' *

.W:
" :ill
I

Precision Machine Tools

*
t :

Cincom £332
PRECISION MACHINERY DIVISION
u
I

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
TYPE"
"".Vi

CITIZEN WATCH CO.,LTD.

ii
 ;

.!
:

51
s \L
*
-ÿ
:!
1
;

:aI
:: !
: A
i
-i'
•I
Ii %\
*t-«<1 UMr* »'i
••
.V

;
f' < } 1

w
a ,

'

: . :

'•••ft. :
Oj
:
v; '
5

| !

- -*rV„,
:

'
:!

;
]
’
-00ÿ
.ÿ>

iffyifii g
'

!
. fS:: S sZrii: y,v
. - V.. >
. ••
• I”"

j§ k : •
. i
m V-
)
'vj
{
1 ;
m
m • V ;
)
:

:
.HSlHHiv £ ;

I
M*fc

i
.
"
i

- ;

;ÿ/;

.
: |

•*
*
II V
•?. V.
;!
:

a
m
l

i ;. .
*

\
'

m K[;

; .1

* ». •

P i

-
1
$
:
I

: •i
5
I
I
8 H!
i .
r.

a
IHI
 E332 TYPE IV TABLE OF CONTENTS
I
.

|
|

OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR Cincom E332 TYPE W

TABLE OF CONTENTS
I
I i.
a 1. GENERAL 1-1

2. SAFETY
2-1 GENERAL WARNING 2-2 !
2-2 WARNING UPON STARTING THE MACHINE ... 2-2
2-3 WARNING DURING OPERATION 2-2
i 2-4 WARNING WHEN ENDING THE WORK 2-3
*
2-5 WARNING IN THE PREPARATORY PROCESS 2-3 I
2-6 WARNING RELATED TO GROUNDING 2-3 1
2-7 WARNING ON THE ELECTRIC UNIT . 2-3 ;
2-8 WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE 2-4 f
2-9 ...
SAFETY DEVICE 2-5

3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS r-i-

X
3-1 NOMENCLATURE 3- 2
3-2 OUTER DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUT OF MACHINE 3- 4 .

3-3 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 3- 5

3-3-1 Standard Machine Specifications 3- 5 : m
3-3-2 Standard Attachments ..3-8
3-3-3 Standard NC Functions r *.> .. 3-10
'i'i
3-4 OPTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS .. 3-12 i
V
3-4-1 Optional Attachments 3-12 I
* 3-4-2 Optional NC Functions 3-13 I
:
4. OPERATION
)
1 4-1 OPERATION PANEL .... 4-5
I
$ 4-1-1 Machine Operation Panel 4- 5
I .
I
I
: 4-1-2
4-1-3
Names and Functions of Switches and Lamps
Names and Functions of CRT Display Unit Sections
4- 6 {

-1
4-18
!
4-2 SCREENS 4-21
4-2-1 Screen Transition on Power Supply 4-21 f
4-2-2 List of Screens
I 4-22
:
5
(1) Code Serial M9001- Issue 1993. 9 [
No. No. (W6001—) Date

.
p

i
 ,

E332TYPEW TABLE OF CONTENTS

I
4-3 OPERATION 4-29
j 4-3-1 Power-On/Off 4-29
4-3-2 Menu Keys 4-31
4-3-3 Page Keys 4-37
4-3-4 Data Setting 4-38
4-3-4 Data Setting 4-38
i 4-3-5 Manual Operation 4-42
4-3-6 MDI Operation 4-50
4-3-7 Program Selection 4-61
4-3-8 Preparation for Operation 4-65
4-3-9 Automatic Operation 4-73
4-3-10 Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Amount 4-79
4-3-11 Creating and Editing the Program 4-84
4-3-12 Program Check . 4-110
4-3-13 Machining Monitor . 4-136
4-3-14 Data Input/Output . 4-144
4-3-15 Others . 4-151
4-4 INSTALLATION (E25/E32) . 4-153
m 4-4-1 Installing the Chuck . 4-153
4-4-2 Installing the Guide Bushing . 4-155
i ;
4-4-3 Replacing the Support Ring . 4-157
4-4-4 Re-arrangement of Back Spindle Device . 4-158

Ki¬ 4-4-5 Re-arrangement for Back Machining of Long Workpieces . 4-163

4-4-6 Installing the Tool .. 4-165
..
ll 5
4-4-7 Setting the Workpiece
APPENDIX FUNCTIONS OF EACH SCREEN
4-180
4-APP.1 I
'
'

5. PROGRAMMING 5- 5
5-1 BASIS OF PROGRAMMING 5- 5
5-1-1 What is an NC Program? 5- 5
5-1-2 Programming Procedure 5- 7
5-1-3 Basic Program Configuration 5-10
1 5-15
5-1-4 Controlled Axes
-f 5-1-5 Coordinates 5-16
5-2 PROGRAM COMMANDS 5-23
!
5-2-1 Summary of Addresses Used in the NC Program 5-24
5-2-2 Address G (G Functions) 5-26
5-2-3 Address F {Cutting Feedrate) 5-36
5-2-4 Address M (M Functions) ..5-37
:> 5-2-5 Address S (S Functions) 5-42
it

(2)

m
 E332 TYPE W TABLE OF CONTENTS
;
!

.
..
5-2-6 Address T (T Functions) 5-43
5-2-7 I Queuing Program 5-46
I 5-3 MULTI-AXIS MULTI-LINE 5-51 j

» 5-3-1 Machining Patterns, Axes Belonging to Each Line, and Superimpose

5-3-2 Machining Patterns and Machining Commands . .....
.......... ..
5-52
5-53
1
.

:
'M:
1 5-3-3 Machining Pattern Transfer
5-4 ACTUAL PROGRAMMING [TURNING]
5-68
5-71
i
:
5-4-1 Overall Program Configuration . 5-72
5-4-2 Preparatory and Cut-off Process 5-75 :
B 5-80
5-4-3 Machining Process l:
5-4-4 Center Hole Machining 5-84
5-4-5 Thread Cutting with Tool 5-90
5-4-6 Boring (Coordinate System Shift) .....- ......... -.. .
.............. • ..ÿÿ 5-94
j:

* 5-5 ACTUAL PROGRAMMING [APPLICATION] . 5-99

5-5-1 Subprogram 5-100
5-5-2 Constant Surface Speed Control 5-103
5-5-3 Spindle Speed Change Detecting Function 5-105 I
5-5-4 Cut-off tool breakage detection (M50) on back spindle operation 5-106
1
I 5-6 ACTUAL PROGRAMMING[COMPLEX MACHINING] 5-107
5-6-1 Secondary Machining 5-108
5-6-2 Secondary Machining Spindle 5-109
5-6-3 Coordinates 5-110 ill
5-6-4 Connection of Turning and Secondary Machining 5-119
i 5-6-5 Indexing 5-122
m
5-6-6 How to Calculate the Command Speed . 5-126
5-6-7 Example of Secondary Machining 5-128
5-7 MULTIPLE-LINE PROGRAM 5-135
5-7-1 Application of Multiple-Line Program 5-136 I
5-7-2 Transition between patterns 5-136
5-7-3 Application of the Machining Patterns 5-137
s
I
5-8 PROGRAM EXAMPLES
Example 1 Outer diameter turning (Basics)
5-145
5-146
I
I Example 2 Center hole drilling,boring, outer diameter turning, and thread cutting 5-149
1
1
3
Example 3 Secondary machining 5-153
Example 4 Back machining 5-160
I
I 5-9 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 5-169

I 5-9-1 Automatic Bar Feed (Content without back machining standard operation)
5-9-2 Tool Nose R Compensation <Option>
. 5-170
5-172
iI 5-9-3 Multiple Thread Cutting Cyde< Option> 5-175 i
V; !
I

(3)

j;
I;
J
:ÿ
 it.
;

I :
:
;
:l

E332 TYPE W TABLE OF CONTENTS

5-9-4 Long Workpiece Machining (Option) U421B, U422B79 5-179

5-9-5 Milling Interpolation <Option> 5-185
5-9-6 Spindle Synchronization 5-198 if
5-9-7 Hob Machining . 5-202
5-9-8 Y Axis Machining 5-206
•1
5-10 CUTTING CONDITIONS . 5-213 §
: 5-10-1 Cutting speed and feedrate 5-214
4
5-10-2 Thread cutting count with tool 5-217 ifV
5-10-3 Secondary machining cutting condition table 5-218
.4
: 5-10-4 Cutting feedrate reference table 5-219
-.f
6. TOOLING
E332 TYPE W TOOLING SYSTEM 6- 2
1
I

*
1

§
(4)
1
t
 1. OPERATOR'S GENERAL

1. GENERAL
i j
1 Cincom is the CITIZEN’S latest CNC machine tool in pursuit of high precision and productivity.
This machine drastically reduces the idle time required for tool exchange or cam setting. Due to its
high stiffness, it also provides heavy cutting and efficient machining of the workpiece precisely.
This manual describes how to operate the machine so that you can make full use of its performance.
Before operating the machine, be sure to understand the descriptions provided in this manual for safe
.
and correct operation of the machine.

PRE CAUTIONS IN READING THIS MANUAL

® When operating the Cincom, give priority to proceeding with works safely. Observe not only the
matters described in Chapter “2. SAFETY”, but also each precaution in the text.

• Of the contents of this manual, some descriptions concerning NC unit operation may overlap with I
the operator’s manual for the NC unit. In such a case, give priority to this manual for use.
® For independent operation of the NC unit, see the operations manual for the NC unit, because it
may sometimes not be described in this manual.

• Note that some functions described in the operator’s manual for the NC unit may not be provided
,

for this machine.

'

These products are strategic products subject to COCOM regulations. }

They should not be exported without authorization from appropriate
governmental authorities. i
Citizen Watch Co., Ltd.
M
>
;

V
5 .

I ;
;
i.

I
1-1

: !
:

:
 ! :
ft

I
:
: ft

:
• :
;

: i

ft

••

ill
.1

1
ft

II

I.|
:

!
1
If
,

)
9 I
f
|

f
•£
;

\ ft
:

ft ’:
;
t

1
:

!! 1
ft' ;
&

11

i i

:
11
:

C j I j N j C | O; M;
i I I ! \
Product code C 1

i
!
I.
I I
i
t
S
3
:
I
I
i

I
Document code j1 jE f ! 1
0{1 * 0 j 0

I
am
 H
«
i
E332IV Safety

if

2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
:ÿ

:
f-ii
2.1 Safety Signs .. . 2- 1
2.2 Emergency Stop Button 2- 4
2.3 Safety Devices 2- 5
2.4 General Precautions During Operation — 2- 10
2.5 Before Starting the Machine 2- 12
2.6 Safety During Setup 2- 14
2.7 Safety During Automatic Operation 2- 15 I
2.8 Safety During Maintenance 2- 16 ;ÿ
i:
2.9 Safety After Everyday Operation 2- 16
J f
2.10 Fire Prevention Practices 2- 17
2.11 Handling Emergency Situations 2- 19
2.11.1 Emergency Situations Requiring Evacuation 2- 19
2.11.2 Power Failure 2- 19
2.11.3 Resuming Work 2- 19

;
'

f.

i ,
Serial H9904- Issue
Date 1995. 11
No. W6065- !
2-01
 [
%
;•
t f

I1
i
I \
\

a6

!: *
I I I
3 3

S
::
i

I
1 1
II
I
i

1
II

3.1
Mr
%

II
m i

*
'*
3,31. f

3
I

: :|

: I 33 1
I
i
!
1

,
«

m
3
;
Ii
!

3 I
I''

!•’! I
!

3
I
 E332IV Safety
I
2.1 Safety Signs
Be sure to read and understand this chapter and all other applicable chapters of this manual and all :
:
on-product safety signs before setting up, operating, and maintaining this machine. :
Safety signs appear in this manual and on the machine. All safety signs are identified by the words
DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These words signify the following: .

DANGER alerts you to an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in it
death or serious personal injury.

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious personal iiyury.

)
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate personal injury and/or possible damage to the machine andits components.

The location and content of the on-product safety signs are on the following pages. Be sure these
signs are readand understood.

:
i
s

'i

r
)

{:

2-1

4
:
:

I\
i
 ;

; ]

E332IV Safety !

Location of Safety Signs

;
1

|
<D
1i

K
Q
:

© ©

1
I
Figure 2.1-1
Location of Safety Signs

1
1
2-2 I
 ii:

E332IV Safety i
1
.
<D
'

A WARNING rt
1
1
AWARNING
To avoid death, serious persona! injury or damage to the machine,

i observe the following safety precautions when operating or

servicing the machine.
® Read and understand the operator's manual and ali safety .

a precautions before operating the machine.

® Do not put fingers or hands into any moving part of the machine,
especially cutting tools.
! '
I:
!

* •
V
Close all electrical enclosure panels during machine operation.
Before removing these panels, disconnect aii power to the machine.
Do not work inside electrical enclosures unless you can do so safely.
• Never disable the safety interlock when operating the machine
in the automatic mode. Hazardous voltage inside.
Will shock, bum, or cause death.
® Close guard door and activate all safety devices before operating
machine. Only open guard door if machine is completely stopped.
1
Only qualified personnel totally
® Be sure there is sufficient coolant in the machine and that it is familiar with electrical circuits
flowing smoothly to all necessary parts. and service manual should I?
• Securely clamp the tooling in place before starting the machine.
® Regularly clean chips and debris from the cutting area and chip
work inside this enclosure.

coilection tray.
Follow Lockout/Tagout EW01
1
I5 1
m *
it <§> I
ill »I
iff! AWARNING A WARNING AWARNING :
Turn off machine before
;iV Moving parts can cause removing chips inside.
serious injuries. .;
ill Hands or chip remover tool
II
SI Keep hands and body can touch moving parts
W Moving parts, hot chips away from moving parts. inside and cause serious I
injury.
and hot oil inside. eww
,
Keep door dosed
during operation.
EW02

( I
Q)

A WARNING A WARNING A DANGER ;

Hazardous voltage inside.

Will shock, bum, or cause :: ;

w
Hazardous voltage. Can
death.

DO NOT work in this

shock, bum, or cause death.
Turn off main breaker before
connecting or disconnecting
coolant pump. EW07
lip
enclosure unless famiiiar
Moving parts inside. with these electrical
circuits and safe servicing
Keep door closed procedures.
during operation. EW03
EDC2 :I
;

S
?)

Figure 2.1-2
Safety Signs
ii
if

1
i

2-3

iv,

:1

I
r
 :

i
i
i:

T~
E332N Safety

2.2 Emergency Stop Button

The red emergency stop button is located on the operation panel. When there is an emergency
situation such as fire, power failure, earthquake, or lightning or if you need to evacuate at once, ft
1
press this button to stop the operation immediately before you leave the work site. Note, however,
that pressing this emergency stop button during machine operation might damage a tool as well as
the product being processed. The machine will display the alarm message OP705 "EMERGENCY
BUTTON PUSHED." To reset the emergency stop status, turn the button clockwise. The procedure I
for gradually stopping the machine operation is given in 2.11Handling Emergency Situations.

Location of Emergency Stop Button

s
:ÿ

a i

J:

•ÿ533

Figure 2.2-1
Emergency Stop Button

.’ll:

2-4
 E332IV Safety

2.3 Safety Devices

Cincom provides the following kinds of safety devices to prevent and detect accidents and hazards
when operating the machine.

The standard and optional safety devices shown and described on the following pages are installed
depending on particular operating needs of the customer.

•These devices: Detect any accident that occurs during machine operation.
* These devices: Stop the machine when there is an unsafe condition.
•These devices: Prevent production of defective products.
* These devices: Prevent damage to the machine or tools.
;
Optional safety devices are strongly recommended in the following situations:

•When you operate the machine continuously and there is possibility of reduced operator
attention.

* When the duties of the operator extend beyond thismachine.

•When you operate the machine during the night shift.
•To reduce the possibility of accidents.
|
;

IMPORTANT
I
No safety devices provide complete safety against accidents and hazards. I;;

Be sure to follow the precautions described in this chapter.

;
f

2-5

:
:
,

§
 :

E332IV Safety

The following safety devices are standard or are available to protect the machine operators and the
machine. :

1
Location of Safety Devices '

:
i
I
Door lock (optional)
Door (2) (*)
Door (!)(*)
Door (3) (*)

Door lock (optional)

vV

Door (4) (*)

€k
'i.

!
Door switch (standard)

Cut-off tool break detection ;

Coolant flowrate device (optional)

I
detector (optional) Door switch (standard)
Coolant level detector
(standard)

I
II
1
;i

'
Figure 2.3-1
Safety Devices (1/2)
I ,
!
If
a I'
I :

;s
2-6 1
ii
 §

E332IV Safety

Fireextinguisher (optional)

#=ca
\
'€
M
iT£ Main circuit breaker (standard)

lubricating oil level detector (standard)

1
|r I
Figure 2.3-i
Safety Devices (2/2)
!

1
i
;

|
I
1
f'
!'
I
2-7

1
i:

;
 ;

? 3
.
:

E332IT Safety

I
The following are detailed descriptions of the safety devices:

Door locks (optional)

Door locks prevent any person from opening the front right (cutting side) door (1) and (2) and
front left (main spindle side) doors (3) and (4) during machine operation. You will only be able to
open these doors when the machine is stopped. You can enable or disable this lock function
11
using PLC switch No.7 (DOOR LOCK ON) (see Appendix 2 Setting PLC Switches in the
Operator's Manual). The door locks work with the door switches.
i
:
Door switches (standard) 1
These door switches disable machine operation while the front right (cutting side) doors (1) and
; (2) are open. Unless the doors are closed, you cannnot operate the machine. You can enable or
: disable these switches using PLC switch No.8 (DOOR SW. ON) (see Appendix 2 Setting PLC
:
Switches in the Operator's Manual). If the door locks are installed, these door switches must be
3 set to ON.

Door switches (optional)

They disable machine operation while the front left (main spindle side) doors (3) and (4) are
open. Unless the doors are closed, you cannnot operate the machine. You can enable or disable
these switches using PLC switch No.8 (DOOR SW. ON) (see Appendix 2 Setting PLC Switches in
the Operator's Manual).

Fire extinguisher (optional)

The fire extinguisher is used to put out a fire in the machine.

Main circuit breaker (standard)

This device automatically shuts itself off when it detects an electric leakage of 100 mA or more. 1
%
Cut-off tool break detection device (optional)
A cut-off tool is very easily damaged. If you continue to operate the machine with a damaged
cut-off tool, this might damage the machine or cause a fire. This device detects whether or not
,
material is properly cut. In other words, it indirectly detects whether the cut-off tool is damaged.
When this device detects a damaged cut-off tool, the alarm message EX114 "TOOL BIT
ALARM" is displayed.
1
Coolant flow rate detector (optional) 1

1
This device is installed in the midsection of the coolant supply pipe and detects the change of the
coolant flow rate. When the flow rate gets lower than the specified value, the alarm message
EX112 "COOLANT OIL ALARM" is displayed and the operation of the machine is
i
si
§
automatically stopped to prevent a fire hazard. I
i
:•

I
:

S
2-8
 E332IV Safety

Coolant level detector (standard)

This device is installed in the coolant tank and detects the height of the coolant level. When the
coolant level gets lower than the limit, the alarm message EX204 "COOLANT OIL EMPTY" is
displayed and the operation of the machine is automatically stopped after completing one cycle
to prevent a fire hazard.

Lubricating oil level detector (standard)

I * This device is installed in the central lubricating oil unit and detects the level of the lubricating
oil. When the oil level gets lower than the limit, the alarm message EX202 "LUBRICATING
OIL EMPTY" is displayed the operation of the machine is automatically stopped after .
1 completing one cycle to prevent machine damage. I
i :

The following software functions are also provided for safety: I

Spindle speed change detection (standard)
This function detects excessive changes in spindle speed to prevent machine damage. The alarm
message EX117 "MAIN SPINDLE RPM ALARM" or EX118 "BACK SPINDLE RPM ALARM"
is displayed when it detects a change of more than 10% from the specified speed. Note, however, s
that this function must be turned off when the constant surface speed control function is used i
and during tap and die machining (see 5.5.3 Commands for Detecting Spindle Speed Changes :ÿ

§
and 5.5.2 Constant Surface Speed Control Command in the Programmer’s Manual).
!
Interface check (standard)
This function checks for interference between spindles, guide bushing, and tool posts of the
machine. When the function determines the possibility of interference during machine
operation, the NC alarm message M03 "COLLISION ALARM" is displayed and the operation of :
ft
the machine is stopped to prevent machine damage. If this alarmis displayed, the operator must t
correct the program (see 4.3.15.3 Interface Check Alarm in the Operator’s Manual). :

:
; 1
:
:

:
:

il
2-9

:
 •I

I 1

E332IV Safety

2.4 General Precautions During Operation

Be sure to follow these general precautions for handling the machine.

DANGER

To prevent death or severe personal injury, always follow these safety

practices:

•Do not put your fingers or hands into any moving part of the machine
during machine operation.
! .

: •machine
Do not touch or stand close to any cutting tool or rotating part of the
duringmachine operation.
i
•Do not touch high voltage parts of the electrical system. You could be
electrocuted if you touch live electrical components. All the control unit
covers must be closed during machine operation. Turn off the machine
before removing the control unit covers.
S
•Never change the machine and control circuit. 5
•Press the emergency stop button to stop all machine motion when there is
an emergency situation. To reset the machine after an emergency stop,
; make sure that the machining situation is safe, reset the emergency stop
button, return all machine moving parts to their return positions, and
remove all materials in progress from the machine.
#
I:
IS
i
WARNING
I
lit
I Follow these safety practices while operating the machine. Failure to do so
could result in death or serious personal injury.

•Never disable any safety devices while operating the machine in the
automatic mode.
•Do not open all front left and right doors unless the machine is completely
stopped.
« Make sure that all front left and right doors are closed and locked (if
equipped with locks) and all safety devices are activated before operating
the machine.
1 .

'

:
I:
1
1

1
!
2-10
1
 il p
ii E332IY Safety :

1
m
i
A CAUTION
1
ftj Follow these safety practices. Failure to do so may result in minor/moderate
personal injury and/or damage to the machine:

I
f: Themachine must be properly grounded. The ground must be electrically
separated from power lines or the grounding wires of another machine
that could be a source of massive electrical noise. (See Appendix A
1! Relocating the NC Machine in the Maintenance Manual.)
1
« Make sure that there is enough coolant in the machine and it is being
§ supplied smoothly to all necessary parts.
Check the tooling to see that it is securely clamped in place before
starting themachine.
;
« Clean the machine regularly to remove any chips and debris from the
cutting area and the chip receiving area.
Remove stray chips from the coolant tank as required, depending on
cutting speed and type of material beingmachined.

m
l ::I
;
:

I
2-11 1
!

;
1
I
:
i
 ;

1i: !

E332IV Safety

2.5 Before Starting the Machine

Before starting the machine for the first time, you should know the following:

• The locations of the emergency stop button, safety devices, and all front left and right doors.
® The meaning of all safety signs.

How to stop the machine in an emergency situation.

*
• What happens to the machine when you operate button, switches and keys on the operation
panel.

• Proper shutdown and startup procedures. 1

I! * Procedures for clearing machine troubles.

• How to disconnect the main power to the machine.

• Fire prevention procedure (see 2.10 Fire PreventionPractices).
'ÿV'V

Each time before you start the machine, do the following to prevent injury or damage:

® Make sure you wear the proper work clothes (no loose clothing), safety goggles, cap, and safety
footwear. Also make sure you remove rings, watches, jewelry, neckties, and all loose items in 1
1
®
your shirt pockets.

Make sure you are not too tired or sick to operate the machine safely. If you are tired or sick, DO
I
«
NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE.

• Inspect the area around the machine for spills or objects that could cause slipping, falling, or
I
m
tripping.

• Make sure that no maintenance work is being performed on the machine.

a
* Check the inside and outside of the machine to see that it is free of all foreign objects (tools,
workshop towels, etc.).
I
« Make sure there is enough oil in the lubricating oil tank, hydraulic power unit oil tank, and
11
coolant tank.

• Clean dirt, oil, and coolant off of the machine especially on the operation panel.
• Make sure that the machine safety devices are engaged and working properly. NEVER
OPERATE THE MACHINE with the safety devices disabled or removed.

» Make sure that the emergency stop button working properly.

• Check all screws on the machine to make sure they are not loose; tighten them if necessary. I

is

‘5;;
2-12
 f
E332IV Safety
:

® Make sure that the tools and the material are mounted firmly. Also make sure that the correct
tools are installed for the machining program to be used and the offset has been specified
!
properly (if necessary).

1 Make sure that all front left and right doors are securely closed.
,
*

i 1

8 ::I
: • ii

i
;;
r
{

I
j
||

f
;

2-13

!
:

;
;

*
:
]

;
 i

E332IV Safety

2.6 Safety During Setup

When setting up the machine, follow these safety practices to prevent injury or damage:
1

® Make sure that tools attached do not interfere with mechanical portions of the machine every
; time the machine is set up for new and exchanged programs or tools. If there is interference, this
could cause machine damage and personal injury.
® When you check the tool movement, always know where you are in the machining program so
that you know when and how the machine will move and can follow the necessary safety
precautions for this movement.

{ • Verify the machining program and the actual setup. Check for unintended results, which you
should always try to anticipate, such as machine damage and dangerous operating conditions.

• Because Cincom has no way to check and correct user's machining programs, the machine will
act exactly the way it is programmed. Verify the machining programs carefully. Failure to do so
could cause machine damage and personal injury.

• Never attempt to perform work that is beyond the specifications of the machine.
i ® Take coolant flow into consideration when you select the tooling. Select tooling that allows a
!
smooth passage of chips.
!
1
• Use the proper tools and install them only after the machine is completely stopped.
:
.j
]
• When either front left or right doors are open during machine setup, do not select a tool, or do not
:
operate the main and back spindles or the tool spindle drive. Also, do not touch cutting tools on
the tool posts during machine operation. Disregarding this safety practice could cause severe
personal injury.

® Never adjust the tools or measure the dimension of the material during machine operation. This
can cause severe personal injury. If adjustment or measurement is necessary, stop the machine
first. Then, before adjusting or measuring, make sure that all machine motion has stopped and
that the work cycle will not start automatically.
:I
• Check whether the chucking force is sufficient for the material.

I • Do not make the guide bushing too tight - it can cause burning or galling. Fix the guide bushing
using the most suitable tightening torque. ;

.
« Do not leave loose tools anywhere on the machine. I
i:

i
' r

'

2-14
!
 E332IV Safety
v

2.7 Safety During Automatic Operation

I
I
Regularly Monitor the Machine
To get best results and avoid damage to the machine and possible personal injury, monitor the
I
machine at regular intervals for alarm messages, tool wear, coolant flow, etc.
j"
1
SI Be aware of common operating problems and correct them immediately. Common problems include
S stray chips that get caught in the machine, damaged tools, burned material, etc.

1 Perform the following inspections on a regular basis. Monitoring intervals will depend on cutting r
speed, type of material, etc., and can only be determined by the operator through experience with the
machine.
\
Clear the Machine of Chips
Too many chips on the tools and materials can greatly reduce the cooling effect of the coolant.
Reduced cooling effect can cause a fire, depending on the type of material being machined. i
! ;

Remove chips from the chip receiving area and the cutting area at suitable intervals. When the
machine is regularly used, intervals depend on cutting speed, material, etc. Monitor the level and
condition of coolant periodically. Failure to do so can result in damage to the tools and a possible fire
hazard.

Inspect the Coolant

1
Monitor the coolant condition and level periodically. Check regularly to make sure that the coolant
is discharged smoothly and that the supply to the machining position is adequate. Failure to do so
can result in damage to the tools and a possible fire hazard. :

:
Inspect the Tools
Dull, worn, or damaged tools put excessive load on the machine. This can damage the machine and t

i possibly cause a fire. Follow a regular inspection/maintenance schedule for the tools. During
: machine operation, listen for abnormal sounds and be aware of possible troubles due to damaged, t.

I dull, or worn out tools. Also inspect completed workpieces for evidence of damaged, dull, or worn out
I tools.
:

1 !
I

g;
1

2 - 15

:
;ÿ

!
 ;

I E332IV Safety

2.8 Safety During Maintenance ii

| Disregarding the following safety practices could cause machine damage and serious persona!
i

!
;
injury. 1
• Only qualified maintenance personnel should perform maintenance operations on the machine, '
especially when any safety device is disengaged.
; « The safety devices can be disengaged for maintenance operations using the operation panel. 111
Before disengaging the safety devices, make sure you are familiar with the current program and
1
j where the machine is in the program. Make sure the machine has stopped before reaching into
the machine to make any adjustment. Cincom recommends that the safety devices be engaged
It j for all machine operations except during required maintenance.

;•
• Before removing control unit covers, turn off the main circuit breaker and the machine.
Always use the specified fuse. Installing a wrong type/size of fuse in the machine can cause
i ®

machine damage and a possible fire.

® A blown fuse indicates an electrical problem that must be corrected.

• The electrical components in this machine are high precision devices that can be damaged by
excessive force, shock, or vibration. Use caution when you handle all electrical components of \ 7

the machine. I''

• Use care when you disconnect connectors. They are easily damaged. I V

• Periodically clean the air filter. The cleaning interval depends on the operating environment.
Operating the machine with a dirty air filter could damage the electrical components.

• Follow appropriate lockout/tagout procedures during maintenance. v

l-.'

"

i 2.9 Safety After Everyday Operation

.
j • Turn off the main circuit breaker and the machine. I
I.
• Carefully remove any chips caught on the material and cutting tools.
® Apply rust prevention oil on all unprotected (unpainted) machine surfaces.
.

I i :

: l
v 2
:
i
! 2-16
 1
E332IV Safety

2.10 Fire Prevention Practices

Follow these general safety practices to prevent fires: '

® Keep all open flame or sparks (cigarettes, lighters, etc.) at least one meter away from the
machine.
I Always perform the necessary daily maintenance.
I
®

I • Always operate the machine within its capacity and according to the procedures outlined in the
Operator's Manual and in this chapter.
I
• Dull, worn, or damaged tools put excessive load on the machine. This can damage the machine
and possibly cause a fire. Follow a regular inspection/maintenance schedule for the tools.

Before operating the machine each day, perform these checks to help prevent fires:
I
• Inspect the tool for chips or cracks and make sure that the cutting capacity is adequate; the
machine and tools must be suitable for the speeds and feeds of the machining program.
a
« Make sure that enough coolant is discharged to the machining position.

• The oil level in the coolant tank must be adequate.

® Make sure that the coolant flow path is clear. !:

• Make sure that the coolant hose is not twisted, and not damaged, there are no loose connections,
;
and there is not too much chip accumulation on any curved portion of the hose.

Inspect the chip receiver box and coolant tank for too much chip accumulation. ;
I ®
f . ?
« Make sure all front left and right doors are securely closed.

During automatic operation, regularly perform these checks to help prevent fires:

« Inspect for chipped tools, excessive vibration and noise, and too much chip accumlation. Inspect '

finished workpieces for surface finish conditions that indicate tool wear or damage.

• Make sure the coolant nozzle is directed to provide optimum lubrication and chip removal. :
® Check for too many stray chips and remove as necessary. Check the coolant tank periodically for
too much chip accumlation. Remove as necessary. Too much chip accumlation can reduce the
effectiveness of the coolant pump. |
r-

-t.
• Check to see that there are no coolant mist leaks.
® Make sure the front left and right doors are securely closed. :
When covers and doors are open, coolant mist or vapor may escape from the machine and catch ;
fire outside the machine.

-
2 17

9
$

i
:
1
i:
5:
.
 :

E3321V Safety

Prevent the following situations in which coolant can mist or vaporize or coolant oil supply may be
insufficient, and possibly cause a fire.

j • A chipped tool can induce an abnormally high friction temperature between the tool and the 1
:
material.

Chips can get caught on the machining surface and reduce the cooling effect of the coolant.
»
|
.
Long chips may hit the coolant nozzle and change its position so that no coolant is applied to the 1
H
machining position.
:S
9 If the coolant in the tank is at a low level or the coolant filter is blocked, the coolant discharge f
may be insufficient. 1
i
: When the coolant recommended by the manufacturer is not used and a flammable coolant is used I
It;
instead; or when the cooling effect of the coolant is inferior. .

When the room temperature is abnormally high, the coolant may vaporize.
3
,;'s:
I
i
0;
The following situation is especially hazardous. Stop the machine operation immediately, and
I
contact the Citizen Service Center.
4
i
® If the machine’s electrical system fails and causes a spark, it may ignite the coolant mist or 3
vapor inside or outside around the machine.
S::'
.S
S'
1
&
1 :

I
v:-
h
1
Is i
« }\
: I;
; a
!;

:i
.

i
m
s
2- 18 1
i

V',
i
I
f E332IV Safety

I b
2.11 Handling Emergency Situations
2.11.1 Emergency Situations Requiring Evacuation
I:
f

When evacuation is required in the case of emergency situations, such as fire, earthquake, or
lightning, perform these procedures.
i i
t • If you have time before evacuating
Stop the machine quickly and turn off the main circuit breaker. Try to get the machine to stop
;

when the tool is not touching the material. Otherwise, the tip of the tool may be damaged in the :

1 process of stopping or restarting operation.

f ® If you do not have time and must evacuate immediately

Press the emergency stop button to stop the machine immediately.

2.11.2 Power Failure :

s '

When power failure occurs, turn off the main circuit breaker.

2.11.3 Resuming Work

When you resume work after the emergency is over, perform the followingprocedure.
\
r 1. Inspect the tool and machine carefully for damage and replace or repair if necessary. And
confirm the machine can be operated safely and properly.

2. Cut off the material that was being machined when the emergency occurred. ;
3. Resume operation of the machine according to the Operator's Manual. i;

1 r

:
,il

£
I
2-19
Jfc

;
;
 •
;{j
1
1
:! '
ft
1 i 1
i
I
I •:
m i
;i :

I1 :
vi
V-
:
? !l
:
1
m . i

i s
?
::
:•
j
1. . t-tt]
f-

•; !
y
ft
i

y
\

ft •
|

1H I
• •:
!

:
ft I
:
:
ft • i 8
K if
•’
i . =.
i
r
1

•v.
!:
ft 1
lift 3

f
I : i
£ •i
1
t J I
:

. * ;

I ::
|'."S
I.
I
y
ft: ft

ft?: :

-ÿ}
t
:

;
:• :•
y :

ft
ft
IHi:
:V,v

ft
II :

11
1
I£ >

ft
ft

V I
I1
'ft 4 i
ft
ft
;
:v

I 111
ft ft
;
:j ftf
Product code E i 3 i 3 ; 2 -IV 7-410
r

1
H
If
II
I k
1
! Document code 0 :E : 1 0 i2 I0 i 1
I : i§
!i

ftft

:r.
 flrWUJWftAXMi
'

f:
i:
3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

;:
?
:
:
:
;
•:
!
!

3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS :

&
:
Hi
;

i 3-1 NOMENCLATURE 3- 2 i.

3-2 OUTER DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUT OF MACHINE 3- 4

3-3 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 3- 5

•i |
3-3-1 Standard Machine Specifications 3- 5

3-3-2 Standard Attachments 3- 8 i

3-3-3 Standard NC Functions 3-10

I V

9 3-4 OPTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 3-12

1 3-4-1 Optional Attachments 3-12
£
3-4-2 Optional NC Functions 3-13
I I
I
r
I
1
1
£
: :

vv
j\
I
;
,

I 1

l
g
Code Serial M9001~ Issue 1996. 6
1 3-1 No. No. (W6001-) Date
8

is§
i
I s.
I
1
 I
j
i '

Is
I;

} i
u:

_
3- MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
3- MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
11 !
3-1
NOMENCLATURE K
$

I
! f xi axis control motor
No.2 turret
Guide bushing
NO,2 tool post I
Main motor \ Operation panel j
Headstock
J main body
j No-2 turret
/ / indexing motor
NO.2 tool spindle
?5$
/ drive motor
Jÿ*r8ack headstock
<Viv
y

2®
3 5
i

Iffn
I
I:
Back spindle
drive motor §
|{ axis control motor Separator
If: ; c axis control device \ No.1 turret
h
| No.1 tool post
Oil pan
I
f! \Lr / Coolant tank
Coolant pump
/ No.lturretindexing motor I
No. 1 tool spindle
drive motor

Hg. 3-1 Front View

of Machine

1
3-2

i
 3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS 1

f
!

Y axis control motor :

x2 axis control motor

Q
/.
•:

n «
:

I ;

U 3
n Control device
Central lubrication device :

a
Hydraulic power device

Hydraulicvalve device :

Z3 axis control motor

Pneumatic device

Z2 axis control motor

i
l%

:
v
Fig. 3-2 Rear View of Machine

| ]

if
1 3-3
1
I
:

;
1 .

: .

3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

3-2 OUTER DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUT OF MACHINE

9 i
M

TTi
a ]S ’

i;

u»
i£.
o
r* 1
I
II
; j
£
a a
o
o
ci
rf 3
§
M
1
:]
400 2610(102.76"] 285 1615(63.58"]
:
[15.75*] (11.22*3 •;
:
is
j
Fig. 3-3 Outer Dimensions of Machine

* When attached with automatic bar feeder I:

Manufacturer Model Use (m) A L 1
CITIZEN E32532 U10J 2.5 4340(170.86”] 6950(273.62”]

ft:
v

!
I
2800
(110.24']

/
St
art
*0

£t\
Hydraulic o?
©<M
Control device device

I
e e
P
£
£

*ȣ
2
CD
irt
1
I
Machine body g Mjj £
«
Bar feeder device
ti £22. CN

1
1
*A
a
400
?
115.75']
©

riB 625
[24.61']
©

910[35.83*I
2610(102.76']
665j
(26.18'] 285
ok
sh
is 1
1
[11.22']
*L |
a
Fig. 3-4 Machine Layout 3
1
3-4
"y

3-3 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
3-3-1 Standard Machine Specifications
1 Item
(1) Max. machining
diameter
( 2 ) Max. machining 320 mm [12.60”] / Ichuck
length
( 3 ) Max. drilling
diameter
( 4 ) Max. tapping
diameter (tap, die)
(5) Spindle through-
hole diameter
(6) Spindle speed
(7) Spindle speed
change steps
(8) Rotary tool
; max. drilling
diameter
(9) Rotary tool
max. tapping
,r diameter
i
1 (10) Tool spindle speed
I
P (11) Tool spindle speed
change steps
l Chuck of the same form as the main
(12) Back spindle
max. chuck
; diameter
(13) Maximum front
external length of a
back machined
1 workpiece
(14) Back machining
max. drilling
diameter
(15) Back machining
max. tapping
diameter
(16) Back spindle speed
(17) Back spindle speed
change steps
I
3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
Model E32IV Remarks
032 mm [01-1/4”]
Optional attachments
U51Z can be used to machine long
workpieces.
016mm [05/8”] Drilling holes larger than shownin the
left is also possible, according to the
cutting conditions andmaterial of
workpiece.
i
M12 !
038 mm [01.50”] Sleeve inner diameter is smaller than *
the dimension indicated to the left.
\
130 to 6000 r.p.m.
Stepless S4-digit
010mm [00.39”]
:
M8
|
225 to 4460 r.p.m. The specifications are the same in the
turrets No.l and No.2.
f
Stepless S4-digit Different speeds for turrets No.l and
No.2 can be commanded simultaneously.
032 mm [1.26”]
spindle is used. :
:
320 mm [12.60”] Optional accessory device U422B can be
used to machine long workpiece.
012 mm [00.47”]
M12
150 to 5000 r.p.m.
Stepless S4-digit
3-5
m

II '

II
ii m
r i 8
it
i
f &

1
3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

!
i
vi
i
Item Model E32IV Remarks
11
(18) Chucking, bushing Use back spindle collet chucks with
types seal. "K" is attached to the end of
the type code.
Spindle CITIZEN FC081-M
collet S&M TF37
chuck NEUCOMM 40.008
.
:: SCHAUBLIN 76-740
t Guide CITIZEN FG531-M
i
ii bushing S&M TD32
NEUCOMM 28.001,229
DUENNER
Drill CITIZEN FC090-M
:ÿ ] collet FCD08
chuck S&M TF8
If-': A
:
SCHAUBLIN F8
Drill ALPS AR11
lego AR16
I: type REGO ER11
I. chuck ER16
i Back CITIZEN
spindle S&M
FC081-M-K
TF37
collet NEUCOMM 40.008
chuck SCHAUBLIN 76-740
(19) Number of 20 tools The number of mountable tools can
\ mountable tools (Two decagonal turrets)
20 + 20 + a
be increased by using special tool
holder.
I when special tools are used
(20) Count of turret 10 X 2 / turret The intermediate indexing function
indexing allows the division shown in the
left.
:
I1 (21) Toolholder
—
036 012 mm
[01.18” -00.47”]
The toolholder is shared with type
m.

*
iII I (22) Cutter size byte

sleeve
Positioning pin type
16X16X90 mm
[5/8 X 5/8 X 3-1/2”]
025.4mm [01”]
||
(23) Max. diameter of
tool mounted on
rotary tool holder 'M
Drill, end mill
1
010(07,016)
11
f !
Tap
[00.39” (00.28”, 0.63”)]
M8
It
Slitting cutter 060X015.875 063X016
. [02.36” X 00.63”] [02.48” X 00.63”] iI
Side cutter
i1. 060X025.4
[02.36” X01”]
063X022
[02.48” X0O.87”]
II
Hob 032X010 I
[0l.26”X0O.39”]
i!
11
I
IS
3-6
:
!
 i
I 3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

•'

ti

Item Model E32F Remarks

ail (24) Rapid feedrate
Xi,X2axes 12 m/min. [472.44”]
Z1.Z2.Z3 axes 16 m/min, [629.92”]
Yaxis 10 m/min. [393.70”]
Caxis 100 r.p.m
(25) Least input
i

I
k:
.
increment
X, X2 axes
Zi„ Z2, Z3 axes
0.001 mm (diameter)
0.001mm
k

Yaxis 0.001mm
Caxis 0.001°
(26) Bar length 2500 mm
[98.43”] ;ÿ

9
(27) Center height 1040 mm s
[40.94”]
(Including mount height) •!.
(28) Motors The following are the corresponding i
control systems.
Spindle drive motor 5.5/7.5kW (30-minute rating) Spindle motor
Back spindle drive 2.2/3.7kW (30-minute rating) Spindle motor
motor
Tool spindle drive
motor
1.5kW
No.l turret
No.2 turret 0.75kW/1.5kW(15-minute rating)
Inverter
Spindle motor f
Turret indexing 1.0kWX2 AC servo motor
motor
Xi, Y axes feed 0.5kWX2 AC servo motor
motor
X2, Z1, Z2, Z3 axes 1.0kWX2 AC servo motor
* feed motor
Caxis motor 0.3kW AC servo motor :
a Hydraulic motor 1.5kW
Coolant motor 0.4kW
Lubricant motor 0.004kW
(29) Input power 16 KVA
I capacity
(30) Required floor space 1605(W) X 7235(L) mm Including the space of the 2.5 m bar
[63.19”] X [284.84”] feeder device.
I (31) Weight
44kN [4,500kgf (9.9klb)]

3-7

V I
h
y

]
 :

'

1
3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

i
i
:
I 3-3-2 Standard Attachments
V

Device name Model Function

(1) Chucking device G32 U940Z The collet chuck device on the spindle
(2) Synchronous rotary E22532 U240Z This device supports the workpiece,
guide bushing device (for domestic and U.S.A.) while rotating guide bushingin
;
E22532 U2140Z
(for Europe)
complete synchronization with the
spindle. I
a Super precision high speed angular
ball bearingis used so that the high
precision lathing can be done.
(3) Rotary Es2532 U40Z A drive device used to realize complete
! guide bushing drive device synchronization of the synchronous
rotary guide bushing device with the
I
I
spindle. Structured by the spline type
drive shaft arranged in parallel with
the spindle.
(4) C axis controldevice
1
t
E3 U21B Mounted on the back end of the
headstock. Used to control the AC
i servo motor to index the spindle in
0.001° units.
l
( 5 ) Tool spindle drive device
(For No.l turret)
E22532 U30B The device is used for power drive of a
various tool spindle mounted on the
turret.
:
(6) Tool spindle synchronization E32532 U33B A device similar to U30B. It has two 3*
device drive gears each designed for the front
andback machining. It enables •4
secondary back machiningby allowing
180 inverted attachment of the front
machiningrotary tool.
It also offers a hob machining and
polygonmachiningby synchronizing
speeds of the spindle and C axis.
i

Ii (7) Back spindle device E32532 U40B The completely equivalent lathing as
the front machining canbe done
simultaneously on the cut-off side
§

(back side). The back spindle indexing :A

device (option) can be attached also for
secondary machiningby the rotary
tool.
I
It
The product knock-out function, back fl
spindle air blow are included in the
standard specifications.
1
(8) Back spindle chucking E22532 U940B The collect chuck devicemounted on r
device the back spindle
(9) Bar feeder device E22532 U10J Weight suspension type single bar
feeder 1
“1,
(10) Support ring device E32532 U11J This is not necessary when Ikura's or
Alps’ bar feeder is mounted.
f\

3-8 I
1
 11
• 3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

Device name Model Function

(11) Material pipe E22532 U19J This pipe is used to feed the workpiece
along withU10J.
(12) Workpiece separator E22532 U3QJ This device collects the product after
cut-off, and accommodates it in the
product box located at the front of the
machine. The receiver box is mounted
on turret No.l ,and the product is
accommodated into the product box by
the swingof the turret.
:•
(13) Workpiece separator for U31J This device collects a projected :
E22532
back machining workpiece by use of the recievirtgbox
on the swing arm, and place it in the
workpiece basket provided on the
machine site.
(14) Coolant device 400 W flood type The coolant level detector is included
Pump type 200 € (52.92 gal] in the standard specifications.
Tank capacity
(15) Hydraulic device
Motor capacity 1.5kW
Hydraulic oil capacity 34€ [9.01 gal] j'
Set pressure 50 kgf7cm2 [711lb/in2] ?!;!
Discharge rate 13 €/min [3.43 gal/min.] i
(16) Lubricant device The lubricant level detector is
Lubricant capacity 2 € (for slide) includedin the standard
Discharge rate 6 cc/30 min specifications.
[0.18 in3/30 min.]
(17) Pneumatic pressure device ii
Set pressure 4 kgf/cm2 [57.1b/in2]
Air consumption 50Nf/min
(18) Door switch Limits the machine operation while
the splash guard door is open.

3-9

1
i

i :
 s

;
;

ii
:

I1 '

3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

3-3-3 Standard NC Functions

Name Specification Function *

i
(1) NC device CITIZEN Cincom Cincom E series dedicated NC
SYSTEM IV device
.
(2) Display device 14-inch color CRT display
(3) Displayedlanguage English (For export)
(4) Controllable axes x„ X2, Z1f Zj, Z3,C, Y Capable of all axes simultaneous
Taxes control
(5) Lines 3 Lines 1
(Hereinafter referred to
Lines)
(6) Input code EIA/ISO
automatic judgment
( 7 ) Command input system Incremental and absolute
systems
(8) Feed command system Per rotation feed/ Per minute
feed (G-code conversion) f
(9) Override function The cutting feed can be overridden
Rapid feed Capable of maximum 100% to maximum 200% by the soft
Cutting feed override, by the section switch.
switch.
(10) Zero point return Manual zero point return The absolute position detection
function eliminates the need for
daily zero point return. i'
rfii
(11) Returnposition Eachaxis automatically returns to
1 automatic return the return position (fixed position) fi
in the predecided sequence. m
(12) Start position Automatically returns to the start
•5 automatic return position of the automatic operation,
according to the machining data set :IX
3
for each workpiece. L:
(13) Manual program check The program execution speed can
function optionally be set by the angle of the
dial, when checking the program on %
the actualmachine. Reverse
operationby —
also available.
direction settingis
I
(14) Tool offset pairs 80 pairs
(15) Constant surface speed
control
Automatically controls the spindle
speed so that the surface speed on
I!
!ÿ: Spindle Provided the workpiece is constant during the
I
Back spindle Provided machining. &
(16) Spindle speed Si = Spindle Speed command can be given £
! simultaneous command S2 = Back spindle simultaneously to maximum 4 axes. £
S3 = No.l turret tool spindle
S4 = No.2 turret tool spindle
I
1
3-10 i

Name
(17) Four M command pairs
simultaneous command
(18) Chamfering, comer R
1 function
1
I (19) Canned drillingcycle
3 (20) Balance cut
(21) Different pitch
simultaneous thread
cutting
(22) Auxiliary function
output during axis
move
(23) Cross machining
command
I Lines.
(24) Control axes
simultaneous command
(25) Control axes
superimpose command
I
(26) Hob machining cycle
(27) Polygon machining
cycle
(28) CincomE series
dedicated macro
(29) Background editing
(30) Machining cycle time
display function
(31) Part program storage
capacity
(32) Input/output interface
I
3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS !
;
!I
Specification Function
Maximum four M command pairs can be
givenin a single block.
Comer chamfering and comer rounding
can be commanded simplyby giving the
"C or "R" commands.
G83, G87 Deep hole drilling cycle
Boring cycle
G85, G89
The above canned cycles are available.
The movement of the turrets No.land
No.2 canbe synchronized for
simultaneous machining. i
Threads with different pitches can be
machined simultaneously on the turrets ;
No.l andNo.2. I
I?
The M, S commands can be output during
axis move, as it reaches the preset *
position.
The Lines of all controlled axes can be
changed, allowingcontrol from multiple
f
Operation can be done in synchronization i
with axes of other Lines.
The movement is the same as
synchronization, but the work coordinate
system moves along with the movement of
the superimposed reference axis.
G114.3 It synchronizes speeds of the No.2 turret
tool spindle and C axis to provide a hob
machining.
G114.2 It synchronizes speeds of the No.2 turret
tool spindle and spindle to provide a
polygon machining. I
Twin turret machining command I
Tool saddle machining command
Back/front simultaneous machining
I .
command
Back machining command
Abundant dedicated macro as shown
above, are also provided. 1
Other programs can be edited while :
operating a program.
The program execution time of eachLine
I
is displayed in a graph, in order of the I
Equivalent of 40 m
process.
f
[1574.80”] tape
r
RS232C
Portable tape reader
can also be connected.
3-11
:ÿ
| !
h
 :

; 3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

3-4 OPTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS :

3-4-1 Optional Attachments
.
5
; Device name Model E32JV Function

I! (1) Fixed guide bushing E22532 U140Z Supports the workpiece on a fixed
device (for domestic andU.S.A) position by the guide bushing.
E22532 U1140Z Effective for high precision
ff;•! j (for Europe) machining of relatively small
I
diameter workpieces. l II.;.

!
(2) Long material E22532 U51Z The chucking device on the guide
? chucking device bushingbody used for re-chucking
the spindle collet. It is intended for
a machining of a long workpiece.
(3) Automatic bar feeder Sequentially supplies thematerial
automatically.
(4) Thin material feed pipe E22532 It is a thin material feed pipe to be
U20J 025 mm [00.98”] or less used along with the bar feeder
U21J 020 mm [00.79”] or less device U10J.
U22J 016 mm [00.63”] or less
U23J 010 mm [00.39”] or less
| I
(5) Workpiece unloading E32532 U32Z It is used for unloading, with a |
I device conveyer, products being collected
by the workpiece separator.
8
(6) Chip conveyor E32532 U93Z Discharges the chips from the oil
panin themachine to the right side. m
(7) Back spindle indexing E32532 U410B The back spindle is indexedand k
device mechanically locked in 5°
:
increment. 1
; (8) Adapter for back
machining of long
E22532 U422B Used to machine workpieces longer
than the standard specification. "

II workpiece
Maximum workpiece 600 mm [23.62”]
The stopper pipe is mounted on the
back spindle, and the workpiece is
:
length unloaded from the right side. II
(9) Rotating lamp It accepts a rotatinglamp ...
interlocked with a buzzer.
(10) I/C card It makes a program input and
Reader/writer output possible between the NC by

(11) Door lock device

use of the IC card.
It applies mechanicallock to the
1
front door so that it may not be
inadvertently opened during an 3
automatic operation. -
&
1
B
I
B
3-12
I
.
 3. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS

1 3-4-2 Optional NC Functions

Name Specification Function

(1) Part program storage Equivalent to tape length

capacity of 120 m [4724.41”]
Equivalent to tape length

t i-
(2) Portable tape reader
of 280m [11023.62”]
Used to input the machiningprogram
from the paper tape, via the tape punch I
interface (RS232C). Can be switched
among multiple machines.
(3) Tool-bit radius The tool-bit radius is compensated
compensation function according to the Geode command. The
tool-bit radius of each toolis storedin
the memory in advance, as the tool
offsets. J
(4) Multiple canned cycle Several canned cycles are available.
(5) Background simulation The tool, workpiece,back spindle move,
as well as the cutting can be displayed
on the screen, without actual
movement.
It allows editing while other program
is run.
(6) Machining monitor It offers monitoring of a programin
graphics as it is run on the machine.
Thus function is operative only whenit
I is used with the background
simulation.
(7) Millinginterpolation It allows D cut through an

(8) Spindle simultaneous

interpolation of X and C axes.
This functionoffers perfect
if
J control function synchronization of the spindle and
back spindle speeds. It also enables
rechucking of a non-conforming
1 material while the spindles arerun. i;
(9) Customer macro User-programmed macros can be
registered and used.
m :

'.V

'

1 3-13

i
 j

hi
I
.v

I
'I
J
1
;

. i'

I- ; |

a i

: .a

:v

I
n
2

& • : •i

1& :

S
i
1
1i
I
s :
:a

i;

5 : V :

,1

U
:
: i
•r. V:

:
E

;
. :
:ÿ
a :5

t
'

;
i
?
;;

:
r

:
a

.! a

I
Va: 3 t i i
T : J !
Product code C Ej 3 j 3 1 2 J IV'i3
I
s
3 3
J
i S i
I 7 !4;0 :
*
SI
oi 3ioio
3
a
Document code 1jE
!.v
$

1:
'

I
I
>: ! i
 1
4. OPERATION

4. OPERATION APPENDIX
I

FUNCTIONS OF EACH SCREEN

'I.

TABLE OF CONTENTS 4-APP. 1

i APP- 1 Machine Specifications 4-APP. 2

-
APP 2 PLC Switch 4-APP. 3
I
APP - 3 Counter Set 4-APP. 6

APP - 4 Editing . 4-APP. 8 :

APP- 5 Operation Search 4-APP. 14 t

APP - 6 Machining Data Setting .. 4-APP. 15
i
-
APP 7 Preparation for Operation 4-APP. 17 I:
APP - 8 Warming-up ............ 4-APP. 19

. 4-APP. 20 i'
APP- 9 MD! Setting

APP -10 On-Machine Check . 4-APP. 22 i

APP -11 Expanded Editing ...... 4-APP. 24

: 4 -APP. 25
APP -12 Simulation
APP -13 Setting Input 4-APP. 27

APP -14 Time Measurement . 4-APP. 32 S:

m >
i
l
i
-ÿ
r

*
I
;

m 1
a i
9
.1.: I
m
u:."! 4-APP. 1
m
f
1
i
I
i
:ÿ

m
:i i
 !

fI

i 4. OPERATION

APP-1 Machine Specifications Si

|
Data concerning the machine specifications is displayed.

CMACHINE SPEC] DIAGN 6 I

'ii
MODEL E 32
1
CONTROLED AXES 7
I
CONTROLED LINES 3
!:

LADDER Ver. 883-081

SOFTWARE Ver, 289-001

MACROPRG. Ver. 883-081

PARAMETER Ver. 80S -001

1R0Y2RDY3RDY LIN

LADDER SERVO (SPINOLE [PLC-I/F |NC-SPEC |HC-SPEC [NC-OIAG |

:ÿ

Display
Item Description
MODEL Displays the model number.
CONTROLED AXES Displays the number of controlled axes.
CONTROLED LINES Displays the number of Lines structuring the machining program.
LADDER VER. Displays the ladder version number.
I
c
SOFTWARE VER. Displays the custom software version number.
MACRO PRG. VER. Displays the custom macro program version number.
:
PARAMETER VER. Displays the parameter version number.

Menu
Menu name Function . . ::
:ÿ
LADDER Selects and displays the PLC LADDER screen. I
;
SERVO Selects and displays the SERVO MONITOR screen.
'
;
SPINDLE Selects and displays the SPINDLE MONITOR screen.
r-i
PLC-i/F Selects and displays the PLC-i/F screen.
NC-SPEC Selects and displays the NC-SPEC1FICATION screen. i, i

MC-SPEC Selects and displays the MACHINE SPECIFICATION screen. I

NC-DIAG Selects and displays the NC DIAGNOSIS screen.

4-APP.2 1 :
i
 ;
4. OPERATION |:

1
I
a
Bis APP-2 PLC Switch I
$§||f
if The PLC switch screen turns on/off various NC operation control signals. *

Set the number of the switch to be turned on, and press the INPUT key. The switch mark turns up, to
i
change the color of the switch name becomes yellow, _ :
11 Set the number of the "on” switch, and press the INPUT key to turn it "off5. The switch mark turns
'j
down, and the color of the switch name becomes light blue.
;
1 1:
CPLC-SWITCH] PRRAM 1
f

1 8
I 1 i $i SINGLE ON 9 f LAST PRG.OFF 17 ? ZERO RETURN 25 ? MACHINE LOCKON :
2 i £2 SINGLE ON 10 XI AXIS ZERO 2S ? M.S. T. B.LQCK

3
* $3 SINGLE ON
* Y2 AXIS CNTRNG 18
II f TOOL PROTECT
<j

19 t 21 AXIS ZERO 27 r DVR.LIMIT OFF

s
4 i BUZZER OFF 12 ? PRG. PROTECT 23 ? Cl AXIS ZERO 28 ? ERR. DETECT ON W:
;;
5 21 f X2 AXIS ZERO 29 ? CHAMFERING OFF
* FEED DIAL ONLY 13 f PRH. PROTECT i:
S ? DRY RUN ON 14 f 1NT. CHECK CAN 22 <? Z2 AXIS ZERO 30 i SI CYCLE START

I * $2 CYCLE START
7 ? DOOR LOCK ON 15 ? 81T RELEASE 23 ? Y2 AXIS ZERO 31

8 f DOOR SW.ON IS ? #27 RELEA5E 24 f Z3 AXIS ZERO 32 & S3 CYCLE START

IRQY2R0Y3RDY #C )
I
I
PLC-SW CONTROL AXIS j
jSET UP i SET UP 2| MACRO 1CU5-VER. MENU
I
1
y-: I
Display
I I
I # Item
Sett-
Description
r

!1
i ing

1
*
n 1
2
3
$1 SINGLE ON
$2 SINGLE ON
$3 SINGLE ON
ON

OFF
Single block i$ enabled in the program check mode. Set for
each Line. All Lines automatically turn on when the program
check mode ends.
Disables single block of each Line, in the program check mode.
x

J
j 4 BUZZER STOP ON Disables the alarm buzzer. I
j OFF Enables the alarm buzzer.
5 FEED DIAL ONLY ON Enables the feed dial under the program check mode.
OFF The feed dial is enabled under the program check mode, when
1 the actual machine operation key is pressed.
1 6 DRY RUN ON ON Enables dry run.
f;
f OFF Disables dry run.

3
% '
::

4-APP.3
C

jv'i

i
;!
14

lI 1
I
!•! : I
 1
I

4. OPERATION

;i
Sett-
# Item Description
ing 1

7 DOOR LOCK ON ON Locks the slide door during automatic operation. When this

8 DOORSW. ON
OFF
ON
switch is on, 8 is also on.
Disables the above function.
Machine operation stops if the slide door is opened.
1 1
1
OFF The above function is disabled. But if you close the door
after openning it , the switch is kept "ON".
:
9 LAST PRG. OFF ON
OFF
The last program is not executed.
The last program is executed.
1
§
10 Y2 AXIS CNTRNG ON Press the start button in the operation preparation mode to :

check the Y2 axis off-centering. $

OFF Disables the above function.
11 TOOL DATA PROTECT ON Data in the tool data is protected.
OFF Tool data input/delete is available. E

12 PRG. PROTECT ON Protects the machining program data.

OFF Enables editing of the machining program and input from 1
the paper tape, etc.
13 PRM. PROTECT ON Protects the user parameter, common variable data. Note 3)
OFF The user parameter, common variable data can be input and
changed. i
14 INT. CHECK CAN ON Disables interference check. In case you keep this switch s
"ON", the automatic operation doesn't work.
Enables interference check. Enabled at power ON.
I
OFF III
15 #1T RELEASE ON Enables the turret No. 1 position shift reset mode.
OFF Disables the turret No. 1 position shift reset mode.
16 #2 T RELEASE ON Enables the turret No. 2 position shift reset mode.
II
OFF Disables the turret No. 2 position shift reset mode.
17 ZERO RETURN ON Enables the absolute position zero point return mode.
OFF Disables the absolute position zero point return mode. 1
18 X, AXIS ZERO Note 1) The display turns yellow as the X! axis absolute position zero
point return is completed. 8
The display is light blue if the Xi axis is not at the absolute
position zero point. 1
19
II
Zi AXIS ZERO Notel) The display turns yellow as the Zi axis absolute position zero
point return is completed. I
The display is light blue if the Zi axis is not at the absolute m
position zero point.
20

21
Ci AXIS ZERO Note !)

X2 AXIS ZERO Notel)

The display turns yellow as the Ct axis absolute position zero
point return is completed.
The display is light blue if the Ci axis is not at the absolute
position zero point. _
The display turns yellow as the X2 axis absolute position zero
;

*
||

A
point return is completed.
The display is light blue if the X2 axis is npt at the absolute
1
II
position zero point. I
I

4-APP.4
 : I.
4. OPERATION

Sett-
# Item Description
1 ing
22 Z2 AXIS ZERO Note 1) The display turns yellow as the Z2 axis absolute position zero
point return is completed.

it The display is light blue if the Z2 axis is not at the absolute

position zero point.
23 Y2 AXIS ZERO Note!) The display turns yellow as the Y2 axis absolute position zero
point return is completed.
The display is light blue if the Y2 axis is not at the absolute
position zero point.
24 Z3 AXIS ZERO Notet) The display turns yellow as the Z3 axis absolute position zero
point return is completed.
The display is light blue if the Z3 axis is not at the absolute
position zero point.
! 25 MACHINE LOCK ON ON Axis move command is locked
OFF Axis move command is effective
26 M.S.T.B. LOCK ON Locksthe M, S; f, B code functions.
OFF Enables the M, S, T, B code functions.
27 OVR. LIMIT OFF ON Enable the feedrate override to 200% Note 2)
OFF Enables the feedrate override to 100%. The feedrate
override is 100% also when the feedrate override switch is set
at more than 100%.
28 ERR. DETECT ON ON Enables error detection.
OFF Disables error detection.
29 CHAMFERING OFF ON Disables chamfering in the thread cutting cycle-
OFF Enables chamfering in the thread cutting cycle.
30 11 CYCLE START ON Enables cycle start of the selected Line.
31 >2 CYCLE START
32 3 CYCLE START OFF Disables cycle start of the selected Line.
Note 1) The reference points of each axis of #18 to #24 are displayed without using the switch.
Therefore, the switch does not move even when enabled.
2) The rapid feedrate override is 100% also when the rapid feedrate override switch is set at 100
to 200%
3) User parameters include the four types of the CONTROL PARAM, AXIS PARAM, SET UP DATA1,
SET UP DATA2.
Menu
Menu name Function
PLC-SW Selects and displays the PLC SWITCH screen.
CONTROL Selects and displays the CONTROL PARAM screen.
AXIS Selects and displays the AXIS PARAM screen.
SET UP 1 Selects and displays the SET UP DATA 1 screen.
SET UP 2 Selects and displays the SET UP DATA 2 screen.
MACRO Selects and displays the MACRO FILE screen.
CUS-VAR. Selects and displays the CUSTOM VARIABLE screen.

4-APP.5

,j
 :

4. OPERATION

APP - 3 Counter Set

Set the required quantity of the parts to be machined as the "REQUIRED", to perform continuous
automatic operation. When a single part is machined, 1is added to the counter. The counter alarm is
p
output to stop the operation, when the machined parts and the setting correspond. There are 4 pairs of
required quantity and machined quantity. 1is incremented to all the four "machined quantity", as a
single part is machined, and when it matches the preset "required quantity", counter alarmis given.
6
£ COUNTER! OFF-SET 6
0 200
as
.
ft 1 RUNNING TIME 3H 30n 0s 4 REQUIRED t 21 1500? 'l ...!..

CYCLE TIME 0ti 03 5 MACHINED £21 0P

i
MACHINING TIME 0tl 05 5 REQUIRED £31 2000p
S3 TOTAL QURNTI TY 0p 7 HRCHINED £31 0P S:

2 REQUIRED £13 1000P 8 REQUIRED £43 30000?

3 MACHINED £13 0P 9 HRCHINED £43 0P
;

1RDY2R0Y3RDY 81 ])( )H ( )M ( )S

: TIP QFS T-OATA WORK |COUNTER I MENU

I
Display

# Item Description

1 O 200 The currently selected execution machining program number.

1 RUNNING TIME The preset time is displayed, and the automatic operation run time is added.
Set 0 H 0 M 0 S to clear the count.
vj\

CYCLE TIME
It returns to O H 0 M 0 S when the time exceeds 99 hours 59 minutes 59
seconds.
The time required to machine one cycle is measured and displayed during
I
;
automatic operation. Measurement is done each time during continuous
operation, and the result is displayed after each cycle ends. The count i
returns to 0 M 0 S when it exceeds 49 minutes 59 seconds, and repeats the
addition.
MACHINING
TIME
The executing time of the actual cutting command of one automatic
operation is measured and displayed. One of the Lines displays the total
8
actual cutting command time.
Measurement is done up to 49 minutes 59 seconds. The count returns to 0 M
%
0 S when it exceeds this count. U;:
99 TOTAL Displays the total number of the machined parts. The count is incremented I
QUANTITY by the M56 command.
Normally only display is available so that counting may not be cleared by
miss-operation.
Enter 0 to #99 to dear the counting forcibly. #(99) (
Maximum 99,999,999 pieces can be counted.
0)
I
4 -APP. 6 i$

:"r
 4. OPERATION
11
m # item Description

i 2 REQUIRED [1] Set how many parts are to be machined. When this count matches with the
?!: machined parts [1], counter alarm occurs to stop the automatic continuous
operation.
f: Maximum 32,000 can be set
Note) When it is set at 0 the counter alarm will be locked without counting
number of the machined products.
3 MACHINED [1] Presetter that sets and displays the count of machined parts. The count is
incremented as the M56 command is given. When the above required parts
count [1] matches with this count, counter alarm is given to stop the

!|
automatic continuous operation. Press the
toO. |RESET|
key to clear the counter

R
4 REQUIRED [2] Used in combination with the machined part count [2]. Details are the same
as the above REQUIRED [1].
5 MACHINED [2] Used in combination with the required part count [2]. Details are the same
as the above MACHINED [1].
8
6 REQUIRED S3] Used in combination with the machined part count [3]. Details are the same
as the above REQUIRED [11.
7 MACHINED [3] Used in combination with the required part count [3]. Details are the same l
as the above MACHINED [1]. :
8 REQUIRED [4] Used in combination with the machined part count [4]. Details are the same i
as the above REQUIRED [1].
9 MACHINED [4] Used in combination with the required part count [4]. Details are the same
as the above MACHINED [t].

Menu
I
Menu name Function
TIP-OFF Selects and displays the TOOL TIP OFFSET screen.
T-DATA Selects and displays the TOOL DATA screen.
WORK Selects and displays the WORK OFFSET screen.
START P. Selects and displays the START P. DATA screen.
COUNTER Selects and displays the COUNTER screen.

f
:
!

4-APP.7

'

I
:
;
 i

( 1
:
.
1

!s
i

4. OPERATION

APP-4 Editing
1) Program Directory I
The directory of the machining programs registered in the memory is displayed.

D 2 V-99...SUB IPROGRftH FILE! EDIT 1 1/1

PROGRfitt ENTRY 13 REflfllN 38
CHARACTER 10180 REflfllN 49500

<PR0GRflf1> <CHR> <C0flMENT> <PROGRfttt> <CHR> <C0Ht1EHT>

1 681 SUB/C
2 331 V-99...SU8
3 145 SUB/N
4 106 SUB/C
5 278 SUB/0
6 163 SUB/ ri
7 203 SUB/E
8 278 SUB/ 3
9 152 SUB/ 2
10 174 SUB/ IV
45 1088
200 5208 TEST-CUT
9999 1381 T-flflSTER PROGRftft

1R0Y2RDY3RDY b( ) COMMENT! )

FILE (NEW-INP j SEARCH j'HC-DATR j SIHU~SEtj

:ÿ
Display

item Description
O 250 The currently selected editing machining program number.
TEST-CUT Displays the comments added to the machining program O 250.
PROGRAM ENTRY Displays the number of the currently registered machining programs.
REMAIN Displays how many more machining programs can be registered. Note 1)
CHARACTER Displays the number of characters used in the machining programs
currently registered in the memory.
REMAIN Displays how many more characters can be registered. Note 1)
<PROGRAM> Displays the numbers of the machining programs registered in the
memory.
<CHR> Displays the number of characters used in the machining program of
each program number.
<COMMENT> The functions, specifications, application, etc. of the machining program
can be displayed as comments. Up to 18 alphanumeric characters and
symbols can be used. Can also be input from the paper tape, etc. Setting
can be done on this screen. Note 2)
|
1

-
4 APR. 8 ;
!;
 ,

4. OPERATION

I Note!) The registerable number of programs decided in the specifications minus number of
y: registered programs is this value. The remaining capacity is the number of character that
I can be stored minus the number of actually stored characters. No more programs can be
registeredif either becomes full.
2) Set the program number and comments, andpress the | |
INPUT tey to set the comment. If the

program already has comments, the new comment is written over the old comment. ,’i :

Menu

Menu name Function

FILE Selects and displays the PROGRAM FILE screen.
NEW-INP Selects and displays the NEW INPUT screen.
MC-DATA Selects and displays the MACHINING DATA INPUT screen.
SIMU-SET Selects and displays the HOLDER DIRECTORY screen of the simulation
setting.

i& 2) Machining Data Input

1 :
;

data is handled in the same way as the machining program. The machining data of the program
5'
I called as the current editingprogram is created and editedhere.
1
3) Setting input - Edit setting (Selection of another screen group)
Set variable data for tools so that they can be used in a simulation. Tool set and back spindle
selection data for later use canbe preset on this screen.
I See "Setting Input- Simulation Setting” for details.

1
11
1

4-APP.9

2
 ;

4. OPERATION

4) New Input
New input, data search, right search are displayed on the same editing screen. The setting section of
the setting field will match each function.
The followingis the common editing screen.

0 200 TEST-CUT EDIT

650 X-4.0 Z2E.7 :
1
• 650 X160.B ZB :
G730 : j 6738 wi ;
G99 (IS H28M79 ; ! 6710 WI ; V1
60 2-1.0 ; ;
Til 00 ; 67Z0 wi :
MSI ; j N2128(PGRIGQN) ;
M3 SI =1080 ; 650 U-38.8 ;
;
! 699 60 X33.8 Z11.0 T21 ;
: I 61 X13.8 F0.2 :
N211CDRILL) ;
! XI 2. 4 F0.0S ;
68 X-50.0 Z-1.0 J 1X13.0 212.0 F0. 030 5
, 61 28.5 F8. 12 T2 ; 222. 0 F8.038 ;
G0 2-1.0 T00 : •: xi 6. 4 wi.7 :
T1580 ; I X33.0 F8.5 ;
M95 1197 ; i 658 U38.8 ;
G9S S88 ; I T2508 ;
. 658 S2800 : :
I . G738 WI ;

1R0Y2R0Y3R0Y

FILE |HEW—INP j SEARCH { HC-DftTfl [sit1U-SET| R-SEftRCnf MENU

Display

1 ; Item Description
O 200 The number of the currently edited machining program.
$1 Indicates that the machining program of the 1st Line isdisplayed on the
left side editing screen.
i TEST-CUT Comment added to machining program 0200
$2 indicates that the machining program of the 2nd Line isdisplayed on
the right side editing screen.
Editing screen Divided into the two sides of left and right screens. Each side can
display 18 block of the machining program. !ÿ

Menu

Menu name Function

J !ÿ MENU Selects the menu.

p
1

4 -APR. 10 ;P.

Im
 4. OPERATION

I 5

Menu
Menu name Function
COPY Copies and inserts the specified range of the program to the specified
position.
MOVE Moves the specified range of the program to the specified position.
EXCHANGE Exchanges the specified range of the program with the seconds
specified range of the program.
REPLACE Replaces the specified frequently used word with a new word.

L-SEARCH Search is done in left side editing screen. J

I R-SEARCH Search is done in right side editing screen. ii
Other menus are the screen selection menu. See "Program directory” for details.

;
i How to create a new machining program
display the NEW INPUT screen. Q 280 TEST-arr EDIT
cse x-4.0 CSS M53.I
The program number, editing program, etc. that 6738 : 6738 M :
699 Its K28 M79 : 6718 M :
appear on the screen are those of the previously 68 2-1.8 :
TUBS ; S728 W :
edited machiningprogram. RSI ; X2I28<PGRI$QH> ;
m si1=1888 : 658 U-38.8 :
The setting field includes the prompts for the 699 68 X33.fr211.fr TZ\
G1 XJ3.8 F3.2 :
machining program number of the program to be «ÿ2-;9- ! XI 2. 4 F3.3S :
XJ3.8 252.8 F6.338 :
fr:ft.fr833 ;
newly registered and of comment. & 4 W.7 :
X33.8 ft.5 :
Set the machining program number and if _ T,5i:
ms 658 138. S ;
T2S88 :

| |
696
necessary, the comment, and press the 656
INPUT 1 6738 « :
key.
i Example 0 ( 300) COMMENT( PIN) IR0Y2R0Y3R0Y .
FILE |H&HNP j SEfiRCH [nC-08Tft Is5t«h-SET|R-SEARCHf i new

I
0 388 PiH EDIT
The program number and comment are registered Z
3
z
a
in the memory and displayed on the screen.
The old program displayed on the editing area is
also erased, to allow input and editing of the
program.

1
5'

IROY2ROY3SBY

FILE jNEU-INP | SEflSCM (nC-BflTR |s!m-SET|ft-SEf«CHf 1 I «w>

4-APP. 11

= !

t !

'
;ÿ

: J
;
:
f
I
'
:

'

4. OPERATION :ÿ

5) Data Search
Refer to the "new input" for the display and menu. '

(T) Program call

i
: A registered machining program is called as the editing program. Set the program number of

1 the machining program to be called, and press the

Example: 0{ 250) N( )- ( )
| |
INPUT k®y-

:
The called machiningprogram is displayed in the editing area from the head.
Note) The sequence number andblock number cannot be set if the program number is set. I
!> %
d> Searchby sequence number, block number 9
Search is done in the left side editing screen. The called machining program can be displayed
;

Example: 0( )N( 3) ( 1) -
| |
from the specified position. Set the position to be searched, and press the INPUT key-
! v'
O( )N( 3) - ( ) The block number is regarded as 0 if omitted.
The program is displayed from the specified position.
m
<D Search by character string
Search is done in the left side editing screen. The called machining program can be displayed s
from the specified character string. Set the character string to be searched, and press the
1
1
| | ke*
INPUT
'

Example : O ( ) N (G01) -( )
The program is displayed from the specified character string.
Note) The character string to be searched must be within 11 characters. Character string I:
<ÿ

including numerals alone is accepted as sequence number.

6) Left Search
Refer to the "new input" for the display and menu.
Searching is done on the left side editing screen of the called machiningprogram. ||i
(D Search by sequence number, block number
I See "data search".
Example :N( 5)-( 0)
(D Search by character string
See "data search".
Example: N( G50) ( - )

Note) Left search has no program number setting field, as in the data search, and no other program
can be called.

.1 4-APP. 12

':•!
 4. OPERATION

7) Right Search
1
Refer to the "new input" for the display and menu.
", Searching is done on the right side editing screen of the called machiningprogram.
(D Search by sequence number, block number
See "data search".
f: Example :N( -
5) ( 0)
I <D Search by character string
See "data search".
Example : N ( G50) ( - )
I
1
£
Note) Right search has no program number setting field, as in the data search, and no other program
can be called.

I
i
1 i
*

;
:

Ik
a

Ia
£
I

*
4-APP. 13
 :
§ I I
;;
i
'

I
!: I
1
s
I

.....
...
if 1 :

I l( 4. OPERATION

APP-5 Operation Search

The execution machining program used for normal automatic operation or for automatic operation
under the program check mode is selected. At the same time, the machining data is also selected and
set.

!
0 200 |t SEARCH! PROG. SELECT 1 1/ 1
PROGRAM ENTRY 14 REMAIN 37
CHARACTER '
10352 REMAIN 48S0S

$ i <PR0GRAH> <CHR> <C0MMENT> <PR06RAH> <CHR> <C0MMENT>

i;t 1 601 SU8/C
2 331 V-93...5UB
3 145 SUB/N
4 166 sue/c
5 278 SU8/0
5 153 SUB/M
is
7 203 SUB/E
8 278 SUB/ 3
9 152 SU8/ 2
: 10
45
200
1880
174 SUB/ IV

5288 TEST-CUT
388 182 PIN
t;: 3999 1301 T-MRSTER PROGRAM
?•

It: 1RDY2RDY3RDY JK )

%
I
SEARCH MC-DATA

See the "Program directory” (Editing) for details of the display.

Menu

Menu name Function

SEARCH Selects and displays the SEARCH screen.

m MC-DATA Selects and displays the MACHINING DATA INPUT screen.

!l

Select the execution machining program used for automatic operation, from the machining program
directory. _
Ii Set the program number, and press the
Example: 0( 250)
INPUT key.

The execution machining O 250 program is selected, the execution machining data is called, and set
1 in the MACHINING DATA INPUT screen.

I!

1
:s
3
4-APP. 14

1 'i
 4. OPERATION

APP-6 Machining Data Setting

The data necessary for machining and preparation is collected as the machining data. The machining
data is handled as the same as the machining program. There are two types of machining data; the
execution machining data used for operation, and the editing machining data to be registered in the
memory in the background.
The following screen is the execution machining data, for setting, displaying, or exchanging data with
i
II the memory. 5

[MACHINING DATA! PROG.SaECT 2

0 200
S l MATERIAL 0.0. 16 00MM
« 7 PIPE 1.0. 0J0MM
2 POSITIONING PT. 2.00MM 8 MACH. LENGTH 50.00MM
3 CUT-OFF TOOL T20 9 PIECES/ 1CHK 2P
!I 4 CUT-OFF SPEED 2000RPfl 10 WORK TAKING TOOL T15
5 CUT-OFF FEED 0.020NM/R
1I 20. 00MM
i £ B-SP CHK-POS.
1
IRDYZRDY3R0Y AC K )

SEARCH |MC-DATA j REGIST : 1:

:

I Display
# Item
O 200
1 MATERIAL O.D.
2 POSITIONING PT.
;
Description
The number of the selected execution machining program.
Set the outer diameter of the material to be machined by O 200 :
(selected execution machining program).
When performing cut-off machining during preparation, the cut-off
tool is fed to this point in rapid feed, and stops. Set how many
millimeters before the material the tool is to stop, in diameter-
converted value.

M
3 CUT-OFF TOOL Set the number of the tool used for cut-off machining in preparation.
4 CUT-OFF SPEED Set the spindle speed when performing cut-off machining during
preparation.
5 CUT-OFF FEED Set the feedrate from the tool positioning point to the cut-off
machining end point, when performing cut-off machining.

4-APP. 15

f;

!
 :

I
I

:
4. OPERATION

# Item Description
6 B-SP CHK-POS. When performing machining
with the workpiece chucked by
the back spindle, input the Spindle cap
distance from the back Chuck
machining work coordinate t
zero point to the chuck position
(spindle cap front end). 22
A: Back spindle chuck position A Back spindle
B: E16/20 E32 9mm -B
f
E25 12mm

7 PIPE I.D. Set the inner diameter of the material, if it is a pipe.

8 MACH. LENGTH Set the length of material necessary to manufacture one product.
(Productlength + cut-off width + face finishing margin) I
Note) When re-damping the workpiece in long-workpiece
machining, set the maximum machining length.
9 PiECES/1 CHK Set the number of products manufactured on the single chuck. The Zi |
axis retrieves to the "machining length x pieces/1 chk" position, when
returning to the start position.
10 WORK TAKING TOOL Set how many stations on the turret No. 1 the separator that accepts
the machined product, is to be attached to.
:
;

Menu
Menu name Function
SEARCH Selects and displays the SEARCH screen. IS
MC-DATA
REG1ST
Selects and displays the MACHINING DATA INPUT screen.
Registers the machining data set in the screen.
1
:

Sometimes the material may be out of stock, and material of different diameter may be used as
substitute for the while. For cases like this, the machining data on the screen is effective, and
changing and setting the screen data will not change the memory. Always press the j REG1ST
key if the change is to be reflected in the memory.
r
j

i
: .

.
V

4-APP. 16

1
 4. OPERATION

I APP-7 Preparation for Operation

Preparation is required before startingmachining of the product. Select the preparation function in the
1 operation mode, to display the following screen, and to enable the various preparation functions.
'
0 289 [PREPARATION! PREPARATION I
1
1 HATERIRL O.D. 16.60MJ1 8 POSITION XI (gj) 0. 800
1 21 (§l> 8.008
2 POSITIONING PT. 2. 68MH C! <gfl) 0.000
X2 (g) 8.836
3 CUT-OFF ZZ 8.083
TOOL T28 Y2 (®) 0.003
I SP-SPEED 2008RPN 23 <|§> 0.600
FEED RATE 8. 020htVR

4 TOOL POSITION / TURRETS1 TIB

/TURRETS2 T21
5 TOOL SELECTION NO. T
SEL.POS /TURRETS! POSSBL
SEL.POS /TURRETS2 POSSBL

S RETURN POS INCOMPLETE

7 START POS INCOMPLETE

V
I5TPZSTP35TP '

PREP | (WARM UP I
Display

# Item Description

O 200 Displays the number of the currently selected machining program for
operation.

1 MATERIAL O.D. Displays the diameter of the material to be machined by O 200 (the
selected machining program). The value set in the machining data.

2 POSITIONING PT. When performing cut-off machining during preparation, the cut-off
tool is fed to this point in rapid feed, and stops. Displays how many
millimeters before the material the tool is to stop, in diameter-
converted value. The value set in the machining data. 1
3 CUT-OFF Displays the number of the used tool, spindle speed, and feedrate ?
/TOOL from the tool queuing point to the cut-off machining end point,
/SP-SPEED when performing cut-off machining during preparation. The value
/FEEDRATE set in the machining data.
!:
4 TOOL POSITION Displays the tools selected on turrets No. 1 and No. 2.

4-APP. 17

i.

M
K! j
.
 \
;

\ )
\

4. OPERATION

# Item Description
5 TOOL SELECTION NO. i
TOOLSEL. POS.
Press a numeral key after pressing the tool selection jQj] key in
the preparation mode, to enter the number of the tool to be selected,
1Jv
f
and it will beset after the T command. Press the automatic operation :

START fTl key to select the commanded tool.

TOOLSEL. POS. Displays whether the gang tool post and turret are at the tool
I selection position. No tool selection of the above 5 can be done if the
:
turret has a disable indication.

: \ 6 RETURN POS. Displays whether the automatically returning to the return position is
completed in the preparation mode.
The axis move to the coordinate position set in the custom variables.
The status will be “incomplete" if it enters the preparation mode.
Moving from the return position by jogging after return will also light
"incomplete".
7 START POS. Displays whether the automatic start position return is completed in
the preparation mode.
The cut-off tool moves to the cut-off end position set in the custom
variables, the Z2 axis moves to the position specified by the custom
variables, and other axes move to the return position.
The status will be “incomplete" if it enters the preparation mode.
Moving from the start position by jogging after return will also light
“incomplete".

8 POSITION Displays the current coordinate value of each axis.

Note) The workpiece coordinate is set during theback position return operation is done in the ::
operation preparation mode. 1 l:
i.

The normal coordinate value upon end of the work coordinate setting is as follows.

Model E16/E20 E25/E32 \

Axis
X1,X2 140.0 160.0
:
Z1,Z2,Z3 0 0 .i
1
I;
!V

4-APP. 18
I
 4. OPERATION

APP-8 Warming-up
I Press the WARM-UP menu key on the preparation screen to display the warming-up screen.

CWRRHIN6-UP1 PREPARATION 3
0 200
1 « i SETTING TIKE a 30-
a; RUNNING TINE 0H 0H 3s
&
REMAINING TING 0H 0n 0s

1STP2STP3STP #( )( )H C )«

PREP { WfiRil UP j ICYCL STP

Display
item Description
O 200 Displays the currently selected program number.
[Setting timel Displays the setting time of warming-up.
OH 30M
[Running time] Displays the executing time of warming-up. !ÿ
OH 1M30S
[Remaining time] Displays how long time is remained.
OH 28M 30S
WARMING-UP Displays during warming-up. v-
#( ) H ( ) M Sets the warm up time.

Menu
Menu name Function
1
:: . PREP Press this key to stop t cycle operation during running. When the machine
: stops, this display returns to preparation screen.
:

4-APP. 19

I
f

i:
F; j ||.

|]
i

I:
 I

4. OPERATION

APP- 9 MDI Setting

The machining program can be input, to perform MDI operation. I
8
H78
m (Xl.Zl.Ct) [POSITION]
XI
21
(
(
)
l)
8.000 FC
8.000
tfOi
[FEED RATE!
0.00
]ÿ
Cl ( > 0.000 [T-COttHfiNDl
X2 ( !) 0.080 TURRETSl;T1800
Z2 ( !) 8.000 TURRETS2:T2100
Y2 ( i; 0.000
Z3 ( ) 8.000

t SPINDLE SPEED! IG-ttODflU

SI: 0( 0) G00 618 623
S2: 8( 8) G99 621 640 643
S3: 8 680 654
54: 8 G64 667 669
697 614 613.1
tn-COfttlRNDl
N
M
«
11
7:i
! EDITING
IRDY2RDV3R0Y

=
1 1 LN Ur- 1 LN 1 2+‘- 2+ LNF
Display
item Description
$1 Displays the currently selected Line.
<X1,Z1,Y1) Displays the axes possessed by the currently selected Line.
;v
[POSITION] Displays the Line and current value of each axis. s
II X1 ($1)
Z1 ($1)
a ($1)
X2 ($2)
Z2 ($2) ,
Y2 ($2) :

Z3 ($3)
[SPINDLE SPEED]
S1 : ( ) Displays the commanded spindle speed and the actual speed
(in parentheses).
It
S2 : ( ) Displays the commanded back spindle speed and the actual speed (in
parentheses).
S3: Displays the commanded speed on turret No. 1 tool spindle. 1

;
S4 : Displays the commanded speed on turret No. 2 tool spindle. II
[M-COMMAND]
M: Displays the auxiliary function command values.
M:
M:
M:
[FEEDRATE] Displays the vector direction feedrate.
(Example Synthetic speed of X2, Z2 and Y2)
[T-COMMAND] Displays the commanded values of tool functions on each turret. I
[G-MODAL] Displays the currently executed G command modal status.
V.

I 4- APP. 20
. 1
 4. OPERATION

Menu
Menu name Function
V 1:1 LN It allows for single block input and execution of MDI program.

i iij
2 + :1 LN It allows for multiple blocks input (up to 17 blocks) of MDI program. The
execution is done block by block, pausing at the end of each block.
2 + :2 + LN It allows for multiple block input (up to 17 blocks) of MDI program. The
execution is done continuously up to the last block.

1 Up to three Lines of MDI program can be created, but the displayed Line alone can be executed.

I £
1
1
I&
t:

i;

-
I
I

I
1
1
;ÿ !

S
1
4-APP.21
!

? I

! :
 j

<

4. OPERATION
:

APP-10 On Machine Check

When checking the program by operating the machine under the program check mode, the operation
can be stopped to edit the execution program and the operation can be restarted, as necessary.

CHECK
0 200 [POSITION] {SPINDLE SPEED] CT-COTOND]
xi cQX) 8.000 Si: 0( 0) TURRETS1: Tl 030
SI SUB 0 0 ZI <§)> 0.000 S2: 8( 8) TURRET#2: T2108
N 0- 0 Cl (ffl) 0.088 SB: 0 EH-COHMftND]

;
$2 SUB 0 8 X2 .(9) 0.088 S4: 8 m
N 0- 0 22 Cÿ> 0.000 [AXIS ESCAPE]
$3 SUB 0 8 Y2 (S) 0.088
N 0- 8 23 m) 8.000 :

£0 (XI. 21. Cl) N 0- 6 Hi CX2.ZZ.Y2) N 0- 0

658 X-4.0 226.7 : G50 XI 68.0 20 :

G730 : 6738 U1 I
G99 H6 N20 1179 ; 6710 HI ;
60 Z-1.8 ; ;
Til 00 ; 6728 HI ;
051 : N2128CP0R1G0N) :
: 113 SI =1000 ; 650 U-38.0 5
i 699 G8 X33.0 211.0 T21 5

;
1RDY2R0Y3RDY I*
| EXPAND | ESCAPE H-COH | §

Display ||
Item Description
O 200 Displays the currently checked execution program.
$1 SUB O 0 The program number, sequence number, and block number are displayed
N 0-0 for each Line, when the program is executing the subprogram.
$2 SUB O 0

i
N 0-0
$3 SUB O 0
N 0-0
'
[POSITION] The current value of each axis is displayed.
XI ($1) 0,000
ZI ($1)
C1 ($1)
0,000
0,000
81
X2 ($2) 0,000
Z2 ($2) 0,000
Y2 ($2) 0,000 111
Z3 ($3) 0,000
| [SPINDLE SPEED]
S1 : 180 ( 0) Displays the commanded spindle speed and the actual speed (in
parentheses).
a
S2 : 200 ( 0) Displays the commanded back spindle speed and the actual speed (in
parentheses).
S3 : 300 Displays the commanded speed on turret No. 1 tool spindle. ill
i:
S4 : 300
[T-COMMAND]
TURRET# 1 :TOOOO
TURRET# 2 :T0000
Displays the commanded speed on turret No. 2 tool spindle.
Displays the tool number and offset number selected by turret No. 1 and
turret No. 2 respectively.
Rif:
lit
I ;
1
i
4-APP. 22
 4. OPERATION

Display

item Description
[M-COMMAND]
1 M:
During reverse operation, the M command moves back without being

& executed. This can cause danger; press the 0 M-COM ) menu and enter the
If: number, to display the number after the "M:M.

| [AXIS ESCAPE]
X1 ESCAPED
Press the tU (start key) to execute the input M command.
The Xt axis or Xz axis can be escaped if danger of interference occurs during
reverse operation. Press the f) ESCAPE )menu key,
the too! change point move switch (preparation) or (2)4= .and

8 press the ® (start key) ,to escape the specified axis.

$1 (X1,Z1,C1) Displays the Lines and the possessed axes of the displayed machining
Is program.

I N 0-0 Displays the sequence number and block number of the executing block.

Menu
$ Menu name Function
EXPAND Select this menu under the reset status, to display the EDIT EXPANDER
screen. The copy, move, exchange, replacement, right search, left search
1
m
- ESCAPE
editing operations are enabled.
The Xi axis or X2 axis can be escaped.
M-COM The M command can be given by manual operation.

display section
The 2nd line of the executing block is displayed in white. Other blocks are displayed in light blue.
When the Line is stopped in a block, editing can be done from the next block (3rd line). Move the
cursor to call the editing mode for the execution program, and the machining program of the 3rd to
10th lines is displayed in inversed light blue, to indicate the blocks that can be edited. Normal
editing operations except for the operation that are enabledby editing expansion, are enabled.
v:;
Operation of the check on machine mode
1
The feed dial becomes effective. This allows forward, reverse execution of the program, as well as
change of the execution speed and stopping the execution. The program check axis lock key is
8 enabled, to lock the axis move of the X1,X2, and Z3 axes.
i
H
y
1
*

i
4-APP. 23

!
 4. OPERATION

APP-11 Expander Editing

::
Press the } EXPAND ) menu key whencheck on machine under the program check mode during the 11
reset atatus, to call this screen.

0 200 TEST-CUT
I
G50 X-4.0 Z25.7 ;
1
I G50 X1S0.0 Z0 ;
FOREGROUND EDIT
I
G730 ; ! G738 Wi ;
699 MS H28 H79 ; i 6710 wi ;
60 2-1.8 ; ;
Til 00 : •: G728 U1 :
: H51 ; ! N2128<P0RIGQN) 5
113 51=1008 ; I G58 U-30.0 ;
1 G99 G8 X33.0 Ztl.0 T21 ;
; 1.G1 XI 3.0 F8.2 !
N21K DRILL) ; I X12.4 F0.0S ;
60 X-58.0 Z-1.8 ; j X13.8 Z12.8 F0.830 ;
Z8.5 F0.12 T2 ; I Z22.0 F8.030 ;
G0 Z-t.0 T00 : •: X1G.4 wt.7 :
T1S00 ; | X33.0 F8.5 ; I
H9S H97 ; 1 G50 U38.8 ;
696 S88 ; 1 T2500 :
G50 SZ000 : ;
; G730 WI ; I
1RDYZRDY3RDY

COPY i HOVE j EXCHANGE!REPLACE j L-SEARCHI R-SEfiRChf FIN

Display

Item Description
0 200 Displays the number of the execution program being checked.
$1 Displays that the Line 1 program is displayed on the left editing screen. I
TEST-CUT Displays the comment given to the machining program O 200. Iv
.
$2 Displays that the Line 2 program is displayed on the rights editing
screen.
i
Editing screen Divided intothe left and rights sides, each displaying 18 blocks of the
li machining program. ,

Menu J
Menu name Function i:

L-SEARCH Search by the sequence number, block number, character string can be 7

done on the left editing screen.

R-SEARCH Search by the sequence number, block number, character string can be
done on the right editing screen.

,
FIN Ends the editing, and returns to the original program check screen. ;
Refer to "APP-4 Editing" for details on other menu keys.

. 4-APP. 24
 5

4. OPERATION

APP-12 Simulation
(v
The operation of the machine can be simulated in animation.

AUTO HI 5PEE0 SIMULATION

200 CONTI igfgl3l BLOCK 4 SP CHG CPOSITIONI
XI ( [) 8.808
! R0Y2ROY3ROY
Z1 ( I) 0.000
Cl ( I) 8.606
X2 { |) 160.068
I 22
Y2
23
(
(
(
)
|>
I)-
0.800
0.008
0.809
I I SUB 0 8
sue o 8
sue o 0
0
TIBI 0

T 0 S4S3 0
0

U (Xhzi.cn N 0- 0 B (X2.22.Y2) N 8- 8

50 X-4.0 229.7 : 658 XI68.8 Z8 ;

G738 : 6738 Wl ;

IRDYZRDY3RDY INVALID I1,T £1

START STOP RESET AUTO SPEED SKIP ALARM OFFSET I MENU

Display

r Stem Description

O 102 Displays the currently checked execution program.

I
[POSITION] Displays the current value and the Line of each axis.
X1($1) 140,000
} 0,000 !

Z3($3) -293,400

$1SUB0 0 Displays the Line of the executing subprogram, if any.

H i

!
TURRET#! Displays the number of the currently selected tool on turret No. 1 and turret
T11 No. 2.
TURRET #2
T43

SI: 1500 Displays the commanded speed of each spindle.

;;;
;

4-APP. 25

:
:

j|
iWH
 :

4. OPERATION

Menu

Menu name Function

START Start simulation.
STOP Stop simulation.
!
RESET Reset alarm for simulation.
AUTO 1 block, 1 cycle or continuous automatic operation mode is selected for the
:
simulation .
SPEED Either one of the constant speed, or two times, four times, or eight timesthe
:
constant speed is selected for carrying out the simulation. However, only time
measurement is available at the speed eight times the constant rate.
SKIP Effectives optional simulation stop.
ALARM Display simulation alarm screen.
OFFSET Display simulation tool data screen.
!ÿ'
EXTEND Select whether to draw the animation on a part of the screen or on the entire I
screen over the characters.
ZONE Select whether to display the animation on the left side, center, or right side
of the display section.
SIZE Changes the scale of the animation display section. Select from one to five
variations. &
COORDINT Select whether to display the coordinate value on the current position,
workpiece coordinate values, or machine coordinate. ;A

TIME-DSP Selects and displays the TIME MEASURE screen.

s
i
MATERIAL Displays the condition in which the axes are moved to the start position, and
the material set. Press it again to return to the original screen.
a
CH.CLEAR Erases the characters, when the animation is drawn on the entire screen over
the characters. The characters are displayed again by pressing this key once I
more.
1
SIMU-SET Selects and displays a simulation setting screen group used for setting variable
tool data for the animation graphics.
The secondary machining sections by the rotary tool is displayed inpurple in the animation
« m
'i;-
simulation display. The thread cutting sections are displayed in white.

Note 1) Graphic shift within 1 dot of the minimum resolution cannot be avoided in the simulation
drawing. The workpiece drawn on the screen must be considered a rough image. r:
The resolution is 0.75 mm in standard scale, 0.5 mm in enlarged scale, and 1.0 mm in reduced
scale. S'
I 2) Simulation cannot be done for the following machining.
Shift workpiece machining, chuck workpiece machining, machiningby special tool holder, long 1
workpiece machining that exceeds 480 mm in standard scale, 320 mm in enlarged scale, and 640
mm in reduced scale.
i
3) The workpiece form cannot be reproduced by reverse operation.
Illegal workpiece form is displayed if the cut-off, pick off, workpiece unloading, etc. are reversed.
4) Pick-off without knock-out when |t5l| [CDj
-* is commanded while the M16 (back spindle
open) to M15 (back spindle close = the back spindle grasps the workpiece on the spindle side) is
executed and the cut-off tool cuts off the workpiece, the workpiece on theback spindle is drawn I®;
as a round rod, but the spindle side workpiece is displayed again on the back spindle side after
the cut-off is completed.
!
1
f
1
11 4-APP.26
 i! i
4. OPERATION !ÿ

AFP-13 Setting input 1

Various data necessary to draw the animation in simulation must be set. Two types of setting the tool
I;
settingin whichholder and tool-bit are specified for a corresponding tool number, and the tool-bit data 1
1
in which tool-bit dimension and material are specified. I
1) Too! Set i
I

0 268 TEST-CUT [ T-COH 3 SIMULATION 1 m

ml HOLDER TOOL-BIT <(DIftttJ
SHIFT Z SHIFT TOOL SHAPE
10. NAME 3ETV NAME WSET. a
BBK ITF18I3 F lOFF L i F 0.008 -IS. 108
r II:DF48I F SLEEVE 2 F 83.880 8.000 i
1 r 12
SLEEVE 1 F £7.580 0.000 1
®
r 13
F H (SCSI 8 F DRILL 2F -15.800 -25.000 :i
I r IS:TFII6 F rRT TRNG 1 F 8.889 0.880
r
r
lSSTFUS
17STF31S
F
F
:RT TRNG 1 F
IRVING 1 F
0.B80 0.088
-12.800 -10.000
2
r 10<SF160 F :UTTER a 1 F 30.368 -5.608 I
r I3STF1IS F *R TRNG 1 F 0.880 0.888
r

2
Ii I;
ilji 1
.y TOOL NO.? 1
TOOL NO. <B8)
1R0Y2RDY3R0Y
§
T-COH | TOOL-BIT] BACK-SP f FIN

Display
I
p Item Description
!,. i',

TOOL NO. The tool number is displayed. The data of the tool selected by this toot
number is set.

NAME Choose holders from the reference screen for each tool specified with the tool
li
numbers and set holder names.

HOLDER SET. Specify the direction to mount the holder.

JI
TOOL-BIT NAME Select a tool-bit for the holder from the tool-bit data on the screen and set
4
the name.
I
DIMENSION NO. Select the dimensionnumber from the tool-bit data on the reference screen i

and set that number.

i

1 m
1
TOOL-BIT SET.

X SHIFT
Specify the direction to mount the tool-bit.

Set the X direction shift amount of the tool-bit. Set the two shifts if there are
two too!-bits.
1
I
I ZSHIFT Set the Z direction shift amount of the tool-bits. Set the two shifts if there are
i:

m two tool-bits. V

i
:i
* 4-APP. 27
I:

: I

f!
:•

Ff ;
i :

f m
 :>

m
:

ILL.
’/ÿ' L '

i
4. OPERATION m
I
1
Reference data 1 (Tool shape) 1
T10-19, T30~39 T20-29. T40~49
I +x
i>

:
Shift in X direction 95mm I
( + direction)

i;
r- +z +z -«ÿ

f-

I
r V

+x
I
( O indicates a tool-bit position of a standard tool ) ,
5
Reference data 2 (Holder list)
s
i Holder list 1/6P Holder list 2/6P
CTF116 TURN:STND D10 CTF219L TURN:REVS 019L
CTF216 TURN:REVS D16 CTF319L TURN:3/8'SFT D19L
CTF316 TURN:10mmSFT CTF419L TURN:1“SFT D19L
CTF416 TURN:25mmSFT CTF113 COFF:STND 13*19
CTF116L TURN-.STND D16L CTF813 COFF.-BACK
i CTF216L TURN:REVS EM6L CTF913 COFF:BACK 12mmSFT
CTF113L COFFrSTND 13*19
CTF316L TURN:3/8*SFT D16L CTF813L COFF:BACK
CTF416L TURN:1* SET 161- CTF913L COFF:BACK 1/2'mmSFT
Vli CTF119L TURN:STND D19L

i: Holder list 3/6P Holder list 4/6P

l
I CDF101 SLEV:STND KTFY216 COMBI: 16 + mo
! CDF201
CDF301
SLEV.-BOTH
SLEV:BACK
KDFY201
KDFY401
COMBI: BOTH + BOTH
COMBI: DUBL + DUBL
CDF401 SLEV:DUBL KTFY216L COMBl: D5/8" + 1/2“ L
CDF401L SLEV:DUBL L KTFY219L COMBI: + 1/2" L
'
'ÿj.
CDT316 TURN&SLEV me KDFY401L COMBI: DUBL + DUEL L
i CDT313 TURN&SLEV 13*19 KCS101 CNTR: (FORTURRET#2)
CDT316L TURN&SLEV D16L
I CDT313L TURN&SLEV 13*19L ii
I
1
f!
"f Holder list 5/6P Holder list 6/6P m
1
I
KSC110 -
CRSS DRL:SHORT KSS260 CIRC- SAW:1/3REDUCT
SI
1t KSC910 CRSS- DRL:LONG KSS263 -
CIRC SAW:1/3REDUCT
KSC310 -
CRSS DRL:AJUST KSS675 CIRC -SAW:1/8REDUCT I
:
KST110 CRSS -TAP: KSS680 CIRC- SAW:1/8REDUCT II
m
KSE110 FACE -DRL:LONG KSF160 SIDE -CUT: ijii

1 KSE310 -
FACE DRL:SHORT KSF163 SIDE -CUT:
1 KST510 -
FACE TAP: U30J WORK RECEIVER
I KSM110 MILL:
11
I KSM406 MILL:AJUST I®
1
1
.11

&
4 -APR. 28
LLv
. LL
I
1
:p ?!
i.
Reference data 3 (Tool-bit data)

TOOL-BIT

FRTTRNG
NO MTRL DMSNA
1
DMSNB DMSNC TOOL-BIT
CENTER
NO MTRL DMSNA OMSNB
1
4. OPERATION

DMSNC

I
V hÿi
2
3
4
2
3
4
5 5

I 6 6
7 7
3 S
3 9
10 10

I 11
12

V
11
12

1 iEu
5
13
14
15
MA
13
14
15

*
V Following too-bits are prepared.

Tool-bit names

1I Front turning, rear turning, cut-off, cut-off left-handed, grooving, thread cutting, knurling, small
turning, horizontal grooving, center, drill, tapping, die, reamer, boring, broaching, end mill,
1 hollow end mill, cutter A, cutter B, sleeve, double end sleeve

1
s Menu
I Menu names Function
>
I T-COM Tool set screen is brought up.

si
B TOOL-BIT Tool-bit data screen is brought up. (Setting is done for tool-bit data).
BACK-SP Back spindle screen is brought up.

I
V- :
FIN Setting input is completed and control is returned to simulation screen.

I:
1
I
-3

.
Is
i

i I
.
4-APP. 29

;
i

;
 I
!
!
!

I
4. OPERATION

2) Tool-bit

[TOOL-BIT! SIMULATION 2
TOOL-BIT 10 rED 7 m X 1TRL 3MSN ftpMSN BpftSW CpflSN 0
FRT TRNG I 1. 80S 1.080
2
A 3
i

5 If
6

B
3
10

‘IU 12
||
ft
1/3P
ILZJI-H f IUKN'J ©RR TURNG ©CUT-OFF
CUT-OFF LEFTBGRVINS.
I KNURLING
©THREAD CUT
©SHALL TUNG ©CROSS TUNG
TOOL-BIT NftttE ?

TOOL -BIT NRHE(g)

1R0V2RDY3RDY
11
T-CGM 1 TOGL-BIT18ftCK-SP [ FIN

Display
I
-
Item Content

DMSN NO. Displays dimension No. Set data for a tool selected with this number.

V FEED OFFSET COEFF Set a Feedrate offset coefficient to be used in the automatic setting of cutting
conditions. (Dialougue program)
ROTATION OFFSET Set a speed offset coefficient to be used in the automatic setting of cutting
COEFF conditions. (Dialougue program)
:
TOOL-BIT MATRL Set tool-bit material. (Dialougue program)

DIMENSION A Set the dimension for A shown in the figure.

DIMENSION B Set the dimension for B shown in the figure.

DIMENSION C Set the dimension for C shown in the figure.

I DIMENSION D Set the dimension for D shown in the figure.

Menu

Menu names Function

T-COM Tool set screen is brought up.

TOOL-BIT Tool-bit data screen is brought up. (Tool-bit data is set on this screen).

1| BACK-SP Back spindle screen is brought up.

FIN Ends the setting input, to return to simulation screen.

f ,

i 4-APP. 30
 i
4. OPERATION t
S

I
X

t/ 3) Back spindle V

i: 280 TEST-CUT IBCK SPDU SIMULATION 3 ;

:
TOOL! HOLDER TOOL-BIT < SHIFT IZ SHIFT TOOL SHAPE II1
40. NAME sET. NAME NQ5ET. (DIfiM)

a» r I0:TFIBI3 F :OFF L ! F 0.880 -IS. 108 I t;

T 11 CDF-401 F SLEEVE 2 F 83.880 8.088
SLEEVE I F 17.508 0.000 1
r i2
r 13
r 1-KSC910 F DRILL 2 f -15.880 -25.086 i
ill T 15:TFU6
T 16-TF116
F :RT TRNG 1 F
F -RT TRNG 2 F
0.089
0. 080
8.008
8. 000 I
:.i

I 17CTF3IG F DRVING 1 F -12.000 -10.008

T 18 <SF168 F GUTTER B 1 F 38.388 -5.880
1 0.880 0.888
f 13CTF1IS F RR TRNG i F i
s
I
BCK SPDL CHUCK I/IP M
;
IDSUPPRT CHUCKS! SUPPRT CENTS
a © m BACK SPINDLE?
j] m ©
f
. BACK SPINDLE(B)
1RDYZR0Y3RDY

T-COM { TOOL-BI TS BBCK-SP j FIN 1

1
Display
i
I
Item Content
I
•M

m BACK-SP The back spindle in process setting is displayed. I

I I ;
11
Following back spindles are prepared. li
f
Back spindle names !
CHUCK, SUPPRT CHUCK, SUPPRT CENTR 1
I Menu
i

If
sf
Menu names Function I
K
T-COM Too! set screen is brought up.
1 I
TOOL-BIT Tool-bit data screen is brought up. (Tool-bit data is set on this screen). i

I BACK-SP Back spindle screen is brought up. I

||
FIN Ends the setting input, to return to simulation screen. f
I
fl
C
I :
p

:.
4 -APR 31
;
!i
,

I;

i
 i

4. OPERATION

APP-14 Time Measurement

® Time measure can be done under time measure and simulation, of the program check mode, and 1-
cycle, continuous of the operaiton mode.
SIII
• The actual cutting, operation time, and queuing time of the three Lines are displayed for each
machining pattern command with different color in bar graphs.
1
® The speed of the spindle andback spindle is also displayed with gridpattern on another bar graph.
® The process information indicates the tool number, tool name, and speed command modal
information. I
® A single previous record (time information and program) can be stored so that the result of time j

measurement and the result of the previous measurement can fee compared. It
1) Screen display II
[TIME MEASURE! TIME MEASURE
I:
0 208 EXEC. DATA
SI J3 CYC. TIME
H 33S

$2 ‘""is-- ]
(WK)fJ2
L
|7I0
TIME AXIS}
(S>8 10 20 38 48 50 G0

SPEED SI

S2

TOOL NAME tlCH.TIME SP. SPEED

Brpflt
(COMMAND) 1
SI £(1)UX82 TI2 CUT-OFF M IS Si:
2 $( >WK T H S
3 $( >WK T M S

1R0YZRPY3RDY
1
| | [
PRC-DATA PRC-C ALL TM-AXi S TI ME-DSP MAS-OSP | |MAS-RGST} MAS-CALL|HI -SPEED| AUTO 1

!
Display

Item Description
O 200 Program number of the displayed result of time measurement. I
$1, $2, $3 Displays the Line of the bar graph.

(WK) 03 • WK01
Display the process number above the bar graph.
r ® to 79 are automatically displayed.
e WK80 to 99 are used the program by the user.
• When the process is too short to dipslay the process number, the process
number is omitted.

• The
Displays the result of time measurement by the bar graph. s
® colored parts are the actual cutting and machining time, while the
02 03 blanks are queuing time.
• The display is colored light blue and yellow each time the tool changes.
Green shows the operating time without using tools.
®
I
® The boundary line sticks out where tool change was performed.

4-APP. 32
I
 1
1':
H
"ft;
4. OPERATION i i
l
*"
8: Item Description
B White line indicates the end of each time machining pattern of the three
$i j L_J Lines.
$2 r 710 -Two-saddle
-
Twin turret machining command
machining command
«i- 720
f
--
-Back/front spindle simultaneous machining command
$3 ] 730
*710 J720
740
750
-Pick-off
3-Line simultaneous machining command
center support machining command
I
I TIME AXIS Displays the time axis of the bar graph that shows the machining time. I
CYCLE TIME Displays the time required to execute a single cycle of the program.
1 SPEED S1 • r.p.m.
Displays the spindle, back spindle speed commands in grid pattern of 250
per dot.
S2 • Constantrotation
Forward is displayed in green and reverse rotation in yellow.
• (forward rotation)
surface speed control is displayed in purple in white frame
and blue in white frame (reverse rotation), regardless
of the speed.
Example 2500 r.p.m. 1100 r.p.m. 200 r.p.m.

*
JL
Odds below 250 r.p.m. is rounded up.
M S Time display to show the measurement time in real time.
I
1 #1 $ ( ) WK
#2 $( ) WK
#3 $ ( ) WK
Press the ) PRC-OATA ) menu to set the process number. The process
information is displayed at the right side.
TOOL Shows the too! number of the preset too!
NAME Shows the tool name of the preset tool number. This is displayed only when
|
the too! is set in the simulation.
MCH. TIME Displays the actual cutting and operation times of the preset process
number.
SP. SPEED (COMMAND) • Up
Displays the modal information of the speed command
• threeto orthree speed commands can be displayed for a single process. If
more speed commands are displayed, the 1st, 2nd, and the last
speed commands are displayed.
• Forward rotation is displayed in white, while reverse rotation is displayed
in yellow.
® "SURFACE SPEED" is displayed for constant surface speed control.

I
4-APP.33

I
 5

B
4. OPERATION A
rS
2) Screen operation function keys
rn
2)-1 Check function
(1) Process information
Select #( ) 1 to 3, and set the Line number in $ ( ), and process number in WK ( }. The tool number,
a
f
tool name, machining time, and spindle speed command of that process are displayed.
i
The "Sleeve" set in the simulation is displayed as "Hole machining".
I:
(2) Process call v:
Set the Line number in $ ( ), and process number in WK { ), to display the bar graph from the
process.
i:
(3) Time axis
Enter 0.5,1, 2,3, 5, 10, 20, 30 in time axis ( ) minutes, to set the time axis of thebar graph. i
* Set in combination with the process call, to enlarge sections that need fine checking.
(4) High-speed measurement
t
Measurement is done in an 8 times faster speed, to display the data.
No information concerning time is displayed.

2) -2 Display funciton
(1) Time display
Measures the time of the operation search program, and display the time.
(2) Master display

Displays the data registered in the master. _ m

)
After this menu key is pressed, menu keys PRC-DATA ). i PRC-CALL TM-AXfS
3
becomes enabled in the master registration program. 4

2) -3 Memory function
(1) Master registration
::•:

The message "ENTRY?" appears on the screen.

f
j |
Press the INPUT key to store the currently displayed time information and program in 09999.
%
(2) Master call
- --
-
INPUT
The message "CALL?" appears on the screen. Press the key to copy the time information
and program stored in the master in the operation search program number.

I
2) 4 - Others
(1) Automatic operation 'X
4
Press this key for time measurement under the operation mode (operation machine).
(2) Finish
fi
Effective in the time measurement screen under the simulation mode. Press this key to return to
the simulation key.
•I”
;ÿ
i
4-APP. 34
 .—I .....
. 1"

m
: •: i
K
H
'

'i
! : r?
n

:;y.
.:

• Is
:
;
f:
;
s

'4

4
4
a ' "
v.
V

1
i:
•• r. 5
, .•

Ii
n
1
t:
tI•

V y. - u El
:
:
1 :;v
:V
at
V
' -a
m v

:
f.:
V
;
J
•: J
f.

I
£
;
;s
IV'

fl ::

; [•! v
i
:
i;
\

fv :
s
! .. . i

v;
•a

i:

(ÿ

..... ;

;ÿ

:ÿ?

i; :

:
['*• :

% . .%••• I* v HS ,••••! I /.*•ÿ!/ S.\l •s

I .....
.... Vs'iVV'sWt'V.s- • .....
I•* ••••%« V.l.\V! :I l"\'* •
s. oM >%'.* »,• !\'If •
«<««',' I\\‘f V* »*s*| I'S I • is <
[• :
:

i] ••
••
y.‘

t;. :•
a :•
;V
!j

v:
a ;
li
:
:
>• V;
ij [:

a:
*.
:
: J
;

8
; 1
$
tv;

•.
h
V |
1
8

i
;
II
If i
: i
i*
R
1

vf '

11
i

l i'll

i if i
ill

iff

ft; I
if
n
i II
:!
if;

ft

f
ff' I
!
if I
ill
!
ft:
iff:
I

111
:•
: 1

II
1
I
::

j
i

1
I
r\ i s
I Product code C i I I !
E 3 3 2 IV ! r
i
3 2
i
:
J
I
i
I
s
I
? 7 j4I0 ; ,
If
Document code 1 jE — 0 j 4 ; Q|0

f f

|I
 ill I
. .
'
4. OPERATION
!;
!-

4. OPERATION
4-1 OPERATION PANEL 4- 5
I 4-1-1 Machine Operation Panel 4- 5
:

4-1-2 Names and Functions of Switches and Lamps 4- 6

it 4-18
!

4-1-3 Names and Functions of CRT Display Unit Sections I

4-2 SCREENS 4-21
4-2-1 Screen Transition on Power Supply 4-21
I 4-2-2 List of Screens 4-22
4-2-2-1 Screens that can be selected by the screen control function keys ... 4-23
B 4-2-2-2 Screens selected by the operation mode keys 4-24
!f

4-2-2-3 Screens selected by the program check mode keys 4-24

II
1 4-2-2-4 Screens selected by the menu keys 4-25
4-2-2-5 Screen selected with other key 4-28
1 4-29
£ 4-3 OPERATION :

4-29 :
4-3-1 Power-On/Off ;

4-3-1-1 Power ON 4-29

4-30
1 4-3-1-2 Power OFF
4-3-1-3 Emergency stop 4-30 •• II
I
4-3-2 Menu Keys 4-31 ::

4-3-2-1 Menu key operation 4-31

4-3-2-2 Selecting the menu 4-32
% 4-S-2-3 Selecting the screens 4-33
4-3-2-4 Selecting the operation 4-35
;
4-3-2-S Selecting other groups 4-36 1
4-3-3 Page Keys 4-37
4-3-3-1 Next page key 4-37
4-3-3-2 Previous page key
4-3-4 Data Setting
4-37
4- 38
1
w 4-3-4-1 Data setting procedure 4-38
I;
| 4-S-4-2 Editing the setting column 4-39
4-3-4-3 Omitting the setting data 4-41
4-3-5 Manual Operation 4-42
4-3-5- 1 Rapid jog feed 4- 42
4-3-5-2 Low-speed jog feed 4-43
4-3-S-3 X axis zero point return 4-44
4-3-5-4 Y axis zero point return . 4-46
4-3-5-5 Z axis zero point return 4-48

I 4-1
No.
Code Serial M9001- Issue 1994.
No. (W6001-) Date 3I !

f
 .

;>

I
4. OPERATION
I
;
4-3-6 MDI Operation 4-50
;
4-3-6-1 Terminology 4-50
4-3-6-2 Specifications of MDI operation 4-51
4-3-6-3 MDI operation mode 4-51
4-3-6-4 Editing MDI programs 4-52
4-3-6-5 MDI operation . 4-54 ::
4-3-S-6 C axis selection and C axis zero point return 4- 56
4-3-6-7 Axis move command 4-57 :
4-3-S-8 Spindle rotation command 4-58
i 4-3-6-9 List of spindle rotation commands 4-59
4-3-6-10 Selecting the turret tool 4-60
fl 4-3-7 Program Selection 4-61
A
$
4-3-7-1 Selecting the execution program 4-61
4-3-7-2 Setting the machining data 4-62
; i
4-3-7-3 Registering the machining data 4-63
::
: 4-3-7-4 Machining data 4-64
4-3-8 Preparation for Operation 4-65
4-3-8-1 Moving to the return position 4-65
4-3-8-2 Moving to the machining start point 4-67
4-3-8-3 Moving to the tool exchange point 4-68
4-3-8-4 Tool selection 4-69
E
4-3-8-S Cut-off machining 4-70 :c
4-3-8-6 Warming-up 4-72
4-3-9 Automatic Operation 4-73 |
4-3-9-1 Starting automatic operation 4-73
'll
4-3-9-2 Single block 4-74
4-3-9-3 Holding automatic operation 4-75
4-3-9-4 Restarting automatic operation after hold, after stop 4-75
4-76 II
t 4-3-9-S Feedrate override
H
4-3-9-6 Setting the counter A- 77 v
4-3-10 Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Amount 4-79
4-3-10-1 Setting the incremental TOOLTIP OFFSET 4-79
4-3-10-2 Setting the absolute TOOL TIP OFFSET 4-81 a'
4-3-10-3 Tool data 4-82 a
4-3-10-4 Erasing the TOOL BIT OFFSET 4-83
4-3-10-5 Erasing the tool data 4-83
1
1
4-3-11 Creating and Editing the Program 4-84 H
4-3-11-1 Newly creating the program 4-85 a
4-3-11-2 Calling, searching the editing program 4-86
4-3-11-3 Editing 4- 89 a
4-3-11-4 Registering the machining program 4-102

4-2 I
;;
 4. OPERATION

4-3-11-5 Creating, editing the machining program 4-103

4-3-11-6 Program unit editing 4-104
4-3-12 Program Check 4-110
4-3-12-1 Time measure ... 4-111
4-3-12-2 Simulation 4-117
4-3-12-3 On-machine check — 4-125
4-127
f
I
m
4-3-12-4 Editing the execution program
4-3-12-5 Editing the execution program in reverse sequence 4-130
4-3-13 Machining Monitor . 4-136
4-3-13-1 Tool-bit data ......... ............. 4-136 1
4-3-13-2 Tool setting 4-138
4-3-13-3 Tool shape .... 4-139
4-3-13-4 Back spindle .... 4-140
4-3-13-5 Machining monitor .... 4-141

R
4-3-13-6 Display selection
4-3-14 Data Input/Output
.

4-3-14-1 Setting the input/output port number and device number

4-3-14-2 Selecting the data input mode
4-3-14-3 Inputting the machining program
..
.......
....
....

..
4-142
4-144
4-144
4-145
4-146
Si;'
4-3-14-4 Inputting the tool offset data ... 4-147 i !
4-3-14-5 Inputting the parameters ... .. 4-148
4-3-14-6 Outputting the machining program ... 4-149
4-3-14-7 Outputting the tool offset data or parameters .. ... 4-150
4-3-15 Others ... 4-151
4-3-15-1 Erasing the entire CRT screen . ... 4-151
4-3-15-2 Reset ... 4-151
4-3-15-3 Interference check ... 4-152
4-4 INSTALLATION (E25/E32) ... 4-153
:
4-4-1 Installing the Chuck ... 4-153 I
4-4-1-1 Mounting and exchanging the chuck ... 4-153 1
4-4-1-2 Adjusting the chucking force ... 4-154
4-4-2 Installing the Guide Bushing ... 4-155
4-4-2-1 Replacing the guide bushing device ... 4-155
4-4-2-2 Replacing and adjusting the guide bushing ... 4-156
4-4-3 Replacing the Support Ring ... 4-157

__
4-4-4 Re-arrangement of Back Spindle Device ... 4-158
4-4-4-1 Mounting and exchanging the chuck ... 4-158
4-4-4-2 Adjusting the chucking force ... 4-159 I
4-4-4-3 Replacing the knock-out jigs . ... 4-160
4-4-4-4 Adjusting the return position of the knock-out jigs ... 4-161
I
I
4-4-4-5 Replacing the chip-stop flange 4-162

4-3

It
m
u
 4. OPERATION

;;
4-4-5 Re-arrangement for Back Machining of Long Workpieces 4163
4-4-5-t Replacing the supporting guide 4-163
| 4-4-S-2 Replacing the product unloading pipe 4164 i-
4-4-6 Installing the Tool 4165
4-4-6-1 Structure of the too! presetter 4165 I
4-46-2 Replacing the light source lamp and fuse 4-166 i
446-3 Reference position check procedure 4167 1
4-4-6-4 Mounting and checking the turning holder 4167 I
4-4-6-S Mounting and checking the drilling holder .... 4168 1
4-4-6-6 Mounting and checking the boring tool holder (VDF101, etc.) 4168
:
44-6-7 Mounting and checking the outer circle drilling spindle, (KSC110,
1
:
KSC910, KSC310), outer circle tap spindle (MST406) 4169 f
446-8 Mounting and checking horizontal milling spindle (KSM110)
4
4169
44-6-9 Mounting and checking horizontal milling spindle (KSM406) 4170
4-46-10 Mounting and checking the face drilling spindle (KSE110, KSE310), I
face tapping spindle (KST510) 4-170
4-46-11 Mounting and checking the slitting spindle (KSS260, KSS660) 4171
44-6-12 Mounting and checking the side cutter spindle (KSF160) 4172
I
\
4-46-13 Presetting the 20-division tooling COMBI /tooling (option) 4173
i:.
4-46-14 Setting the back machining tool 4177
446-15 Mounting the tool holder . 4179
4-47 Setting the Workpiece 4180 4;
?1
? APPENDIX FUNCTIONS OF EACH SCREEN 4APP.1

!'

j
..

1
:

i 4-4

II
 K
i
I
4. OPERATION

1 4. OPERATION
I'in l
4-1 OPERATION PANEL
IV 4-1-1 Machine Operation Panel !;

I
8 iofe |°<0 O
|KE raw 0 S)
0
3 i is
3iim
sW 0 0
tan•
••£
*t*
— %n
3 t| 3:
I 3 0
3
«
8s
®

5
3 m 3:
3 mid
1 1® 00 00
© 0
la® 0 0
—\•@0000® 0300 mgs
I ®@®000 EGO®
: : 000000 0013 000
I 0 000

\
C
c
c
r
L
r
c ,

r
L
i i
IBB IO

4-5
.
1
,
f
I

I
!
4. OPERATION

4-1-2 Names and Functions of Switches and Lamps

ft
1 T*
— ———
POWER

O
.
'
(Z)

tip
•Owtt

sm liDi at

d>
o
LlilU — --®
b 33 1( pmlRSpEj
~ipnr~iririr~irir~ir~|r
d 1 11 m la
g- ---—— - - ©

d> © <§>

. Name Symbol Function -

(T) POWER
Power-onswitch
m Supplies power.

I
(?) Power-off switch m Disconnects power.

(?) CRT display Displays menu keys, current position, program

content, offset data, alarm number, and diagnosis
data.
SRWHT
(?)
CRT brightness Varies brightness of CRT.
_controlknob O
(?) Page keys (Right)
Pressing this key, scrolls a page forward when
handling multi-page data on the screen.
' Pressing this key, scrolls a page back when
;| (Left) handlingmulti-page data on the screen.
i
(?) Menu key
)
Selects desired screens or operations from the menu
'I
;
D shown at the bottom of CRT. (Press the key
corresponding to the menu - located beneath the
menu).

(?) Power lamp

POWER Lights when the distribution board breaker switch
: O is turned on.
(?) Changes the feedrate at 10% step within 0 to 100%

m
FEED RATE OVERRIDE
Feedrate override
i of the commanded speed. (The feedrate can be set
switch between 0 and 200% of the commanded rate by use
of parameters).
(?) Axis feed lamp AXIS FEED
Lights during axis move. Flashes as long as reverse
operation is performed in the program check mode.
ii'
a
;
: @ Program-check feed The execution of the program can be selected to be
done in step feed, automatic, forward direction,
dial stop, or reverse direction, when operating under the
\ program check mode. Adjust the feedrate by the
dial, for forward and reverse directions.
(Tj)
Q Press this switch firmly in case of emergency during
'

Emergency stop
switch operation. (The switch is reset by turning the knob
: to the /Y direction.)
J Power supply is disconnected when the automatic
power-off is on.

4-6
 4. OPERATION

;
1
I
I
i
I
:

:
1 '

© :
4;'
1
ERROR ALARM __ __ /
CRT DISPLAY
<—ÿ ' - -M0WTQB— -
— •
_
BACK GnOUNO
LOCK
€>
m #
‘ | ||~0AKÿ|
EOT OFS. GRAP. PRA. DGN. ALM. | |j
S1AT. POS.
1j PROG- j j j
RESET

( mmmmrri
[ CP. j[ XOfi juLÿJ
[PROGRAM-CHECK
TIME ACTOtLMACHINE
_ _ _ _ _ _ _. OPERATION MODE
AUTO
f.

00000 s@@|| N© i)
MTQ jjWHtlSlj SQ jj SMO j[ EQ PROGRAM-CHECK PREPARATION AUTO
OPERATION
-
/ AXIS LOCK CUT/OFf r*Al/T0 RETURN
I
I-

[ JLJjL.BL.‘.ill—£J
103011000
-.
jfESOOIAL TOOL SELECT
BACK GROUND
LOCK
F

t
H @’g
.......
V ..... ! -—
ii'

!
:

V
1
Sf MANUAL
4

I BBB B \
H, ®t ,-MAIN SPINDLE-.
» .
s

S m
§
t
/ 0 00 • r N1/ r 00 Zf Zi
«
• Zz Za
m
•y
@0000 1 0 *
K
i
(f§h~— — MANUAL 1
0B00B 0 rr $U8 SPINQLE-.

00000 @1,0 --I®

SB x.®

T 1

<jj>

I;
1||

4-7 s
III
:i . W.*ÿftvv4- ! TK'I «ir* }t nV"V v..V«•vv ww-V

I
;

'
I!
w
I I. I
I. :•! £ 1
;
I' f:
feg
¥•
i
I 1
1
i
i

'

ft
; I
1
4. OPERATION
i
I
1

© i
vj
/
BACK GROUND
8
1
i,S
CRT DISPLAY LOCK
ALARM ERROR r MONITOR 1 I
a
POS. PROG.
EDIT DATA OFS. GRAP. PRA. DGN. ALM. STAT. RESET i
IV
&
%
\ I
fi © ill

i
!

Name Symbol Color Function

'ÿ&
(l2) ALARM Red Lights or flashes when alarm occurs.
Alarm lamp
When the lamp lights, turn off the power once, and
remove the cause, to recover from the alarm,
When the lamp flashes, remove the cause, and press
the reset button to recover from the alarm.
ERROR Yellow Lights when error occurs. Remove the cause to recover
(3) Error lamp from the error.

Resets the NC alarm and machine alarm.

(3) Reset button

BACK Yellow It goes on when the background function is run. The

(14) Background lock GROUND reset button is disabled as long as this lamp remains
lamp LOCK on. (This is arrangement is provided to avoid an
inadvertent depressing of the reset button during a If
background operation).
Press the reset button to turn this lamp off. Press the
reset button again in this state to reset the NC or
machine alarm. I
j!
1
i

4-8

II
 4. OPERATION

1
Function
Name Symbol Color
Switch Lamp
Editing Yellow Executes program editing,including Lights while
©
£
i
CRT
DISPLAY
0 creation, registration, search, insertion,
deletion, etc. Also enters the machining
data, or sets simulations.
selected.

i
Data Yellow Executes input/output of data with the Lights while
input/
output | |
DATA
external devices.
Executesunit editing,including copy and
selected.

i deletion of the programs.

Offset Yellow Sets and displays the offset data. Lights while :
f 0 selected.

l
Graphic Yellow Displays machining monitor screen. Lights while
|GRAP.| Provides the simulation screen for a
simulationperformed in the program
selected.

check mode, and the time measurement

screen and on-machine check screen for
your time measurement and on-machine :
check, respectively.

3 Para¬ Yellow Sets and displays the parameters. (Some Lights while
I meter
0 parameters can also be set.) selected.

Diag¬ Yellow Displays the diagnosis data. Lights while

I nosis |DGN. selected.

Alarm Yellow Displays the NC alarm. Lights while

| j
AIM, selected. I

Opera¬ Yellow Displays the command/modal, time. Lights while

tion
status
j STAT.j selected.

Position Yellow Displays the position. Lights while

0 selected.

Program Yellow Displays the executed program. The on- Lights while

I | |
PROG. machine check screen is displayed during selected.
the on-machine check under the program j.
V check mode.
1
1
I;
i

4-9 t
;

j
,

S
::

4. OPERATION

OPERATION MODE
AUTO
©~
Im|[B>|[m|[ÿ][ÿ]|f5jll0 1
PREPARATION AUTO

CUT/OFF f~AUTO RETURN f

:1
00B m H> I
©- BACKGROUND
LOCK
TOOL SELECTION

(ml (m
i!

Name Symbol Color

Yellow The jog button feeds the X, Z and Y P

© Jog feed
[m| axes by manual operation.
Lights while
this mode is ! •

Operation selected.
mode Yellow Executes the program created by
MD! Lights while
selection manual data input. this mode is
: switches
r selected.
and
indicators Conti¬ Yellow Continuously executes the program Lights while
nuous registered in memory. this mode is
selected. i
1cycle Yellow Executes 1cycle of a program Lights while
i1
registered in the memory. this mode is I

selected.
AUTO
Single Yellow (1) Executes the program registered Lights while
block
H in the memory block by block.
(2) Whenselected during continuous
or 1cycle execution, the operation
thismode is
selected.
I

stops after completing the

executing block. Press the
automatic operation start button
1 to restart the single block
|
execution.
:
i
Prepara¬ Yellow Prepares for the start position return, Lights while

j
tion
(®j returning to the return position, cut¬
off, tool selection, and jogging
operations.
this mode is
selected.

Program Yellow (1) Registers the execution program Lights while

I selection
0 into the memory.
(2) Displays and sets the machining
data.
this mode is
selected.
1
4-10
H
 ;

4. OPERATION
l

l
;
Function
Name Symbol Color
Switch Lamp
Yellow Cut-off is performed according to the Lights while
©
0
Cut-off
data set as the machining data. selected.
;
Preparation
buttons and Yellow Automatically returns to the return Lights while

0
Return
indicators position position. selected.

Start Yellow Automatically returns to the machining Lights while

position

Move No. 1
B start position.

Yellow Moves a turret No.l to the tool select

selected.

Lights while ;
turret to selected.
Tool set
tool select 5 position.
position

?ÿ

MoveNo. 2
turret to
1
Yellow Moves a turret No.2 to the tool select
position.
Lights while
selected. j
tool select
position

Tool Yellow Inputs the selected toolnumber to Lights while

selection execute tool selection. selected.

Automatic Red Automatically disconnects the power in Effective

@ power off case alarm occurs during continuous while on.
AUTO cycle machine operation.
Optional Yellow Stops automatic operation after Lights while
: stop executing the block in the program with the optional
the M01 command. Press the start stop function
IV
button to restart the operation. is effective.
Block skip Yellow Ignores the block in the program Lights when

i
E§ including 7" (slash). ignoring the
command of
i the”/" block.
Start Green Starts automatic operation. Lights during
execution of
automatic
operation.
Hold Red Holds automatic operation. Lights while
[®l holding
automatic
operation.
Back¬ Yellow Lights when a background function is executed. Start
ground and stop buttons are disabled while the lamp is on. (It is :
lock lamp so designed to avoid an accident due to inadvertent start
or stop button operation in a background environment).
Pressing the start or stop button turns off this lamp.
Press the start/stop button again in this state to initiate
or stop automatic operation.

4-11 i

i
}
!
4. OPERATION

PROGRAM-CHECK
I
TIME ACTION MACHINE -©
ION/7] |ON/| JON/
/OFF! /OFH /OFF

PROGRAM-CHECK
I OPERATION I
l|:
I AXIS LOCK i
1
X1
SB
FEED DIAL

tn

;
i1
Function
Name Symbol Color
Switch Lamp
Time Yellow The time measurement function Lights while
ON, displays and checks the program selected.
OFF execution time.
i
Program
check mode
selection Action ON/ Yellow Checks interference by graphic Lights while
|
buttons and OFF simulation. selected.
indicators
Machine ON Yellow Actually moves the machine to check Lights while
:
'OFF the program. selected. >
Xi axis lock Green Disables the Xi axis move under the Lights while
Xl check on machine mode. the Xi axis is
locked.
Program-
X2 axis lock Green Disables the X2 axis move under the Lights while ;;
1 check
X2 check on machine mode. the X2 axis is m
T
,1

11
axis lock

Z3 axis lock
Z3
Green Disables the Z3 axis move under the
check on machine mode.
locked.
Lights while
the Z3 axis is
I
locked.
Feed dial Yellow Makes the feed dial able in the on- Lights while
1! machine check mode. selected.

:
I

Wj

4-12
 4. OPERATION

X2|ÿ z2 z2
Z1 Z3
••JJ**
_.
x4
Zl Z,
C1O i
C.D • DD Z2 z3
#
r
z, z2 Z3 Z3 -©

4 ©(•

0 X1I, -T.TX2« 0
:-:v
Symbol Color Function
1 Name
Moves the 2\ axis to the arrow direction when
Z\ axis
© under the jog feed mode or preparation mode.
i Jog buttons
Z, Zl
(spindle)
I
i C1 axis Moves the C1 axis to the arrow direction when .

I c,0 under the jog feed mode or preparation mode. ;

c,B
•7
Axis status
indicator
Super¬
imposing
rZ2 Green Lights while the 2\ axis is superimposed with the
reference axis Z2.
(spindle)
Super¬
imposing r Green Lights while the 2% axis is superimposed with the
reference axis Z3.
z3
Jog button Xi axis Moves the Xi axis to the arrow direction when
(No.l turret)
4 under the jogging mode or preparation mode.

x4
s
Axis status No.l Green Lights when the No. 1 turret is at the tool
turret selectable position.
indicator tool
(No.l turret) selection
position
Synchro¬ Green Lights while the Xÿ axis is synchronizing with the
nizing TT
x
reference axis X2.
2

Rapid jogging button Green The feed becomes rapid jogging when thisbutton
is pressed along with the jog button.

4-13 I

:
;
i
 >

4. OPERATION

Name Symbol Color Function

!
X2axis Moves the X2 axis to the arrow direction when
© 4 under the joggingmode or preparation mode.
i
Jog buttons
(No.2 turret)
x2[r I
Z2 axis Moves the Z2 hydraulic axis to the arrow direction
when under the jogging mode or preparation 1
?2 Z2 mode. %

Axis status No.2 Green Lights when the No. 2 turret is at a tool selectable
indicator
(No. 2 turret)
turret
tool
©f position.

selection
position
! Clutch Yellow It goes on when the clutch is reset
,

i
being
reset
0+
Synchro¬ Green Lights while the X2 axis is synchronizing with the
nizing reference axis X|.
JT*
Super¬
imposing r Green Lights while the Z2 axis is synchronizing with the
reference axis Zj . 1
Zi
*1
Super¬
imposing
_r Green Lights while the Z2 axis is synchronizing with the
reference axis Z3.
z3

Jogbutton Z3 axis Moves the Z3 axis to the arrow direction when

(back Z3 z3 under the jogging mode or preparation mode.
spindle) >

Axis status
indicator
Super¬
imposing r Green Lights while the Z3 axis is synchronizing with the
reference axis .
(back Z1
spindle)
!
Super¬
imposing rZ2 Green Lights while the Z3 axis is synchronizing with the
reference axis Z2.
lit
.

Rapid jogging Z3axis The feed becomes rapid jogging when this button
button
0 is pressed along with the jog button. l '

4-14
 4. OPERATION

MANUAL
1
r MAIN SPINDLE-1
:

0ElS if

MANUAL

r SUB SPINDLE “1

Function
Name Symbol Color
Switch Lamp
Coolant Green Turns on/off the coolant during Lights while
E. © on/off
& manual and automatic operations. the coolant is >

%
Manual discharged.
3,
buttons and
indicators
Spindle
chuck
open/close m Green Closes the chuck.

Opens the chuck.

Note 1)
Press once to Lights while
close the chuck the chuck is
and once more closed.
to open the
chuck.
i:!
it
:
m
Back spindle Green Closes the chuck. Press once to Lights while
chuck close the chuck the chuck is
open/close Note 1) and once more closed.
Opens the chuck. to open the
chuck.
i ,

Name Symbol Color Function

© Spindle stop Stops the main spindle and tool spindle by manual
control, during manual and automatic operations.
Manual
buttons
f$o
Back spindle Stops theback spindle by manual control, during
I
stop manual and automatic operations.

Note 1) This function is operative in the jog mode or operationpreparation mode.

4-15

:
 I

4. OPERATION 1

A B C D E
OR XOR AND SIN COS
:
F G H L M
, TAN ATN SQRT ABS IF

N O P Q R
GOTO WHILE DO END £Q

s T U V W
NE GT LT GE LE

( ) X Y Z v
f ] I J K

.!
! /
SP SHIFT
$ #
*
i;

7 8 9 INSERT 1

4 5 6 DEL.

1 2 3 CB.
-0
CAN
I
+
o ESP.
!
Name Symbol Function
T,
@ Alphanumeric Used to input alphabets, numerals and symbols.
keys _
Shift key
| | SHIFT
Press this key before pressing the alphanumeric
key, to input the alphabet, symbol, or character
stringprinted at the lower part of the key.
I
:i
Inputs a space (a blank equivalent to one
n
'il
Space key
0 character).
1
I
©
Edit
Insertion
jlNSSRlj Inserts data to a program or setting data. I
:

j
buttons Deletion
0 Deletes data in a program or setting data.

Line deletion
0 Deletes 1block of data in a program or to delete one
of the setting data denoted by ( ).

Pressing this key, following the shift key, deletes

1
Cancel
Q all program data or variable data on the screen. It
is alsoused to delete all setting data denoted by ( ).
(See {23) shift key).
Aborts a setting and to return to theinitial setting
Escape
0 item. (It is used in a simulated tool setting, for
example.)

"I,

4-16
!i
I
&
f: 4. OPERATION

I
i'
it Q, / oo ? S.5KIP !

i
§ t* «- $-SEL ;/
EOB -©
If
\b
;;&
u 4- CUR. INPUT

;
Name Symbol Function :
Moves the cursor on the CRT vertically, line by line.
(25) Cursor keys t* The cursor moves continuously when kept pressed.

u .

Moves the cursor on the CRT horizontally, character ;

<- by character. The cursor moves continuously when

kept pressed.
I
?ÿ

Moves the cursor to the head of the previous word in

ft;
Tab keys
0 the program. Moves the cursor to the left
parentheses in the setting column.
Moves the cursor to the head of the next word in the

0 program. Moves the cursor to the right parentheses

in the setting column.

H
Line key Switches a line of program at cursor position.

Moves cursor horizontally. ::

Cursor key
H
Warp key
js-SKipj Not used.
:

Pressed at the end of the each program block, to

End of block key
0 indicate the end of eachblock.

Input key
|INPUT| Enters the edited program into the memory.
Sets the edited setting data.

!i
4-17

: if

1
:
 ;

4. OPERATION

i;
4-1-3 Names and Functions of CRT Display Unit Sections

The CRT screen has the following five main sections. ,

(1) Data display section

(2) NC operation status and alarm message section
(3) Key operation message section
i
(4) Setting section
?! (5) Menu display section

;
1
Screen name
J
(« Screen name i) j Screen group name

Data display section

21 lines {

T
NC operation status and alarm i Key operation message section 22nd iine
message section !~
Setting section 23rd line
Menu display section

80 columns

(1) Data display section

\\ The entire data display section can be used to display the menu data, or it can also be divided into two >
parts to display the basic data on the left part and the menu data on the right part. The following
names are given to the screens.
j ;
Menu data display Basic data Menu data
section display display
section section
:
1

Example of screen group names

Offset 717 2

Group name
\ Number of
Group No. Page No. pages

# 4-18
 'ÿ

4. OPERATION

! :
I
(2) NC operation status and alarm message section
I
When there are less than two alarms

Column 1 Column 21 Column 40

f
22nd line Alarm 1 Alarm 2 i

23rd line NC operation status

The NC operation status is displayed on the 23rd line, and the alarms are displayed on the
22nd line when occurred.

When there are more than three alarms

Column 1 Column 21 Column 40

22nd line Alarm 1 Alarm 2 n
23rd line Alarm 3 Alarm 4

When three or more alarms occurred, the NC operation status display is replaced with the
alarm messages on both the 22nd and 23rd lines.

i) Alarm message section

When alarm occurs, the Linenumber occurred alarm, alarmnumber and the message are
displayed in this section.
:
Column 1 Column 21 Column 40 ,

m MXX Message :

:: Alarm No. I 1

1
I
Line No. (inversed)

ii) NC operation status display

The preparation and operation status are displayed for eachLinenumber.
1 Column 1

I
1
1 RDY2RDY3RDY
t
Preparation , operation status
Line No.

:V

4- 19

;
 I

:
:i

4. OPERATION
V
i;
Operation status display
1
Symbol Description Note) The setting section
EMG Emergency stop has 40 characters or
more in some V

RST Resetting the NC y

parameter and offset
RDY Ready for operation screens, and the NC :
During automatic operation operation status and
alarm display cannot *
SYN Queuing for synchronization
be done. i
CRS Queuing for cross
STP Stopping
HLD Holding

(3) Key operation message section

$
When error occurred in the data setting and inputting screen, the error number EX X and a message
giving the details of the error are displayed on the 22nd line.

Column 41 Column 61 Column 80

Key operation message section 22nd line
Setting section 23rd line

(4) Setting section ,

In the data inputting and setting screen, the data number field and the data field are normally
displayed on the setting section. Input each field, and press the INPUTI key to set the data in the
specified data number.

Column 41 Column 80
#( ) DATA ( ) 23rd line

Data No. Data

|
Note) There are also screens that have the setting section at the left side. 1
.

r (5) Menu display section 1

The menu used to select the screens and operations is displayed on the bottom of the screen.

NC operation status Setting section

| Ii
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 y Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6j Menu 7 Menu 8 Menu 9

: Press the menu key corresponding to the menu display to select the menu.
]

4-20
 h
i: ill
>

4. OPERATION

1
r
4-2 SCREENS ;

4-2-1 Screen Transition on Power Supply

The initial screen is displayed as the power is supplied. Then, several seconds after the power supply, !:

the operation search screen under the program selectionmode is automatically selected.

Power initial SEARCH

supply screen
I
I
|| 1
Several seconds Automatic selection
I! f
;

The optional display screen can be selected by performing the necessary operation, before the operation
search screen is automatically selected after several seconds following power supply. I
S

Power Initial Selected I

Operation
supply screen screen i
1 .

s Screen operation function

Operation mode I
I
I Several seconds — Automatic selection
1

iS

l f
Automatic selection is canceled
It
V

§
31
i *
1
i f:
i
!;
r

I§
1 1

1 u
m

I-;

1
S 4-21
I

|
M.
® .

i :ÿ

1
.1
it
 i
I

•-

4. OPERATION

4-2-2 List of Screens

In this machine, the desired screen is displayed by pressing the screen control function key (CRT
display) operation mode or program check mode key, selecting the display screen group, and then
pressing the menu key. (For details, refer to "4-3-2 Menu Keys".) :
!
i;
Screen transition keys
(1) Screen control function keys
$
EDIT DATA OFS. 6RAP. PRA.
:
'

f
>
DGN. ALM. STAT. POS. PROG.

(2) Operation mode keys

AUTO

WW B> £31 tH [3 Hi O
(3) Program check mode keys

TIME ACTION MACHINE

uiy- UN/
, -'t>FF -"6FF

(4) Menu key

) This key displays the menu corresponding to a screen selected by one

of the above (1) to (3) program check mode keys.

a
(5) Other key
!?
S.SKIP
::
1
i

4-22 I
:ÿ
 4. OPERATION
I
1s?
4-2-2-1 Screens that can be selected by the screen control function keys
II'

PROG. p PROGRAM I

Sill
;
U MACHINE This screen is available when the on-
machine check key (for the program
check mode selection) is turned on.

:
POS. ¥ POSITION

gj •J

I PI P2
£
V
il .-.
STAT. ¥ COMMAND /MODAL TIME

11
I

ALM. ¥ NC ALARM

i
Note) Previously selected screen will be
:£
DGN. ¥ One of the diagnosis screens
shown
See 4-2-2-4

PRA. One of the parameter screens J

Note) selected screen will be

See 4-2-2-4

GRAP. ¥ MC- MONITOR This screen is available when the option is

included
r
See 4-2-2-4
This screen is available when the
SIMULATION simulation key (for the program check
mode selection) is turned on
See 4-2-2-4

TIME This screen is available when the time

measurement key (for the program check
mode selection) is turned on.
n
OFS.
rj One of the offset screens‘'I i
Note) Previously selected screen will be If
\ J shown
See 4-2-2-4

DATA
¥ f One of the data I/O screens j Note> Previously
V shown
selected screen will be

See 4-2-2-4

EDIT
Note) Previously selected screen will be
¥ One of the edit screens shown
—» See 4-2-2-4 1
ip

i'1
3 4-23

l
 !

4. OPERATION

_
4-2-2-2 Screens selected by the operation mode keys

cO v
r f One of the program 0i
selection screens J
Note) Previously selected screen will be
shown
-* See 4-2-2-4

QJ ¥ ,k< _.groj>aratj
One of the operation 0, Note) Previously selected screen will be
22 screens }
->
shown
See 4-2-2-4 I
cm * PROGRAM )
!ÿ:

i
%
Si ¥ PROGRAM
I
i
1
cm ¥ PROGRAM ) is

I
%
i
w> ¥ MOI
;
§
i
m
m ¥ POSITION
1
8
4-2-2-3 Screens selected by the program check mode keys

ON/
H MACHINE )
IS'
ON
•OFF ACTION
Note) The simulation screen must always
be displayed
I
$
-> See 4-2-2-4

i ON .
•OFF TIME
J i-
.

i 3-.

4-24
 f;-.

II
?;
4. OPERATION

;;
4-2-2-4 Screens selected by the menu keys
13
r One diagnosis screens a I t
!l/
'ÿ)

K J ¥ LADDER

i
I
;.\i
SERVO MONITOR m
SPINDLE MONITOR a
;
I
1"
PLC-I/F
P.2
p-V
NC SPECIFICATION NC SPECIFICATION

— MACHINE SPECIFICATION
!
I:
'

NC DIAGNOSIS
I
( a i
3 •\ One parameter screens
J
¥ PLC SWITCH
!, 1
CNTROL PARAM j;
v"

AXIS PARAM
; I
!
I
SET UP DATA 1 :ii
*s
4
; II
SET UP DATA 2 "is:
. I4

1 MACRO FILE i
m CUSTOM VARIABLE
'ÿ

:sfi j
a
’M
BASE PARAM 1 4"
.4 j

h BASE PARAM 2
%!4
1 AXIS PARAM

m -
ZERO RTN PARAM
m. pa
P-V
P.2
SERVO PARAM SERVO PARAM

:v;'.
’T
P.l.
MC- ERR. DATA
P. 2 to 13
MC-ERR. DATA
;l

i
iI
''I 4-25
li
t ;’l|
1
§• ,vyv
m
r !
i
I
lI 3
: :ÿ»
1

1 i I
I
|f' ;

hr 3
s

;
; y

V; :

i
•.'II'K W mv
&rr

4. OPERATION
i

:
5
-
II
;
SPINDLE SPEC. v:

I
y PLC DATA

PLC TIMER
IRi

.
:
:
PLC COUNTER I:I
'

ifi
8 BIT SELECT

_ PLC AXIS PARAM l

1=
I• SUPERPOSED -ERR. CMP.
I:

•I
I
II f
! One offset screens TOOLTIP OFFSET y

J
I
TOOL DATA
1

WORK OFFSET

START P. DATA
I
COUNTER
;•

i
COMMON VARIABLE 1 |
j
COMMON VARIABLE 2 i
fill
LOCAL VARIABLE
t
i
i- r
fi; i One data I/O screens
.J
DATA INPUT 11
I
I DATA OUTPUT fi;.,fi;;1'

1
1
fa;
V

fa,
PROGRAM COPY

PROGRAM ERASE

I
'I COMMENT
P.L
7
P.2
i'C1'
-
I/O BASE PARAM I/O BASE PARAM
a fi;

! 4-26

1
 il

I
']!
i j
4. OPERATION
m
:l
Is r One edit screens
"'l
¥ PROGRAM FILE i
I K J / 1

EDIT
1
I
1

MACHINE DATA :ÿ
i j
j
1
: SIMU-SET
m
§ 1
i TOOLSET
I
t!
ft
TOOL-BIT i
V
i I
I
mm BACK-SP.

{ One program selection SEARCH

i!1 screens J
I 3
I MACHINEING DATA
#
1
v

3
One operation i
5 PREPARATION
preparation screens
;
1— WARM UP
:
I H
mm
SIMU-SET
MACHINING MONITOR
m
vj
i
afi.
TOOLSET i
*
;

TOOL-BIT li

BACK-SP. I
«
'v: '

IV
SIMULATION ¥ SIMU-SET

TOOLSET
I
l
2:
TOOL-BIT I
a •/. „ I
1
BACK-SP.
1
1
m
i
TIME Time display only.
1
1«
I I tv
-
4 27 i
I

;;
J: :.a
!'•
il
.=ÿ

I
a

a
ft

2
 V

i
i
i

4. OPERATION

4-2-2-S Screen selected with other key

S.SKiP > Not used.

I
t! I
;:2
I
!

ml!
&
!.•

;
[
I.
!|:

m
!. m
U
III
l; I

11
5;!S'
I
H
i

1 1
? i'lf
I
i
\
I

i;:

i
m
I
1
i.. 4-28
4' 4
 B;;
$ 4. OPERATION
&
:
i;
i 4-3 OPERATION
B
How to read the figures
8
Operation If §
...

c ) lamp indication .!

I
) CRT display f

4-3-1 Power-On/Off
i
c 4-3-1-1 Power ON

I
)
.

Turn on breaker

i
C
Power
O lights )
Power
I
m PUSH

CRT

I Initial screen

CRT I
( SEARCH screen
The screen automatically changes if no screen-
related operation is performed for several second
after the power is supplied.
?

i.
4-29 i

l
!

:
 ;

:ÿ :

A. OPERATION
f
I:
e
1 ,

a*
c 4-3-1-2 Power OFF

4
) H.
11
B
PUSH

I f:
I
Turn off breaker i:

f Note Warning upon power-on/off

(1) Do not press the keys on the control
panel when turning on/off the
power, or it may cause failure.

C 4-3-1-3 Emergency stop

)
o PUSH

i.

i
j 1. 1

'I ;v
I

4-30
,
 i 4-3-2 Menu Keys
4. OPERATION

In this machine, screens of similar functions, or screens used for a single operation are grouped, to allow
efficient selection of the screen to be displayed. Select this screen group by the control panel key. The
menu keys are offered to select the desired screen from the displayed menu.
|
Menu key operation
1 4-3-2-1

Display screen ::
1

Selected

Menu -S 1ÿ
I Menu 1 |ÿMenu2|| Menu 3 Y
:ÿ
Menu keys IIZÿ> j )E )l) )
Menu key Menu key Menu key
for selecting for selecting for selecting
menu 1 menu 2 menu 3

The menu is displayed on the bottom of the display screen. Press the menu key below each menu, to
select the screens, operations, andother screen groups. :
I The menu key to select menu 1is described as Menu 1 ) in this manual.
The menu display is yellow while the menu is selected, and white when not. Hl
:
There are three types of menu; the screen selection menu used to change the screen, the operation
I
selection menu used for editing and machine operation, and other screen group selection menu used
I
to move to other screen groups.
I
I ||

$
i;:

'•

ft

Ml
'f.

4-31

1
'•
I

'

r
 s;

4. OPERATION
I
4-S-2-2 Selecting the menu
There is currently a screen that has over twenty menus in a single screen. However, a screen can v!,1
display only 9 menus. Therefore, screens with more than 10 menus need a menu selection menu to feed
the menu pages so that all the menus can be displayed.
m
When there are 10 to 18 menus

a Jr 1
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu iÿMeny 4 Menu 5 Menu syMenu 7 Menu 8 MENU
I;

Press the menu key

E MENU
> i Feeds the page.

9
.Menu 10
Y Y MENU
1

Press the menu key MENU y Feeds the page.

;;

When there are 19 to 27 menus

I
I;

i. Menu 1 Menu 2
Y Y MENU

Press the menu key

E MENU
> I
Feeds the page.

.Menu 10
Y Y MENU

I Pressthe menu key

I MENU )
1
Feeds the page.

Y
Menu 19
Y Y MENU

• n

’
Press the menu key
E MENU
> page.

1
1®'

I r:
&

4-32
V
d
 • :
’
4. OPERATION
j?

4-3-2-3 Selecting the screens

I
:
In this machine, the display screens are grouped according to the functions and objects, to make screen
selection from more than 70 display screens efficient.
Operate as follows, to display the desired screen.
1) Find the group where the desired screen belongs to, using the list of screens (4-2-2).
2) Press the screen control function, operation mode, program check mode keys to select the group
)
where the desired screen belongs to.
V
The previously selected screen in the group appears. ;v
3) Find the name of the desired screen from the menu, and press the corresponding menu key to
display the desired screen. «_

If the name of the desired screen cannot be found on the first menu, press the menu key ) MENU
) f1
until the desired screen name appears. Then, press the menu key corresponding to the desired
screen.
1

; :

4-33

f
; }

|;
 I
;

i 4. OPERATION

Example) How to display the "common variable 1" screen

1)
TOOLTIP
OFS. OFFSET TOOL DATA

ft E TIP -OFS )E T-DATA ) Find the group from the list of screens.

MENU ) 1
4}
COMMON COMMON
VARIABLE t VARIABLE 2

COM-V.1 )E COM-V.2 ) I
:

j |
i
• -

: 2) Press the OFS. key. To select the screen group.

Previously selected screen (tool data screen) The screen in the same L
screen group is displayed.
TIP -OFS MENU

: i

3) Press the MENU key. To feed the menu page. I

15
Previously selected screen (tool data screen)

The menu display alone changes. V'

COM-V.1 COM-V.2

Press the -
COM V.1 ) key. Select the desired screen.
!:
Common variable 1 screen u ;
: COM-V.l 1 Display the desired screen.
////////////>J COM-V.2
1
'

I :) I
;
I
i.
;
1: i"

$ 1
4-34
1
 4. OPERATION

4-B-2-4 Selecting the operation

Select the screen to perform the desired operation, in the same way as the screen selection described in
;;
4-S-2-3. Monitor the menu to press the menu key of the desired operation.

Example Howto register a machining data into the memory

;
i-
1
I (Program selection)
Press the O key. To select the screen group.

The previously selected screen

(operation search screen) The screen in the same screen group is displayed. i;
I
£ SEARCH
w//y////// a MC-DATA

:
;
Press the MC-DATA ) key. To select the desired screen.

Machining data setting screen

I
SEARCH 7, MC-DATA
///////////
T-PATT
Y RESIST
Y
Press the RESIST \ key. To select the desired operation.
(The machining data is registered in the memory.)

.1;

t:

:.
4-35 y.
!

V
1
:

¥;
 i

i
;
:

4. OPERATION

4-3-2-S Selecting other groups

m
There is a menu that allows selection of another screen from a screen group, and then returning to the
original screen by pressing the menu key.
The setting and editing expansion functions are included in this menu. The setting screen group is I
i
used to set drawing data for the simulation. This group can be called from program selection, editing,
and simulation. The editing expansion screen group is used to reinforce the editing function under
I
1
the program check mode. This group can be called from check-on machine and simulation. f
I
'i.
Press the FIN
Jkey to return to the original screen,if moved to other group.
Example) Howto move the setting screen while selecting simulation, and then to return to the
V
simulation screen :S.
v;
Simulation screen i
START STOP RESET SIMU-SET MENU

Press the SIMU-SET key. The other group screen is displayed.

is
Simulationsetting screen

T-COM TOOL-BIT BACK-SP.

Y TOOL-BIT FIN :

Press the FIN

) key. The display returns to the original screen.

Simulation screen

START STOP RESET SIMU-SET MENU

I
:r

4-36 :
 t
if.
4. OPERATION

4-3-3 Page Keys

One set of page key is found at the left and right ends of the menu keys below the display screen. The
i page keys are used to feed the screen pages when the screen has multiplepages.
1
Display screen
III
Y Y
DDDDDDDDD
i Previous page key Next page key 1

4-3-3-1 Next page key

The next page key is at the right end of the menu keys. Press this key to display the next page. When
the screen displays the final page, nothing happens by pressing this key.
Example When the screen is structured of 3 pages

Page 1 LZ£> Page 2 -

I Page 3 ] I- | Page 3

Press the NEXT Press the NEXT Press the NEXT

PAGE key PAGE key PAGE key

4-3-S-2 Previous page key

The previous page key is at the left end of the menu keys. Press this key to display the previous page.
When the screen displays the first page, nothing happens by pressing this key.

Example When the screen is structured of 3 pages

Page 3 I—_ÿ> | Page 2 [_£> | Page 1 L

—£> Page 1

Press the PREVIOUS Press the PREVIOUS Press the PREVIOUS

PAGE key PAGE key PAGE key
X.

:,!:ÿ!

3
4*37
s!.
s
!

|
!
r

4. OPERATION

4-3-4 Data Setting

4-3-4-1 Data setting procedure
When a display screen requiring data input is selected, a setting field parentheses appears at the lower
right data setting section.
The setting field is structured by the data number field and the data field. The data number field will
not appear if a single data is required on the displayed screen. As many data fields as required by a
single data number appear on the screen.
Example How to change the machining length in the machining data to 15 mm
Choose the "MACHINING DATA INPUT" screen.

[MACHINING DATA INPUT]

7 l
PIPE I.D. 8.00MM
8 MACH. LENGTH 16.00MM I
9 P1ECES/1CHK 1P
Cursor The cursor appears on the right end of ,
the first setting field parentheses.
#( )( )
5
i
Press the alphanumeric key •

#{
0» Data number "8" is entered.

Press the cursor key

0
#( 8 )( The cursor moves to the data field. 1
Press the alphanumeric keys
(ZHE1
It isentered as; #( 8 )( 1
0 ) 18
£

| j
Press the INPUT key.

[MACHINING DATA INPUT]

1
II
7 PIPE I.D. 8.00MM
8 The data is set, and display changes to
MACH. LENGTH 15.00MM "15“.
9 PIECES/1CHK Ip
!ÿ
The data number is automatically I
#( 9>< > incremented by 1, and the cursor moves
it
ft ft to the right end of the next setting field
parentheses.

The above completed the editing, and the machining length data of data No. 8 is changed to
i
i
"15 mm“.

-
m
4-38
I
 4. OPERATION

4-S-4-2 Editing the setting column

The data input in the setting column can be edited.
1) Cursor move .

11
Press the cursor key
0 to move the cursor 1 character to the right.

20)( 1 0 0 0 )
.

#( 1 1ÿ]3 )( 1 0 0 0 ) #( 1

#{ 1 2 3 )( 1 0 00)
#( 1
20X 1 °00>

Press the cursor key

0 to move the cursor 1 character to the left

I #( 1 2 3 )(
100 0) #(1 2 3)([l]0 0 0 )
#(123 ){[T|o 0 0 ) #{ 1 20)( 1 0 0 0 )

Press the tab key

0 to move the cursor to the right end of the next parentheses.

00)
#(
103 )( 1000) #( 1 2 3 )( 1 0

#( 8 0 0 ) ( 1 000) (0 0 ) #( 8 00) ( 1 0 0 0 )( 1 0)

Press the tab key

0 to move the cursor to the right end of the previous parentheses.

#( 1 2 3 )( 1 cjÿoj 0 ) #( 1 20| ( 1 0 0 0 )
#(
800 )( 1 0 0 0 )( 1 0 ) #( 8 0 0 ) ( 1 000)( >0)
.
2) Insertion
Characters can be inserted in front of the position of the cursor.
Move the cursor to where the data is to be inserted.

I
I
#( 1
#>
Press the
|INSERT| key.

#( 1 2
05 ) A space is inserted at the position of insertion.

Press the 3 key.

1
#(1 23
05 ) "3" is inserted, and it waits for the next character to be inserted.

| |
Press the INPUT key. The space is erased, and data "12345“ is set.

4-39

%
\
k

.
 : ;

4. OPERATION

3) Deletion
a. To delete the character at the position of the cursor.
Move the cursor to where the character is to be deleted.

#( 1 2ÿ3 4 5 ) tit
Press the
jpELETij key.

#( 1 [2J3 4 5) One character is deleted, and the space is right-justified.

b. To delete all data in the parentheses at the position of the cursor.

Move the cursor to the setting field to be deleted.

#{ 1 ojojx 1 0 0 0 )
Press the | CCAN | key*

#( [])( 1 0 0 0) All data in the parentheses are deleted.

c. To delete all data in all parentheses.

#( 8 0 0 )( 1 0 o[o|)( 10)

| |
Press the SHIFT key.

:
Press the
;

:: #( )( []>( ) Ail data in the parentheses are deleted.

1
Note) In the variable screens (common variable 1, common variable 2, local variable,

1 custom variable) and the machining data screen, all data displayed on the screen are
1
\ deleted along with the data in the setting field.
If the data of the entire screen is deleted by mistake, the data still remains in the
I memory if the INPUT key is still not pressed. Move to another screen, and return to
%
I
the variable screen etc. , and all the deleted data return to the screen. However, the :
!i
1 data in the setting field is deleted. m
1!
§11

ii
I

4-40
1
 I 1

i 4-3-4-3 Omitting the setting data

4. OPERATION

\
1
I When there are two or more setting fields of a data, inputting data only of the field to be changed and
setting the data, leaving data of the other field(s) as is, causes the data-input field alone to be
overwritten, leaving the data of the other field(s) as is. f
t
Example of the offset wear data
1
[TOOL TIP OFFSET]

#1: INC. #A : ABS.

<X> <Z> <R>
#1 0.000 0.000 0.000

1 2
3

;
#()()()( )
.

Change the value of #1 <Z> aloneto "1.000".

#( D< x ig>< ) Input in the field to be changed alone.

l
| |
Press the INPUT key.

<X> <Z> <R>

#1 0.000 1.000 0.000 The data of Z alone is changed.
i

Note) The setting method using the setting section differs in each screen. There are also
screens with special use. Always refer to the descriptions of each screen for details
(Appendix "Functions of each Screen" and "NC Unit Operator's Manual").

!
:
I;
V

sI
1

4-41

f
h

i;J
i
 i

4. OPRERATION

4-3-5 Manual Operation

'

C 4-3-5-1 Rapid jog feed )

OPERATIONMODE
I (Jogging)
The operation mode can be switched under the reset
status.
Note)
i
Press the

I
r [m[ lights
) I
CRT
POSITION screen ) I
Press the rapid feed button on Example
the lower left and right, while
%
pressing the jog button of the
move direction [vv| and jxj]
Note) A reset status is a status in which automatic operation is held in an emergency stop status €
caused by pressing the reset button or by the emergency stop or servo alarms.
1
:

>
6
r

V,

%
\\
, •:

.....

. !'; |i.:

i;l !

5
;
4-42
 I
.
'
4. OPRERATION

! -
i;

V'

C 4-3-S-2 Low-speed jog feed ) :

IS
I 1
OPERATION MODE

(Jogging)
Press the mkey

I
\j\J\j\j lights

CRT
'i-
POSITION screen
m{j

Select the speed by the feedrate

override switch

Press the jog button of the move

direction
If
:

i
I
1
i
*
S' ;

1
I
'

S':
.i

4-43

1.

1
f V
5 j

I
1 ! 1
 1

i
:

A. OPRERATION

As this machine is equipped of the absolute position detection function, there is normally no need for
1
zero point return. However, dog type zero point return must be performed only when the absolute
position recovery warning of the servo alarm is given.

C 4-3-S-3 X axis zero point return )

OPERATION MODE i
! (Jogging)
£ Press the

I
:
.
C [m lights
) ,\V
CRT
POSITION screen i
:

Move to a point within 20 to 30 mm inside the tool |jjj|

Jog the X axis
change point.
CRT DISPLAY

Press the PRA. key

I
r'.

1
:
CRT
C PRA. lights

One PARAMETER screen

)
The previously selected screen of the "parameter" ...

screen group appears.

Menu 4- I
Press MENU ) MENU

E )E )
o
Press the MENU key till "PLC-SW” appears on the
1

menu.
(There is no need to press this key if the “ PLC-SW” is
displayed in the beginning.)
Menu

E
Press PLC-SW ) PLC-SW CONTROL AXIS

I E )EZDEZD i
To next page o
[: There is no need to press this key if the "PLC-SW" is
displayed in the beginning. ]
4-44
I
 4. OPRERATION

From previous page 17 (j) ZERO RETURN

CRT i 18

19 <j) Xj AXIS ZERO

IS PLC SWITCH screen
H 20 (j) Zi AXIS ZERO
I
a
Setting T
h
Press 1 7 INPUT Enter #( 1 7 ) in the setting field.

1:
%
cCRT
The error lamp flashes

I
J ; :

PLC SWITCH screen

17 (I) ZERO RETURN ::

J The zero point return mode switch turns on and the

color turns yellow. 4
Keep on pressing the - X key Keep on pressing the
point return. 0 key for Xi axis zero

I& Keep on pressing the

0 key for X2 axis zero
point return.
in
CRT
I& PLC SWITCH screen
18 (j) Xt AXIS ZERO
ft 21 (j) X2 AXIS ZERO
Note) No switch is used here, so the switch does
8 not turn on.

Release the -X key when the X1 axis The color of the Xi axis zero indicator
zero point return is completed turns yellow, to indicate that the zero
point return is completed.
X2 axis The color of the X2 axis zero indicator

Setting I 7
turns yellow, to indicate that the zero
point return is completed.

1
Press INPUT 17 (j) ZERO RETURN

c
i
The zero point return mode turns off and
The error lamp turns off
J the color changes to light blue.
V

Note) Operation other than the zero point return v

CRT operation cannot be done unless the zero 1
( PLC SWITCH screen
point return mode is turned off. Be sure to
turn off the mode after completing the zero
point return.

5-

4-45
t 1
M

i
 '

:
;

4. OPRERATION

I c 4-3-S-4 Y axis zero point return

)
Y axis mode ON (G210) is executed in the MDL
1
I See 4-S-6-5

OPERATION MODE
I (Jogging)
:
|
Press the

CRT
C [m]
7
lights
)
POSITION screen
;

Jog the Y axis Y axis moves near to the center.

CRT DISPLAY
it
Press the [ | key
PRA-

lights

CRT f The previously selected screen of the "parameter" !!

One PARAMETER screen
screen group appears. %
%
Menu 4?
.
1
Press MENU ) MENU

Ti
1) )E )
o
V'j. Press the MENU key till “PLC-SW" appears on the
i menu. m
(There is no need to press this key if the "PLC-SW" is
displayed in the beginning.)
m
Menu
A
j;:
.
Press
H PLC-SW ) PLC-SW CONTROL AXIS

!'
;; i )EZDEZD 1
To next page
I
I,;; t
There is no need to press this key if the "PIC SWITCH
screen" is displayed in the beginning. ] '

1
| ?!
II
;§
4-46
I
 j

4. OPRERATIOM
\

iii
I
:
From previous page S'.

CRT i \
17

18
(j)
<?
ZERO RETURN

.I PLC SWITCH screen

/ 19 (J) Xi AXIS ZERO
V:
'ÿ Setting T * (Indicated in light blue)
Press 1 7 INPUT Enter #(17) in the setting field.

CRT. I
( PLC SWITCH screen 17 (f) ZERO RETURN

The zero point return mode switch turns on and the

color turns yellow.

Keep depressing both

[rn|andp] keys

CRT I ;

( PLC SWITCH screen 23 (j) Y2 AXIS ZERO

Note) No switch is used here, so the switch does
:

not turn on.

’! I
Release the -Z key as the zero Y2 axis absolute zero point will be displayed in
point return is completed yellow telling the zero point return is complete.
1 is

I Setting
;
I Press 1 7 INPUT
17 <j) ZERO RETURN

m The zero point return mode turns off and the color

CRT i changes to light blue.

Note) Operation other than the zero point
:

3
PLC SWITCH screen
) return operation cannot be done unless
the zero point return mode is turned off.
Be sure to turn off the mode after
completing the zero point return.
:

;
I

4-47

:ÿ

i
 ;

4. OPERATION

I
c 4-3-S-5 Z axis zero point return
)
|:
OPERATION MODE Vlij

%
Press the m]key
{Jogging)

!';i;

CRT
( |m| lights
)
POSITION screen
i
T
Jog the Z axis Move to a position; |
about 100 mm from the guide bushing (Zi axis)
about 100 mm from the guide bushing (I2 axis)
CRT DISPLAY
about 300 mm from the guide bushing (Z3 axis)

Press the | |
PRA- key

(
CRT /
H* lights
)
The previously selected screen of the "parameter"
One PARAMETER screen screen group appears. 1
Menu 4
Press MENU ) MENU

)H )
o
Press the MENU keytill "PLC-SW" appears on the
menu.
(There is no need to press this key if the “PLC-SW" is
displayed in the beginning.)
Menu

Press PLC-SW ) PLC-SW CONTROL AXIS

)D ;
T
To next page
D
o
)
There is no need to press this key if the “PLC SWITCH
screen" is displayed in the beginning. 3
f

31
4-48
 4. OPERATION

From previous page

CRT. I 17 <j)
18 <j)
ZERO RETURN

XT AXIS ZERO
'ÿ

PLC SWITCH screen

19 <J) X, AXIS ZERO
Setting T (Indicated in light blue)

Press 1 7 INPUT Enter #(17) in the setting field.

1 CRT T
PLC SWITCH screen 17 (I) ZERO RETURN

...
The zero point return mode switch turns on and the
color turns yellow.

Keep on pressing the - Z key Keep on pressing the

point return. 0 key for Z1 axis zero

Keep on pressing the ZL key for Z2 axis zero i

l point return. -
' '
l
Keep on pressing the ZlL key for Z3 axis zero
CRT
point return. L
-1
(j) i
PLC SWITCH screen
) 19 ZT AXIS ZERO

1
I
Release the -Z key as the zero
22 (j)
24 (j)
Z2 AXIS ZERO
Z3 AXIS ZERO
I point return is completed Note) No switch is used here, so the switch does
.1 not turn on.
Setting 4 Z1 axis The color of the Zi AXIS ZERO indicator
turns yellow, to indicate that the zero
Press 1 7 INPUT
point return is completed.
I2 axis The color of the Z2 AXIS ZERO indicator
turns yellow, to indicate that the zero
point return is completed.
Z3 axis The color of the Z3 AXIS ZERO indicator
:.SV turns yellow, to indicate that the zero
point return is completed.
u CRT
N 17 (j) ZERO RETURN
i,
PLC SWITCH screen
y The zero point return mode turns off and the color
changes to light blue.
I Note) Operation other than the zero point return
operation cannot be done unless the zero
point return mode isturned off. Be sure to
% turn off the mode after completing the zero
point return.
i;

:
4-49

;
 :

4. OPERATION

4-3-6 MDI Operation

4-3-6-1 Terminology
The following are some terms used to describe the MDI operation.

; Line This machine uses 7 axes (the Xi, X2, Z1, Zj, Z3, Y2, , and Os, axes) for machining. The six I
;
axes can be grouped into three groups, and a program can be written for each group, to
execute the programs simultaneously. The groups are called Lines.
In normal operation, the combination of axes commanded by each Line can be changed for
the machining.
$1 : Represents Line 1
$2 : Represents Line 2
1
$3 : Represents Line 3

Process Machiningdone with a single tool is normally called a process.

i
Queuing The programs of each Line are executed independently, without any connection with other 1
Lines. If, for instance, the process of the 2nd Line is to be started immediately after the
process of the 1st Line is completed, the timing to start the 2nd process must be adjusted. V

;
This adjustment is called the queuing. See "5. PROGRAMMING" for details.

I liV

fl

i!..:
i

4-50
i'
 4. OPERATION

4-3-6-2 Specifications of MDI operation

The comxnandable axes of each Line are as shownin the tablebelow .

Line Possessing axes

1.
I
$1 XuZv*
$2 x2,z2,Y2

( $3 Z2
Note) The command that changes the relation of the axes is ignored inMDI operation.
{
ip

Execution of the MDI operation

Execution of the program input via the MDI is performed only by the displayed Line. It cannot be
executed simultaneously with other Lines.
Thisis why the queuingcommandis ignored.
!ÿ

Change of the Line h|

$-SEL
Press to switch display and execution line. I
The selectedLine changes as $T - $2
*ÿ
-* $3 -* $1-* $2.

£
4-S-6-3 MDi operation mode

1) Single line input/execution mode When menu 4 is selected.

1 A single block can be input. The program is erased after execution. §1

1:1LN 2+ :1LN 2+ : 2+ LN :

MENU4 MENUS MENU6

2) Multi-line input/single line executionmode .. When menu 5 is selected.

Up to 17 blocks can be input. The program is stored after execution.
Execution is done block by block.

1:1LN 2+ :1LN 2+ : 2+ LN
MENU4 MENU5 MENUS

3) Multi-line input/execution mode When menu 6 is selected.

Up to 17 blocks can be input. The program is stored after execution.
Execution is done to the final block.

1:1LN 2+ :1LN 2+ : 2+ LN

5 MENU4 MENUS MENUS

4-51

ffl

::
;
?,T

v'

I
4. OPERATION

u
4-3-6-4 Editing MDI programs
a Program up to 17 blocks per Line is input and executed under the MDI operation, when continuous I
a
execution is selected. (The capacity becomes smaller if the program includes blocks with 2 or more
lines.) The input programs can be edited as follows. s
1
c
CRT.
1-character input
) c
CRT
1-character modification
ft
lit

1
A B | j\_ cursor ) ( A0C ) I
I
Press the c k6y Press the key
AND 2

1 CRT CRT 1
The display becomes ABC
) The display becomes A 2 C
) I
1

C 1-character insertion
) C 1-character deletion
) m
i

CRT T CRT -4’'

C *0° ) ( *0 C D 1
il
lm
it Press the INSERT key Press the DEL. key i
11
i
CRT CRT
The display becomes A B C The display becomes A C D ) 1:
It
I
IS
i 11
in
4
CRT,
Press the SIN
kSy
1
11
The display becomes A p[ | B C iIf
III

I
s

Insertion can be repeated.

Press the key
!
INPUT
I
I
it. CRT
The display becomes A D B C
-
111!

I
4-52 tf&
11
 I

4. OPERATION

;
c
CRT
Single block deletion

T
)
A A A A A;
MB B;
CCCCC ;

l ;
Press the C.B. key
CAN

l CRT
V1,
The display A A A AA;
becomes U
CCCCC;
l#.:

i
i C 1-screen deletion
)
cny- T
A A A A A;
B B B;
Jcjc C C C ;
if! D
I
!
J
I Press the SHIFT and CB.
keys
CAN

:
CRT l if
The display :

becomes

I The above editing operation can be done on the MDI program. Editing can be done when inputting the
MDIprogram, after the MDI setting, and after completing the MDI operation.

4-53
L"
|l|

If
!

; a
 ;

i
4. OPERATION

i
c 4-3-6-5 MDI operation

OPERATION MODE
) Note) When the previous program still remains, erase all
the blocks by sequentially pressing;

Q [ÿj 0
!
|

[®]key (MDI)

I
Press the

i
C
CRT/
ID] lights ) [MDI]
$1 (Xlf Y-|, Z-j)
MDI screen
I
Menu 4 Cursor

Press S-SELECT ) Select the Line for the MDI operation

CRT 4
i;
.
;

:
MDI screen Selected Line
) [MDI]
$2(X2,Z2,A2)
I
:
'
1 : 1 LN
enu Menu 2 + : 1 LN Menu 2 + : 2 + LN
Press 1 : 1 LN ) Press 2 + : 1 LN ) Press 2+ :2+ LN )
: CRT 7 The 1
: 1 LN indicator \CRT
turns yellow
c The 2 + : 1 LN
indicator turns yellow
XCRTZ The 2+ : 2+ LN
indicator turns yellow
/ \
1
:

Input 1 block Input and edit up to 17 Input and edit up to 17 V

blocks of program blocks of program I

rr j
J

Sets the MDI into the operation memory, to enable

Press the INPUT key the execution.

CRT
( [SETTING COMPLETE] is
displayed on the key
\ operation message section
1
1
1

AUTO I
Press the m (Start)
key

I 4
To next page

4-54
.
 1
|
r 4. OPERATION
111
1
, i

i
I From previous page

1
K:*
C CD
i
Single block execution

(Start)
lights ) CM
i(Start)
lights
2+ : 2+ LN

)
,
If The MDi program is executed in The MDi program blocks are
1 block. executed continuously
|! CRT CRT
1 RUNNING" is displayed on “RUNNING" is displayed on
the key operation message the key operation message
section. section

l I
End of execution of the final
End of single block execution block

I
CRTC 1 11 turns off

The MDI program is erased.

) CRT C M turns off

“NO SETTING DATA" is

)
“NO SETTING DATA" is displayed on the key
displayed on the key operation message section
operation message section.

Note) When the program is executed in a single block, the MDI program of the executed circuit is
f'! erased after execution. When it is executed continuously, the program on the screen remains
fv after execution. '
Repeat from pressing the | |
INPUT key to re-execute this program. Repeat from the inputting
and editing the program to change the displayed program to another program.

After completing the continuously execution, press the 1: 1 LN ) key to change the
execution of single block execution; allblocks of the program remaining on the screen will be
erased.
1
:ÿ

.'i,

/; V

,(]

vi-'

4-55

:
 :

4. OPERATION

1
1

c 4-3-G-6 C axis selection and C axis zero point return

4
)
See 4-3-6-S Select the “MDi“ screen.
; IS
4
CRT,
MDI screen

4
Press M G H
IF 7 4 SP ATN 2 8 SP
SQRT 1 SP

M ;/
IF 1 8 EOB

CRT l
M74 G28 H1 M18;

4
D i
Press the INPUT key i

CRT 4
SETTING COMPLETE
1
AUTO I
[®] Press the
(Start)
key

4
(151 lights )
Select and execute the C axis.
Perform C axis zero point return.

I
( 1, i1 turns off ) C axis zero point return is completed.
1
*
.

If the C axis is already selected, the C axis zero point return can be done by commanding
“G28H1;“. M20; resettheC axis selection.

4-56 I
1
 4. OPERATION

c 4-3-6-7 Axis move command

T
Note) Always check before performsng the axis move,
that the axes do not interfere. ]
*:

See 4-S-6-5
Select the "MDl" screen.
;§;i: Line 1 Possessing axes
l CRT
& [MDI] ['

1
e,
NIDI screen
$1 (XÿZnC|)
I
H j
11
I G X
!
Press
ATN
0 0 SP i 1 0 <r
5 SP

z 2 1 4 ;/
K EOB I

CRT 4 i
[MDI]
GOO X10.5 Z21.4 ; |
SKXÿZt.C,)
GOO X10.5 Z21.4;
' ;
Press the INPUT key
K
CRT T
SETTING COMPLETE
!

I
t AUTO I
Press the [CQjkey (Start)

1
cm
;-i'

I
1
lights ) The axes possessed by the selected Line move.
:
£ The Xi and Zi axes move
I
4
I
am turns off
) End of Xi and Zÿ axes move

4-57

i
i
V
s
-
i
i

I
 .

l
:v
:

4. OPERATION

Spindierotatioÿ commandÿ J1 Note) Check the materia! and open/close status of the
chuck before rotating the spindle. ] m
t'j B
See 4-3-6-5 Seiectthe “MD!" screen.
1

I CRT, '"4:
v:'

MD1 screen ,j

I
S
Press NE 1 # 1 0 0 0 SP

M if
IF 0 3 EOB
1

;
CRT,

S1 = 1000 M03; S1 = 1000 Sets the spindle speed at 1000 revolutions per
minute (r.p.m)
M03 Commands start of forward rotation of the
. spindle.

Press the INPUT key

SETTING COMPLETE 11

AUTO I ;'S

i;
Press the m (Start)
key

I
c 03 lights

The spindle rotates to the

forward direction
)
4
c 111 turns off )
1

<ÿ.
,

1
4-58
1 I
 I $
ft; ft
4. OPERATION

4-3-6-9 List of spindle rotation commands

1
1 Commanded spindle Forward rotation Reverse rotation Stop
command command
i
Spindle S1n ] M03 si = r ] M04 M05;
I Back spindle S2=[ ] M23 S2 = ] M24 M25;
ft
S3 = ] M80 S3=[ 1 M81 M82;
I Turret No. 1 toot spindle

] M83 ] M84
Turret No. 2 tool spindle S4=[ S4 = M85;
!
ftft 1 represents the commanded speed.)
ft:
I Example
St = 1000 M03; The spindle rotates to the forward directionin 1000 r.p.m.
GOO XI0.5 Z21.4; The axes move.
M04; The spindle rotates to the reverse direction in 1000 r.p.m.

I SI = 2000;
M05;
The spindle speed becomes 2000 r.p.m. (still reverse rotation).
The spindle stops.
I
I As in the above example, once the S command is given, the forward and reverse rotations can be
ft commanded by the M code alone. The speed can be changed during rotation, by the S command
j.

ft

I ft
alone.

Spindle speed command $1 Spindle E16 200 to 10,000 r.p.m. :

I
1 Command range;
E20 180 to 8,000 r.p.m.
i
ft E25 150 to 7,000 r.p.m. :

ft E32 130 to 6,000 r.p.m.

I S2 Back spindle El6 200 to 6,000 r.p.m.
!

£
?h
E20 200 to 6,000 r.p.m.

1
I
E25
E32
150 to 5,000
150 to 5,000
r.p.m.
r.p.m.
r
f

ft
S3, S4 Rotary tool spindle E16 300 to 5,840 r.p.m.
ft
'ft- E20 300 to 5,840 r.p.m.
;i
ft E25 225 to 4,460 r.p.m.
ft E32 225 to 4,460 r.p.m.
I
I
4-59

V S'
!
Siv.„

ft

;
I
l
4. OPERATION
i
I

G 4-3-6-10 Selecting the turret too! )

"l":
H
1
! No. 1 turret tool
selectable position

When selecting tools of tool

Nos. 10 to 19, 30 to 39

See 4-3-S-4
&
i
is on

..........
............
Note)
........
—.....
—
No. 2 turret tool
selectable position
is on
1 When selecting tools of tool
I NOS.20tO29,4QtO49
Tool numbers for E16/E20 are 10 to 17, 20 to 27, 30 to 37, and 40
to 47.
Select the “MDI' screen.
L
H®
M
m
a

CRT, v m
MDl screen ) i
I
Press
T
1 2 0 0 ;/ m
m:
GT EOB
I
i
CRT
T 2200 ;
)
I
:

,v;;
1
Press the INPUT key I
11
CRT
SETTING COMPLETE
Ia
1
\ tfi

16
AUTO
ll
II
t.| Press the m (Start)
key
|f
as
1! i
1 in lights Ill
1
1 The tool is selected The tool on the 12th station of the No. 1 turret is selected. 1
«
I I 1
•If
m
?! CD turns off
i
1 1
a
:

*
I
4-60
1
!
 4. OPERATION

4-3-7 Program Selection

$
1 Seizing the executionÿÿp When selecting program 0250
I
I.
OPERATiON MODE I
i (Program selection)
Press the O key

cm
CRT
lights

jone PROGRAM SELECTION screen

)
The screen that selected previously in the "program
selection" screen group appears.
C
Vl:
I
'C Menu I
1
Press SEARCH ) [Skips this step if "SEARCH'' is already displayed.]
1
c; CRT T
SEARCH screen ) O 100
PROGRAM ENTRY 6 REMAIN 58
\i
!

:
1 CHARACTER 2129 REMAIN 26500 : ;
1
$
<PROGRAM >
10
<CHR> <COMMENT>
28 TEST! '
1
20 54 TEST2
M
too 117 I
200 406
I: 250 323 ;
I
8
m
i Press 2 5 0
1 0( 2 5[o) I
I j
1 SI
I Press the INPUT key :
1
is
»;
:C'
• CRT, I Program 0250 is called as the program to be executed.

O
B O 250 250 i

I
a
m
i
j»

§
I

I 4-61

i:
 :

.......
,.....,4

11
4. OPERATION

I 4-3-7-2 Setting the machining data

The machining data is that required for machining or preparation, and can be considered almost the
same as the machining program. It is registered in the memory. The machining data other than
currently used for execution can be created and edited in the background.
1

The machining data displayed on the “MACHINING DATA INPUT” screen is effective, and used for :

machining and preparation for the operation. The explanation here will be done using the example of .

setting the execution machining data called from the memory by operation search, along with the
execution program.

c Setting the machining data

)
*
See 4-3-7-1 Cal! the program selection mode.
I
%
Menu l \
I
Press fSkipthisstepifthe screen displays the i
MC-DATA
) [jMACHINING DATA INPUT]. j £
%
CRT
MACHINING DATA INPUT screen Execution program No. V:
O 250
#
: 1 MATERIAL O.D. 0.00MM
2 POSITIONING PT. 0.00MM 1
MATERIAL O.D. +
3
o
No machining
!ÿ;

"ÿ Press 1 data is set

)
Set# CRI

i
1 to
10 ( #( D(
D
1

Press the INPUT key

O 250
CRT # k
MACHINING DATA INPUT screen
1 MATERIAL O.D. 12.00MM II!
K The setting field becomes #( 2)( ?:

I
$
IB
Menu The data number is incremented by 1.
Press REGIST ) Registers the set machining data into the memory.

..
I
f?
4-62
i
 f 4. OPERATION I :
,

1 4-3-7-3 Registering the machining data

.. There may be cases in which the material may be out of stock and substitute material with difference
outer diameter may be needed to be machined. In cases like this, the machining data registered in the
memory need not to be changed; just change the data on the display, and the change will be accepted as

v the machining data.

.
c Registering the machining data )
Select the “SEARCH1* screen.
1 See 4-3-7-1

I A
CRT/
SEARCH screen ) Machining data of 0250 is called from the memory.

:
A
See 4-3-7-2 Select the “MACHINING DATA INPUT" screen.
i:

CRT
A
MACHINING DATA INPUT The machining data setting screen registered in the
screen memory is displayed on the screen, and regarded as the
machining data.
I
See 4-3-7-2 to set the machining The set machining data is displayed on the screen, and
data regarded as the machining data. 1
$
Menu
IV'

iH Press REGIST )
1
: REGIST )
Memory
:V'.:
/MACHIN-X
t ING DATA
i
« INPUT
\ screen /
Machining data
m Machining program t
1
m
The machining data on the screen is I
registered into the memory.

Note) The machining data is changedonly by data setting andcall from the memory
(including the automatic call by operation search). The datais not changedby moving
to other screens or disconnecting the power supply and turning on the power once more.

i
i;i'

4-63
.

i
i,
i

.. r

4. OPERATION

4-B-7-4 Machining data

1. MATERIAL O.D.
The diameter of the outer circle of the material O.D. machined by the currently selected program.
1 2. POSITIONING PT.
When performing cut-off for preparation for operation, the cut-off tool is fed rapidly to this point to V

stop. This value indicates how many mm before the material the axis is to stop at, converted in
diameters. :
3. CUT-OFF TOOL
:
The number of tool used for the cut-offin preparation for the operation.
1
11
4. CUT-OFF SPEED
When cut-off is performed for preparation of operation, stopping the cut-off tool at the tool quelling
point, and re-activating automatic operation rotates the spindle in this speed.
f 5. CUT-OFF FEED (specified by per-rotation feed mm/rotation) B
I
When cut-off is performed for preparation of operation, the cut-off tool moves by this cutting
feedrate when the cut-off tool is stopped at the tool queuing point, automatic operation is re¬ If
activatedand the spindle speed reaches this speed.
6. B-SP CHK-POS.
When performing machining by chucking the workpiece on the back spindle, enter the distance
I
from the back machining work coordinate zero point to the chuck position (Spindle cap forward
end). ' 1
5
Spindle cap I
Chuck A: Back spindle chuck position I
B: Distance between cap forward end and |
chuck forward end
s
_ mmmm I
E16/20, E32
E25
9mm
12mm
I

t 1
. |I
'

i 7. PIPE l.D.
The diameter of inner circle when the materialis pipe. Set 0 for the solid pipe.
8. MACH. LENGTH
II
\
The length of material normally required to make a product.
(Product length + cut-off width + facing allowance)

9. PIECES/ 1CHK

.
The number of products machine on a single chuck.
10. WORK TAKING TOOL
The station number on the turret No. 1 where the separator of the machined product is to be placed
'*
1
j on.
: Note) Alarm occurs to disable the setting when the "MACH. LENGTH X PIECES 1 CHK"
[
I exceeds the Zi stroke.

4-64

if
I 1-
4. OPERATION

i;:
4-3-8 Preparation for Operation !

Preparation is needed before starting machining of a product. The preparation is done easily by using
the preparation functions. Jogging is also enabled during preparation. Escape axes that may interfere !

i by jogging, before moving the axes. '!

I

1 c 4-3-8-1 Moving to the return position ) i:

'

I
OPERATION MODE l f
j;

Press the [GD (Preparation)

key ;

O
CRT/
lights
) i
!

PREPARATION screen 6 RETURN POS. INCOMPLETE 1

!

J
PREPARATION

Press the 3ÿ (Return position)

4
CIS lights
)
I AUTOI
I Press the m (Start)
key
&
-4
i c CD lights

Each axis automatically returns

to the return position.
)
Return sequence : G> XT,Xj, Y2, ® Zi, Z3, ® Z2

I Set the work coordinate system

after the return is completed.
1

r: CRT/
PREPARATION screen The display changes to;
:

5: 6 RETURN POS. COMPLETE

SI
f
V
CD turns off
)
3
I S3
: ';l' ;

I
1 4-65 1
V

i
 i

4. OPERATION

Return position (in normal cases)

;

X2Z2 X2 : Tool change point

Turret No.2 : Z2 : Forward point
I Zl Z3

-B—-B Guide bushing

B-
Spindle : Return position Back spindle : Return position (machine zero point)
(machine zero point)
X1
Turret No.1 : Tool change point

I i
;

a
1
;

1
;
;
V

II
I
:
111
;

III
ft s.
!* i *
1

!
d
ii: I
I 1
I
4-66
 §

1
4. OPERATION

c4-S-8-2 Moving to the machining start position

0 I

i
;

See 4-3-8-1 Select the " PREPARATION” screen.

CRT,
PREPARATION screen 7 START POS. INCOMPLETE

PREPARATION 4 Note) Alarm occurs if the cut-off tool is not selected.

Press the
0 (Cut-off)
key Select the tool, referring to "4-3-S-4 Too!
selection".
-

C lights
)
AUTO I
Press the ti-ÿ| (Start)
key
•v

i;

V:
( til lights ) 1
i

1 Each axis automatically returns Return sequence

I to the machining start point. ® X1,X2, Y2 backward; @ Z,, Z3; ® Z2; @ X, or X2,
s
i I Y2 forward (the side of the turret with the cut-off tool
is the forward direction)
CRT
)
i

i PREPARATION screen The display changes to;

7 START POS. COMPLETE
!

I
cm turns off
)
Machining start position
[When the cut-off tool is on the No. 2 turret]

I
Turret No.2 : Cut-off end position

Zi Z2 Z3

-B8--
Spindle : Back spindle : Return position
A point (MACH. LENGTH x PIECES/1CHK)
backward
Turret No.1 : Tool change point

4-67

Vi
 /

f:

4. OPERATION

fl
Ml-3-8-3 Moving to the too! exchange point
D
See 4-3-8-1
(Example of No. 1 turret)

Select the “PREPARATION" screen.

8m ii

1
?

;; CRT
PREPARATION screen ) 5 TOOLSEL. POS. /TURRET #1
/TURRET #2
IMPOSS
IMPOSS
Itl
I
1

TOOL SET for

PREPARATION '
Is

Press the key

; lights
)
I" AUTO i
Press the m (Start)
key
i
a
i
II
11

I
m nshts j)
The turret moves to the tool :
change point
l«
ill
CRT ill

1
PREPARATION screen ) The display changes to;
5 TOOLSEL POS. /TURRET #1
/TURRET #2
POSSBL
IMPOSS
li
t
I The (l)l lamp lights
1
'•v;;

l ilt turns off

ill
When you want to move a No. 2 turret a replacement position, press follow the procedure
I f*
1
-
given above. -
s
i
1 I
I
I 111
I

A
4-68
I
| iw
 /
!

:!
I 4. OPERATION *
&
1
8 :
I
I
8
m
C 4-S-8-4 Tool selection ) I:
I
1 1 ! m
Turret No. 1 tool Turret No. 2 tool
'J selectable position ©I is on selectable position
£§)[ is on
J !.
| When selecting tools of tool
J
When selecting tools of too!
numbers 10 to 19, 30 to 39
1£
See 4-3-8-1
Note) ToolnumbersforE16/20are10to
17, 20 to 27, 30 to 37, 40 to 47.
numbers 20 to 29, 40 to 49

Select the "PREPARATION" screen.

V;i
CRT,
PREPARATION screen ) 4 TOOL POSITION /TURRET #1
/TURRET #2
T10
T25

TOOL SET for 5 TOOL SELECTION NO. T

rii' PREPARATION

1 Press the O) (Tool selection)

key
I
1 s
1 01
j
lights

ifI
1 Press keys 1 4
m
:

CRT
l
I i;,”i
The display changes to;
PREPARATION screen 5 TOOL SELECTION NO. T14
1
i:
I
AUTO T J;

1 Press the m (Start)

key
m
I :
1
1 lights

1 The too! is selected

The display changes to;

4 TOOL POSITION /TURRET #1 T14
1 l"'"l
1 turns off /TURRET #2 T25

I
i
CRT,
PREPARATION screen
5 TOOL SELECTION NO. T 1

I
1
I 4-69
,v
.
"I
I

I
!

>!
m
§5
:

’Mi
 ,

4. OPERATION

s
;r
c 4-3-8-S Cut-off machining )
'I;
J
See 4-3-8-1 Select the “PREPARATION” screen.
1
I
,v
II

III
; i.
CRT T 1
I PREPARATION screen
) 3 CUT-OFF /TOOL
/SP-SPEEDS
T11
2000 RPM i
Is /FEEDRATE 0.020 MM/R m.
i 4 TOOL POSITION /TURRET #1 T14 m
sr
Select the tool specified by the
cut-off tool number
/TURRET #2 T25
SiIll:
See 4-3-8-S

T 1
CRT n
m;:s-s
PREPARATION screen
) The display changes to;
4 TOOL POSITION /TURRET #1 T11

PREPARATION
(CUT/OFF)
op¬
press the key

T
i.
c
AUTO
Gu“

I
lights )
(Start)
Note If the cut-off tool is not at the too! exchange point,
03 key
Press the it moves first to the too! exchange point.

" T
c CD lights
Move the cut-off tool to the tool
)
Tool positioning point set in the machining data. A
1
positioning point in rapid feed
Is
sr
1
1
1
.
c CD flashes

To next page
) Completed the move to the tool positioning point. V

1
I
i
I 4-70
i
m,
I
1
1
 4. OPERATION

:?

From previous page

4
See the tool to take out material
::3
for the cut-off amount.
1
1
' 1 I

I
Press
a The coolant is supplied.
i.

i
AUTO
1 :

I Press the CD (Start)

key

1
1 I
1
.
Z' The flash of jCD jturns to a
V constant lighting J
H
A The chuck doses

m
-
%
The spindle starts rotation

When the spindle reaches the

cut-off spindle speed, the cut¬
£ off tool moves in the cut-off
feedrate

I ;

c 1 11 turns off

The spindle stops

) End of cut-off.

The cut-off tool stops at the cut-off end point (normally

4 mm). The chuck is still closed.
-
I
s
1
Note) When holding the preparation operations by pressing the 1"ol key during operation by
(Start)
f: pressing the

again.
key, the operation cannot be restarted by pressing the
m key

1
II , Press the | |
RESET key to start from the beginning.
1 if.
S V » •
i
s
u'

a 4-71

:
:

I
1
 1

4. OPERATION
;

4-3-S-6 Warming-up
:
This function can execute empty operation on setting time without MSS count-up.
}ÿ

C Warming-up
;
T Select execution program
See 4-3-7-1

CRT
*
ORT operation search screen

See 4-3-8-1 execute return position

i

See 4-3-S-2 execute start position

T
Press WARM-UP )
CRT
WARMING-UP screen
1

Press WARM-UP ) Set up setting time. Setting-up is per 15 minutes.

Press the m (Start)

key

T ;

i
c m lights
Program while selecting is
excuted, stops for 1 cycle when
)
If FIN key is pressed while operation, warming-up can be
?
I
ended.
reaching to setting time.
1
!'
Press FIN )
t
i;
PREPARATION screen

4-72

1 I
 4. OPERATION

4-3-9 Automatic Operation i

i

c
:

)
}

4-3-9-1 Starting automatic operation

I:
4r i
See 4-3-7- 1 to select the execution Select the execution program.
program.
1
CRT/" O 250 i
SEARCH screen
i

4-
See 4-3-8-1 to return position.

£ i
* See 4-3-8-2 to moving to the f

machining start position.

AUTO _
OPERATION MODE
__
OPERATION MODE
AUTO .

Press the tnu (Continuous)

Press the [@|key
(1 cycle) j

i i
c~m lights
) C fol
I
lights )
AUTO O
Press the ms?
J l

CB
CRT,
lights

PROGRAM screen
)
I
The program is executed
i-
i

Notes 1) Before initiating an automatic operation, start position procedure, following

completion of return position procedure, must be implemented in the preparation
mode. •••

2) Turn the MACHINE mode offbefore starting a continuous operation. .

4-73

>

0
 i

4. OPERATION

4-3-9-2 Single block

I :

The single block function of automatic operation can be used in the following two ways.
1) To execute 1block of the execution program and stop after execution. 11
2) To stop the program after execution of the current block, when selected during the continuous cycle
or 1-cycle automatic operation. I
If single block is selected during execution of multiple-Line program, the execution of the Line

i,
including the first completed block after selecting single block stops, and blocks of other Lines are ft8
heldin the middle.
Case 1) Case 2)
I

c Single block
) c Single block
) 1
X
See 4-3-7-1 "Selecting the During execution of continuous
execution program" cycle or 1-cycle I
8
I
CRT
SEARCH screen C M lights
) i
1
OPERATION MODE
OPERATION MODE AUTO
AUTO
(1-Block)

Press the | l (1-Block)

key
Press the

r
1
I ( H lights
D c CZjtl] or O turns off )
f AUTO I @ turns on
)
Press the [fiT key I Machine stop

c@ turns off
)
lights
) When there are held Lines.
1
CRT/
PROGRAM screen
] Tot (HOLD) lights
I
1 block of the program is
executed J
: Same in case 1).

c
Machine stop

1 I1 turns off
3 Note) Selection of continuous cycle, 1 cycle and
1 block of automatic operation can also
be done during the execution. Switch to
1
1 cycle during execution of the program
under continuous cycle, and the machine
can be stopped after executing 1 cycle.
1
i:
i
4-74
 ,ji

4. OPERATION

( 4-3-9-3 Holding automatic operation ) (feed hold)

|
;

During automatic operation

1
1
i;
C TTl is on )
AUTO
(Hold)
Press the BB key
Machine stop

( fol lights
)
Si; c 4-3-9-4 Restarting automatic
operation after hold ) C 4-S-9-4 Restarting automatic
operation after stop )
ii

C 10l * (HOLD) is on
C fol (1 BLOCK) is on
)
AUTO I The machine is stopping

1 Press the 1 jI key

(Start) OPERATION MODE
AUTO i Continuous) (1 cycle)
Omit this step
i when

I
) tol|keyor jfoljkey continuously j

%
C 03 lights

Execution of the program AUTO

Press the

l
executing
single block.

restarts
(Start)
Press the &e,

1
4 ( m lights

Execution of the program

)
restarts

4
*
B

I I
a
I 4-75

| ft
1
4
4
'V.V
I
I
1
I
Ilf
 :

4. OPERATION

4-3-9-5 Feedrate override

The same feedrate override is commanded on both cutting feed and rapid feed.
•
i'

soy
50 /
Feedrate override

70
80
#
*>JC0J1Q 120130
%
% 140
% 150
100%
0%
200 %
.....
..... The commanded feedrate
No move
Twice the commanded feedrate
1
si
is

«•
30
t 160
I170
Note)

\ #
20 \ 0 180
10 \ £ 190
0 200
%

Note) In machining using multiple Lines, setting the feedrate override at 100 % or more causes the
feedrate to exceed the maximum move speed at rapid feed, to clamp the speed. The speed
clamp may cause the machining timing to be shifted, and the product programmed in the
'I v'1-
machiningprogram may not be manufactured. Therefore, the feedrate override is effective up
to 100%; if specified 100 to 200 %, 100% willbe set as the override.
i
In machining that does not need to worry about the above timing, the "27 (j)
OVR. LIMIT
OFF" switch on the PLC switch can be turned on (see 4-S-5-3), to enable overrides up to 200 % I
on the cutting feedrate alone. More than 100 % override commanded on the rapid feed will all
be clamped at 100 %. I
The jogging speed can be adjusted by the feed override switch. The following are some typical
standard feedrates.
1
v

Feedrate
Low speed Rapid feed
Scale X axis Y axis Z axis Xaxis Yaxis Zaxis
0 0 0 0 0
30 2 3,600 3,000 4,800

:
60 14 7,200 6,000 9,600

100 200 12,000 10,000 16,000

130 520 12,000 10,000 16,000
!
160 1,400 12,000 10,000 16,000
1
't 200 5,200 12,000 10,000 16,000
(Unit : mm/min)

4-76
=;
 4. OPERATION

c 4-S-9-6 Settsng the counter

CRT DISPLAY i
)
1 Press the OFS. key

i
1
c
CRT
OFS. lights

One offset screen

)
The previously selected screen in the “offset” screen group
is displayed.

Menu I
Press ) COUNTER ) When the COUNTER
ykey cannot be found in the menu l:

Press the
appears.
) MENU
\ key till the COUNTER ) key
;
COUNTER screen O 250 :

#1 RUNNING TIME 10H12M34s

CYCLE TIME M S
MACHINING TIME M S
99 TOTAL QUANTITY 10000000p
2 REQUIRED [1] p :

3 MACHINED [1] p

Press 2 0 0 0

CRT 4
Refer to 4-3-4-2 "Editing the setting column”, to correct
#( 2 ) ( 10 o[o]) J the input data.
i
V J Set 1000 pcs as the required parts.
Press the SNPUT key |
CRT T
f #2 REQUIRED [1] 1000PCs
COUNTER screen
The maximum setting count is 32,000.

I
To next page

4-77

!;V

i
1
 ;
:

4. OPERATION

From previous page

4r
Press 3 4H 0

CRT
If there are machined parts, input the number.
#{ 3)(
0’
Press the INPUT | key
Set 0.

CRT

COUNTER screen #2 REQUIRED f1] tOOOp

3 MACHINED[1] Op

J
Press 1

l
#{1)(0)H(0)M(0)S If already operating for machining, enter the time.

Press the INPUT key Set 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds.

#1 RUNNING TIME OH 0M 0S

COUNTER screen 2 REQUIRED 11] 1000P

i
3 MACHINED HI Op

Notes)
REQUIRED: 4 pairs of number of required parts andnumber of machined parts are prepared.
Alarm occurs to stop the machine if the number of machined parts and number
of required parts of the same number match.
Press | | to reset the alarm.
RESET

If automatic power offis input, the machine stops and the power turns off.
When "0" is set, the number of machined parts is not counted.
MACHINED : When M56 is commanded after a part is machined, each number of machined
parts [1] to [4] is incremented by 1. When the count corresponds with the

t
number of required parts to cause alarm and stop the machine, press
to make the corresponding number of machined parts alone "0".
|RESET|
RUNNING TIME :The operation time of automatic operation is accumulated.

4-78
 4. OPERATION
'

i
;ÿ 4-3-10 Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Amount i

< When the tool offset number is specified by the tool command (T command), compensation is done using
I
&
the "TOOL TIP OFFSET" including the tool nose wear set for each used tool, and the "TOOL DATA"
including the tool length of each used tool.
The "TOOL TIP OFFSET" screen and the "TOOL DATA" screen are both structured by multiple pages.
If the number of the data to be set or checked is not on the screen, press the page keys to display the

*
I desired number.

Green l
IklCD ODOODDD
CRT
Green

Page key Menu keys Page key

Displays the previous page. Displays the next
page

| C 4-3-10-1 Setting the incremental TOOL TIP OFFSET

) When data No. 31 is set.
CRT DISPLAY

Press the OFS. key

c
CRT,
OFS. lights

One offset screen

)
The previously selected screen of the "offset" screen group
appears.

Menu I
Press TIP-OFS ) ( Skip this step when the "TOOL TIP OFFSET" screen is
displayed. )
CRT I [WEAR DATA]
TOOL TIP OFFSET screen (page 1) #l : INC #A : ABS.
<X> <Z> <R>

1
Page key 4 #1
2
-0.005
0.000
- 0.000
0.005 0.002
0.000
Press the (next page) key
{WEAR DATA]

I CRT #1: INC. #A : ABS.

TOOL TIP OFFSET screen (page 2)
<X> <z> <R>
#31 -0.010 -0.005 0.005
4
To next page
32

M!
ii

4-79

;
 :

4. OPERATION

From previous page

4
Press the SHIFT
X
, keys
When the color of ”#I: INC/1 is yellow and the mode is the'
incremental setting mode, skip the next four steps.

4
CRT/-
#(
0 [#< 0 (){)()
4
The incremental setting mode is called.
Press the INPUT key 1
1
I
I
CRT
( TOOL TIP OFFSET screen
The color of
#1: INC. turns yellow.
4
Adding a decimal point makes the unit milli¬
Press 3 2 meter; without the decimal point, the unit is
micron. I
4
CRT/-
# (3 1 ) ( -0) # (3 1 ) ( -QH )( )
• I'

4 The data of the field where the setting data is omitted,

Press the INPUT key remains unchanged.
The <X> field alone is incremented.
4
< CRT/
TOOL TIP OFFSET screen
#31 -0.010 -0.005 0.005
becomes;
#31 -0.012 -0.005 0.005

V
l # {3 2) { )( )

fc=The data number is automatically

incremented by 1.
:

I
Note 1) Wear data setting range
Press | to display 31 and [godisplay 33.

Item Function Setting range

x,z Tool nose wear offset ±10.000 (mm)
1
R Tool radius (nose R) offset Oto 10.000 (mm)
::
I! Note2) Refer to the NC Unit Operator's Manual for details on the TOOL TIP OFFSET.

:ÿ
m
m
4-80
it
m
mm
 4. OPERATION

:i,

,.y
:

C4-3-10-2 Setting the absolute TOOL TIP OFFSET

) ,

II
!
I Select the "TOOLTIP OFFSET" screen.
See 4-3-10-1
'

I
1
:

CRT/
I ftraOL TIP OFFSET]
#1: INC #A : ABS. 1
¥ TOOL TIP OFFSET screen <X> <Z> <R>
#1 -0.010 -0.005 0.005 vi;
I
i
&
2 0.000 0.000 0.000
i

Press the
T| key When the color of “ #A : ABS." is yellow and the
mode is the absolute setting mode, skip the next four
,steps. i
!
I
(
CRT
#(
0> [#( 0)( )( ) ( )

I
i Press the jiNPUT-j key The absolute setting mode is called.

ii
I
-0:
CRT/
TOOL TIP OFFSET screen The color of
#A : ABS. turns yellow.
:
1
1
'V. I
Press 1 2 Adding a decimal point makes the unit
+ millimeter; without the decimal point, r.
the unit is micron.
6
+

CRT/
I
#{ 1 )( - 12)( -B> < ) ) Input and displayed in the setting field. V

Press the INPUT key The input data is set.

CRT/
TOOL TIP OFFSET screen ) It becomes;
<X> <Z> <R> i

i #1 -0.012 -0.006 0.005

4-81

,
| ;

;
 1
1

1
4. OPERATION

I c
CRT DISPLAY
4-3-10-3

I
Tool data )
(
Example of how to set the incremental value
Refer to ”4-3-10-2 Setting the absolute TOOL TIP
OFFSET” for how to set the absolute data. )
1

i
'i;:

Press the OFS. key

i{ i
i
<
T

l
c
CRT?
The OFS.

One OFFSET screen

| lights
)
The previously selected screen in the “OFS." screen group
m
i
%

is displayed. II
i:.s
Menu X 1
Press T- DATA ) Skip this step when the "TOOL DATA” screen is
already displayed. I
I
:
CRT
T [TOOL DATA] m
#! : INC. #A : ABS.
TOOL DATA screen
<p>
!!
<X> <Z> <R>
111
T #1
2
20.000
0.000
3.000
0.000
5.000
0.000
3
o
i
See 4-3-10-1
Cal! the incremental value setting mode.

3E
CRT/
TOOL DATA screen
) The color of
#l : INC. turns yellow.
I
1
T 1
Adding a decimal point makes
Press 1 3 1 the unit millimeter; without the
!
decimal point, the unit is micron.
T 1
ii
i
CRT
TOOL DATA screen
) #( 1 ) X ( 3. ) Z ( -l[Tj ) R ( ) P ( |||
!||
T 'I
s
Press the INPUT key 8
CRT/
it becomes;
<X> <Z> <R> <P>
*
i
TOOL DATA screen
) #1 23.000 2.000 5.000 3
it
1 |
Note 1) Tool data setting range Item Function Setting range 1
Tool length data

Tool-bit data
X,Z
R
Tool length offset
Tool radius (nose R)
±999.999 (mm)
0 to 999.999 (mm)
1
ii
P Tooi-bit point 0to8
jt
2) Refer to the NC Unit Operator's Manual for details on the TOOL DATA. ,1'S1
s
'

1
a
4-82
1
|i
 4. OPERATION M

ii1
1
ill
c 4-3-10-4 Erasing the TOOL BIT OFFSET

4
)
[TOOL BIT OFFSET]
ill #1: INC #A : ABS.
I See 4-3-10-1
<X> <Z> <R>

CRT I # 1
2
-0.005 -0.003
0.000 0.000
0.002
0.000
i

B
II ( TOOL BIT OFFSET screen 3
4
-0.006 -0.005
0.000 0.000
0.003
0.000
I Data of all displayed pages is deleted.
Note) 1
111 Press the SHIFT
cb*
CAN
keys
[TOOL BIT OFFSET]
CRT 4 #1: INC. #A : ABS.

C TOOL BIT OFFSET screen

) # 1
<x> <Z> <R>

I
X 2
3
Press the INPUT key 4

Set the deletion into the offset memory.

CRT Jr
I
&
TOOL BIT OFFSET screen [TOOL BIT OFFSET]
#l : INC. #A : ABS.
m
&
<x> <Z> <R>
i

# 1 0.000 0.000 0.000

i 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 I
1 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 ;
II
ii 4 0.000 0.000 0.000
'I

I
C 4-3-10-5 Erasing the tool data

4
See the above
"Erasing the TOOL BIT OFFSET"

ilWS':;
J
m Note) If all the displayed data is erased by mistake, display other pages and return to this page again
Sg3
S: to recover the data, if the INPUT key is still not pressed.
?
I
I
-
m
$ 1
i r,
II
t 4-83
;
f

:: :

M
 I

I
1
:
4. OPERATION

i I
1i
4-3-11 Creating and Editing the Program
This section describes how to create and edit the machining program in the background. If
T
In this machine, the seven axes, X1, Zl, C!„ X2, Z2, Y2, Z3 are grouped into three Lines. Each Line 1
til;!
'

can create independent programs to be executed simultaneously. This function can widen the
S;
I
it j)
machining. i
II When giving a single program number to the programs of the three Lines, the programs are regarded
as a single program.
i
O 250
%
I
f:| l
1
$1
Machining
$2
Machining
$3
Machining
I ,v
program program program
li
1 I
i
Programs of two Lines are displayed simultaneously, for ease of creating and editing the program. 1
i Press the CUR- to move the cursor to the side where the new program is to be displayed, and press rl
{. Si;
_*
the line key S-SEL to display another program on the other side.

s
1 gg;
I
Cursor -\ 0 250 $1 $2 0250 $1 $2 i
\ I
$1 $2 $1 $2
I machining machining machining machining
:

\ program program / \ program program /

Press .. $-SEL Press CUR.

4r
O 250 $3 $2 The Line O 250 $1 $2 Move the
that was not cursor to the
displayed is left screen if
: displayed in it is on the
if. j right screen.
i $3 $2 place of $1. $1 $2
machining J machining machining j machining
\ program j program program j program /
I
I I :*j Press S-SEL Press _ $-SEL
!t
:'
!f
s
if 0 250 $1 $2 0 250 $1 $3

i $1 $2 $1 $3
; \
machining machining machining machining
program y
If
\ program program y v program
I
;

:i
4-84 w
$
 4. OPERATION

c 4-3-11-1 Newly creating the program

CRT DISPLAY A
)
Press the | | EDIT key

i A
1 CRT/
lights ) The previously selected screen of the ’’editing"
screen group is displayed.

II One Editing screen

Menu A
( If the “PROGRAM FILE" screen is displayed, skip
this step. )
!;ÿ' ;
Press
uA FILE ) (PROGRAM FILE]
PROGRAM ENTRY :
CHARACTER :
30
1234
REMAIN :
REMAIN :
-
;ÿ

CRT, :ÿ

<PROGRAM> <CHR> <COMMENT>

1
?!
PROGRAM FILE screen
100
200
427 TEST CUT PROGRAM
;

300
The programs are displayed in accending order.
Check the program numbers currently registered
on the program file, and use a free number as the
I Menu program number of the new program to be
a Press NEW-INP )
created.
.
$
Editing screen 9
CRT 4 0(0 > COMMENT (
NEW INPUT screen
) )

;
|
n
Press 2 5 o P
DO
SHIFT
X
!
N
GOTO -
1

CRT

0 ( 2 5 0 ) COMMENT (PIN 1 )
I
I
' X
I | |
Press the INPUT key
Register the program number
Note)
i!
:]

s CRT 4 O 250
$1
PIN 1
$2
1r
is
Editing screen Editing screen
|

Note) The program number can use up to 8 digits. However, Nos. 9000 to 9999 are reserved !ÿ';
by the machine toolbuilder for the custom programs and normally cannot be used.

m. :
I 4-85

! .

*
 1

j{

4. OPERATION
1

4-3-11-2 Calling, searching the editing program

I]
The registered machining programs can be called for background editing, using the data search
function. The desired position of the editing program is searched and displayed. The search can be done
by the sequence number, block number, or by the character string.

c Editing program cal! ) S

I Select editing.
See 4-3-11-1

Menu I
Press SEARCH ) Editing screen ?!
CRT i I
m

DATA SEARCH screen

) 0( N( )-( )
S

I Program Sequence Block

f1
number number number
Press 2 0 0 M
i
The sequence number and block number cannot
1
CRT I be input when calling the program.

1
-
0( 20@)N( )-< )

I
Press the INPUT key Editing screen 1 m;;
CRT I 0( 2 o[o|)
SEARCH EXECUTION

DATA SEARCH screen I

£
Search the program a
§
CRT i O 200 $1
Display the machining
$2
Display the machining
i
!
DATA SEARCH screen program, 0200, $1 program, 0200, $2
1:
1

< SEARCH COMPLETE

:
1
I
1
1
4-86 1
S
 4. OPERATION

by sequence number, btock number Example of searching in the left editing screen

i 4 Select editing.
See4-3-11-1
S3 Sequence number
•
Menu I Block number

I
Press
E ) O 200 $1 $2

----
SEARCH

m I N1-0 ME ] -*ÿ This is the sequence

m CRT N1-1 -f-i- 3; number 1, block

1 DATA SEARCH screen

Ml -2
-
CH
N2[
3;
3;
number 0 block.

1 M2 0
N2-1
M3-0
EH 3;
N3C 3;
;

5
l
! 0( D)M{ )-{ )

Press 2 1

it
CRT I
I
1 ( N( 2) -( 1)
) When the block number is omitted, the search is
done with the sequence number alone.

mm 4
Press the INPUT key
SEARCH EXECUTION

m
2
I 0( )N( 2) -( 1)

c
CRT
i
DATA SEARCH screen
: i
!••ÿ '

The specified position is O 200 $1 i.

searched for
. The searched position is
E
CRT 4 3/ 4" displayed at the head.
N3E -*
' Sequence number 2, block
|:I
i

DATA SEARCH screen

) number t block

:I
SEARCH COMPLETE

l!

i
l!
Note) Press the
same as
D J
R-SEARCH

data search,
menu key
that the
except
to search in the right editing screen. The functions are the
program number cannot be searched.

1 j

4
jit
Iif

a If
4-87

1
:

m’

I
 ]
!

• ,

:j

1I V

4. OPERATION
if1 :
-

c Character string search

T
) Example of search in the right editing screen

See 4-3-11-1 $2

9
Menu
I N1[
c
Press R-SEARCH ) l N2C
GOO 210.0;

4
c
CRT
!N( )
)
RIGHT SEARCH screen
) :

Character string of up to 11
characters can be searched.

Press G 0 0 SP z 1 0 0
ATN K
*
CRT

( N( GOO Z10.i) - ( )
)
!!
I
Press the INPUT key
I

i I SEARCH EXECUTION

c
CRT
'
j N( GOO Z10.0) -( )
t RIGHT SEARCH screen

The specified position is

1 I

searched for I $2
CRT 4 i GOO Z10.0 ;
RIGHT SEARCH screen
) j
N2[

SEARCH COMPLETE

Note) Character string can be searched also in the left editing screen in the same way, by setting the
character stringin the sequence number setting field.
, The "NEW INPUT", "DATA SEARCH", and "RIGHT SEARCH" screens have the same
editing screen in the data display section, allowing editing after the operation, only that the
setting field differs.

l
4-88 I
a If!
 J'!,..v
.

4. OPERATION
I

4-3-11-3 Editing
This section describes the program editing.
See "5 PROGRAMMING" for details on programming.
p I) Character-unit input, alteration,insertion, deletion
See "4-3-6-4 Editing MDI programs".
: 2) Word-unit replacement
Use this function to replace a word used in the program with a new word.

C Word replacement
)
4-3-11-2
4 Editing program
call

CRT 4
Editing screen
l

: Menu I
Press
D MENU )
CRT 4
i
( Editing screen ) COPY MOVE EXCHANG REPLACE L-SEARCH

4
H
Press
Display the Line where the word is to be replaced.
(Skip this step if it Is already displayed.)

4
Press
SH00
to move the cursor to the
position where the replacement

1
is to start If necessary, use the j L-SEARCH )E R-SEARCH )
4 | |
CUR. or (page key) key.
To next page

4-89
j!;

!
;
 ii

4. OPERATION
H
m
1

II!
From previous page
Cursor
I
i 4-
CRT
Editing screen ) Nn ]; a
Menu
S h > Machining program If
[
Press REPLACE ) ]' *1
Si
CRT T §
Editing screen OLD ( [])-»NEW( )
J ..ij

T T Replace the current T10 with T20.

Press GT 1 0 2 0
GT

a_ j
CRT, T
Editing screen ) OLD ( —
T10 ) > NEW ( T2

f 4 :

Press the
Searches by scrolling up the screen.
INPUT key

i
j:
[fioj; T10 is inversed as soon as it is

fa
CRT

When replacing
Editing screen
) found.

Menu 4ÿ When not replacing

i

CRT
Press
G REPLACE )
T20 ;
Press the |INPUT key
* III
T10 is replaced with T20

T CRT

Press the

When searching
INPUT key
To register
the
replacement
intothe
C T10 returns to norma! display. TIO ;
a
!! t the nextTtO memory
fl
•4 III
H
CRT I
Editing screen
) Searches to the final block, and end the word
replacement.
I
I 1
|
ill
I 4-90 I
i
1
 4. OPERATION

When ending the word replacement

in the middle of the program

C When ending in the middle of the program )

T So]; T10 is inversed when found.
m: Editing screen

4
1 When ending after When ending without
word replacement repfacing the word
I Menu

I ) IfcB~
Press REPLACE Press the key
CAN

CRT,
T20 ;
T21 is replaced with T20
15r: [
m
1
I 4
Press the C.B. key
& CAN
Press the INPUT key.

I CRT/ T10 returns to normal display T10

&
I
Press the INPUT key

The word replacement ends

3 [

I The word replacement ends

s'
SI
si
s
1
1

!;
4

4-91

;
 ;

4. OPERATION

1 3) Line unit deletion |

I!
1
I!
c Line deletion

I
)
Line deletion Block deletion
1

Press

.
hNli* *4
Move the cursor to the line
to be deleted
Move the cursor to the
block to be deleted

CRT GOO X 20.0 GOO X 20.0; G01 glO.O;

G01 @10.0 GOO X 15.0;
Editing screen GOO X 15.0

T
Press the C.B. key The line where the cursor The block where the cursor '.k
CAN
is, is deleted. is, is delected. H
»
CRT
0 If
Editing screen
) GOO X 20.0 ;

GOO X 15.0;
GOO X 20.0;
GOO X 15.0;
m
T
Press the INPUT key
To register the deletion
into the memory. I
GOO X 20.0 ; GOO X 20.0;
1jg
.

( Editing screen
) GOO X 15.0; GOO X 15.0;

in
%
i

I:

1
i.

it

1
1
I
4-92

It
I i
4. OPERATION

4) Character stringunit copy, move, exchange

:: •Copy Example of copying the Line 1 program
to Line 2

1 $1
Machining program
$2

Where to insert the copy

i' Program to
be copied
o
I
Ilf i
After copy
m $1 $2

[• Copied propram
J after insertion

Exampfe of moving the Line 2 program to another position in Line

2
1
•Move
' Machining program
$2

Program to be
moved
Where to insert
the moved
I
J
program
0
II
After move $2

: V

i Moved m
program $
I
*
1 IV!

; 4-93

:
IV
1
I

a
 j

i
;1

4. OPERATION

® Replacement Example of exchanging the programs of Line 2 and Line 3

|
Machining program

$2
$3
8
s
} I
T Program to be exchanged
Program to be
exchanged
1
$2 $3
After replacement b
I
I

Note) Copy, move and exchange can be done within the Line, or between Lines.

I
;
1
i

-
i

:
I
|
I .

4-94
 4. OPERATION

I
:

c Copy

T
)
Select the Editing screen
See Word replacement

CRT J
COPY MOVE EXCHANS REPLACE :
Editing screen i
1
i
)E )
BBSS
V
Press If necessary, use the SEARCH R-SEARCH

to move the cursor to the head of

the character string to be copied
[ |[ [
CUR S-SEL or

(page key)
CRT 4 Machining program
Editing screen
$1 $2

Menu I l|l "j 1

[ ]
I:

Press
H COPY ) Cursor
I —11
Press
BH00
to move the cursor to the end of
The characters turn to inverse display as the cursor
moves, to show the range of the copy.

the character string to be copied $1 $2

CRT l [ ]
]
I
Editing screen
mm
r ];
i
I Menu l
1 Press COPY )
P. I
m The copy range is set

i
To next page
*
j:--.;

1!

4-95

M.
1
;‘v

i
 :
:

4. OPERATION

From previous page

B
Menu 4-
Press CUR. H
$1 $2 a
CRT 4 I-1: a 3; The cursor moves
[ to the previous
)
Editing screen
[ ];
r
J;
; position.
1!
Press
SH0S
to move the cursor to the head of
If necessary, use the (page key) I
1
the character string to be copied

4
Machining program 1
*
CRT $1 $2

Menu
Editing screen

4 m =!>©[ i
3

Press COPY ) &

CRT T [
$1
3; [
$2
3;
I
Editing screen
) r 3;
[
} Copied character
string

T [
s
irl Press the INPUT key
The copy is registered in the memory.

Note 1) Press the j CCAN jkey before pressing the | |

INPUT ey, to cancel the copy.

The screen returns to the display before copy.

4-96

•4
 4. OPERATION

c Move

X
)
See Word replacement Select the editing screen.

CRT X
Editing screen ) COPY MOVE EXCHANG REPLACE
I
X I
If necessary, use the )E )
lk
Press
rMWMH L-SEARCH R-SEARCH

I to move the cursor to the head of

the character string to be moved 0B“
(page key).
CRT X
11
1 ( Editing screen
Machining program
$2
r-I:
Menu X fc-3;
f 3;
H )
s;
Press MOVE 3;
[ ];
X
Press The characters turn to inverse display as the cursor
moves, to show the range of the move.

Im to move the cursor to the end of

the character string to be moved $2
j
i

1 CRT mmm Inverse display

i ( Editing screen BMi
[ j;
1
r Menu
L

1 Press MOVE )
5£ x
The move range is set, and
;

erased.
g X
To next page

iV- 4-97 i
¥

¥
 4. OPERATION

From previous page

4
I
Press

to move the cursor to the destination

If necessary, use the

(page key) keys.

0 'I

to insert the moved string Machining program

CRT 4 $2
r=l:
I
Editing screen Inverse display
I:
Move range
1
I
];
Menu
i B 3
Press MOVE ) Cursor destination s
CRT 4 $2 1
9
Editing screen
) L
Moved character string
4 [ ];

| j
Press the INPUT key The move is registered in the memory.
i
I

Note) Press the

j C.B. I key
CAN | |
before pressing the INPUT key, to cancel the move.
1V
The screen returns to the display before move.

'3

1
3
.
3
",

)
-
i
3
3.
*
11

",

i:
4-98
i
 4. OPERATION

c Exchange

T
)
Select the editing screen
See Word replacement ‘

CRT i
Editing screen COPY MOVE EXCHANG REPLACE i
4-
Press L- SEARCH )tt R-SEARCH )
A
s
.
to move the cursor to the head of the CUR. S-SEL or ||
1st character string to be exchanged
(page key).
CRT T
I Editing screen Machining program
$2 $3
Menu T r ]
8
E=3
' Press
£X EXCHANG ) mu
E==S [
]

If
;
Press
NH00
to move the cursor to the end of the
The characters turnto inverse display as the cursor
moves, to show the string character range
specified for the 1st exchange.
1st character string to be exchanged
I $2 $3
r
:« CRT i ]
r 3;
Editing screen wmm r
mmm
i Menu T
;;
Press EXCHANG )
I I
1
h
The 1st exchange range is set

l
Press the | CUR, key
$2 $3
a CRT i [ ]•
]; The cursor
I
Editing screen 0 ]; moves to the |
illl r i• previous
position.
i',

To next page
1

4-99
I

£ÿ

E
 :

4. OPERATION

From previous page

4
(page key) .
Press
t35*<-0
to move the cursor to the destination
If necessary, use the

to insert the moved string.

$2 $3
CRT
0
|
Editing screen
) [
J;
j:

Menu 4
Press
D EXCHANG )
4 The characters turn to inverse display as the cursor

>•
Press
Ff*4*M3
to move the cursor to the end of the
move, to show the string character range specified
for the 2nd exchange.
$2 $3
2nd character string to be exchanged
t=l;
4 miwm

c
CRT

i Editing screen
) mat
Menu 4
I
Press EXCHANG ) $2
r
$3
];
CRT 4 [ 3; Li Exchanged

H C Editing screen

4
Exchanged
character string
[ J;
3;
character string
f!

;ÿ Press the INPUT j key The exchange is registered in the memory.

fÿ"l
i
'

I
:l

Note) Press the key before pressing the

INPUTj |
key, to cancel the exchange.
The screen returns to the display before exchange.

;
||
I
i

1 !ÿ:

I
I 4-100
4
 1 f
I
ii 4. OPERATION

v.
5) Display screen unit deletion
The entire program displayed on the editing screen where the cursor is positioned, is deleted.

C Entire screen deletion ) Example of deleting the left editing screen

I See Editing program call

CRT

Editing screen ;
I
T
Press the (pagekey) and the

SB keys to display the

cursor on side of the
screen to be deleted. O 200 $t $2 Editing
[ ];
CRT 4- I ];
%

Editing screen
B 3; !i

I C.B.
[

Press the SHIFT CAN keys

*
CRT I O 200 $1 $2 Editing
Editing screen

[ 3;

k; Press the INPUT key To register the deletion into the memory.

m
I'

Note) Move to other pages (or screen) and return to this screen, to cancel the deletion, if before

pressing the | |
INPUT key. The screen returns to the display before deletion.
!

When deleting the right editing screen, move the cursor to the right side of the screen,
and perform the above operation.

i
i ;;i;

4-101

|
I

!
!
 ;

4. OPERATION
11
1
( 4-3-11-4 Registering the machining program )
1
New program i Old program
I
lit
i
See 4-3-11-1 See 4-3-11-2 I
J
CRT f ii
t
Editing screen
) &
I. I 1
a
Various editing operations tf'
;
I Register the machining program edited on the
Press the INPUT key
screen into the memory. s
j |
Note) Always register the result of editing into the memory by pressing th( INPUT key.
The machining program displayed on the screen cannot be used for operation without
registration into the memory. The machining program may also be erased if other operations
are performed on the screen.
a
i

m
:
!"

'

i ;
4-102
I
 4. OPERATION

4-3-11-5 Creating, editing the machining program

This section describes how to create and edit the machining data in the background. The machining
data currently used for operation cannot be background-edited.

c Creating, editing the machining program

4
)
See 4-3-11-2 Call the machining program including the
machining data to be created or edited.

i
K CRT 4
I
( Editing screen ) O 200

I,
Menu 4
Press MC-DATA )
i CRT 4 O
#
200 [MACHINING DATA INPUT]

i. MACHINING DATA INPUT screen 1 METERIAL O. D. 10.00MM

k'
4
;i
:

Set the data in the same way as when setting the

1
;«
See 4-3-T-2 actual machining data.

1/
[
Note) Unlike the actual machining data, setting the data and pressing the
data to be registered into the memory.
j j
INPUT key causes the

£
v The display on the screen and the contents of the memory are always the same.
Thereis no REGIST ) operation on the menu key.

.f.

k\ 5

I
:
.i'ii:

,!i ;

4-103

;
 i
i| ;

Si
i

i 4. OPERATION
A

:
>r i
Vi

1-J-11-6 Program unit editing

One whole machining program can be erased or copied. 5
l

c
I
)
’

Program deletion If-

.$
If
yj:.
IT DISPLAY
J'
f

if Press the DATA key 1

I
i T %

sf
:
DATA lights i
I
I CRT
M Data I/O screen The previously selected screen in the "data I/O" screen
4 group is displayed.
Menu
;!
Press
£ ERASE ) >
3
j
[PROGRAM ERASE]

#1 PART PROGRAM A 1
IN/OUT 4

- 7999 I
•'!: ij 3 10000- 99999999

1:
CRT
PROGRAM ERASE screen
) ? #2
#3
j #4 FIXED CYCLE
B 8000-
C 9000-
8999
9999

'
3
5 #( Q) DATA( /> I
1- Press 1 ->ÿ 2 0 0
£:
i
I
CRT
( #1( 1) ( 20 ) To erase machining program 0200.
§
'v-'.

Press the INPUT key <PROGRAM > <CHR> V

100
200
T 250
CRT,
PROGRAM ERASE screen
300 ERASE EXECUTION
J
Erase the program <PROGRAM> <CHR>
100
v
T 250
CRT
PROGRAM ERASE screen
300 ERASE COMPLETE
j I
,/ S

5
!s
1
i
HE'
4-104
 4. OPERATION
i

Note) Normally, #3 PART PROGRAM C and #4 FIXED CYCLE cannot be deleted.

#3 PART PROGRAM are mainly the custom programs of program Nos. 9000 to 9999 prepared
by the machine tool builder.
i #4 FIXED CYCLE are canned cycle programs including thread cuttingcycle and the like. 1
For details, refer to the Operator's Manual of the NC unit.

C Group deletion )
I { [PROGRAM ERASE} IN/OUT 4
'•

See Program deletion I

l #1 PART PROGRAM A 1
10000-
- 7999
99999999
#2 B 8000- 8999
)
i
CRT
PROGRAM ERASE screen ! #3 C 9000- 9999
!#4
)s
FIXED CYCLE
... .
{#( 0) DATA< )

Erase all machining programs within the range of

program Nos. 8000 to 8999.
;

I
•! A L L
Press 2
1
r
OR ABS ABS

C
CRT
AL0) 'j;

I #( 2H
<PROGRAM> <CHR>
1000
8000
Press the INPUT key 8100
8200
± 9000 ERASE EXECUTION
J :
CRT
PROGRAM ERASE screen ) ;

Erase the program

<PROGRAM> <CHR>
1000
;ÿ

i
CRT
PROGRAM ERASE screen ) 9000
ERASE COMPLETE
J /

'
? i
{ÿ
:ÿ
-
f
4-105

t
:aP

ir
 !
4. OPERATION

1
c Program copy

4
) Howto create a new machining program 0300 by copying
an existing program 0200.

See Program deletion Select Data I/O

Menu
Press COPY ) { [PROGRAM COPY]
S

{ #t COPY
IN/OUT 3

CRT/
l •#2 CONDENSE
! #3 MERGE
PROGRAM COPY screen | #4 PROGRAM NO. CHANGE
j#( 0>°( )$( >-»0( )$( )

Press 1 "# 2 0 0 -# «# 3 0 0

CRT/
PROGRAM COPY screen

T
#( 1 ) 0 ( 200 ) $ ( )-»0( 300)$
J
::
Press the INPUT key COPY EXECUTION j If
CRT 5-
PROGRAM COPY screen ||

Copy the program ?

1
'
CRT/
PROGRAM COPY screen COPY COMPLETE
J
Example
&
#(1)0( 200)$( ) ->0{ 3 0 0 ) $ ( ) Programs of a!! the Lines of machining program
I When both Line designations are omitted 0200 are copied to program 0300.
I
# ( 1 ) O ( 2Q0)$(2)-*O( 300)$( ) Program of Line 2 of machining program 0200 is
When one Line designation is omitted, copied to program 0300, Line 1.
| the omitted side is regarded as Line 1.

#(1)0{ 200)$(1)-»O( 300)$(3) Program of machining program 0200, Line 1 is

copied to program 0300, Line 3.
*
ij X

4-106
1
M
 I
?!
4. OPERATION :

c Program condensation

4
) Editing the machining program may sometimes make
blank parts in the program. This blank part can be
condensed so eliminate redundancy in the memory.

See Program copy

Select the "PROGRAM COPY" screen.

1I :
CRT [PROGRAM COPY] IN/OUT 3
PROGRAM COPY screen |
\ #1 COPY
! #2 CONDENSE :
I #3 MERGE
! #4 PROGRAM
I
NO. CHANGE
yrrr.r::.:::.
'

;#(
s
2 ) 0( Aig)$( )-*0( )$( )
j
All the registered machining programs are
A L L
Press 2 =# OR ABS ABS condensed.

CRT
PROGRAM COPY screen )
T
Press the INPUT key
-
CRT/ *
PROGRAM COPY screen

Condense the program

CONDENSE EXECUTION
J !;

J.
y

i
CRT
PROGRAM COPY screen CONDENSE COMPLETE
;ÿ

Example Setas#(2)0( 200)$( )-*0( )$( ), and press the INPUT key to condense the
program No. 200 machining program. I 1 -
O 200 O 200

Blank part wmm Condensed

> J
ill &

iill
'h

4-107

!•

f
 !

4. OPERATION

I
c Program merging

I
) How to copy a machining program after another
machining program, to create a machining program
merging the two programs.

See Program copy Select the "PROGRAM COPY" screen.

CRT/ ! [PROGRAM COPY]

v
IN/OUT 3
PROGRAM COPY screen l #1 COPY
; #2 CONDENSE
I I | #3 MERGE
« #4 PROGRAM NO. CHANGE

Press
300000000
4
0

CRT/ 0)$(
PROGRAM COPY screen
) #( 3 ) 0( 210 ) $ ( )->0( 20

The 0210 machining program is merged after the

)

4 0200 machining program.

Press the INPUT key

4
CRT/
PROGRAM COPY screen MERGE EXECUTION
;
Merge the programs

[: 4 MERGE COMPLETE
CRT
PROGRAM COPY screen
)
O 200 O 200

[
Merge
I
lllip
O 210 Hi
<
Example
#(3)0( 2 1 0)$( )~»0( 2 0 0) $ ( ) Programs of all the Lines of machining program
When both Line designations are omitted 0210 are merged into each Line of program
% 0200.
j
#(3)O(210)$( )-»0( 200)$(2) Program of Line 1 of machining program 0210 is
When one Line designation is omitted, merged into program 0200, Line 2.
the omitted side is regarded as Line 1.

#(3)0( 21Q)$(2)-*0{ 200)$(3) Program of machining program 0210, Line 2 is

merged into program 0200, Line 3.

4-108
i
?
I
 § 1
1
8 4. OPERATION

1
I
;S
ISs
c Program number alteration

T
)
I
See Program copy. Select the "PROGRAM COPY*1 screen.
T
I . CRT
| [PROGRAM COPY]
i
IN/OUT 3

!U:
( PROGRAM COPY screen ) !#1 COPY
',#2 CONDENSE
i #3 MERGE

J S #4 PROGRAM NO. CHANGE

Press 4 2 0 0 0 0

'
5
! Is
#{ 4 ) 0 ( 200) $( )->0( 500) $( )

c
it] CRT
¥' PROGRAM COPY screen )
4
Press the INPUT key Change machining program number 0200 to I
number 0500.
CRT X
PROGRAM COPY screen NO. CHANGE EXECUTION

Change the program number

CRT NO. CHANGE COMPLETE

( PROGRAM COPY screen

) |;
I
Note) Setting the Line number $ (
error".
) in machining program number alteration will cause "setting -
1
I
;

I
;
1
f h

E
ff
E
Si l:
%s i
'J
1
'

4-109

1
a
I I
I
I
 i

4. OPERATION

4-3-12 Program Check 9

It:
The multiple-axis multiple-Line control of this machine allows all kinds of machining. The machine i':
also offers a program check mode, to finish the machining program with more precision and with more
efficiency.
1
The following is the general procedure to create and complete the machining program. The program
I
check mode can be turned on/off under the reset status. I
c Start ) I
I
if
fr.
Machining program :ÿ
New input, edit ’ÿ

i
4- S
PROGRAM-
CHECK
Time measure Displays a bar graph of the machining time m
m
for each Line.

Execution program editing The processes are replaced or moved to

shorten the machining time and create more
efficient program.
*X
PROGRAM-
CHECK
4-
Simulation The machining is simulated on the display. 1
Time measure The time is counted during the simulation.
|
Editing The interference is checked for while
monitoring the animation of the machining.
if interference is observed, the program is
sent back, the interference corrected, and the
i
program is executed again to complete the
I check.

PROGRAM- The machine movement and interference are

CHECK checked in details while actually operating
Check on machine the machine.

Executing program editing The executing program is stopped for .1

1 correction, and re-executed.
j 1

|
C End )
V

w
4-110
1
 4

4. OPERATION f

4-3-12-1 Time measure >

'

1} Time measurement mode

C Time measure )
I Select the execution program which machining
time is to be counted.
1 SEARCH screen ) Example) How to measure the machining time
of program 0250

OPERATION MODE
AUTO
J 0 250

Press the ©key

(t cycle)
i

4
s '
c m PROGRAM screen
lights
3
B

P‘ Note) Set the feed dial at AUTO.

I
PROGRAM-CHECK Set the feedrate override at value used for
h
TIME the actual machining.
Press the
0* Measure the machining time with the
override.

I
1 |!

CRT
C s lights

TIME MEASURE screen )

J:
Note) High-speed measure is executed at II
! High-speed measurement 8 times speed, and is recommended
* as program check, etc.
f I
4
i ’
;
-ji

Press
V HIGH¬
SPEED )
1
J
I
To next page I
I
f
;

i
i 4-111

J
!

1
|

W:
j

'i

g
4. OPERATION 1
1 a
3 ,,
'O
From previous page
1
AUTO 4- 1
I
•j:
Press the m {Start)
key 1
L

T
C )
'K'
Mote) "MEASURING EXECUTION" or “HIGH-SPEED
CD n9ht$
MEASURE EXECUTION" flashes during execution
Time measurement is of time measurement, and "MEASURING
1 executed COMPLETE" is dispalyed when it ends.
The measurement is continued even if other fgi

I screens are selected during measurement. 1

1
1* '

I
C CD turns off
) i
i
C
CRT
TIME MEASURE screen
i;
S
From other screen

4-
Press the |GRAP.| key
I
I
I
I GRAP. lights ) I
H
!

1 TIME MEASURE screen II

4 |
Press TIME -DSP
) $
O 250 aa
.. s
01 05
$1 (wk)
02 03
$2 (wk) [
i; The result of measurement is t:
displayed as a graph $3 (wk) [
TIME [ i l i i

c
Speed 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
(r.p.m.)
i
I
End of time measurement ) Refer to ”4) Comparison of result of measurement" to
register the result of measurement in the memory.

1
»
I
I
1 4-112
m
 &
:: ,

4. OPERATION

B |
2) Operation mode
&

c
i

Operation, time measure )

Select the execution program which machining
time is to be counted.
Example) Howto measure the machining time

( of program 0250 }

SEARCH screen
O 250
A
OPERATION MODE I
-
AUTO,

i Press them 0 cycle)

key

I |

am tights

PROGRAM screen
)

PROGRAM-CHECK 1
TIME

Press the
\%\ key

1
if
1
ci Sights

TIME MEASURE screen

)
I
|
I Note) Automatic operation allows measurement

Press AUTO ) of machining time even when the machine

is run.
.3
I
To previous page
Press AUTO
J again to perform
machining time measurement after
machine has been stopped. (P.4-111 1
Time measurement mode).

4-113

!
I

i :
I
 I

I i:'

'l

4. OPERATION

1 3) Simulation mode

;
c Simulation time measure
)
Select the execution program which machining
time is to be counted.
Example) Howto measure the machining time

( SEARCH screen
) O 250
of program 0250

PROGRAM-CHECK 4
ON (ACTION)
Press the 'OFF key

3
1
ON
OFF lights

( SIMULATION screen

Press
I AUTO ) Select 1 cycle.
m

!| ¥
1
If S
I 1
Press START ) IS

*§ a
m
.

*
a START lights

Time measurement is
executed
Note) Ameassage "MEASURING
EXECUTION’* lights at the lower
1
«
;ÿ
right corner of the screen. ]ÿ 3
i :
j.
'.I:
START ) turns off
SIMULATION screen 8
I

To next page
4
To next page
i f

H
4-114 ill
I1
 4. OPERATION

1
:
From previous page From previous page ;

I
Si
1
sI Press TIME-DSP )
i
The result of measurement is
1 displayed as a graph

I
Press FIN ) .

I
To return to the p
simulation screen Refer to "4) Comparison of result of
measurement" to register the result of
measurement in the memory.

C End of time measure )

g
!

£ .1

I
H

1
i
& '

I '

4-115

!'
f;,.
ii |
1
 I

4. OPERATION

4) Comparison of resuit of measurement

When changinginto a short time program for efficiency, compare whether the cycle time has been short
or not.
When registering the new ;;
machining program into the From previous page
master
> 4 Register the result of time measure and the
When not
changing the
master
Press j MAS-R6ST ) INPUT machining program in the memory.

%
See 4-3-11-3 The use of move or exchange is convenient for
process of O 250 machining program when
CRT DISPLAY edited by process the unit. >:-i-

Press the GRAP I key

Note) jj MAS-RG$T
J the machining program to
be stored. The machining program is
T stored as is, even when the program of i
the same program number is edited. i
CRT/
GRAP. | lights ) i MAS-CALL
J the machining program, 1
to call the stored machining program as
TIME MEASURE screen the execution program.
AUTO

Press the [CDlkey (Start) Execution program

O 250 Register
Master program

O 250

i
( [51 lights ) Cal!

Time measurement is executed

c
CRT/
1 iI turns off

TIME MEASURE screen

)
The result of the improved 0250 new
machining program is displayed.
: IS

|
Menu
Press * MAS-DSP )
i CRT/
X \ The result of time measurement registered in
TIME MEASURE screen the master is displayed.

X Press ) TIME-DSP ) to return to the result of

Study and compare the result of measurement
measurement

X
To improve the
program
c End of time measurement ) ,/j"

4-116 m
IS
 4. OPERATION

4-3-12-2 Simulation Note) The simulation function is optional.

The simulation function is used to display an animation of the machine operation. The program can be
checked if the programmed operation is performed, if there is no interference, or if the workpiece is
machined roughly as designed. The executing program can be edited during the simulation. The feed
dial is also enabled. h
Before simulation, set the various data concerning the used tools. Also set the "material outer
diameter" and "pipe inner diameter” (set 0 for solid pipe) of the material "MACHINING DATA", as the
data is used to draw the simulation.
1) Tool-bit shape setting
Up to 15 different tool-bit shapes can be registered for each of 21tool-bit types.
I

( Tool-bit data setting )

T r

See 4-3-7-1 Select the execution program to be simulated.

CRT, I
DARA SEARCH screen 250
PROGRAM-CHECK I
(Action)
Press the key

i
& Cl lights )
8 CRT
SIMULATION screen ) START STOP RESET
;

T
To next page ¥

4-117

;;

|
J,

f
 i

4. OPERATION

From previous page

Menu 4 Note 1)
H
Press
D S1MU-SET ) {TOOL-BIT]
FRNT
No. FED% RTN% MTRl DMSNA DMSNB

1 16.000 16.000
A
2

CRT/
4 3

TOOLSET screen ) 4

Menu 4 \w
Press TOOL-BIT )
.

4 J
CRT/
I
;
TOOL-BIT DATA screen
)
4
Tool-bit name ?
Tool-bit name ( )
&
4
Enter the setting value using
"Alphanumeric keys" and “Input
'
key". Repeatthis procedure until
1 line of tool-bit data is entered.

!
CRT
4
TOOL-BIT DATA screen

Set and register on all used tool-bit.

Note 1) Up to 15 different tool-bit shapes can be registered for each of 21 tool-bit types.

Note 2) Asmuch as 21 tool-bit shapes are offered.

Note 3) Tool-bit name selection can alsobe done by using |ÿ"j and .

5
0 key allows switching among the columns (lower left of the screen). I
Note 4) (page key) allows to switching among the reference screens (upper right).
I f
Note 5) Press SHIFT and
0 keys to delete one line of tool-bit data.
1
Note 6) Press
ESP.
to return to the initial step of the setting procedure.
1
;! 1
: V?
1
4-118
!j !
i 1
 4. OPERATION

2) Too! composition setting

i The used tools are set along with the holder and tool-bit. Specify the tool number, and set the holder
number and mounting direction selected from the holder directory, the tool-bit number and mounting
1 direction selected from the tool-bit directory, and the tool-bit X, Z direction shift amount.

'
C Tool set )
i
K
U
Refer to the too!-bit data

I
ft,

Menu

Press T-COM ) TOOL

NO.
HOLDER
NAME SET. NAME
TOOL-BIT
NO. SET.
X
SHIFT
Z
SHIFT

T20

CRT
I T21

TOOL SET screen ) T22

T23

1I
Tool No. ?
Too! No. { )

X
Enter the setting value using
"Alphanumeric keys" and “Input
key". Repeat this procedure until 1
line of tool number data is entered.
Menu 1
CRT/
Press ) FIN )
When
TOOL SET screen ) CRT
J :
When
continuing setting is SIMULATION screen
the setting completed

Set and register on all usedtool.

Notet) Up to 28 tools can be registered.

Note 2) Holder name and tool-bit name can also be selected by using
US®-1 @
CD key allows switching among the columns flower left of the screen).

Note 3)
HHP (page key) allows switching among the reference screens (upper right of the screen).

| |
Note 4) Press SHIFT and DEL. keys to delete one line of tool setting data.

Note5) Press to return to the initial step of the setting procedure.

ESP.

-
4 119

;>

'

'v'
:
;

.
I
 :

V
4. OPERATION

3) Tool shape
The shape of the combination of the holder and tool-bit set in tool composition is displayed on the right
1 side screen. Monitor the screen to check that the settingis done as assumed.

C Tool shape )
Refer to "Tool-bit data”

Menu I
Press T-COM ) I.

CRT I
TOOL SET screen
'

I
:
Tool No. ?
Tool No. ( )
4
&
I li
Bring up the tool number input
screen using "Cancel" key. ft
Then, using "Up/down arrow"
keys,bring up the tool number
the shape of whichis to be
checked.

CR‘ I TOOL SHAPE

TOOL SHAPE screen

I
g K:
1
::

1 11
/

I
;

1
j
.
4-120 11
 £1
1
4. OPERATION
\S

4) Back spindle
Select the chuck or center used on theback spindle.
v!

1
h
c Back spindle

I
;
Select the TOOL SET screen. !
Referto “Tool-bit data"
i
If
CRT/
4 ,

TOOL SET screen l

Menu

Press BACK-SP )
1

CRT
4
BACK SPINDLE screen
:

4
Back spindle?
Backspindle( )

4
i Select theback spindle using
;
"Alphanumeric keys", "Up/down
arrow keys", and "Tab key".

CRT/
4
BACK SPINDLE screen

: •
Note) Back spindle selection can alsobe done by using GÿJpH"1! -

j Chuck shape \ ;
I
89I
v:;

:'v
Chuck Chuck with end bushing

4-121

i
f

!
:
 •i

4. OPERATION

5) Simulation
Simulation starts by drawing animation on the display, after setting the data necessary for drawing.

C Simulation )
T
CRT

Menu
c One SIMULATION screen

T
FIN

fj
Press FIN ) Note) When simulation is done using the preset data,
select the simulation screen referring to "Tool-bit 1
shape setting".
l
CRT
( SIMULATION screen ll

1
Press MATERIAL ) Use the material diameter, inner diameter of pipe, cut-off
tool number set in the machining data, to display the
material, and to display the tool at the machining start

CRT/
4 point. I
t
SIMULATION screen 0 250 [SIMULATION] If
HR

with diameter set in the machining

data
Set the feed dial at "FIX." or
1
"FWD.“.

T hi/ The tool set as the cut-off tool in

the machining data, is displayed at
the machining start position.
i
If
Press START ) ] 1
I
Note) The program is

o
reversed only after
(Feed dial} executing the program
Press the ta key to the forward
direction. Command
11f,
Simulation is executed while reverse execution after l
pressing machine operation key. executing the program
to the forward
I
I
Animation display motion and direction.
program process end, if letting
;
go of the key.

i I
SIMULATION screen Machining simulation is executed by Animation display
I
Note) If PIC switch #5 feed dial signal is turn on, hand operation is executed
I
i
hll
by mere setting the feed dial at the forward or reverse direction.
Machine operation key need not be pressed.

|!
1

4-122

'.i.
 4. OPERATION

6) Display selection

The display area of the animation display of the simulation, the display position, and display size can
be selected before being displayed. Make the best selection for each object.

C Display selection ) 1

4 l

I See "Simulation" Select the SIMULATION screen.

CRT 4
SIMULATION screen MENU
a v-

1 Menu 4
Press MENU ) SIMU-SET EXTEND ZONE
Y SIZE

CRT 4 Animation display section :

J:i
& Menu
SIMULATION screen

X
0 250
Standard
0 250
Enlargement :

I
m
Press EXTEND ) '

1
1 CRT 4
1 The display area changes Press
CH.CLEAR )to
erase the characters.
.
Bi Menu 4 i
Left
1 Press ZONE ) 1 Center
Right
:

CRT 4
c
J
a
>ÿ
Y Menu
The display position changes Left Center Right
n
The position changes each time the menu key is pressed. !
I Press SIZE ) S

IY CRT 4 a
t The display size changes

Y.
Y
%
Note t ) The above three menu keys
are enabled only when the
machine is reset.
r Standard Enlargement

The magnification can be changed. The magnification

1
changes each time the menu key is pressed.
c
*s
..i
Y 4-123
7
a|v:

P.
 '
&
i

I
)l:

4. OPERATION

I
II
1 Mote 2) Press
E SIZE
J to change the scale of the animation display. Scales 1to 5, with
resolution as shown below, can be specified.
1

Maximum length
I
Scale Resolution {per dot)
y;
i.'
i 1.0mm 640mm a
1 2 0.75mm 480mm H
3 0.5mm 320mm

4 0.375mm 240mm

5 0.25mm 160mm

The default upon power-ON is scale 2.

The scale changes as 2-*l~»5~»4-*3, each time the SIZE is pressed.

j
When the scale is changed by SIZE j the number of the changed scale is dispalyed on
the center of the screen inenlarged green character.

When 1 EXTEND
M ZONE
M SET j are pressed the number of the m.
currently set scale is displayed likewise. This display goes out by pressing the cycle start

button.

:i;
i
as
i>
i
M
i
I
i
i
!
HI
il
II

I I
:

'k
I
:H i'.
H:
1
1
I
4-124
1
 ;W

1IS S
4. OPERATION
flf;
I
1
I

1
1
% c 4-3-12-3 On-machine check

i
The program is checked, while actually moving the
machine. Avoid cutting the workpiece,

Select the execution program to be actually

rf#
: See 4-3-7-1 checked.

8i
CRT T O 250 I

I! SEARCH screen

OPERATION MODE
AUTO r~
I ta key (Continuous)
Press the

4 I
CRT
CJ§ lights ) O 250 [CHECK ON MACHINE)
r
PROGRAM screen
$ 1 SUBO o I
it
PROGRAM-CHECK 4
MACHINE
$2 SUBO
N
0
0-0
f
li
N 0-0
i ON $ 3 SUBO 0
Press the OFF key
N o-o I
$i (xi,/zi,a)
I i; execution biocfc \ The «
cm
execution

CRT
lights

CHECK ON MACHINE screen

3 ]<•

;
I;
executing block
<—Next executing block

J
(10 blocks
are
displayed.)
;

ll: The currently executing block is displayed in white,

while other blocks are displayed in light blue.
Feed dial
1 Set the dial at "FWD."
Execute the program to the forward
direction. The feedrate at "FWD." and
ii V

h
i \ REV." on the feed dial becomes faster
li
11

i Feedrate override I y as it becomes far away from the stop

I Set appropriate value
"&• position.

i 4 Note 1) Set the override first at a

1 To next page A To next page B FEEDRATE OVERRIDE
low value, and operate
„ so
SO
„„
no 120 slowly. Setting the
70 130
so jr % MO override at 50% as shown
T.
. J SO (
I
<0
\ ISO
\ 160
in the left figure will equal 1
I the feedrate override on i
30
1 £ 170
3 »\ £ iso
$ 190
both the forward and
i 10
0 200 reverse directions (both at
1 %
50%).
I
;
t
4-125

I
*
I \

;
 I

4. OPERATION

From previous page A From previous page B

i
AUTO i
l!
Press the I 1
CD key
(Start)

x
CHl lights ) 9
II
PROGRAM-CHECK
This key may not be used when the PLC switch feed
I
1:
(Feed dial)
dial is independently pressed. «
Press the [lol| key-
I
I
The machining program is
Use the feed dial to change the feedrate, and
executed while the actual
forward, reverse directions, to check the
machine operation key is
pressed.
program. Note 2) a
CRT/ 1
CHECK ON MACHINE screen
The execution program display section scrolls so %

!
AUTO J that the executing block is displayed on the
second line. 1
Press the [@| (Hold)
key
u
l Note 2) When the feed dial is set at "REV.", the machining
program is executed to the reverse direction. Blocks 1
CM turns off, and

I
jtÿl lightsÿ with movement can be reversed for several blocks.
See P.4-131 Note 1) for the particulars. *
I
i
i ;

Note 3) If the execution feeedrate of the program is reduced by using the feed dial or override, the M,
S, T command are also prolonged in ratio so as not to let the synchonization between the Lines
shift, and it may appear as if the operation stopped. During this while, "WAITINGMST FIN.

...... . . .. . . ........
$ÿ" appears on the display. IS

Note 4)
................
Be careful not to put hand into .....
-ssss=ssssxsmass= aswaaaaas a .Eij saxassa a
the machine.
snsssa cssm:

Avoid continuous cutting of workpiece in the on-machine check mode. If the cutting is still
ll
.ÿSi¬
:ÿ

required, it must be done after turning the feed dial to FIX. and setting1cycle operation. it
Note 5) Machining programs that can be checked in on-machine check, simulation are those which I
single cycle time is up to 120 minutes when the overide is 100%.

1
4-126
a
1i
4. OPERATION

4 ;!

i ( 4-3-12-4 Editing the execution program ) Correct the program under operation by on-
machine check ,operating automatically.
It is used when avoiding interference of program
s

error and so on.

Avoid cutting work for safety.
:

i See 4-3-12-3 Example of on-machine check

Perform automatic operation of continuous cycle under
§ A the on-machine check mode.
ON-MACHINE CHECK screen

-
OPERATION MODE
AUTO
A
Use the
HH 1keys to display the Line to be
edited, and to move the cursor to that Line.

S Press the [oÿi| (1-block)

key ;

4 The first Line that reaches the block end stop at

C@ lights ) the block, and other Lines are held.

Stop the block

i

cm* 4?
$1 (X1,Z1, Y1) $2 (X2,Z2,A2)
. Light blue

turns off White

Light blue [ |;
ON-MACHINE CHECK screen ]; Light blue

When the Line to be edited stopped at the block.

The cursor on the block-stopped Line flashes. The
cursor of the Line being hold is the same inverse
display as during execution.
The block-stopped Line alone can be edited. The NC
operation status display unit indicates “STP" when it
block-stops.
'

1STP 2HLD 3HLD )

©Use the
s key to move the cursor to the first Line.
If the cursor flashes, the first Line can be edited.

I 1HLD 2STP 3HLD ) ;i

©Use the [CUR- j key to move the cursor to the second Line.
If the cursor flashes, the second Line can be edited.
!ÿ

1HLD 2HLD 3STP J

To next page To next page © Use the j |
CUR. key to move the cursor to the third Line. i

1
If the cursor flashes, the third Line can be edited.

.
4-127

c
 ;

4. OPERATION m
I!

From previous page From previous page

I
When the Line to be
edited is being held
AUTO-
I
k III
'4.
Press the @27
!

CJa lights ) a
The program is executed
.

Press the
4*
To call the edit mode.
$1 (X1,Z1,C1)
1
[
I 3;
1st block

2nd block
Previous execution block
Currently executing block I
ON-MACHINE CHECK screen E3 3rd block Next execution block

10th block I Light blue

inversed
characters
I
a
Cursor The flashing cursor indicates that editing is enabled.

The machining program of the 3rd block to the 10th

i
ft

Perform necessary editing
| j
Press the INPUT key
:
block can be freely edited.
However, editing by the editing expansion mode can be
done only under the reset status.
II
Register the edited machining program into the
memory, and end the edit mode.

I EZ3-
$1 (X1.Z1.C1)

ft
ON-MACHINE CHECK screen ) PIZ3 ]; I
3rd block
1
i
Repeat execution and editing, to
:
10th block
The display returns to the
normal light blue.

I
11
complete the machining program.

Note 1) Edit the simulating machining program, referring to the example of "on-machine check ".
I
i
However, only 4 blocks of the executing program can be displayed, so the 3rd and 4th blocks II
alone can be edited.
Note 2) If the same program is selected for execution and editing, the execution program edited, and II
then the background editing screen edited, the program display may appear from middle of
the block. 1

4-128
 jj

4- OPERATION

c
Menu
Edit expansion

1
) Can be used under the reset status in the on-machine
check or simulation mode of program check.
:

1
1
Press

T
EXPAND )
CRTs
The same display as normal editing screen.
EDIT EXPANDER screen

4
I.
3b
Editing is performed The same operation as normal editing can be done on the
execution program.
{The program cannot be selected.)
Menu l
|
Press FIN )
4?; 1

Return to the program check screen.

’My

1
M
1)'
'

1
I .

!>ÿ
:

i
1

$
I
i
I
4
8
1
H
1 4-129

li

:
 j

4. OPERATION

c 4-3-12-5 Editing the execution program in reverse sequence

) Example in on-machine
check

I When an already executed block needs change,

the program can be reversed to edit the
1
I
l:';/

See 4-3-12-3 machining program before the current block.

Perform automatic operation of continuous cycle 1
I under the on-machin check mode.

o
Set the feed dial at “STOP".
I
1
5-
4
ON-MACHINE CHECK screen Use the j S-SEL jj
CUR. |
keys to display the

_
OPERATION MODE
AUTO
cursor on the Line to be edited.
$3 (X2, Z3, )

Press the
(1-block)
CZP

I EZ3
(pi j I C> 1 1 lightsÿ
turns off
|l1
!ÿ'
I
Set the feed dial at " REV.“.

(Feed dial)
PRO-
[ta| Release the feed dial key if the machine is in
11
I
GRAM- Keep on pressing the Key
CHECK danger of interference. The machine will stop.
;)
I
The program reverses for 1 block,
and block stops.
“STP“ is displayed on the NC operation status
display, for the block-stopped Line.
-v
I C Example Line 1 : Slock stop, other Lines are held
1 STP 2 HLD 3 HLD 3
C |g (start)
turns off ) 4*
m
Whenthe program is
not returned before the Whenthe block returned beyond the block to be edited.
block to be edited
Note 2)
m
OPERATION MODE
«&
AUTO 4
(Start) V.
Press the CD key
I
Si
4 "
To next page A To next page B
1
i
l
X
4-130
m
 4. OPERATION

From previous page A From previous page 8

4r
( N lights )
PROGRAM-CHECK
(Feed dial)

press the
|gi| Cy¬

The program reverses for several

blocks, and block-stops. Note 1)

( E
(start)
turns off )
When the program is
not returned before!the
block to be edited When the block returned beyond the block to be edited

OPERATION MODE
AUTO
*
Press the m (Start)
key

c
PROGRAM-CHECK
If 1 lights

(Feed dial)
)
i
Keep on
pressing the [@| ke*
The program reverses for several Note 1)
blocks, and block stops.

1 Edit the machining program. If the program is reversed

$

:
See 4-3-12-4 too far, execute the machining program to the forward
direction, before editing the program.
The Line where the cursor flashing can be edited.

;
Note 1) The modal information of the previously executed block is stored each 5 (moving) blocks, to
:
reverse the machining program (reverse execution of the program). Reverse the program to
this block where the modal information of the Line pointed by the cursor of the displayed
execution program, and stop the block.

4-131

$
I

r-

ij:
 ]

4. OPERATION
i

Note 2) Maximum ten (moving) blocks canbe reversed. Execution of the forward or reverse direction
can be done freely within this range. 1
However,if one of the three machiningprogram Linesreaches the final reversible block, the
reversing of other Lines is also stopped.
Executing
Example 1 y
V_V
$1 hi
v*
5 j6 j 7

V V
IT i
$2 l1 { 2 |3 l4l5 ) 6 |7 j 8 | 9 |lo|l1|12|l3|
,-.y ,_ V
$3 [ |
1 2 I 3 j j 4 m s m
f*—
j
Can be returned to this block.
($1,$2,$3)

Example 2 y The storage of modal information of each S

V V
$1 n| 2 |3 | 4 { 5 | 6 I7I 8 |
blocks starts from a no reversing block.
• No-reversing blocks
V ! v v Blocks with G code commands as, G201,
G999,G5dd, G7DD machining
I 1 1 1 3 I 4 j 5 I 6 I7 1 8 | j
$2
12r*—Can be returned to this| block. ($1,$2)
9 10
patterns.
Blocks with Tdddd tool selection
$3 1 I 2 Aj 4

r8" Can be returned

commands.
Blocks with M commands accompanying
axis movement of M02,M32, M78, etc.
to this block. Blocks under milling interpolation.
($3)
• Blocks where reverse operation is enabled,
but not executed.
Blocks with M commands that do not
accompany axis movement.
y : Block where modal • Blocks where reverse operation is enabled,
but editing cannot be done during reverse
information is stored
operation.
: No-moving bfock Blocks with nose R compensation.
Blocks before queuing command.
: No-reversing block
• Inhibition of reverse operation during
superimpose, synchronization.
Wheit two Lines are under mutual
superimpose, synchronization status,
inhibitingreverse operation or one lane
will also inhibit reverse operation axes of
the other Line.

1 Note 3) The axis move lamp flashes during reverse operation. The reverse operation whenreaches the
final reversible block, to turn off the axis move lamp.

When the axis move lamp is flashing. The machine may appear to be stopping. However,
reverse operation is taking place, and it is very dangerous to put hands in the machine.

Note 4) The synchronization between the Lines may shift when editing is done by reverse operation, or
when block feed, single block are continued. The final program check must always be done by
forward operation or automatic operation.

4-132 |
 1
4. OPERATION
!r

i- Note 5) The no-reversing blocks that can be reversed in Line other than the Line including command.
Execution in this case will include reversing axes and no-reversing axes, so necessary
i
measurements must be taken to avoid interference.

Executing the program with the

feed dial set at “FWD."
:
PROGRAM-CHECK 4-
{Feed dial)
Keep on
pressing the \{o\\ key

Set the feed dial at “REV." To reverse the program.

PROGRAM-CHECK
(Feed dial)
Stop the execution if there are blocks which inhibits the
s Release the [@| key reversing of its own block alone, to cause interference.

Set the feed dial at ’’STOP''

Menu

Press D ESCAPE )
( HT (Start)
turns off ) ! I
PREPARATION
l Select whether to escape the turret No. 1 or No. 2.
Press the key

AUTO 4
I
Press the m (Start)
key
The selected turret moves to the escape point.

CRT ;
[AXIS ESCAPE]
1 ON-MACHINE CHECK screen
X1 ESCAPED (when the No.1 turret is escaped)

i':
AUTO 4 (Start)

Press the CD key

:

Set the feed dial at " REV.” I

r
To next page

I f:
i1;
ji
4-133

: l
 i

4. OPERATION

From previous page

v'j }
PROGRAM-CHECK 4-
(Feed dial) Restart reversing the program.
Press the |tn| keV Reverse operation is performed while pressing the feed
dial key.

Set the feed dial at “FWD.”

(Feed dial) The program is fed forward while the feed dial key is
PRO-
GRAM-
CHECK Press the
[ta| pressed.

4
Automatic forwarding hold The feed is automatically held as soon as it returns to the
escape position.

AUTO 4 The escaped axis returns to the original position.

(Start)
Press the HI key
AUTO 4
(Start)
Press the CD key
PROGRAM-CHECK
(Feed dial) Continue to forward the program.
:
Press the T~5l key

Note 6) The M commands are not executed while reversing the program. Manual M command can be

;
;
givenif this can cause danger. The “M.TNOT AVAILABLE” message appears if the M code is not
executed.
I
f
I
Executing the program with the m
feed dial set at “FWD."
5 PROGRAM-CHECK 4-
(Feed dial)

Press the
I
:'i I
I Set the feed dial at “REV." To reverse the program
B !
PROGRAM-CHECK
(Feed dial)
I
1
Release the [H| key II
§1
in
To next page

II
i
4-134 :

m
 4. OPERATION

From previous page

Stop the execution if there is danger by ignoring the M

Set the feed dial at "STOP*1
command.
,
Menu T

i1 CH
Press D M-COM

(Start)
turns off

4
)
)
8 Press 0 5 INPUT
sft
CRT/
+ [M COMMAND]
ON-MACHINE CHECK screen M 05
ft
AUTO i
Press the m (Start)
key
I
4
Execute the M command
1
€
4
Set the feed dial at "REV.'
t
E
:y AUTO I (Start)
I
CD
H
ft
Press the
PROGRAM-CHECK 4
key
if
l

(Feed dial) Restart the reverse feed of the program. The program is
I
I
Press the key reversed while this key is being pressed.

8
I The above are descriptions on the M command during reverse feed, but the “M.T NOT

s
B
AVAILABLE” status can also occur during the forward feed after the reverse feed. In this
case, use the same M command as for reverse feed.

I Note 7) When the PLC switch #5 FEED DIAL ONLY is turned on, manual operation is enabled just
by setting (he feed dial at “REV.” or “FWD”. There is no need to press the feed dial key.
Note 8) Stopping the forwarding block after reversing or forwarding may not allow modal
1 information editing. Stop the reversing block and then the forwardingblock, before editing.
The cursor flashes to indicate that editingis enabled.
ft' Note 9) The same function as the time measurement functionin the program check mode can be used
during actual machining.
i
I
1ft
8 4-135

;
 4. OPERATION I

4-3-13 Machining Monitor Note) Machining monitor is an option.

The machining monitor displays, in animation, the machining operations. Since the display is provided
in synchronization with actions of a machine being run in automatic operation, you can check the
machining now inprogress.
Relevant data for the tool used must be set before you can proceed to the machining monitor. "Material
outer diameter" and "Pipe material inner diameter" (0 is set for a solid pipe), both are provided in the
"Machining data", must also be set because they are indispensable for graphics of material. (They are
usually set during the simulation operation).

4-3-13-1 Tooi-bitdata
Up to 15 different tool-bit shapes can be registered for each of 21 tool-bit types.

I
Tool-bit data setting )
See 4-3-12-2 A program used for the machining monitor m
1
(automatic operation) is selected.
I
CRT
1
DATA SEARCH screen
) O 250 %
I
CRT OiSPPAY
m
Press the iHksy (Graphic)

II
a

c
;
/
GRAP. lights

CRTi
MACHINING MONITOR screen
)
1
T II i
To next page
li
!
I

tl
I
;!
1
f,

4-136
*5 s.
 ..
I 4. OPERATION
U

From previous page

",
; Menu 4 Note 1)

; Press SiMU-SET ) ITOOL-BIT]

FRNT
NO. FED% RTN% MTRL DMSNA

1 100 100 S-HD 16.000

DMSNB

16.000

4
A 2
3
" CRT

,'v-
TOOLSET screen ) 4
:
3
Menu 4 S
W
Press TOOL-BIT )
'i
•V

*: CRT 4
J i

TOOL-BIT DATA screen

I i
3 4
1 Tooi-bit name ?
Tool-bit name ( )

4
Enter the setting value using
"Alphanumeric keys” and "Input
key". Repeat this procedure until
1 line of tool-bit data is entered.
;ÿ

CRT
4
!'
TOOL-BIT DATA screen

Set and register on all used tool-bit. i1

Note 1) Up to 15 different tool-bit shapes can be registered for each of 21 tool-bit types.
5
Note 2) As much as 21 tool-bit shapes are offered.
l
Note 3) Tool-bit name selection can alsobe done by using
HHH-S
key allows switching among the columns Gower left of the screen).
;;

Note 4) (page key) allows to switching among the reference screens (upper right).

Note 5) Press SHIFT and

Note 6) Press
ESP.
0 keys to delete one line of tool-bit data.

to return to the initial step of the settingprocedure.

,
{ I.

3
4-137

,
 !
:

4. OPERATION

4-3-13-2 Tool setting til

The used tools are set along with the holder and tool-bit. Specify the tool number, and set the holder
number and mounting direction selected from the holder directory, the tool-bit number and mounting
I
direction selected from the tool-bit directory, and the tool-bit X, Z direction shift amount.
I
c Tool set

x
) I
a
a
Refer to the tool-bit data

I
Tool No. ?
Tool No. ( ) s
X 1
II
Enter the setting value using
"Alphanumeric keys" and “key". Ill
Repeat this input procedure until 1 1
line of tool number data is entered.
1
CRT
.
TOOL SET screen
1
;

r, When IWhen
1 continuing
the setting
Isetting is
Icompleted
I
t
Set and register on all used tool.
Menu 4 i;

Press FIN )
I
CRT
MACHINING MONITOR screen
«
?
II
if

;
Note 1) Up to 28 tools can be registered.
111
Note 2) Holder name and tool-bit name can also be selected by using .
«
key allows switching among the columns (lower left of the screen).
% Note 3)
JIIIP (page key) allows switching among the reference screens (upper right of the screen). a
m
Note 4) Press SHIFT and | j
PEL, keys to delete one line of tool setting data.
I
NoteS) Press
ESP.
to return to the initial step of the settingprocedure. 11
II
it
'I 4-138 1
I
 1
fi
4-3-13-3 Tool shape
4. OPERATION

Up to 15 different too-bit shapes canbe registered for each of 21 tool-bit types. The shape of the
combination of the holder and tool-bit set in tool settingis displayed on the right side screen. Monitor
.
8 i f
the screen to check that the setting is done as assumed.
1:
C Too! shape ) ;

4
(ÿ
Refer to "Tool-bit data M

CRT T :

( TOOL SET screen

;

Too! No. ?
I
Toot No. ( )
fU

§
4
Bring up the toolnumber input
B screen using "Cancel" key.
Then, using "Up/down arrow"
keys, bring up the toolnumber
i the shape of whichis to be
checked.

CRT 4 TOOL SHAPE

TOOL SHAPE screen )

4-139

1
I
 i

4. OPERATION
4

4-3-13-4 Back spindle 1

Up to 15 different tool-bit shapes can be registered for each of 21 tool-bit types.
Select the chuck or center used on theback spindle.
I

c
; i

Back spindle
) :;|V

I Select the TOOL SET screen.

I
Refer to “Tool-bit data"

CRT/
I
TOOL SET screen

f Menu J
m. Press BACK-SP )
CRT
i
BACK SPINDLE screen
1
I
Back spindle?
v‘

Back spindie( )
1'::
Select the back spindle using
"Alphanumeric keys”, "Up/down
arrow keys", and"Tab key".

CR' I
BACK SPINDLE screen ) i;
f a :

I
Note) Back spindle selection can alsobe done by using
j and jaÿ j . a
I
1
Chuck shape I
!£ I

Chuck Chuck with end bushing il

4-140
i
B

4. OPERATION
I

4-3-13-5 Machining monitor

!
After setting data required for graphics,proceed to machining monitor executed in animation display.
;

c
CRT
Machining monitor

I
)
FIN

One SETTING screens

Menu T
Press FIN )
. CRT
MACHINING MONITOR screen :

1 AUTO 4 ,

Press the mjsr

8
CRT. T 0 250 [MACHINING MONITOR]
;

I
1
MACHINING MONITOR screen
Material diameter of which is registered in
the machining data. V

The tool, that has been set as a cut-off

tool in the machining data, will be
displayed at the machining end ;
position.

s j

Machining monitor is performed checking the

animation on the screen.
$
;

% '!

*
I

1! 1
;

4-141 |
I
B i
¥

i
 j

J
'

4. OPERATION

4-3-13-6 Display selection .4-

Appropriate display area (region), display position, and display size in the machining monitor I
I
animation display section can be selectively displayed. Combine them properly so that you can have an
animation display suitable for you purpose.
i

c Display selection
) I *
m

I
I r-:
1
See "Machining monitor". Select the MACHINING MONITOR screen.

CRT 4 %
1
MACHINING MONITOR screen EXTEND ZONE SIZE
T m
Menu 1 Standard
Animation display section
Enlargement
;
Press EXTEND ) 0 250 0 250
I
ft

CRT
j;,
The display area changes
m,
1
j
Menu 1 CH.CLEAR )«o
Press _
Press ZONE ) erase the characters.

CRT T \
Left i
The display position changes Center I
Right 1
Menu I j

I CRT
Press

4
SIZE )
C — Left Center Right

The position changes each time the menu key is pressed.

The display size changes ) 1
: 1 1
I 1
a
r Standard ’Reduction Enlargement

The magnification can be changed. The magnification

1 ,
Hi
changes each time the menu key is pressed.
I
:
;ÿ
Note 1) The above three menu keys are enabled only when the machine is reset.

1
II
I 4-142
I
•if-
 4. OPERATION

' Note 2) Press 5 SIZE y to change the scale of the animation display. Scales 1to 5, with
resolution as shown below, can be specified.

Scale Resolution (per dot) Maximum length

1 1.0mm 640mm

2 0.75mm 480mm

3 0.5mm 320mm

4 0.375mm 240mm .
1 :
5 0.25mm 160mm
if
The default upon power-ON is scale 2.
!

£
The scale changes as 2-*1-»5-*4-»3, each time the j SIZE ) is pressed.
When thescale is changed by SIZE
J the number of the changed scale is dispalyed on
the center of the screen inenlarged green character.
1
When EXTEND
J , ZONE J, SET j are pressed the number of the

currently set scale is displayed likewise. This display goes out by pressing the cycle start button.
I

mm
f

Ill

t:

i
111
v

1
1

4-143

g
g,
 !

l
4. OPERATION
1

4-3-14 Data Input/Output :

The machining program, tool data, and parameters can be input and output using paper tape and the
like, by connecting various input/output devices to this machine.

1 t
Setting the input/output port number and device number
) Normally use ports 1,
device No. 0 for
input/output devices
CRT DISPLAY 4r recommended by
m
Press the | DATA key Citizen.
Note) When using input/output devices other than those

CRT
I recommended by Citizen, set the RS-232C
conditions referring to the NC unit Operator's
One data I/O screen Manual, “I/O PARAMETER", before connection.
Menu _ Use port No. 1 and device Nos. 1 to 4, where set in
the RS-232C conditions.
Press
f DATA-IN )°r H DATA-OUT )
The screen previously selected in the “data I/O"
CRT/ DATA INPUT or DATA OUTPUT
screen ) screen group is displayed.

I ; #1 PART PROGRAM #11 PORT NO. 2

1 Press
Mi 1 1
4M 1 i#2 TOOL DATA
! #3 PARAMETER
#12 DEVICE NO. 3

T
CRT/
#( 11) Data (
0>3 j#( []

i
) DATA ( )

'f.
#11 PORT NO. 1
press the INPUT key im¬
#12 DEVICE NO. 3
i
CRT/DATA INPUT or DATA OUTPUT
screen ) |#{ 12) DATA ( [] )

Press 0 i

T
Press the INPUT key

T
CRT/DATA INPUT or DATA OUTPUT
screen
IN/OUT 1

#11 PORT NO. 1

#12 DEVICE NO. 0

i,

- 4-144
1
IMSl
 ;
4. OPERATION

4-3-14-2 Selecting the data input mode

There are two data input modes to input the machining program, tool data, parameter; the input mode
and the compare mode.
Input mode : Inputs the machining program, tool data, parameter, and registers them into
the memory.
if Compare mode : Inputs the machining program, tool data, parameter, and verifies them with the

I
t
data registered in the memory. If the input data and the memory data differ,
”E35 compare error" occurs.

&
r
( Data input mode selection )
i i Seiectthe "data I/O” screen.
See 4-3-14-1
'

[DATA INPUT] IN/OUT 1

Menu i #1 PART PROGRAM #11 PORT NO. 1
Press DATA-IN ) #2 TOOL DATA
#3 PARAMETER
#12 DEVICE NO. 0

<DEVICE> PPR
CRT 4 <BAUD RATE> 4800

DATA INPUT screen ) # 10 MODE

1 : IN
2: tcQMPj m
V_ Yellow The selected mode
Press 1 0 *# 1
is displayed in
yellow.
CRT

DATA INPUT screen

#(10) DATA ( S3)
9 4
Press the INPUT key Switch the mode from the compare mode to input
I mode.
CRT 4
( DATA INPUT screen
# 10
1:
Mode

I The mode becomes input

r
mode, and the color i
2: COMP changes to yellow. .i

.B
;

•• 4-145

B;-
V:

1
 !

4. OPERATION

4 c 4-3-14-3 inputting the machining program

4
) When inputting by paper tape

Select the input mode.

&

Connect the tape reader

Supplypower i
Set the paper tape j [DATA INPUT] IN/OUT 1
!

J#1 PART PROGRAM #11 PORT NO.

'
i
X ! #2 TOOL DATA
! #3 PARAMETER
#12 DEVICE NO.
1
0 I
M
See 4-3-14-2 <DEVICE> PPR
<BAUD RATE> 4S00 §
CRT I #10 MODE
(
V

DATA INPUT screen 1 I

2:
;; CÿMPYellow Selecting 1
When the tape When the tape has no prog
has program I number and the program n her
proqram numt
number

*I
must be newly added Note 2)

Press Press
v\m 2 0 0

CRT/
I CRT/
X 1
#( [7])DATA( ) #( 1 ) DATA ( 2 0@)
X 4 . 8
Press the INPUT key Press the INPUT key I
CRT/
T CRT/
T
DATA IN EXECUTIONÿ DATA IN EXECUTION
#{ 1 )DATA( 3 0 0) #( 1 ) DATA ( 2 0 0) 1
Input the data in the tape Notel) Input the data in the tape
I |

: IDATA IN COMPLETE
J

;| #( ) DATA ( )
Data input ends when the EOR code is read
I
I
Remove the paper tape from the
; tape reader
i 1,;

Disconnect the power and

disconnect the tape reader Ifll
!
Note 1) The “300“ of "data ( 300)" is the program number of the tape.
Note 2) If the tape has a program number, the program number on the tape is effective, even if I
another program number is given.

:
4-146
If
 4. OPERATION
I
;

J
c 4-3-14-4 inputting the too! offset data

1
)
1
1 Prepare the tape reader, and set the tape on the
li See 4-3-14-3 tape reader.
Then, select the input mode.
tit;; CRT I | [DATA INPUT] IN/OUT 1
1

«
is
C DATA INPUT screen
!#1 PART PROGRAM
!#2 TOOL DATA
| #3 PARAMETER
#11 PORT NO.
#12 DEVICE NO.
1
0 V:

m :
<DEVICE> PPR
1 <BAUD RATE> 4800

j# 10 MODE /-Yellow
:
5
* : m
'V:
:! 2: COMP l
Press 2
Set "tool data" as the data type.
I
CRT I
'0'. ( DATA INPUT screen
) !#( @)DATA( ) )
i T
1
II
Press the INPUT key
1
11 CRT I ! DATA IN EXECUTION
I
i
a C DATA INPUT screen ) ;#( 2) DATA ( )
I

I*
m Input the data in the tape
t

a CR'
! DATA IN COMPLETE

1
DATA INPUT screen ) #( ) DATA ( )
§

i
«!
I |
):

%
!

Disconnect the power and

I disconnect the tape reader
..J

I
SI
pit

8 !

4-147 II
m
1
1
n
i
i
! I

I?

sw
 i;

i
i

...
.

4. OPERATION

G
4-3-14-5 Inputting the parameters )
l Connect the tape reader, supply power, and set
See 4-3-14-3 the tape on the tape reader.
Then, select the input mode.
V
CRT
&
DATA INPUT screen
?
X I
d:
Press 3 Select parameter as the data type.

i'
X
CRT

DATA INPUT screen #({|) DATA ( )

1
X I&

Press the INPUT key

X 1
See 4-3-14-4 The data on the tape is input.
m

Note) Refer to the NC Unit Operator’s Manual for details on the tape format, etc.

!«

1 1

:i:
i

:ii
.

4-148
 4. OPERATION

c 4-3-14-6 Outputting the machining program

4
) When outputting onto the paper tape

Connect the tape punch, supply

% power, and set the tape on the
:

tape punch.

4- Then, select the data input/output.

See 4-3-14-1 [DATA OUTPUT] IN/OUT 2

Menu 1 #1 PART PROGRAM

#2 TOOL DATA
#11
#12
PORT NO.
DEVICE NO.
1
0
Press DATA-OUT ) #3 PARAMETER
<DEVICE> PPR i

: CRT 4- <BAUD RATE>

<1S0/EIA>
4800
ISO
1 DATA OUTPUT screen <TYTLE FEED> 1

i
i When outputting
X When outputting all registered

1 a
program 0200

Press Press
machining program

ill!
if 1
000 o 1
m OR
A L
ASS
L
ABS

X CRT/
X
CRT/
#( 1 )DATA( 2 0@) #( 1 ) DATA ( A 10)
1I
4- 1
Press the INPUT key Press the INPUT key

i
CRT/
X
CRT/
X
DATA OUT EXECUTION \ DATA OUT EXECUTION
#( 1 ) DATA ( 2 0 0) #( 1 ) DATA ( ALL)
0
Output the machining program Output the all the machining
onto the paper tape program onto the paper tape
i
, CRT/ DATA OUT COMPLETE
#{ ) DATA ( )

I
Remove the paper tape from the
tape punch, disconnect the
Note) Refer to the NC Unit Operator's Manual
power, and then disconnect the for details on the tape format, etc.
tape punch.

V:
4-149
v.

T: f:
L

i.;
 I

4. OPERATION
i
I .
&

c 4-3-14-7 Outputting the too! offset data or parameters

) When outputting onto the
paper tape

1
“r

See 4-3-14-6 Select the "data I/O" screen.

l [DATA OUTPUT] IM/OUT2 a

:'S£

|
CRT
DATA OUTPUT screen
) #1 PART PROGRAM
#2 TOOL DATA
#11
#12
PORT NO.
DEVICE NO.
1
0 1
#3 PARAMETER
a
W

When outputting
l
When outputting the
parameters
1
the tool offset data

The ’tool The

1
I
Press 2 offset data" Press 3 parameters'

J
is selected as
the data
type.
I
is selected as
the data type. I
CRT
#( {?]) DATA ( )
CRT/-
#( dj)DATA( )
) 1
5j
1
y‘Z
Press the INPUT key Press the INPUT key

i
CRT/'
#(
DATA OUT EXECUTION
2 ) DATA ( )
CRTV

#(
DATA OUT EXECUTION
3 ) DATA ( )
If

I
s
Output the tool offset data onto Output the parameters onto the
the paper tape paper tape

I
e!
l \

CRV DATA OUT COMPLETE N

#{ ) DATA ( )

1
I
Remove the paper tape from the
1 tape punch, disconnect the
power, and then disconnect the
tape punch

§
I
1
1
it
1

1
lie 4-150

*
l
 4. OPERATION

I
4-3-15 Others
I
'

5-1 Erasing the entire CRT screenÿ Erase the display on the CRT if the screen is not
monitored for some time, to prevent the screen to
deteriorate.
(5
CRT DISPLAY I
Press | POS.

l
CRT
POSITION screen
) The POSITION screen is displayed.

I
I Press the SHIFT

i
C.B.
CAN
keys ;

CRT
All the display is erased
)
is CRT DISPLAY I Note) Press one of the CRT DISPLAY keys. The selected
Press PROG. i

screen is displayed.

CRT/
i
PROGRAM screen ?

t
.
,
1
4-3-15-2 Reset :

iff Press the H key while operating in the background for editing or data input/output, to reset
not only the sections related to the displayed screen, but also the foreground including the machine
r
operation and the like. Use this function with care.
Normally background lock will be applied. See 4-1-2 (j4) .

I
I
1
1 4-151 I
1
$1

•:
 ;

;
:

'

4. OPERATION

4-3-15-3 interference check

V
This machine offers the following two kinds of interference check to prevent interference on the
machine.
1) Interference of theback spindle with No. 2 turret .
2) Interference of the separator with No. 2 turret .
Note 1) The interference area of No. 2 turret is set considering the tool-mount status. Therefore,
interference alarm occurs far before interference, if no toolis mounted.

v
• Interference check on/off by the PLC switch
The interference check is disabled by turning on the PLC switch #14, “INT. CHECK CAN”.
The interference checkis enabled when the power is supplied.
:
® Interference check on/off by the M code command
i The interference check can be enabled/disabled by the ft/I code, when interference check is
enabledby the PLC switch.
M88 : Disable interference check command (no interference check is done)
M89 : Enable interference check command
Note 2) Press the reset key while interference check is disabled by M88. to reset the disable status and
enable interference check.
Note 3) When the M89 command is given while the interference check is disabled by the PLC switch,
4
the program cannot proceed from the end-queuing status.

..

:i;

4-152
 4. OPERATION

j
4-4 INSTALLATION (E25/32)
4-4-1 Installing the Chuck
4-4-1-1 Mounting and exchanging the chuck

(1) Loosen the set screw, to pull out the spindle

H
cap from the headstock side cover.
£ IT Cap set screw
I

e
1
&
XI 0
Spindle cap
%

0
A s
r ;

Headstock side cover

(2) Set the hook wrench (standard attached tool)

on the cap nut, andinsert the tommy rod into
the spindle tommy hole, to loosen the cap nut
(the cap nut is a right-hand screw).
: i
(3) Turn the cap nut and remove it from the Tommy rod
spindle.
Hook wrench

c a :

Cap nut
Spindle cap

i
(4) Put the chuck into the chuck sleeve inserted i
into the spindle. If another chuck is already 5
mounted, hold the chuck, pull it forward to
remove the old chuck, and replace it with the jf. c Chuck sleeve
new one.
(5) Screw the cap nut into the spindle once more, Tr /•
Chuck
and use the hook wrench and tommy rod to ((m
tighten it firmly.
(6) Finally, push the spindle cap into the

J headstock side cover, and tighten it with the

set screw.
Q>
:

4-153

|-
;
\ :
:

:
!
i
I
 4. OPERATION

4-4-1-2 Adjusting the chucking force

!
; Lock screw
Chucking lever
i
Chuck adjustment nut

0
J

: K &
O

o *0

Strengtheÿlÿÿfeÿ! ©

Chuck OPEN/CLOSE tool o o

Open

%
(i

It o
!
£
£ Ql
o
o
Close O.
5
i

Bobbin

(1) Open the chuck with the spindle chuck OPEN/CLOSE button, and loosen the screw to remove the

;
headstock upper cover.
(2) Loosen the lock screw of the chuck adjustment nut on the rear side of the chuck claw holder.
(3) Turn the chuck adjustment nut, to move the chuck claw holder to the shaft direction.
r
(The chuck force strengthensby turning the chuck adjustment nut to the opposite side, while it
i; \ weakens by turning the nut to this side.)
(4) Press the spindle chuck OPEN/CLOSE button on to open/close the chuck andcheck the clamping I
force of the chuck.
(5) When fine adjustment is required, use the attached chuck OPEN/CLOSE tool to check the Vi!

clamping force by swinging the chucking lever.

(6) After adjustment, tighten the lock screw of the chuck adjustment nut firmly again.

I;:

If

4-154

I
 4. OPERATION

4-4-2 Installing the Guide Bushing

-I 4-4-2-1 Replacing the guide bushing device

; Guide bushing main body j

Guide bushing cover
1
tp
0/

u 0}

y
I
Guide bushing device

Set screw

9 The fixed type guide bushing device, as well as the standard synchronous type rotary guide bushing
1
a
device are provided.
(1) Remove the guide bushing cover.
? (2) Loosen the fixing bolts of the guide bushing flange mounted on the front of the guidebushing
1 device, and remove it.
I (3) Hold the flange andpull out the guide bushing device slowly to the front.
s (4) Insert the new guide bushing device into the mounting hole of the guidebushing main body.
(5) Tighten the fixing bolts firmly.

1
I
i,
s
1

I 4-155

I
|
 !$p

4. OPERATION

:E
!
4-4-2-2 Replacing and adjusting the guide bushing
(1) Loosen the lock bolt of the leading nut on the
i
i rear side of the guide bushing device.
(2) Insert the attached Y wrench pin into the
Guide bushing
main body
: leading nut tommy hole, and turnit to the Leading nut Guide bushing
counterclockwise direction to loosen the nut. device
'

(Hold the spindle cap nut by hand or insert the

\
attached tommy rod into the spindle tommy Guide
1 hole, to stop the spindle.) Lock screw bushing
(3) Turn and pull the guide bushing to the front of
the unit by hand.
r
(4) Insert the new guide bushing into the guide
bushing sleeve. (Match the phases of the key in
Guide bushing
1
! the sleeve with the key groove on the outer
sleeve
circumference of the guide bushing.)
(5) Screw the leading nut into the rear part of the
guidebushing, and turnit to the clockwise
:
direction to tighten the nut.
(6) Use the Y wrench to tighten the leading nut. Introduce thebar workpiece into the guide bushing,
I and move it to the shaft direction, to adjust the clearance of the guide bushing with the bar
workpiece.
(7) After adjustment, tighten the leading nut lock screw firmly. I
!'

1 .

V wrench
I
Loose
j.
I ©
Tight
;
:
! 1
j'\ Guide bushing main body 1
ft
'i

t
i
Leading nut

uy
y 4-156
 :

4. OPERATION I
j,
j
1
& 4-4-3 Replacing the Support Ring
;
When long-size material is rotated in high-speed, the rear end of the workpiece may swing. The support
1
ringmust be replaced to match thematerial diameter, because of stopping the swing.
Replace the ring as follows.
5
(1) Loosen the slide cover set screw, and move the slide cover to the right.
(2) Use the hook wrenchand tommy rod (standard attached tools) to remove the nut.
|P
(3) Replace the support ring, and assemble the slide cover following the opposite procedure.
i ft
Note 1) The dimensions of the support ring are as shown in the right figure.
: ) i\
Material Resin
Manufactured by NipponPolypenko
MC 801
•5 T
l

i-*8
018
->
2) The support ring must have at least 1 mm (in diameter) clearance with the maximum
diameter of the material or the push rod of bar feeder.
3) The rings provided in the standard specifications are 0d = 017 mm, 021 mm, 026 mm,

I 033 mm.
4) Support unit of different structure may be needed for some models of the automatic bar feeder. 1

**
II
II
:

1 Nut
\
Support ring
/
Support ring
Nut
!
!

TFH
\ ~1 I

r
:

;
-M i
m Z axis slide ‘
Spindle

Slide cover
\ 1 5
Slide cover
set screw

fit . j 1
Left side cover
tu i

i|

4-157
 '
;

4. OPERATION

4-4-4 Re-arrangement of Back Spindle Device

4-4-4-1 Mounting and exchanging the chuck

(1) Loosen the set screw, and remove the spindle

Back spindle
; cap.
headstock

Spindle cap
set screw

-
1
\
i

1
a
I Spindle cap
11
i

(2) Set the hook wrench (standard tool) on the

cap nut and insert the tommy rodinto the
1 tommy hole on the spindle, to loosen the cap
nut. (The cap nut is right handed.) 5°<s>
(3) Turn the cap nut to remove it from the Tommy rod <£"
spindle.
Hook wrench

M si#
I-
)
1 Cap nut

Spindle cap

(4) Put the chuck into the chuck sleeve inserted

into the spindle. If another chuck is already,
holdthe chuck, pull it forward to remove the
I old chuck, and replace it with the new one.
(5) Screw the cap nut into the spindle once more, Chuck sleeve
and use the hook wrench and tommy rod to
\ \ Cr*
tightenit firmly.
(6) Finally, fix the spindle cap firmly with the
;
iwJJi
%
m
i
set screw.

O' Chuck
7 6
1

i; 4-158
I
.if y
V 4. OPERATION
:
:
.

¥*
.

4-4-4-2 Adjusting the chucking force i

1 Adjust the back spindle chuck force by the hydraulic pressure. .

Turn the knob to the right to

strengthen, and to the left to
S weaken the chucking force.

*?:V H The correlation of the hydraulic

pressure and the chucking force is
o 0

as shownbelow. i
1 ||
rlj PI D
*
The followingis a proximate
value. The correlation differs
according to conditions as the
Hydraulic gauge
material, coolant, etc. (for back spindle i
\ chuck force)
Pressure
adjustment knob

Tar-

Note) Avoid empty chuck (chuck without workpiece) wherever possible, as it can cause motion
failure or may damage the chuck.
If empty chuck cannot be avoided, set the hydraulic pressure near 0.

Chucking force
.

300 :

P.
'

1
1
200
i

:
-35; 100 Z
1
r: z_
z_
A
%
!
P, 0 10 20 30 Hydraulic pressure

I
I
kgf/cm2

I
2
4-159
* ::v
 I

4. OPERATION

4-4-4-3 Replacing the knock-out jigs i

The knock-out jig may need

replacement in some form of
w.
'! workpiece (chuck diameter,
.45
through-hole diameter).

--
|
(1) Remove the chuck andchuck 30 5 10
sleeve according to the
procedure shown in 4-4-4-1.
& !i
“I
2
5
2 1 /

XL 1
TJ
10*0 2N v
:
8
9 -0.2

1
}
(2) Move the knock-out jig
forward (M10 command).
1
45

I 35 10 g
I H
.....—
La >'
d.
>. o

K
3
l ~a
10 —i
10
•

2N

Id
0
in
-0.25

(3) The knock-out jig will stick fjj

out of the forward end of the
10 25
spindle, so use the wrench to
>
replace the jig. 15
(4) Move the knock-out jig
backward (M11 command).
. Cl
H
C1
/
JN
Pi
Note) The three types as shown
in the right figures are '0
19 -0.35
\A / ST-;
3N
ij.

50
r prepared in the standard
specifications. 08. drill
Workpieces which
knock-out cannot be
done with these jigs may i
need to design special
knock-out jigs.
'
\

ii'
4-160 |
:!
 1
I 4. OPERATION

1
I
:

4-4-4-4 Adjusting the backward position of the knock-out jigs :V;

The chips can be kept out and the cycle time can be reduced by adjusting the backward position of the
knock-out jig with the workpiece length.
i
(1) Set the cylinder stopper at an appropriate position with the knock-out jig at the forward position
%
(M10 command).
(2) Fix the cylinder stopper firmly with two machine screws and two screw bolts.
(Example) Whenthe workpiece is inserted 50 mm inside the chuck from the front face of the chuck ;•
(310— 50)— (40 + 40 + 40+40+ 30 + 30+ 30) =260 250=10 10mm clearance — 1

I;
Notel) If the workpiece length changes, always check the knock-out jig position before
if machining If overload is applied on the knock-out jig, the error detection sensor detects
the overload and outputs an alarm.
2) Although the knok-out moving speed is regulated at a certain rate before shipment,
1 regulate it again according to the workpiece. The speed is regulated by adjusting the
1 hydraulic valve opening.(See Maintenance Manual for valve position.)
:i

i
I
i
1
. Knock-out position dead end Dimensions in ( )areforE25.
319mm :
m ,02) 310(308)

SO 260
r
I
:S: Knock-out jig
Chuck face
1 /

:ÿ

Screw bolt
IS, 15. 15. IS. 30 30 30 40 40 40 40
screw

4 T s
yOmm 320mm Cylinder stopper
I ; ICylinder stroke
A I I J i 320ÿm Knock-out

I
S'
:
Error detection sensor
— -dp
bracket

Knock-out
Knock-out pipe
\ bracket
I Machine screw ©
II j

4-161

1
V
1 ?

I i
 :

4. OPERATION

4-4-4-5 Replacing the chip-stop flange

A flange Is mounted on the end of the spindle cap to
prevent the chips to enter theback spindle.
(1) Remove the set screw, and take off the flange from
Chip-stop flange
the spindle cap.
V
(2) Mount the new flange on the spindle cap hole. Set screw \ /

Note 1) The following types of flange are provided in [ ] ./

/

the standard specification.

Nominal diameter (D) =
06 3 pcs
\
Spindle cap L_
032(025) 1pee Dimensions in ( ) are
for E25.
2) Bore the 6 dia. flange so that the hole
diameter is (0Dj) = D + 0.5 ± 0.1.

__
3) As shownin the following figure, flange
cannot be used for workpieces which sticks
-
2 a3.3. drill and
06.5 x 3.3 deep ,
out of the chuck face for 11mm or less.

5
l
ffi 1 CO.5
%i

j
co/ j J,
38 8

Materia! Bs

I
)
j
!
ff!— I
i
% B .HI

. .—.
CTF213 -CTF1013
LLT
=-!
HI
£21
--r-nj j 23=534.0

-HM
—if11 ill -t-
Zs =538.0
1B }- ,t

'! 4 !
3
7 A
IS, ft )
Dimensions in ( ) 75 -1 1(1 4)
Dimensions in (
13. 19 1(77) a re for E25.
I are for E25.
Chuck nose Chuck nose

4-162
 '•'i
4. OPERATION j;

H
4-4-5 Re-arrangement for Back Machining of Long Workpieces
E25, E32 back machining devices can machine or take out products of maximum 320 mm workpiece
length. When machining workpiece which length is 320 mm or more, the optional attachment "long
workpiece back machining adapter device" is required.

m
J: 4-4-5-1 Replacing the supporting guide
(1) Remove the chuck sleeve according to the procedure of 4-4-1.
(2) Take off the chuck and square spring from the chuck sleeve, and replace the supporting guide.
I (3) Mount the chuck sleeve according to the oppositeprocedure.

„ Note 1) Hole diameter (tfDi) = D + 0.3 ± 0.1 Dimensions in ( )areforE25.

I D: Use the supporting guide of the ij
I..;::, maximum workpiece outer diameter
ir 2) Bore the attached four Di = 0 6.3
A supporting guides, according to the L5 xrVZ&ZZM —rrcn 11
©<=
;L

S!
t
v
maximum outer diameter of workpiece.
'g.r
1 10 20

30

Material B$

/
.#
l
Coliet chuck Supporting guide
\
/
t 1 /

M If
ii
:I
s I >;

I i

Chuck sleeve
I)
,
Square spring

:::

I
:
S

4-163

U
 y

•3

4. OPERATION

i | '
4-4-5-2 Replacing the product unloading pipe

(1) Remove the right side cover.

s (2) Remove the knock-out bracket and knock-out
pipe of Figure 4-4-4-4. The knock-out bracket
For 08 or less I
is fixed by two machine screws (D. 0l4x<2
(3) Fix the product unloading pipe © matching 5
«i
022.2 x«2
I
II
the outer diameter of workpiece with
machine screw ®. Fors14 or less I
(4) Mount the long workpiece dedicated right as
side cover (bottom). B22.2 x«3
s.~j 030x12
i
i

I
; (5) Mount the flange on the long workpiece
dedicated right side cover (bottom). Insert For B20 or less !
[
the product unloading pipe ©, and fix it with
the machine screw ©. 025 x *1.5
c3 1.75 XM.5
1
(6) Adjust the flange position so that the centers
of the product unloading pipes © ©match. 1 !
(7) Place the long workpiece dedicated right side For 025 or less
.1 cover (top).
(8) Set the attached product stand. 031.75 x '2
040 x '2
D
Note) Three types of product unloadingpipes
For e32 or less
. ® © of dimensions as shown in the right iS
i figure are prepared.
s
038.1 x *2.5
044.5 x *1.5

jv Right side cover top

dedicated
U for long workpiece
: 1
Machine
screw ©
'
;

I
E rr Product unloading
pipe © f
r£ÿ II
I
TEpr 1 . N
§
5 /
Machine
/
Product unloading
FFlange
pipe @
screw ©
•

Long workpiece
dedicated cover

4-164
 4. OPERATION

1
£
I 4-4-6 Installing the Tool
4-4-6-1 Structure of the tool presetter
f :

The following is the structure of the tool presetter. 1

1 Too! holder mount for various models as EL42, E16/E20/E25/E32, F20/F25, F12/F16, G32, G16, RL20
etc. can be mounted on the tool presetter main body.

Projector
'
Screen
*:
I
1
Dial indicator

Arm
Light source lamp lens
- 1

X axis handle
Stage Slider
Petr Pressure claw
Clamp screw
£ÿ.; <s>. '

'o
X axis scale Tool holder mount
2 axis scale
0 !
V

I Ml
Slider clamper
8 ;
£’ÿ
e
a
Z axis handle Fuse
%
I
% On/off switch I

Base
£"!' .

i
n 3& I
y ;!j

S
.
.
:;v ?

i 4-165
i
V

;
:
 4. OPERATION

4-4-6-2 Replacing the light source lamp and fuse

E ( )
The projector light source does not light

4 4 1
;

c The light source lamp is out.

4
) c The fuse is blown.

4
) ft

i
-
Loosen the damp screw on the front of the Remove the fuse cap on the right side of the si
case mounted on the stage, and pull the base. l
flange out of the case. I
4 I
•
:«
4
Remove the light source lamp set in the
Replace the fuse with a new one, and fix the
fuse cap once more.
flange from the socket, and replace it with a
new one. i
4
Set the flange back into the case, and fix it
.
with the damp screw. if

• Use the electric lamp No. OP2101(thin rim)for optics of replacement lamp. 1

V:;

I! I
s
I
5
Si
if
I

1
IE

4-166
'i
I 1
'

4. OPERATION
$

I
4-4-6-S Reference position check procedure
$*'!
(1) Set both X and Z axes at the 0 position.
(2) Mount the master gauge on the 1st mounting Master gauge
1 position, and fix it with the clamp screw.
p
(3) Then, check that the reference cross at the center

.i
>ÿ?
I-;'
and master gauge image on the projector screen is
as shown in the right figure. If the reference cross
and the master gauge image do not match, turn the
& TT
0
handle to correct the position. Then, correct the
position of the scale ring fixed on the handle by-
loosening the clamp screw, and adjust the zero

i
position.
(4) Turn the dialindicator to let the probe touch the
end of the master gauge, and adjust the 0 position of
m
the dial scale board at the then indicator position.

i :

I
m
4-4-6-4 Mounting and checking the turning holder (CTF116, CTF113,etc.)
(1) Set both X and Z axes at the 0 position. This :
I
m
position is the standard nose position for front
turning and cut-off tools.
Therefore,when the tool to be set needs Z axis
j-

r-v direction offset (thread cutting, rear turning, etc.),

turn the Z axis handle to move for the necessary
offset amount from the 0 position.
& 0
ft (2) Temporarily hold the tool on the tool holder,
:

i
S
mount this on the 1st mounting position, and fix it
with the clamp screw. zh o :y
'
(3) Then, match the nose of the tool with the reference
si'.'
cross. Though the adjustment may differ
according to the form of the tool, normally adjust
IS j!

the tool so that the tool nose is at the position

S:
1 shown in the above figure (same as mater gauge
position).
(4) Turn the dial indicator to let the probe touch the
end of the tool rake face, andcheck that the then
s indicator is near the 0 position decided by the
master gauge. If the indicator is away from the 0
position, adjust the position with the base plate.

I (5) Fix the temporarily clamped tool clamp screw

firmly.
(6) Check again that the reference cross and the :
indicator match well.
(7) Remove the holder from the 1st mountingposition.
m 'V

;;

4 - 167

I
 I

i
:
:ÿ

4. OPERATION

4-4-S-5 Mounting and checking the drilling holder (CDF101, CDF401 etc.)

(1) For CDF1Q1, X axis is set to a position 25 mm

[0.98”] in [—) direction from 0 position and Z axis to
0 position. When attaching a sleeve to the outside
mounting hole on CDF401, X axis is set to a position
8.75 mm [0.34”] in (— ) direction from 0 position.
Also, when attaching a sleeve to the inside T
t
mounting hole on CDF401, X axisis set to a position (-)25 tO.98'3 > 9
11
41.25 mm [1.62”] in (-*) direction from 0 position. -
l( ) 8.75 [034']]
[{-) 4135 (1.62']]
It is the tool nose position of a standarddrill.
ztr
m
When an offset is required in Z axis direction, use
the Z axis handle to move Z axis a required offset
amount based on 0 position.
i
g
(2) Temporarily hold the sleeve where the drillis set, Si
on the holder, mount this on the 1st mounting
position, and fix it with the clamp screw.
(3) Shift the sleeve, and match the tool nose at the reference cross, as shown in the right figure.
(4) Tighten the sleeve clamp screw, and check the tool nose position once more.
(5) Remove the holder from the mountingposition.

4-4-6-G Mounting and checking the boring tool holder (CDF1Q1,CDF401 etc.)
*
1
(1) For CDF101, X axis is set to a position 25 mm
1 [0.98”] in (—) direction from 0 position and Z axis to
I 0 position. When attaching a sleeve to the outside
mounting hole on CDF401, X axis is set to a
position 8.75 mm [0.34”] in (— ) direction from 0 I,
position.
TJ
Also, when attaching a sleeve to the inside
(-) 2510.98'] \
mounting hole on CDF401, X axis is set to a 1(~) 8.75 1034']] ;

position 41.25 mm [1.62”] in (~) direction from 0 [(-) 4135 [1.62'J]

position. It is the tool nose position of a standard 7ÿ =
'f
boring tool.
When an offset is required in Z axis direction, vise
the Z axis handle to move Z axis a required offset
amount based on 0 position.
m
(2) Insert the boring tool into the sleeve, and fix the
1: sleeve on the holder at an appropriate position.
(3) Mount the holder on the 1st mounting position, and
fix it with the clamp screw.
(4) Shift the boring tool inside the sleeve, andmatch the tool nose at the reference cross, as shown in
the right figure.
J g
(5) Turn the dial indicator to let the probe touch the end of the boring toolrake face, and check that
fj
the thenindicator is near the 0 position decided by the master gauge. If the indicator is away :
from the 0 position, adjust the position by turning the boring toolinside the collet chuck.
(6) Tighten the sleeve set screw well, to fix the boring tool. II
(7) Remove the holder from the mountingposition.

4-168
 )
w 4. OPERATION

l: Mounting and checking the outer circle drilling spindle (KSC110, KSC910,
1 4-4-6-7
KSC31Q), outer circle tap spindle (KST110)

(1) For outer diameter spindle and outer diameter

tapping spindles, set X axis to a position 15 mm
[0.59”] in( +) direction and Z axis to a position 25 I

g
%
(2)
mm [0.98”] in (—) direction from 0 position.
Temporarily mount the tool on the collet chuck,
mount the holder on the mounting position, and
& rjnr
{* >1510.59']
fix this with the clamp screw.
f (3) Shift the tool to match the tool nose at the
_
I reference cross, as shown in the right figure. £
g,
(4) Tighten the cap nut, and fix the tool with the
collet chuck.
m-I
z
(5) Check again the tool nose position, and remove
the holder from the mounting position.

Note) Setting of KSC2 16 is done by using a slide calipee and conforming to the procedure
I given in Tooling (Page 6-59).

4-4-6-8 Mounting and checking horizontal milling spindle (KSM110)

(1) Adjust the X axis at the (— ) direction 25 mm

[0.98”J position and the Z axis at the (+) direction
25 mm [0.98”] position. This position is where
the tool nose matches the center of the workpiece
center. Therefore, move the Z axis for the
necessary offset amount, using the handle, from
|3ÿ TT n
(-)25f0.9Sn
this position. For instance,when 2-face
machining of 10 mm [0.39”] widthis to be
performed. Move the Z axis 5 mm [0.20”] to the
£
—
( ) direction, to adjust the position at the (+) zH on .
direction 20 mm [0.79”] position.
(2) Secure the tool to the collet chuck temporarily,
turn the spindle 90° and attachit to the mounting
position, and fix with a clamp screw.
(3) Shift the tool so that the tool nose matches the
$
(4)
reference cross.
Tighten th cap nut, andhold the tool with the
t
collet chuck.
(5) Check gain the tool nose position, and remove the
,;iv holder from the mounting position.
V
,;g

;T

4-169

g-
 ;

!
-
]
4. OPERATION

4-4-6-9 Mounting and checking horizontal milling spindle (KSM406)

—
(1) Adjust the X axis at the ( ) direction 20 mm
[0.79”] position and the Z axis at the (+) direction
25 mm [0.98”] position. This position is where
the tool nose matches the center of the workpiece
center. Therefore, move the Z axis for the
necessary offset amount, using the handle, from
la*,
i this position. For instance,when 2-face
ichining of 10 mm [0.39”] width is to be
(->2010.79-3

! performed. Move the Z axis 5 mm [0.20”] to the £

(— ) direction, to adjust the position at the (+) 2 C-

(2)
direction 20 mm [0.79”] position.
Secure the tool to the collet chuck temporarily,
turn the spindle 90° and attach it to the mounting
H! l

position, and fix with a clamp screw.

(3) Shift the tool so that the tool nose matches the
reference cross.
(4) Tighten th cap nut, andhold the tool with the
collet chuck.
(5) Check gain the tool nose position, and remove the
holder from the mounting position.

4-4-6-10 Mounting and checking the face drilling spindle (KSE110, KSE310),
face tapping spindle (KST510)
'

—
(1) Adjust the X axis at the ( ) direction 25 mm
[0.98”] position and the Z axis at the 0 position.
This position is the standard drill nose position.
If Z axis direction offset is required, turn the Z

i (2)
axis handle to move the Z axis for the necessary
offset amount, from the 0 position.
Temporarily hold the drill on the collet chuck, and
&* 1
1
{->2510.98-3
mount the holder on the mountingposition.
Then, fix it with the clamp screw.
8 (3) Shift the tool so that the tool nose matches the
Z t.
(4)

(5)
reference cross, as shown in the figure.
Tighten the cap nut, and check the tool nose
position once more.
Remove the holder from the mounting position.
m
I

4-170
 I !

4. OPERATION
]:
!

4_4-5_1 f Mounting and checking the slitting spindle (KSS260, KSS660)

The slitting cutter is positioned using the combination of the attached spacers. )ÿ
(1) Combine the spacers so that the dimension of the 2-face width to be machined becomes "b".

(2) a = 17[0.67”] — “!r2 — t

t : cutter width
Combine the spacers at “a”by the above expression.
(3) c = 39 - (a + b + 2t)
Combine the spacers at "c" by the above expression.
1
(4) Perform the machining, and readjust the error by changing the spacers.

i
1

t b t ']ÿ
;
I
: ;
h-
gT~j (V//A

i
m u u
17 j0.67*]

39 [1.S4*] Spacer (standard)

1:
I
S
t
i i
''tv1

I ;

I
!
4-171 I:
i
.
tig

*
1
I i

m ;
 i

4. OPERATION

;
4-4-6-12 Mounting and checking the side cutter spindle (KSF160)
Mount the side cutter in combination with the attached spacer.
Note) The Z axis direction shift amount is decided by the dimensions shown below and the side cutter
width.

(I;
i

rh

£
;

r
[k
&ni \

L.J
Max.14 3
|l0.55-3| [0.12-;

Program reference 25
[0.98*3 Spacer
position
(standard, t=2mm [0.08"] : 2 pcs; 3 mm [0.12"] : 1 pee)

f
f
:•

i
|

1
;; .

,i

1
4-172

»
 !ÿ

K 4. OPERATION
8 1!•

1
!S
4-4-6-13 Presetting the 20-division tooling \COMBl/ tooling (option)
'
:T ,
'
1
1) Setting the tool holder set plate
(1) Fix the 20-division tooling set plate (KTPZ1Q1), with the standard set plate being held in it,
il on the tool holder mount (CTP101) and secure it with a screw. (Position ® in the figure).

I
8
(2) Remove the standard CTP1Q1 clamp base, and mount the clamp base for KTPZ101.
(3) Remove the CTP101 clamp rod from the CTP101 clamp base and insert it to the KIPZ101
:

si
v. clamp base.
(4) Secure the clamp plate (KTPZ101) with the mounting screw (CTP101) and attach a hold

% plate.

Clamp rod
Pressure plate IcfpToi)
Clamp plate
(KTPZ101) \ j (CTP101)
Clamp base

v
Set screw
(CTP101) A :
~7
j(KTPZ101)
1!
20-division tooling
set plate _ U
Standard set plate
(KTPZ101) (CTP101)

na I
ru~
:S

irv
j:
/ >1 \
3=5 j
X
Tool holder mount
(CTP101) ,
Set position ®/
4 3 43, ;
Set position ® -bA- i
J

30
[MS'] : 1

I il :
!>

Note 1) The tool on the standard position is preset by the normal setting method, removing this set ;ÿ

plate (KTPZ1Q1). (Position ® in the above figure) ,i i

2) KTPZ101 clamp base can be used for clamping the standard tool holder.

i
:
i
-
1

4-173

r.
 I

I
3

4. OPERATION
111

2) Mounting and checking the 20-division too!

2-1) Mounting and checking the KTFZ216

(1) Set the toolholder as shown in the figure, 11

Standard set plate
1
and fix it firmly with the set screws.
(2) Set a tool at position CD only.
(3) The standard tool nose position inX
hJ
r"
n (CTP1Q1)

direction is at 0 position. itz j

\ T
i
hi ®T V
\
I

Z!C.-ME
ft 1

:: (4) Pre-setting of the tool ©is done after the 20-division

4W
set plate (KTPZ101) is being set. tooling set plate
(KTP2101)
The standard tool nose position in X I
; directionisat +30 mm [1.18”) from 0
/ :
position.
V
O !

;rs

i II
30
y Il.tS'J

!
1

: !

4-174

I
 1 4. OPERATION

2-2) Mounting and checking the KDFZ201

i
(1) Set the sleeve holder as shown in the
figure, and fix it firmly with the set
screws.
(2) Set the two sleeves (D and <D in this order.

I
(3) This sleeve holder is for forward,
backward two-way machining. After
setting the front-machining tool by the
HU Standard set plate
/ (CTP101)
presetter, measure theback machining
tool with calipers and set it on the holder.
o
T®
|
Note) The dimensions below becomes standard
position in Z direction whenit measured
by calipers to set on the holder.
rn

20-division tooling

111 .set plate

(KTPZ101)

r®

&
"1

148mm

40 65 43

a ! rr —i
\

i
!
""

1
1
I
I
1
.no ri

LJ

11

4-175
;

If
t

i
:

1
4. OPERATION

2*3} Mounting and checking the KDFZ401 11

(1) Set the sleeve holder as shown in the
figure, and fix it firmly with the set
screws.
/
(2) Set the tool on position(D using the set Standard set plate
ring, andclamp the set ring with a screw. CD /{CTPW)
(3) After setting, remove the sleeve with the /
set ring on.
© ©

1'
ffl I
j

(4) Set the tool on positions CD and (D once

more. (Without the set ring.)
I (5) Remove the toolholder from the presetter. Sleeve holder
ft (KDFZ401)
(6) Insert to set the tool set in the above (2)
Set ring
into©. \
\

I
Note) Following dimensions and positions
apply to a setting done by use of a slide
:
caliper.
;
;
i I 73mm

—
4>.
I J
;
W
S>!
!

0 !

I
€f=r-
fÿ-i — - irn
i
;
r-T
I i
if :
---- I I

D
i

a U

4-176
1 1
fi 4-4-6-14 Setting the back machining too!
4. OPERATION

The back machining is normally done by the turret No. 2, but in the turret No. 2, either “front ;ÿ

machining” or “back machining” can be performed just by changing the direction of the same holder.
(Also same for the rotary tools.)
Therefore, no special tool setting is required for back machining on the standardholder.
However, the tool is set on the two-way machining holder that can perform machining on both sides
on a single holder,in the standard way for front machining, and special way for back machining.

i;! 1) Back machining reference position

The reference position for back machining is 148 mm [5.83”] shifted to the Z axis direction against
the reference position for front machining.

FH ij] iki
t
I
3
s tea
s i
4#> 10.12 -?[ 73 [2.87*3 j
1148 {5.83'] I
UT w
8
ll 1_
::

a
,1
a_ ir~ 1
73 [2.87*]
| 148 15.83*1 j 3 1
10.12-1 10.12 ']J 1 148 IS.83*} )

4-177

:
 :

4. OPERATION

2) Setting by scale

Use calipers and scale, etc. to set at;

148 mm [5.83”] from the front machining reference position
or
43 mm [1.69”] from the back face.

!! ! !
v
j

4L—( ILJi
jS
i
a T £1

r
©

j © '

i i\dJ i
fri
j43
|H.69*11 3 40
til ~

3 10.12'J 11.57*1 [1.69*1

****![ j.10.12*! [148 [5.83*1 148 tS.83*}

1
v
3) Setting by the presetter
: (1) Fix the holder by the clamp lever holding
the back machining tool set plate

&
(KTP102).
(2) The 5 mm [0.20”] to the X axis (—)
direction and 23 mm [1.10"] to the Z axis •T1
(-15 10.20*1
(— ) direction position is the standard tool
i
nose position of theback machining tool.

zHl
I

K
m
I T>

!
r
s

......
i
II
r-'o-
i: C7i
<q il
fÿj
Sr ~L__jil position
\
Too! holder mount
(CTP101)
Ts" i | 20
10.20*1 i 7012.76*1 (0.79*3
1
Back machining tool setting plate
(KTP102)

1
1
||
4-178
 4. OPERATION

4-4-6-15 Mounting the too! holder

!
Note 1) Tighten the holder set screws firmly.
2) Always cover blank turret faces. ; y

3} Always place the cap on the overall mounting surface of the turret No.2.
i

i Cover Cap

Turret No.2
i
J
Cover
Holder //

/
:
7
Q. Cap
/oÿH
a, i
Holder set screw : I
:
a Front machining mounting
* i Turret No.1

*
$
I

Cap
Oj, *yz
v. »
O >-s
0Dÿ Q
t.°Q
K:
1
%
i
n
i
1
I
£;
4-179
Back machining mounting

|
I
I
,

!
 I

4. OPERATION
\l

4-4-7 Setting the Workpiece

Clamp pulley
!
Clamp lever
Push-cord Stopper lever
Workpiece
stand
I,

I
: r I
Workpiece tube
.

Clamp knob
%
j/Ss
Centering screw / I
(vertical direction)/
Centering screw
(horizontal direction)

Tube support block

" EE
(1) Check that the workpiece tube and the spindle are centered correctly. If not, adjust the
| workpiece tube using the centering screw (vertical, horizontal screws) so that it is correctly
aligned with the spindle.
i.
(2)
(3)
Hold the wing at the end of the push rod inside the workpiece tube.
Open the chuck to pull out the remaining workpiece from the guide bushing, and hit it from the
I
front of the spindle to the back.
I (4) When the remaining workpiece jumps out of the rear end of the spindle,pull this completely
inside the workpiece tube.
(5) Loosen the clamp knob of the workpiece stand to slide the workpiece tube along the slide shaft,
and pull it out together with the tube support block.
> (6)
(7)
Pull out the remaining workpiece to the front of the workpiece tube.
Insert a new bar materialinto the workpiece tube. I
(8) Pull downthe clamp lever, while holding the bar material firmly, to reset the clamp of the push-
cord.
(9) Completely insert thebar material into the workpiece tube.
(10) Pull the clamp lever once more, to clamp the push-cord.
(11) Slide the workpiece tube along the slide shaft, and returnit till thehorizontal direction
centering screw hits the stopper washer.
(12) Tighten the clamp knob firmly, to clamp the slide shaft.
: (13)
(14)
Retrieve the cut-off tool by jogging to tool change area till the indicator lights.
Hold the push-cord and pull the clamp lever to reset the clamp of the push-cord. Release the
push-cord and move the push-rod forward by the force of the weight, to send the bar material into
the spindle.
§
(15) When the bar material comes out of the front end of the spindle through the chuck, hold the
workpiece, and pass it through the guide bushing.
(16) Chuck the workpiece when the tip can be seen from the opening of the guide bushing.
(17) Cut off about 10 mm [0.39”] of the end of the workpiece by jogging, or MDI operation, as
necessary.
(18) Retrieve the cut-off tool once, and perform reference point return.
(19) Open the chuck once more, to check that the front end of the workpiece touches the cut-off tool.
: Note) The jogging, etc. in the above description can be performed by a touch of the button, under the
operation preparation mode.

i;

4-180
 Ivs
•;
.
!

i'.

i;
y,

i
i}
*

-)
i

:
:

ft
:
ft

:
.1
i

!h

;-.V.
i
;V-

in

.*•

V
\) S
.1
)

i
! I
i!
:
m
5 i

i
.. i'
i it
S:
5 ;
V
1 ft

r<: / ft y.

v
. ;S
/ 1

yi i
«•* tt* i.
;

4 A

,v

%
ij
ft
ft *
v
i

!
’ÿv

;
!:
:
;
h
j
i :!

i:

i?
.. V:>V;vu I•/»•••*VV/%••••« v •;s>v \v.*> < \Vs\-.

[:'•

):'ÿ

it
f Oj

i::

:
i!
i
;;
ft
;!

y
•:
iV

'

ft
ft
|V':
::
: ft
 :ÿ

1!
::
:

? -

j.

;
!!

j;
I

i
:

; I
V

I:
I- r.
;

:
It:
ii
(4 '
I 4

I;
1; ) m

'

Product code C 7 ! 4 !5 0 i

|
Document code 1!E — 0i0 0|0
 I,
11
5. PROGRAMMING
*

;
-V

5. PROGRAMMING
5-1 BASIS OF PROGRAMMING 5- 5
5-1-1 What Is an NC Program? 5- 5
5-1-2 Programming Procedure . . 5- 7
5-1-3 Basic Program Configuration . 5-10
5-1-4 Controlled Axes 5-15
s 5-16
5-1-5 Coordinates .

!
5-1-5-1 Coordinate system 5-16 : i
5-1-5-2 Various fixed points . . 5-17
5-1-5-3 Diameter designation 5-19 :
i
5-1-5-4 Sign and coordinate value 5-19
5-1-5-5 Coordinate system setting 5-20
5-1-5-6 Absolute and incremental 5-21 '

5-1-5-7 Interference check region and turret swing radius 5-22

!
5-2 PROGRAM COMMANDS 5-23
i
4.. 5-2-1 Summaryof Addresses Used in the NC Program 5-24
V 5-2-2 Address |<f] (G Functions) 5-26
:
5-2-2-1 Rapid feed (GOO) 5-28
jl 5-2-2-2 Linear interpolation (G01) 5-29
a 5-2-2-3 Circular interpolation (G02, G03) . 5-30
S-2-2-4 Dwell (G04) 5-32
;ÿ 5-2-2-S Product separate (G201) G code macro commands 5-33
S-2-2-6 Last program (G999) G code macro commands 5-35
5-2-3 Address jF~| (Cutting Feedrate) 5-36 V

5-2-4 Address ji\/F] (M Functions) 5-37

5-2-5 Address jiT] (S Functions) 5-42
1 5-2-6 Address
5-2-6-1
ff~l (T Functions)
E16/E20type
5-43
5-43
I 5-2-6-2 E25/E32 type 5-44
5-2-6-3 Address jf~] (T Functions) 5-45
I 5-2-6-4 Tool offset (simply offset for short) . 5-46
5-2-7 jT] Queuing Program 5-49

5-3 MULTI-AXIS MULTI-LINE 5-51

5-3-1 Machining Patterns, Axes Belonging to Each Line, and Superimpose 5-52

5-3-2 Machining Patterns and Machining Commands 5-53

5-3-2-1 Twin turret (G710) 5-53

i G71-l~ (W2105-) Issue

Serial G32-1-
Code (W5158-) 1994. 7
5-1 No. No. M9001- (W6001-) Date
I

.
i
\
.

«
:
f

:
;

1 :
;
'i;

: 5. PROGRAMMING

1
S-3-2-2 Two-sadd!e (G720) 5-53 u
5-3-2-3 Back/front simultaneous machining (G730) 5-59 1
S-3-2-4 Three-Line simultaneous machining (G740) 5-62
.
5-3-2-5 Pick off, center support machining (G750)
5-3-3 Machining Pattern Transfer
5-65
5-68
1
;ÿ
5-4 ACTUAL PROGRAMMING [TURNING] 5-71 'I
5-4-1 Overall Program Configuration 5-72 1
: y
: 5-4-1-1 Program configuration 5-74
:
5-4-1-2 Machining plan 5-74

i)
5-4-2 Preparatory and Cut-off Process
5-4-2-1 Preparatory process
5-75
5-75
m
: S-4-2-2 Cut-off and ending processes 5-78
5-4-3 Machining Process 5-80
:
5-4-4 Center Hole Machining 5-84
5-4-4-1 Center drilling 5-85
S-4-4-2 Drill 5-86
S-4-4-3 Thread cutting by tap and die . 5-88
S-4-4-4 Tapping process (Example of machining M8 P = 1.25) 5-89
I
5-4-5 Thread Cutting with Tool 5-90 'v:
5-4-5-1 G92 thread cutting canned cycle . 5-90
$-4-5-2 G92 taper thread cutting canned cycle 5-93
5-4-6 Boring (Coordinate System Shift) 5-94
5-4-6-1 Diameter direction coordinate system shift
and coordinate system shift cancel 5-94
I
:
5-4-S-2 Longitudinal direction coordinate system shift
and coordinate system shift cancel . 5-95 ,
:
:
5-5 ACTUAL PROGRAMMING [APPLICATION] 5-99
5-5-1 Subprogram 5-100 :
5-5-1-1 Deciding the machining drawing and tool layout 5-101
5-5-1-2 Programming (Main program and subprogram) 5-102
5-5-2 Constant Surface Speed Control 5-103
/

5-5-3 Spindle Speed Change Detecting Function 5-105

i
5-5-4 Cut-off tool breakage detection (M50) on back spindle operation 5-106 %
i;
5-6 ACTUAL PROGRAMMlNG[COMPLEX MACHINING] 5-107 iff
5-6-1 Secondary Machining 5-108 i
.
5-6-1-1 Difference between turning and secondary machining 5-108
5-6-1-2 Machining sequence 5-108 1
5-6-2 Secondary Machining Spindle . 5-109

'

{
5-2
 I

5. PROGRAMMING

! 5-6-2-1 Tool spindle speed 5-109

|
5-109
a S-6-2-2 Turret and mounting spindle
5-6-3 Coordinates . - 5-110
;
5-6-3-1 Coordinate value and sign 5-110
I S-6-3-2 Coordinate shift and tool position 5-111 ;

S-6-3-3 Main shift programs and program points . 5-113

5-S-3-4 How to use the coordinate system shift program . . 5-117

| 5-6-4 Connection of Turning and Secondary Machining 5-119

I
5-6-4-1 When transferring from turning to secondary machining 5-119 >!ÿ

5-6-4-2 When transfering from secondary machining to turning .... . 5-120

S-6-4-3 Rough form of program including secondary machining 5-121
5-6-5 Indexing 5-122
.

* 5-6-5-1 Spindle indexing angle and indexing command 5-122

S-6-5-2 Secondary machining spindle position relation (Except E32IV) ...... 5-123
i
5-6-S-3 Rough form the indexing program 5-124
v
S-6-5-4 Back spindle indexing command 5-125 ;;
5-6-5-S Interference preventive restrictions for secondary machining spindles
used in back machining ...... ......
.. — .. 5-125
'
5-6-6 How to Calculate the Command Speed 5-126
I 5-6-6-1 How to calculate the spindle speed value
— . .. 5-126 i;
I
1 S-6-6-2 How to calculate the tool feedrate 5-127

I 5-6-7 Example of Secondary Machining . 5-128

:

m 5-6-7-1 Cross center, drill, tap (E16/E20) ..

.
5-128
i
S-6-7-2 Milling, slitting (E25/E32) (Except E321V ) . 5-130
1 5-6-7-3 Example of continuous indexing lead grooving (G01 command) . 5-132
I
1 5-7 MULTIPLE-LINE PROGRAM 5-135

1
I
5-7-1 Application of Multiple-Line Program
5-7-2 Transition between patterns
5-136
5-136
‘ i

I 5-7-3 Application of the Machining Patterns : 5-137

t 5-8 PROGRAM EXAMPLES ... 5-145 l
«ÿ Example 1 Outer diameter turning (Basics) 5-146
1
t
Example 2 Center hole drilling, boring, outer diameter turning, and thread cutting 5-149

i Examples Secondary machining

Example 4 Back machining
5-153
5-160 !. ;

1 5-9 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 5-169

1 5-9-1 Automatic Bar Feed (Content without back machining standard operation) 5-170
5-9-2 Tool Nose R Compensation < Option> 5-172
i
»
I 5-3

1
!
i
8
1
1
I
 i

5. PROGRAMMING

5-9-3 Multipie Thread Cutting Cycle< Option> 5-175

5-9-3-1 Thread cutting command 5-175
S-9-3-2 Program Sample 5-176
S-9-3-3 Line Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle I ..... 5-177
5-9-3-4 Notes upon double thread screw start position 5-178
5-9-4 Long Workpiece Machining (Option) U421B, U422B 5-179
5-9-4-1 Remaining Workpiece in A Long Workpiece Machining 5-180
S-9-4-2 An Example of Long Workpiece Machining 5-181
5-9-5 Milling Interpolation <Option> 5-185
5-9-5-1 Milling Coordinate 5-185
5-9-S-2 Milling Plane 5-185
5-9-S-3 Program Format 5-186
if : l S-9-5-4 Coordinate Calculation for Milling . 5-187
5-9-S-5 Precautions for Your Programming 5-188
'

5-9-5-6 Milling Offset 5-190

S-9-5-7 Program Sample 5-191
jj 5-9-5-8 List of alarms 5-197

!
5-9-6 Spindle Synchronization <Option> . .. 5-198
5-9-6-1 Command Format 5-198
5-9-S-2 Program Sample 5-199
5-9~6-3 Selective Use of Spindle Synchronous Control 5-201
S-9-6-4 How to Adjust R (Phase Shift) ... 5-201
5-9-7 Hob Machining ... 5-202
5-9-7-1 Command Format ... 5-202
S-9-7-2 Program Sample . .. . 5-203
5-9-7-3 Gear Formula ... 5-204
5-9-7-4 Speeds, Rotation Direction, and Restrictions ... 5-205
5-9-8 Y Axis Machining ... 5-206
5-9-8-1 Machining Form and Spindle ... 5-206
S-9-8-2 Stroke ... 5-206
S-9-8-3 Y Axis Machining Mode ... 5-207
S-9-8-4 Process by Process Comparison of Secondary Machining Spindles ... 5-208
S-9-8-5 Program Creation [A sample] ... 5-209
I
5-10 CUTTING CONDITIONS 5-213 li
5-10-1 Cutting speed and feedrate 5-214
5-10-2 Thread cutting count with tool 5-217
5-10-3 Secondary machining cutting condition table 5-218

I,5 5-10-4 Cutting feedrate reference table 5-219

\
3
5-4
 5. PROGRAMMING

5-1 BASIS OF PROGRAMMING

5-1-1 What is an NC Program?

NUMERICAL CONTROL PROGRAM

I What is an NC? What is a program?
%

r
C A device that feeds numerical information
(command) to the processing device, to control
the movement of themachine.
X A method to controlthe machine according
to a predecidedprocedure.

The NC program is a group of commands necessary to move the machine by the NC (numerical control
)
unit). Simple combinations of numerals and alphabets are used as command language. The language
is
1 is designed for the optimum understandingby the NC unit and optimum use of the programmer.
Before giving details on the NC program, why not try the following simple quiz? _
£

Q.
--------
Use the following four commands to complete the code to move from A to B in the
following figure.
I) T G01 J Move straight to OO.
II) FG02J Move circularly to OO.
HI ) F M03 J Turn on the start switch. X50
N)

Codes
fM04J Turn on the “goal-in" switch.

X40
’A i
S
0 M03 (Turn on the start switch.)
1 G01 X10 ZO (Straight move to 4
X=10,Z=0.) X30
2 G01 X10 Z10 (Straight move to
6 5 3
X=10,Z=10.) X20
3( ) X20 Z( ) (Straight move to
X = 20,Z= 10.) 2 i
4 G02 X( ) Z20 (Circular move X10 1
X = 30, Z = 20.)
5( )X( )Z( ) (X = 20,Z = 20**) 10 0
6( )X( )Z( ) (** from X = **, Z = **) X0
Z50 Z40 Z30 Z20 Z10 ZO
7. ( )X( )Z( ) (**fromX = **,Z **)
8(
9(
)X(
)X(
)Z(
)Z(
)
)
*
(** from X = **,Z = **)
(** fromX = **,Z = **) IB
I
A
10( )X( )Z( ) (** from X s= **, Z = **)
11 ( ) (Turn on the "goal-in*
switch.)

The NC program is roughly the same as the above code. The following product can be created if a tool
moves along the path.

5-5

;ÿ

:
 I
I

5. PROGRAMMING

What are differences between cam control and NC control ?

Cam control Numerical control (NC)

Cam
[ FI unrT)
shaft
I
IHrO
i!

zzz

|
721

r vw
ZZZ
Where is
the
n Si
9
SB
&
brain of
the m
machine
I
<£ÿNCprogramÿ>
i ?
I
m.
Oj -=<£) ,

I 2
i '
<ÿMechanicaTÿ> CÿctriQ
The up down movement of the cam is transmitted
directly to the mechanism, via the follower to lever. The information of the program is converted into &
How do
electricsignal, to affect the movement of the motor
drive, switch on/off, etc.
1
.",0,..
' .

<ÿAnalogÿ>
you
operate
<C~DigitaP> I
i
the The NC program is created, andthe operation
The cam is first designed. The up down movement
of the cam against time is continuously given. machine
?
commands are constructed step by step, according to
the process. I
i
Use chuck I
Elevation \ I 1 (in 2000 r.p.m)
IS
Rotate the spindle
amount
I 1
Time I Selectfrontturning tool and perform positioning ]
<ÿTcycie is angular]ÿ
What is
t
Ill I The entire process must be completed within 360 °. a
program
1 cycle islinear~~ÿ>
As many commands as possible can be connected.
4 like?
1
•:!
n
Re- '

turn
i
m
® Limitation to complex and long-time © No limitation however long or however
machining complex the machining is.
..Si
Cjfardware CÿSoftwarePÿ>
I
I;
The cam formation, or the metal machining of the
cam itself must first be done. Which is
easier ?
Just type the commands according to the decided way.
The program can easily be rewritten. 1
|fj
# Time and labor is required to setthe cam. © Very short time is required for the . 4,

preparatory stage.
; ® Correction and change is difficult. © Correction and alteration is very easy.
® Storage is difficult. © Storage does not required much space. The
program can be stored as long as necessary.
# Requires large cost to form the cam.
I ® Only one kind of cam can be set on one
© Once programming is acquired, the program
can easily be made at any workshop.
I machine. © Multiple types of program can be stored on a
single machine, to be selected as necessary.
f
:
l:

4.
;
5-6
I
 5. PROGRAMMING

5-1-2 Programming Procedure

(Done by the programmer)
Material : S45C
<£> Drawing (Carbon steel for structure)
R5
•The drawing is the basis of the
NC program.
sfEE EH S 5
1
1
13
isic
. 16
50

<|> Create the tool Iayout.

T20
®T2Q ©T21 3
Describe the rough form,
dimension of the width, and Til
the number of the tool.

430®©T12 ©Til
3
T21

T12 '
5
<3> Create the machining layout. @T20 @T2l

«
I
(Process recognition)

•Describe the used tool number,

O
I
path, and cutting procedure.
•Give the process numbers. IBt
.

©T12 ©Tit
(Plan 1 !ineG710)
<§> Structure the machining. ® ©' ©
.. (Plan 2 line G730)
n
* iH v*
fi •Decide the machining pattern.
I
*
r
<|> Set the spindle speed and
feedrate.
©
* ©

1
&
•Select the appropriate cutting F0.02
F0.Q2 (S1=2000)

conditions.

I Cutting speed
Infeed amount
Feedrate
» F0.06 (SI = 2000)

*1
F0.06
*;
To next page F0.02

5-7

m
V

;ÿ

|;
 ;

5. PROGRAMMING

(10.0. 16.0)
<t> Read the coordinates values. (20.8.37.4) (16.0.29.0) f(10.0.8.0)

(-4.0.50.0) (7.9. -0.4)

y
(10.0.50.0)
-3 .(15.0. 16.0)

(12.0,40.0)
(15.0.29.0)
(16.0.28.S)-
-
(16.0;16.5)
<2> Perform coding to create the
program.
04321 y;
- Describe on a paper what tools $1 $2 $3
are used, to where, what kind
of machining pattern, under
what machining conditions,
according to the rules.
:

n <t> input the program I

I
•Type the program on the paper
input the machining data.
into the NCunit.

..

f Re-editing — i
0
«j
200
O.fc 16.8a.
imOttoeatt »»» *!*.Kltt J 2

0.0a.
No <|> Measure the No Master 2 wans.* «. 2.8a. 50.0a.
need machining time registration 3 osj-csr am T10 9 WKSWiOB 2,
of « Off-or# vas 200a„ T15
•Ifthe time measurement result in “No“,
<t> the machining program is registered
8.02a™
V. <$> 20.80. yy
into the master and editing is done
1 Yes again.
i xma |vw»I T ! 1 i r
5 Then, the time measurement is done 1 f
once more, comparing with the
l machining time registered in the master.
•When the operator is satisfied by the
Input the tool arrangement data.
measuring, progress to the next process.
4

<$> Program check (simulation) pr *.«*

f aSps
il
1! 11
X<U
FIT
-or .raw
• Check the program and the interference by irtTta 8
m «MS
the simulation.
:ÿ - Correct the program if necessary.
4 'tm, «.•»

i<m Ji»5.>«r|wot»»I 1 I i r 1 ft»

i
To next page

4
i
y

m
5-8

It
 !
5. PROGRAMMING

!
i

From previous page

14
:

!jf

£ <0> Check on machine "i

::

Check the actual operation (tool

&
8>
•
movement, etc.) on the machine.
(Dry run)
•Set the material, and check the
1. actual cutting.
I I;
(Complete the item on the drawing
by compensating the dimensions.)
1 (To be done by the operator.)
<&> Continuous operation
(machining)

I
IK
* Machine as many products as required.

i
:v
<#> End J
-ÿ

:Ti The above completes all the work from programming to continuous machining.
I
1
i
;8 i
I
3

;«ÿ
&

::
k
& '

1 5-9
I

i
 i

5. PROGRAMMING

V:

I 5-1-3 Basic Program Configuration :

5
E series program
SS
Main body of program
I
;
Preparation process
T •Program name • Command Line No. 2. •Command Line No. 3.
1
1 :ÿ
•Command Line No. 1. •Set the coordinate system. •Setthe coordinate system.
•i
I •Set the coordinate system. • Twin turret command. •Twin turret command. 1
I • Twin turret command.
•Turn on the coolant unit.
•Give the last program Give the fast program 1
ill
command. command.
I * Close the chuck.
•Select the tool.
•Queue for the fast •Queue for the last
program. program.
I •Select turret No. 2. Command the sequence . Command the sequence
•Start spindle rotation, feed number. number.
I per revolution. * Stop for 1 cycle. •Stop for 1 cycle.
•Return to tne head. •Return to the head.

I t
ill
Machining process®
•Command machining

I pattern = twin turret

• Select turret No. 1. III
i •
•
Select the tool.
Feed and position at the i
i
I ••position in rapid feed.
Subprogram
i
8
Machining process© •Subprogram name
• Feeo and position in rapid
I •Select the tool.
I
•Follow the subprogram
command.
•Move to the tool change
feed.
•Cut to
•
the
•• position.
Return to the main
1 *1
1I
\ position.
program.

Cut-off and product

separation
1
1
•Select turret No. 2.
I •Select the tool.
j •Decide the cut-off position.
I I •Perform the product

s separation sequence.
•Perform the cut-off.

Ending process m
•Stop the
spindle. I
•Open the chuck.
• Return the
tool to the
longitudinal direction start
point.
- command.
Give the last program
- Queue for the last program.
•Command the sequence 1
number. !v-
* Stop for 1 cycle.
- Return to the head.

t 1
ft
5-10
 S. PROGRAMMING

Program data

Machining data

1. Materia! outer diameter? 7. Inner diameter of pipe material?

2. Tool positionig point? 8. Machining length?
5
3. Cut-off tool number? 9. Pieces per 1 chuck?
tO. Product separeter number?
4. Cut-off spindle speed?
5. Cut-off cutting feedrate?
6. Back spindle chuck position?

y-.

1
1i Too! arrangement data

•Mount the tool on the turret position corresponding to each tool

number.
* Holder No.?
: i
Mount direction?
i
1
•

e Mount the tool on the holder.

I •

•
Tool No.?
Mount direction?
:

I h>
•Tool-bit point
• X direction shift amount? .
• Z direction shift amount?

I
&

1 .

'% 5-11
>,

I-
i
1
i
i
I
;y
 ;

5. PROGRAMMING

E series program
i
Main program body

Preparation process
T * Oxxxx * $2 * $3
1 •$1 * G50X-4.0Z0 •G50Z0

I •G50X®#Z#® •G710W1 •G710W1

-G710 * G999 * G999
I •M52 •N999 •N999
•M06 * M02 •M02
;
i * T® ® ® ® •M99 •M99
I * G712 •% •%
•GOOX® ®Z# #
I
4
* M03S1 =
••• ®G99
w If
I
|Machining process <D
T •G711
I •T®®®#X®®
I
4
* GOOX ®
• Subprogram |||;;
I Machining process ® •Oxxxx

I
• G712
•T®®®®
•GOOX®
* G01X®
••
• Z®
s •M98P
•GOOX
®
•••
[“
•M99
•%

4
Cut-off and product
separation
* T®
•GOOX •
•
••••
• Z
Note) 1. The three Lines $1 to $3 (Line Nos. 1 to 3) are
considered as a single tape.
•
•G201G01X-4.0F®
M31A®®T®®
2. This structure is a rough form for machining
on Line No. 1 alone with machining pattern
= twin turret command.
1
I
|i
|

Ending process *The program on the machine has no special

assembly, and the machining pattern is arranged
•M05
according to the concept of the machining, so the
•M07
program can also be expanded and arranged to
* T® ®® ®
•GO0X-4.0Z ® ®T00
include assembly.
a
1
•G999
w
•N999
•M02
•M99
I
•%

I 4
5-12
I
 : i
I
i 1
5. PROGRAMMING
;
Si:

:
•K
k
I
Program data

Machining data .%
I
IttftCHINlKG OftTai PROG. SELECT 2 H
0 200 ;.s

e i mTERSAt o.D. 16.00m 7 PIPE KD. 0.00m, 1

2 POSITIONING PT. 2.00tw 8 ftflCM. LENGTH 50.00m S
t i
I
1 3 CUT-OFF TOOL T10 9 PIECES/ IOK 2? V
i
I 4 CUT-OFF SPEED 2000m 28 WORK T8K2NG TOOL T15
5 CUT-OFF FEEO 0.020tWR i; §
:
S B-SP CHK-POS. 20.00rai ( 1
I '!

IR0Y2K0Y3R0T 8< K J

SEftRCH tIC-OfiTfl RESIST §

i

Too! arrangement data

I 0 288 TEST-CUT ( T-CQtt 3 SiffllflTiQH_1
roou HOLDER TOOL-STT < SHIFT 2 SHIFT TOOL SHftPE
HO. NflflE SET. NfiHE NCBET. (Olfln)

ifp mtmm F 3FF L 2 F 6.888 -IS. 108

r U 3*401 F SLEEVE af 83.866 8.886
m r 12
SLEEVE l F 17.508 8.806
J;
r 13 i
a r ifvscsie F mu 2 F -15.888 -25.006 I
r is :TFHS F :RT C 1 f
r IS:TFUS F :RT ™
8.888 8.800 o
1
m
TRNG 1 F
r 27 :TF316 F SAVING I F
9.80a 8.088
-12.086 -28.088
IS r I6<SF!S8 F FITTER 8 2 F 38.380 -5.088 i
i
i!
r IS:TFII6 F ft TRKG 1 F 0.680 0.088

ft: I
1
I
is m TOOL NO.?
fc TOOL NQ.tjfe) I
ml IROY2ROY3ROY

lv i
T-con |TOO.“8It|BfiCK-SP | I FIN I
I m
1
Ji§:
m
%

'in'
%
I
5- 13

II Jr--
%vi.ÿrOv\ov\«.i>.w/i oi'.*< >iww
*

:i
- h
1 I ‘
'

:f
 i:.

5. PROGRAMMING

:ÿ

•3

5-14
 5. PROGRAMMING

a
5-1-4 Controlled Axes

z
EM fm

_
\©p ;9|
Sir fflpSS&'SSj p Turret No. 2 :ÿ
JP
\r~lF.
_~ n
///A (rrr-01
:r
_L
., ,.... Aÿ,
»
Spindle 5 Guide
— —
< :-
t
*j bushing I
-E
;r

7Zi
—' fTfcx «
I :

\
ISi Pf1 -vmk'
Turret No. 1
i

L_._ I •:

1 Note) Y2 axis are for E32IV only.

The control axes comprises the spindle (Zi, CO, turret No. 1 (Xi), turret No. 2 (X2, Z2), and the back
spindle (Z3). The Z2, Z3 axes move parallel with the headstock, and Xlc X2 axes are perpendicular with :
;
j
the Zt.Z2.Z3 axes.
"f:
6 axes control specification
1. Spindle :Rotary angle and left/right move control Ci, Zf axes
(rotation,longitudinal direction)
2. Turret No. 1:Forward/reverse move Xt axis
(diameter direction)
3. Turret No. 2:Forward/reverse, left/right move X2, Z2 axes
f (diameter, longitudinal directions)
h 4. Back spindle : Left/right move Z3 axis i
(longitudinal direction)
1
7 axes control specification For E32IV only
1, Spindle :Rotary angle and left/right move control Ci,Zt axes
(rotation, longitudinal direction)
2. Turret No. 1: Forward/reverse move X1 axis
(diameter direction)
vl
3. Turret No. 2 :Forward/reverse, left/right move X2, Z2 axes
(diameter, longitudinal directions)
i 4. Back spindle: Left/right move Z3 axis
(longitudinal direction)
5. Turret No.2 : Vertical, up/down move Y2axis

5-15

:
1 !

jx
 ;

1 5. PROGRAMMING

*
5-1-5 Coordinates
9
I
5-1-5-1 Coordinate system
This section describes the theory of the coordinate system, which is the most important theory for
«11
4'
4:
programming.
1
In the CNC lathe, the tool position and move distance are all programmed according to the coordinate. I
The coordinates used for the programming are the six axes of vertical X axis (Xi, X2), the horizontal Z 4:
axis (Zi, Z2, Z3), and the rotary C axis (CO, which are read separately for each axis in the coordinate
system.

-
Model E32IV utilizes seven axes above six axes plus a vertical axis Y (Y2).

x © f
Program zero point (0, 0)
Main spindle
X © §
3
z © 11
4
/
c © z ©
4

c © 54. I
III
;

__
%
z ©
Program zero point (0, 0)
Back spindle ||
I
X ©
1

X Axis (Xi, X2) Forward/backward move of the tool (diameter direction) 1

Z axis (Zi, Z2, Z3)
C axis (CO
Y axis(Y2)
. Left/right move of the spindle (longitudinal direction)
Main spindle rotary angle control (rotary dirction)
Up/down moves of the No.2 turret (vertical direction) .... for Model E32IV only.
i
I
1
A
; 1
I 1
1
i

; 5-16
 5. PROGRAMMING
:

II
1
2
5-1-5-2
Ml
Variousfixed points
Machine stroke
Following strokes are specified for each machine, and each machining pattern requires fixed points

5 unique to it. When a machining pattern is changed, a different combination of fixed points must be
provided.

(Z2) 212

1 j
r-Ti
Turret No. 2
C332)
Turret No. 2

ii
i
'•V
£
CD

l
A

B 148 51 B
(148) (81)
3

--
o
rn S i
si
_ iAi -
Sl! P

1
® ill
TTTC “ '
Uirÿ"
in O-
J co CO
•sr
i—i
00
CM

o 0
©
trZ-3: s
11 CD 400
(550)

%n Dimensions are for £16/20

Dimensions in ( ) are for E25/32
Turret No. 1 Dimensions in [ ] are for Mode! E32IV
8 lodel E16 E20 E25 E32
||| Item
A 165 205 255 325 +Y
Zero point
it
f
B

A: Maximum 2\ axis stroke

9 9 12 9
-33=4
B: The distance from the back spindle flange Fixed pointy
end to the back spindle chuck.
ai +x -- Turret
3=. -X ;
.

No. 2
fNI
1
-3-
II
—Y
5-17
m
1
1

I
1

8
1
 j

5. PROGRAMMING
1
.

B Back spindle chuck position

I
£===3
Turret No.2
k| tt
1

1
I &
%f 4r
s

§
i

dr__
»:! —si
J

Z,/Z3 (superimpose)
Tool width C program value AL C B

AL
z Workpiece length L Z2 axis fixed point
(Back face)

L : Workpiece length Example 1 :j Example 2

Z : Programmed back chuck position L = 50mm :i (An example where C
2' : Actual workpiece chuck position Z * 20mm j: becomes minus)
C : Back spindle chuck position set in Z' = 20mm-B :•L= 10mm
i
1
the machining data -
C= 50mm 20mm = 30mm :•Z= 15mm
•i Z' = 15mm -B (15-9 = 6mm)
: C== 10mm 15mm = 5mm- -
S
Note 1) A L is the face turning amount; normally 0.1 to 0.2 mm
Note 2) Theback spindle chuck position C is represented by the value set in the machining data.

B Too! change point

Tool change position of turrets No.1andNo. 2 is decided in E series.
•E16/E20 : 70 mm [2.75w] from the center (X 140.0) (X 5.5']
* E25/E32: 80 mm [3.15”] from the center (X 160.0) [X 6.3*] ,both Xj and X2 are common fixed
points
1
Note) The tool cannot be changed at positions other than the tool change point.

51
ir.
I "V
1
1
§
s
S'
M %
5-18
:
§
 5. PROGRAMMING

5-1-5-3 Diameter designation

X coordinate valueis always expressed by the diameter designation.

X© Program zero point

(0.0)

z©-

This diameter is expressed as X 10.0.

1
---
--Z0

X©

5-1-5-4 Sign and coordinate value

x©
5 15 10

; ?
(-10,30)
!
I
\
Z© — I
o
— z©
X (0,0)
(10,30) (8,10) '(8,0)
\
(10.25) (20,10)
( 20, 25)

X©

The tool direction is the X © direction, while the workpiece direction is the Z © direction.

5-19

i.;*

i;

I
 :ÿ

'i

|
5. PROGRAMMING
i
5-1-5-5 Coordinate system setting l
Program start position
;
The most convenient point to machine the workpiece is set as the program zero point (XO, ZO), and the I
coordinate system is set by reading the program start position from the X, Z coordinates, based on the

:
||
cut-off tool.

G50 X -4.0 ZO

X©
Cut-off too!

Program zero
point
1
1 2mm
a
Z=7ÿJ
z©
(XO, ZO)
I
J3
Z©

Program start position

;
X©
The cut-off tool is normally mounted on turret No. 2,but may also need to be mounted on turret
I
No.1according to the machiningpattern.

Coordinate system setting of each Line

The start positions of each machining patternis set in the coordinate system per Line.

[Example] G50 XI I Z[
O

rL Twin turret
”3

J
$1
G50X140.0Z0
$2 $3

G50X-4.0Z0 G50Z0
(X160.0)
M710 G710W1 G710W1
M06

1
I
2 Z©
z© z©
ZQ
t £•'
1C "«
1
;v \- X 4.0
o
m ZO
g

;
X 140.0 Turret No. 1
(X160.0)
i
5-20

a5
 i
a §
i
:
5. PROGRAMMING

!
Absolute and incremental r
5-1-5-6
The coordinate value is commanded by the absolute command where the (X, Z) coordinate value of the
target position is commanded, or by the incremental command, where the X and Z axes direction move
distance are commanded.

1 Absolute command : The (absolute) coordinate value of the target position is commanded.
(xdZ],z[ZZ3) [YCUn
Incremental command: The X axis direction, Z axis direction (relative) move distances are
commanded.
(unzxydzi) iv cun

Above! ]areforE321V only.

Absolute Incremental

<D X12.0 ZO CD UO WO
4 4
© X12.0 Z12.0 ® UO W12.0
4 4
® X20.0 Z25.0 ® U8.0W13.0

:
1
I *;
x©
s
i
©
Target value
© <D
37- Target value Current value
37 37
K Z© -- s
jir\
XV S z©

1 20 13 12
:

«e

X©

I'
?ÿ:

;;
*
1

S
I 5-21

I'
q
.

!
i;
I r
 ;

£
5. PROGRAMMING
i
K
;
5-1-5-7 Interference check region and turret swing radius
i
I
Turret No. 2

X© I
1
I
<2>
X2 68
(78)
X©
i \ XI 40.0 ZO
( X 160.0 20) -
.1
1
\\\\\
Zi
z© ze

Zs 262 Z3 50 £ £
XI 40.0 ZO (341) (80)
(X160.0 20) X© o
<s> 1
E
X© TO S
in
cn
to 1-
s13 TO S
o
§
Rmax 210 £
(220)
o 3
V
3
.<ÿ

Turret No. 1 center

f

Dimensions in ( ) are for E25/32.

Interference check _
® When a machining is scheduled within the llltlllregion, MSS and M89 must be respectively
specified prior to and after the programmed machiningprocess. (If they are not commanded, the
interference check alarm will occur).
® If M89 is commanded when the parameter PLC switch (14) is turned on and thus disabling the

interference check, the machine will be stopped.

I Turret swing radius
R max in the above figure represents the distance between the turret center and tool nose end. If
o
i5 this distance is exceeded, a turret might interfere with the cover or back spindle during its swing
action. (This applies to both No.l and No.2 turrets).

5-22
I I!
 !
5. PROGRAMMING
I
:

:
5-2 PROGRAM COMMANDS I

'

5-23

:
 I
I
a
I

;i
:
I
5. PROGRAMMING
1
I 11
£
5-2-1 Summary of Addresses Used in the NC Program its
m
As described above, combinations of alphabetical characters and numerals and special symbols are used
for the commands in the NC program.
!
:s
s
?:
The alphabet part is called the address.
m

"
c Command address
5 c Coordinate address
3 ,;bis-
a
:
1 Rapid feed GOO
Linear interpolation GOT
Move distance of diameter
direction move axis (X axis) x [—}
:':’r
'

mm
1
Circular interpolation G02 (U) m
il
Move distance of longitudinal y I
(Preparatory
i G direction move axis (Z axis) i
functions)
mm a
Given code
(W)
Radius R[ 1
G OOD mm 1 V
Angle indexing
Given code Time U[ c [ i
sec mm
(P) (H)
i.
G710
G711
G712
Twin turret command
Select turret No. 1
Select turret No. 2
'I *
a
m
f. Forward rotation of spindle M03
C Cutting conditions setting
address
3> ::¥f
Close chuck
Turn on the coolant
M06
M52 Spindle speed S Ol
Given code
— DDDD rpm

(Miscellaneous it /i
,VI
functions)
Feedrate F [ ] mm/min
Given code mm / rev

Too! selection command

From cutting conditions I
:
TDODD
!:ÿ
>

Too! No. Offset number

: f
|
if

u
i
'
5-24
a
 5. PROGRAMMING

c Program structure address

>c Line command
)
Program No. O $
Sr'
8-digit command Given code
(00000000 is not accepted) I

%
* Optional program number can be
used, except for the 9000s.

Sequence number N DDDDD

c Queuing command

I
) r S

1 Freely decided - 5-digit command

Optional numeral
*(Excepted for N999) 1
* Queuing is done by the ! or ! command.

Queuing number with each Line L[

1
{
Jr
This chapter gives details on the the address and the $, !, and explains how to give the commands. i;

1
i
1

I
i
I;
'!
I
*i 5- 25

i
S:'
I
1
S'
I :

%
1
 ;

| 5. PROGRAMMING
N'

5-2-2 Address [cf] (G Functions)

v';
Command format : Gd

The G functions, commanded by 2-digit numeral following address G are also called i
I
the preparatory functions. The G functions are used to command the axis control
(X,, X2f ,Z1f Z2, Z3, C, ) to the NC. 1
Example : r:
GOO Rapid feed

G01 Cutting feed 1

I
l
i
List of G codes (Popular G codes)
i,
Code Group Function Code Group Function
i
®G00 A Rapid feed G90 A
Longitudinal direction turning
cycle
1
I
G01

G02
A

A
Linear interpolation

Grcular interpolation (clockwise)

G92

G94
A

A
Thread cutting cycle

Face turning cycle

1 %

Grcular interpolation
G03 A (counterclockwise) G96 F Constant surface speed control

|s G04 C Dwell ©G97 F

Constant surface speed control
cancel
1

I
G28 C Reference point return G98 D Per minute feed
if-
G32 A Thread cutting ©G99 D Per rotation feed

G50 C Coordinate system setting

Explanation : O Once the G functions of groups A, C, D, E, and F are commanded, they are effective
till another G function of the same group is commanded. (This feature is called
"modal".)
!S O The G codes marked © are the default G codes uponpower supply. i
IS

I;

5-26
s
 :R
5

5. PROGRAMMING

n
:
I |~G] (G Code Macro Commands and Special G Codes)
Command format : 6 G 3-digit function command
1
%
O This command is special to this machine, allowing multiple Line machining.
O Thiscommand (function) canbe used to simplify the program to shorten the machining
1 time and to improve the productivity.

List of G code macros and special G codes

G code macro Special G code
i
I Code Function Code Function
i
G201 Product separate command G12.1 Milling interpolation (Option)
:
G210 Y axis machining mode ON (E32IV only) G13.1 Milling interpolation cancel (Option)
Spindle and tool spindle synchronization
G211 Y axis machining mode OFF (E321Y only) G113 cancel (It is an option except for E32W)
:
Spindle synchronization (Option) .
G500 Coordinate system shift OFF G114.1

I G501 Coordinate system shift ON

Tool spindle synchronization I
G114:2 (It is an option except for E321V)
I
& G710 Twin turret command
Tool spindle synchronization E
G114.3 (it is an option except for E32W)
i
1
1 G711 Secect turret No. 1 G115 Start position queuing (Type 1)
R
i
I
&[
G712 Select turret No. 2 G116

G117
Start position queuing (Type 2)

Miscellaneous commamd output during

G720 Two-saddle machining command
t axis move
I
1 G721 C axis cross cancel G125 Control axis synchronization
;;
G722 C axis cross command G700 Cancel machining command

Back/front simultaneous machining

G730 command 3

3-Line simultaneous machining

G740 command

Pick off, center support machining

G750
command

G999 Last program execution

Refer to the attached description for details on the program command.

Note) G721 and G722 must be commanded on both Lines $1 and $2.

5-27
 ;
j

5. PROGRAMMING

5-2-2-1 Rapid feed (GOO)

The tool is rapidly moved to the specified point (X, Z) in the coordinates system and positioned.

•Diameter (X axis) direction rapid feed GOO X EE (Z is fixed)

!
Command format : •Longitudinal (Z axis) direction rapid feed GOO Z I i (X is fixed)

•Diameter
direction
(X axis), longitudinal (Z axis) GOO x ED z EE
(Both X and Z axes move)

0.5 <Program example t >

Positioning the tool from point A to point B
o (10.0, -0.5)
ID s
2 -0 -- O
N0111
B
GOO X10.0 Z-0.5 !
l

I
longitudinal cutting (X, Z)) _
G01 (longitudinal cutting (Z) or diameter,

A Chamfering
S The machining program follows
1
I <Program example 2>

;
Hr 45 Positioning the tool from point Ato point B
(17.0,47.0)

%£>
Z s N0511
j GOO X17.0 Z47.0 j
B
G01 X -4.0 F0-02
1
The end process program follows
;

* The tool width in Z47.0 can also be shifted by the

I entire length of part + cut-off tool width tool. See
the section on the machining process for details.
cJ.3
The rapid feedrate need not be set in the program, as there are proper values for each axis
(X axis 12000 mm/min, Z axis 160QQmm/min).
Note 1) The maximum rapid feedrate of the Z axis where the Lines are superimposed, is
24000 mm/min
2) E321V Y2 axis rapid feedrate is set at 10000 mm/min.
1

5-28
I
 I S. PROGRAMMING

5-2-2-2 Linear interpolation (GQ1)

S Linear interpolation is to perform cutting while moving the tool linearly to the specified point (X, 2)
in the coordinate system, in the specified speed. The tool path thus is a line.
The feedrate is designated by address F. (See V-36 for details on theaddress F.)

•Diameter direction feed

(X axis) G01 X (ZZ3 F cm (Z is fixed)
Command format : •Longitudinal direction feed
(Z axis) G01 Z CZDF cm (X is fixed)
•Diameter, longitudinal axis, (X Z axis) simultaneous feed (tapering)
GOI x cm cm cm
z F ,i;
(both X and Z axes move)

I (D Straight(l)
As there is no Z axis direction (longitudinal direction) move, the Z coordinate can be omitted
in the program.

--
<Program example>
I
B I
t -
Cutting from point A to point B ( 0.2, 0).
z 2
B — G01 X-0.2 F CD

c X in
(D Straight (2)
As there is no X axis direction (diameter direction) move, the X coordinate can be omitted in
the program.

10 <Program example>
Cutting from point A to point B (8.0, 10.0)
z GOI zio.o F cm

I X
~|P]Jph 10.5 I i
4

(3) Tapering (3)

The tool path in taperingis a tiltedline.
f
<Program example>

Z
-- s O

IN
--
\
Cutting from point A to point B (12.0, 10.0)
G01 X12.0 Z10.0 F Cm

T
X
Lf>
3 10
f. 4

5-29
 1

S. PROGRAMMING a

S-2-2-3 Circular interpolation (G02, GOB)

Circular interpolation is to perform cutting while moving the tool to the point (X, Z) specified in the
coordinate system along the arc of radius R (in mm units), in the specified speed. The tool path is an
arc.
I
i
G02XCZ3 Z CD R CD F cm
Command format : or
ill
G03 X Z R F
ft

O G02 Clockwise (CW) 1

1
Jj
II
m
<Program example> m
|R4 Arc machining from point Ato point B il1
Z
A

“i
eo (8.0, 4.0).
I
B
n * Point A = (X0.Z0)
G01 X-0.1 F I -1 i
n-7 r
xo
i
I X 4
j G02 X8.0 Z4.0 R4.0 F Cd j i
if
GOI z cm F cm 1
1
(D G03 Counterclockwise (CCW) I
<
<Program example >

z N o\
a
Arc machining from point A to point B
(9.0, 4.0).
!ÿ
B * Point A = (X3.0, Z1.0)
GOO X3.0 Z- 0.5
!
GOI zi.o F cm
r ]
j G03 X9.0 Z4.0 R3.0 F C=3 *
:
X 4 ————— ——— — —— — ——— —
—————--. -.-a

5 GOV z cm F cm
1

I*
*ÿ
if
E

5-30
I
 f
;
S. PROGRAMMING

if
» G02 and G03

When the form after cutting is convex

When the form after cutting is concave
.....
Specify G02 and G03 according to the tool move direction and form after cutting, as follows.
When moving the tool to the Z axis +(plus) direction;
G02
G03
!

Back turning Front turning

y "V
z

7f\
i
i i l G02 i
G03 L-' ~i
I GQ3
X i ;

; :
Clockwise G02 Counterclockwise G03 Counterclockwise G03 Clockwise G02 :

'
•£
:
Note 1) The cutting in the above figure uses the tool on turret No. 1; it is completely the same
also when the tool on turret No. 2 is used.
2) The Z axis is rarely moved to the — (minus) direction for circular interpolation. In this .

case, G02 and G03 become opposite.

ifI 3) In this machine, circular interpolation can be done not only on the front side but also
on the back side, according to the combination of the Lines. However, the +Z, +X

-
V

3S
circular movements are always G02 (clockwise, convex), so the above theory is always
applied.
i
f
;;

y'

i
s*
I
H

5-31

S
 :
;

5. PROGRAMMING

2-4 Dwell (G04)

k
Dwell is to stop the program execution and keep the state for the specified time. The dwell command
is written as follows. :
%

G04U O
or 'ÿi
Command format:
G04 P O' seconds
I
I: :

Giving the command in the above format causes the machine to execute the command in the
previous block and start execution of the next block after as many seconds as specified in the above
O passes.
1
The maximum command time is 99999.999 seconds.

I
; <Program example> 2.5-second dwell
;
G04U2.5 orG04 P2500
V Note 1) Decimal point cannot be used in address P.
..
2) Dwell starts when the specified feedrate of the previous block becomes zero.
5i

I
(Reference)
Aim of dwell
1) To stabilize the groove diameter.

T 2) To adjust the time till the machining speed falls after the speed commandis given in thread
cutting. (See the tap and outer diameter thread cutting process.)
3) For deep hole machining (stepping) using the drill. -» See (drill machiningprocess).

5-32
 m
i
1:
m 5. PROGRAMMING

it
II
i
If 5-2-2-S Product Separate (G201) G code macro commands
8 Command format: G201 G01 X-4.0Fr~~1 M31 ADDDD TODDD
1
II y" :
O This command executed the product separate process. (i

I O The product separator is to be mounted on turret No. 1.

1
ill! O This command is effective when turret No. 2 command is given.
1

1 G201 Sequential operation pattern

J G712
Comb type tool post cut-off
tool selection and outer
| G 201 G01 X-4.0FE 3 MSI Aooan TODDD
diameter positioning
<ÿ:

1 :
8
I
Select the tool on turret No. 1 side with separater *1 G>

----
1,
Product
separate
I | Cut-off
i

1
B:
process
(G201) _ Rapid feed positioning

V [
i © (ADDDn)
m Deceleration, decide the collection position
5
:

*
t
End of cut-off

----
U

Deceleration, escape to fixed position

*• (3)
1 V
To tool change position in rapid feed
m
at
II Low speed swing {180 °) of tool with separater to collect the product
® (M31
TODDD
I
Select next machining tool ©
I
i l§
Rough form of program (twin turret)
Oxxxx
.ÿI
,

1
$1 $2 $3
G50X-Z- G50X-4.0Z0 G50Z0
G710 G710W1 G71QW1
G711 6999 G999
I
1
N999
M02
N999
M02 i
i
i G712
M99
%
M99
%
i Gooxnzn
» G2oi GOI x-4.0FnM3iAnnninnnn
M56
G999 Too! selection command (tooi number at 180 °
N999
MG2
[
t position of the tool with separater)

.. M99 The separater decelerates from rapid feed for

% t positioning at position AO .
Turret low-speed swing command

111
1 5-33

;
:

i-
5. PROGRAMMING

K I

!:
.V :
[Product separate movement]

fig. 1 Cut-off too! holder fig. 4

L
m I
Front turning tool holder
U30J
ft
f
Sleeve holder
'i. Product separator

Fig. 2
1: fig. 5

\ (i
\

© \

I
.

i
Fig. 3
\
v \

;
:
:

; Note 1) Must be selected in another block before this block.

2) See the M code list for product separate command, etc. on the back
spindle side.

5-34
:
 S. PROGRAMMING

S-2-2-6 Last Program (G999) G code macro commands

Command format : G999

<> Thiscommand must always beinserted at the end (endingprocess) of eachprogram Line.
O Inserting G999 in each Line ($1 to $3) allows automatic queuing.
O The effective last program machining pattern is the pattern commanded after this
commandis given.
O The machining pattern command can be given in the last program, to change the
machiningpattern.

'-I
f";

3. The following is an example.

$1 $2 $3 fjJPfA
G7xx G7xx G7xx
r ’I r. I
Programs of each Line
ft
I
__ PI
J
P2 P3 S

T
I _T_.

{ P4

M56
G999 G999 G999 .

f”J

I
i V
P5 Last program
j j
M999 N999 N999
M02 M02 M02
M99 M99 M99
% % %

Note t ) Always insert the commanded to perform queuing (N999) at the end of the last
program.
2) After the N999, command "M02 M99 -* % " at the end of the endingprocess, to
j!
end the program.
}'

*ÿ
1

i
5-35

i
.....
. . " f
v

!;

91
 1

* <

5. PROGRAMMING

I;

5-2-3 Address [T] (Cutting Feedrate)

Command format: F Cutting feedrate designation

The feedrate of linear interpolation and circular interpolation are designated.

i
Explanation O Specify the feedrate along the G01, G02, G03 cuttingpattern.
O There are two kinds of feedrate unit as follows. 111
1
G98 mm/min (per minute feed = how many mm per minute the m
tool is fed)
G99 mm/rev (per rotation feed = how many mm per spindle 1
revolution the tool is fed)
1
Move distance per Move distance per
minute (mm/min) rotation (mm/rev) 11
1
f
!

J J
1
T ! ! ! I
i
A
> m
,

D 5D 1
Per minute feed Per rotation feed
1
Description
Per minute feed
The feed distance of the tool
Per rotation feed
The feed distance of the too! per
I
per minute spindle rotation
Designation and address F F
Designated G code G 98 G 99
Metric input 1mm/min to 60,000 mm/min 0.001mm/rev to 999.999mm/rev
(FI to F60.000)
Override 0 to 200% (in 10% step) override is commanded in both per minute
feed and per rotation feed. Normally Oto 100%.
i
1 O The maximum command value F of the per rotation feed is;
8,000 mm/min
F (mm/rev)
Spindle speed (r.p.m.)
O The speed given by the F { ]command is kept till the next designation is given
(modal).
.it-
O Decide the appropriate feedrate according to the cutting conditions table (5-10. Cutting
conditions).
Note 1) The cutting feed cannot be executed without the F [ ) .
2) G code must be commanded before F command without fail in case of changing G99 mode
•ÿj into 98 by the same block as G01 cuttingblock
example: G98G01 XOO ZOO FDD orG01 XDQ ZDD G98 FDD
i

5-36
B
 1
5. PROGRAMMING

5-2-4 Address [M] (M Functions)

Command format : MOD

V
The M function commanded by M followed by a 2-digit numeral, is also called the
j1 miscellaneous function. The functions are used to command the on/off of the switches in the
program.
V •

Guide bushing

I I
Example :
I MOB Spindle forward rotation

M04 Spindle reverse rotation MOB

I

M04

Workpiece

• Up to four M codes can be commandedin a single block. If commanding the M codes

in the same block does not cause functional problem,it is recommended to command
!'ÿ as many M codes as possible in the same block, so as to reduce the cycle time.

Note 1) Commanding contradicting M codes (for example, MB and M4) at the same time
causes the program to stop.
i 2) Commanding M25 and M16 (back spindle stop, back face chuck open) at the
same time, while the back spindle is rotatingin high speed will open the chuck
before the spindle stops.
3) Check the operation of the machine well, before commanding simultaneous M
:i
commands.
4) The M02 and M78 functions must be commanded in a single block.
i
.

: lj'
j;

:
i

5-37

|
1
 1

i
i

5. PROGRAMMING

List of M codes I
&
M code Function Description Remarks
MOO Program stop Stops the automatic operation
II

I
'
M01 Optional stop Enabled when the corresponding switch
on the keyboard is on. Performs automatic
operation stop. The operation restarts by
pressing the start key _ 1
M02 t cycle stop Stops the machine when under the 1 cycle Used in a
mode. single block i
I
M03 Spindle forward rotation Starts forward rotation on the spindle
M04 Spindle reverse rotation Starts reverse rotation on the spindle I
?!
i1 M05 Spindle stop Stops the rotation on the spindle
M06 Chuck close Closes the chuck on the spindle
M07 Chuck open Opens the chuck on the spindle I
M08 Short cut program insertion ON Starts the end cut program of bar material Available on
$1 and $2
I: alone. 1
j
M09 Short cut program insertion OFF Endsthe end cut program of bar material Available on
$1 and $2
1
V
j.
alone.
M10 Knock out ON Forward move of back side knock out bar
A
j Mil Knock out OFF Reverse move of back side knock out bar
M12
8
M13 Close long workpiece chuck Option 1
%
1
M-14 Open long workpiece chuck Option 4
M15 Close back chuck Closes back spindle chuck ;i
1 M16 Open back chuck Opens back spindle chuck
M17
M18 Spindle zero point return and C axis Preparation for C axis control
it gear ON
M19
\ M20 Reset C axis selection End of C axis control
4 M21
1 M22
1
M23 Back spindle forward rotation Starts the back spindle forward rotation
M24 Back spindle reverse rotation Starts the back spindle reverse rotation
J s M25 Back spindle stop Stops the back spindle
.! M26

•i M27
M28
’
M29
M30

:
i .
I.
5-38
i
 5. PROGRAMMING

1 Mcode
M31
Function
Turret speed selection (low-speed
swing)
Description
Selects low speed one-way swing on the
turret
Remarks
Available on
product
separation
.:ii
8 macro
alone.

a M32 Forward move of workpiece

separator (back side)
Forward move of workpiece separator Available on
$3 alone.
Command
this function
H in a single
block.
M33 Reverse move of workpiece Reverse move of workpiece separator
separator (back side)

i M34
MBS
I
M46 Y axis clutch OFF Y axis dutch is turned off (Allows the axis Available
move) . for E32IV
# alone

I
i
M47 Y axis dutch ON Y axis clutch is turned on (it must not be
used except when Y = 0)
Available
for E32JV
alone
i;
Rotate the spindle at low speed to set M50
I M50

M51
Back pick-off inferiority detection

Tool break detection

after cut-off
Detects the tool by the switch. Option
:

I M52 Coolant ON Starts the coolant supply.

1 M53 Coolant OFF Stops the coolant supply.
r-.
V
M54 Bar feeder stop Used when replacing the material. Option
Option
1 MSS Bar feeder material replacement
start
Starts replacement of the bar feeder
material.

I M56 Product count Counts the number of the product

I M57

1 MSS i
M59
M60
M61 Externa! M code 1

I M62 External M code 2

M63 External M code 3
M64 External M code 4
£ M65 External M code 5
» M70
1 M7t

9
5-39
1
1
I
a

. '!

m
1
*
 y

5. PROGRAMMING

1;
i-
\
?
I
Mcode
M72
Function
Back spindle air blow ON
Description Remarks
I
M73 Back spindle air blow OFF
t
M74 C axis zero point deceleration
dummy timer
To be used with M74G28H1;
m
M75
M76
M77
Back spindle torque control (L) ON

Waiting for spindle synchronization

25% the rated torque (same M123}

Option
1
m *
!. M78
to end
Back spindle indexing nstruction format: M78S 1 1 Option
I
v
1 1: 15° interval for E16/E20 and 5° To be used II
interval for E25/E32. Less than 360° in a single
block. m
.
a
M79 Back spindle indexing OFF Resets the positioning of the back spindle Option
at the fixed position
M80 Too! #1 spindle forward rotation
M81 Too! #1 spindle reverse rotation
Tool #1 spindle stop
.i;I
M82
M83 Too! #2 spindle forward rotation
M84 Tool #2 spindle reverse rotation 1
M85 Tool #2 spindle stop K
M88 Interference check OFF (reset) It stops monitoring for the inference
I .
region f
M89 Interference check ON Not available when the interference check
disable is turned ON on the PLC switch
M90
.
M91
,
M92
I
M93
M94 Back spindle variation detection ON
M95 Back spindle variation detection OFF I
M96 Spindle variation detection ON
M97 Spindle variation detection OFF 1
M98 Subprogram call Calls the subprogram :• 1

'[ÿ M99 Program return To be inserted at the end of the main and
;I sub programs
.
I
l 5-40 I
t :ÿ
I
i
I,

a
5:
Mcode Function
M123 Back spindle torque limit (H) ON
Description
When cut-off with the spindle and back
spindle synchronizing with each other.
To stop the workpiece to slip in the chuck
by rotation error.
5. PROGRAMMING

Remarks

I M124 Back spindle torque limit OFF

:
M125 G'tizen side used within the macro.
I
i,;
Not used.

m Ml 26 Citizen side used within the macro. Not used.

1 I
1
M127 Citizen side used within the macro. Not used.
v;
-!
>:
I :

s;ÿ Note) If contradicting M functions are commanded in the same block, the machine will stop
instead of rising alarm.
i
i
1
.a:
,
1
« J
i i
-ÿ
!

I
m
?
!, '

!i
•C,

. ..w
I f.
:
i
i
l £

m
I I
r'

M.
3 f
1 5-41
i-

f
l
\

\
!

!
 5. PROGRAMMING

5-2-5 Address |jf] (S Functions)

I
Command format : Spindle * Spindle on model E16 only:
1 S1 = O
S2=
Spindle
Back spindle
S1=
I
If
Rotary tool spindle 5 digits
:
S3= Turret No. t rotary too! spindle
m
i S4=
;
Turret No. 2 rotary tool spindle I
s if
The S functions, or the speed functions, as commanded in the above format is
used to command the speed of the spindle.
The spindle speed is calculated from the following formula, and rounded up to *ifs
>.
make a flat numeral. m
N: Speed (r.p.m.)
< V: Cutting feedrate (m/min)
N = W;rDx 1,000
D: Material diameter (mm); or hole diameter for
t!
drilling 9
s. JT: Circular constant (#3.14)
Spindle speed command

Command range : SI Spindle Model El 6 200 to 10,000 r.p.m. I

Model E20
Model E25
180 to
150 to
8,000
7,000
r.p.m.
r.p.m.
i
Model E32 130 to 6,000 r.p.m.
S2 Back spindle Model E16 200 to 6,000 r.p.m.
Model E20 200 to 6,000 r.p.m.
Model E25 150 to 5,000 r.p.m.
Model E32 150 to 5,000 r.p.m.
is
S3, S4 Rotary tool Mode!E16 300 to 5,840 r.p.m.
spindle
Mode! E20 300 to 5,840 r.p.m.
Model E25 225 to 4,460 r.p.m.
Model E32 225 to 4,460 r.p.m.

Example: Spindle
S1 = 3000 =» 3,000 r.p.m.

5-42
 !'

5. PROGRAMMING

• •

j.
m
5-2-6 Address [Tj (T Functions) i

i;;

i Command format : T

1
1
Tool selection
The tool selection command is given by T followed with the selected tool number,plus two
"0"s. T10s and T20s tool selection and T30s and T40s intermediate tool selection commands ;
are available.
T 00 ;
! v-v
I
Alphabet "T“
L Tool number T1Os, T20s, T30s, and T40s.
.'i;
:
:

5-2-6-1 E16/E20type I
i There are sixteen (eight+ eight) tool numbers that can be insertedin the ,inboth turret
it Nos. 1and 2.
Tool numbers for turret No. 1 ... 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
( )
1
II Tool numbers for turret No. 2 ...
(30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37)
20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27 intermediate

tl
(40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47) - J too1 selection

Decision andcheck of tool selection position

S'
* Command the number on the turret side.
ill
Turret No. 1 Turret No. 2 (back through figure)

*
I
i!
/oo°o°\
o°o o°]
\oooooJ
/oo°DON
k &
\OO00Oy

1
I
m
Standard 16-division turret
1 1

Note 1) There are eight tool selection commands each for the 10s, 20s, 30s, and 40s. The total is
il;{:
16 commands in the standard specifications and 32 commands in the intermediate tool
selection.
1 2) Theintermediate tool selection command is decided by the mounting holder. (Holder is
optional.)

1 I
IJ
5-43

!
:

f
 5. PROGRAMMING

S-2-6-2 E25/E32 type

I
There are twenty (ten+ ten) toolnumbers that can be inserted in the ,inboth turret Nos.1 a
and 2.

Tool numbers for turret No. 1
Tool numbers for turret No. 2
... 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
(30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36,37, 38, 39) ( )
... .
20, 21 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29
(40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49)
j._ intermediate
_J tool selection

Decision and check of tool selection position

* Command the number on the turret side.

Turret No.1 Turret No. 2 (back through figure)

||

O0°0o\
°o°-I °o\
?9o°q0°o
i i
I

Standard 20-division turret

I
Note 1) There are ten tool selection commands each for the 10s, 20s, 30s, and 40s. The total is
20 commands in the standard specifications and 40 commands in the intermediate tool
i selection.
2) The intermediate tool selectioncommand is decided by the mounting holder. (Holder is
optional.)
3) When a milling or slitting spindle is used, No.l turret does not accept a mounting to the
tool numbers preceding the one where the spindle is situated. On the other hand, No.2
turret front side and No.2 turret back side do not accept a mounting to the preceding
i
I and following tool numbers, respectively.
i 4) The double sleeve holder can not be used on the E32IV No.2 turret.
5) The E32IV specialized slitting spindle (KSS760) can be mounted to only one side of a
turret.
6) When the E32IV specialized hob or polygon spindle is used, a tool mounting is not
available to the turret side having tool numbers that precede the number where the
spindle is situated.

5-44
mi
 i
!
5. PROGRAMMING

5-2-6-S Address [TJ O' functions) T function except Tool selection

T code 2-digit command

Command format : TOD

Tool length nose wear compensationby single T2-digit command.

Enter the offset number in .
Note) See “Tool Offset” on page 5-46.
V
!
T code 4-digit command
Command format : TOO DO X (argument) A (argument) Y(argument)

Command X and A in the same block as the T4-digit command.

X (argument): Return X coordinate after tool change i

(fixedpoint)

A (argument): Destination tool nose point Z coordinate upon

p; return (spindle longitudinal designation
distance)

Y (argument): Return Y coordinate after a tool change (fixed

point)

?, Note ) Command the T4-digit command in a single block.

*T codes enabled (O) in each machiningpattern (X :not available)

1 Machining pattern
Twin turret
Commanded Line

$1
T1
G711
G712
4-digit
O
o
2-digit
O
o
O
o
X A
x
o
Y
X
x
T2
G711 o o o o o
G712 o o o x o
S3 X O x x x
Tool saddle
Si o o O X X
$2 O O O x O
Back/front simultaneous
$1 o o o x x
$3 o O O X O
Three-Line simultaneous
$1 o o o X x
machining
$2 O O O x O
$3 X O X x x
Pick off $3 x O X X X
L:
% Note) Y argument is available for E32IV only. j

Si
I
1
5-45

?
'1

r
 jj

:ÿ

5. PROGRAMMING

!
I S-2-6-4 Tool Offset (simply offset for short)
Offset is to correct the difference between the actually machined dimension and the dimension on the
drawing. The dimensions are automatically corrected without changing the coordinates on the il
program, just be entering the difference. The material to measure the difference must be prepared in
advance.
1
The offset is commanded in the program according to the following instruction format.

Command format for T

offset Sr'
Offset numbers Ot to 80
1 Alphabet "T" _
Offset number and offset data
(Tool position offset)
The difference between the machining
dimensions and the drawing dimensions is
input as the offset data in the table as shown in
the right (CRT screen), just be specifying the
number of the positions in the program where
offset is needed.
The offset datais all ”0" in the 1st machining.
II
4 TOOL TIP OFFSET)

3
S
6
7
SC INC. ME *6$.
<X>
8.888
9.086
9.806
6.986

6.888
6.968
<z>
9.886
.9.086
8.886
6.888
9.060

6.986
9.988
8.888
a.088
8.880
8.868

6.899
6.898
IS
37
19
S3
26
-

2!
22
OO
8.908
8.868
8.980
8.888
9.980
-----
8.869
8.008
___<Z>
6.686
6.
6.888
9.608
8.880
9.886

6.986
8.880
OFFSET I. I/
OSQ5e-g>
8.666
8. 0fi0
8.
9.
8S..980
9.966
9.886
8 9.680 9.966 6.888 23 0.808 0.688 6.968
9 9.688 8.366 9.666 24 8.866 6.808 0.886
18 6.686 8.096 0.980 25 6.332 8.866 6.686

Howto enter the offset numbers H

12
8.888
$.986
0.986
8.863
6.888
6.666
25
27
8.066
B.888
9.686
8.989
0. KG
9.
8. sea
• Specify the offset number when the tool is
positioned at the outer diameter approach
13
14
IS
8.686
6.688
0.
8. SOS
8.883
8.666
IZ
26
2S
38
8.998
8.38®
8.866
9.888
3. 888
0.988
8.880
0.1

1C
position.
® Specify in face drilling and tapping when
TIP QFS j THMTfl 1 T W» I jaMtTQ? } 1 «£N0

giving the Z machining command. Note)

• Specify in each step.
• The above table is an example of the CRT
display on the NC.
® <Y> will be added to each of the above
notation for E32IV .

Offset cancel
Specify ’TOO" to cancel the specified offset. The lower two digits "00” of the "TD 00" upon tool
selectionalso includes the offset cancel. However, tool selection of the effective turret side alone by
:{ turret change G711 and G712 enables the offset cancel in G710 (twin turret command).

Note) The offset value is actually added to the coordinates in the following cases.
if:
ii • When TOD offset is entered, the offset value is added when the next move command (X, Z, or
i
1 U,W) is given.
® The entered offset value is effective till the cancel command is given.
® When selecting the tool on the same turret side, the offset number can be entered upon tool I
selection of TDD (2 digits) as well as TD DDD (4 digits) commands.

I;
5-46

I
 S. PROGRAMMING

Actual example of offset

OOuter diameter cutting ;

' I
:

R1
I ::
X/7//7////A

ST"
:

i-5 -r
s EEi
V
C0.5 C0.5

% 7 15

% N0121 G712 iu

GOO X6.0 Z-0.5 l TOt [ The block is thus specified for approaching material in a
G01 X8.0 Z0.5 F0.03 rapid feed.
;ÿ
Z15.0 _ (Offset for the 08)

X11.0 |T02 |- Specify each time when there is step difference.

XI2.0 Z15.5 (Offset for the 012)
Z22.0
:

•i ;

OFace drilling (drill, tap machining)

0.5

:)i

Y///77
6
i £ & mWx-so.o
V////

,
15

I N0314
I
GOO -
X 50.0 Z-0.5
v> G01 Z15.0 F0.08 IT03 \ Specify to adjust the drill depth.
GOO Z-0.5 {TOO] - Offset cancel
T1500 (Always command this when returning.)

1 1

5-47

1
\
 I
!
i

1
S. PROGRAMMING

1 O Cut-off

t {/////777Z
y

!
N0411 G712
T1000
GOO X15.0 Z22.2 ffoTl The product length is decided by the Z axis direction
i
offset, and the chamfering size is normally adjusted by
the X axis direction offset
G201 G01 X-4.0 F0.02 M31 A6.0T1400
M05
M07 ;->V
T1100
GOO X-4.0 ZO fTOOl- Offset cancel
M56 Always specify the cancellation when returning the
program to the start position. If the designation is
G999 overlooked, the diameter changes each time the
;y N999 product is completed, and the longitudinal direction
M02 position will shift till it finally becomes Z axis overrun.
M99
%

ii i 1

1
:

5-48
f".
1
 5. PROGRAMMING §

im
I: 5-2-7 1![ Queuing Program .

(Exclamation)
is
?: Command format : ! Single queuing
! ! Ln Multi-Line queuing

i t— 1
line number (1 to 3)
u. Queuing number (0 to 9999)
1
I: I s' ;

s O Inserting a single!(exclamation mark) allows queuing with the!in program of other Lines.

I O Commanding! L allows queuing withparts in other lines ($1 to $3) that needs queuing.
O The same number of!single queuing command must be given in other Lines ($1 to $3).
;
i If the number does not match, the queuing will not work.
i

1
m. Example 1 : Single queuing command
; r
5
1 Qxxxx
$1 $2 $3

Is !
r 1
! ! Queuing
§ f
L
;
1 !
Programs of each Line
! I « ;i

I M56

1 G999
N999
G999
N999
G999
N999

1 M02
M99
%
M02
M99
%
M02
M99
%
2
V

5-49
I
 5- PROGRAMING

Example 2: Multi-Line program queuing pattern

Oxxxx
$1 $2 $3
;
11LI.
j
!2L1
i > !2L2
13L2
r
J Queuing
; -
:

«
i
l
i 111313 1112L3 Programs of
12I3L3 i each Line

5
j
f 1
11

1213L4 1U3L4 1112L4

I
m
M56
G999 G999 G999
N999 N999 N999
M02 M02 M02
M99 M99 M99
% % %
I
"

s
Note 1) Program error P35 occurs when illegal Line number is commanded.
2) When move command and MST commands are given in the same block as the queuing
1
i command, the move and MST commands are executed after the queuing.
Example 12L5G00X100.;
GOO X100. is executed after queuing with the Line 2 command
3) Queuing is performed only when the corresponding Line is under automatic operation. If this
i
condition is not satisfied, the queuing is ignored, andit proceeds to the next block. I
|;!
4) The L command is the queuing identification number. Queuing is performed between the
same numbers. The default is L0. 1
5) The queuing command specifies the Line number of the corresponding Line. The Line number
of the parent Line can also be designated.
Example Line i command lilnlmLf;
6) When the line number is omitted (! only), Line 1is regarded as 12, Line 2 as !1, and Line 3 as
:S program error P33.
!! causes program error P33 in all the three lines.
!
;
7) Queuing cannot be done with macro statements.
Example 1L1;
;?
#100=10.; (G4; block is the queuing block)
|
G4;
8) ”SYN" is displayed on the operation status display, while it is queuing.

5-50
 B
1 5. PROGRAMMING
}
I
1
f 1
H
I
I
¥ I
1
St
1

$
5-3 Multi-Axis Multi-Line
1
M

t.
I
I

*
I
i:$
A:

l
l
P

l!
£
I 5-51

S'

I
 !

5. PROGRAMMING

I
5-3-1 Machining Patterns, Axes Belonging to Each Line, and Superimpose !

Axes belonging to each Line Superimpose

Machining pattern Command code
$1 (Line No. \) $2 (Line No. 2} $3 (Line No. 3)
j
Machining pattern cancel G700 Xt.ZÿC, X2,Z2,Y2 Z3
G711 Xt.Z,.C, z3
Twin-turret G710
I
G712 X2.Z„C„Y2 Z3
G721 X„ZVC, X2,Z2,Y2 Z3 zt/z2
: Two-saddle 6720
G722 x„z, X2,Z2.C„Y2 Z3 z,/z2

_
Back/front simultaneous
machining_ G730 Xj,Zt,C| Z2 X2,Z3,Y2
3-Line simultaneous machining G740 Xÿ.C, X2.Z2,Y2 Z3 Z,/Z2 zÿ3
Pick off G750 Z3 z,/z3

Y2 axis is for E32IV only.

:
Note 1) The machining pattern cancel G700 command is used to cancel G71Q to G750, but there is
normally no need to enter the G700 command. One of the G710 to G750 pattern commands
must always be commanded during automatic operation.
Vf
2) G711 and G712 are turret selection commands, and G721 and G722 are C axis cross
commands; they are different from the machining pattern commands.
. 3) The machiningpattern commands G700 to G750 cannot be entered via the MDI.
4) G700 command, when it is used, must be given to all Lines.

Line
Each of the multiple tool posts have independent move, and can be divided into three Lines, based on
the Z axis. The 2-f axis based Line is Line 1and is described as $1 on the program. Likewise, the Z2 axis
and Z3 axisbasedLines are Line 2 and Line 3 respectively, and are described as $2 and $3.

Superimpose
Commanding G720, G740, or G750 superimpose machining pattern command on the Z axis of an
3
:.l’
optionally selected Line causes the axes operating in different coordinates to synchronize in a
S'!
coordinate with a single reference axis.
For instance, independent Z\, Z2 axes becomes basic coordinate axis Z1, and superimpose axis
i!! (synchronous axis) Z2, and the Z2 program coordinate commands are performed on the coordinate
reference axis, to perform synchronous, asynchronous operations.
4
: %
i
$
5-52
!
i
5. PROGRAMMING

5-3-2 Machining Patterns and Machining Commands

5-3-2-1 Twin turret (G710)
II :
|Machining command
$1 $2 $3
:

Command format : G710 G710W1 G710W1

Commanding the above code to the execution Line calls the twin turret machiningpattern,
I
to automatically move to the next position.
This pattern is the most popular pattern, and is best for machining where turret No.l and ;
turret No.2 are used alternately.

| Turret No. 2 :
X?© Y2©
X 140.0, Z0 x2
(X 160.0, Z0) Y2 X2© I
©
o o
co
*.

I C,@

z© 2©
&
§ xo, zo J •1

zo
Ci@
i o o
»
xt© I
X 140,0,20
(X160.0, 20}
/ fe\xi j
X1

Turret No. 1
Dimensions in parentheses
are for E25/32.

Y2 axis is for E32IV only.

411
(561)

jg

i-l

i;i

5-53

I[
 1

l
:
5. PROGRAMMING
I
;

Execution program

$1 $2 $3
G710 G710W1 G710W1
t
IG711 I
-OI
G00X12.0Z 0.5
I
X21.0 a
f s'
mm ! s

t
T1000 t
(G0QX21.0Z4aFI
-
G201G01X 4.0M3 1A10.0T1400
M05
M07

Turret No.2

:• M
{/////
an
o

o
Si (GOO X21.0 Z43.0)
'

y////,

3 40 \
24 I
::
I
(G01 724.0 F I I)
:

l
Turret No.1

Explanation
"

The above shows the positions of the front turning of turret No. 1, and the cut-off of turret No. 2,
in twin turret alternate machining.

5-54
1 §1
5. PROGRAMMING
1
i
i
Iff Macro specifications Classification of Lines Line No. 1 ($1) Line No. 2 ($2) Line No. 3 ($3)
: ;
*"* "N, :
O
S'
/ s
;] : VC'-'..;i }
\
Turrets No.l andNo. 2 perform turning {.
and secondary machining on the same Z $1V i

1 ii 1
axis fixed point.

(Zt, C1f X1,(X2), Z3 axes control)

G712 *
?
—
Fixed point
TT, Turret No. 2

i (Z1f Ci, X1( (X2), Z3, Y2 axes control)For

iti
Fixed point
—_

--
-
i E321V only X2
/L
A

i
-/(Spindle)*! 761*? — — —
7
<1 (Back
1

spindle) -3
i;
::
Note) $1, $1' are selected by the turret iW, S*s-
selectioncommands (G711,
G712). I
ll ZB
t Turret No.1 I
M G711 it
I
$1
M

Line Line 1 Line 2 LineB I ;

Axis Xj.py.Zÿ.Y;,
Superimpose Z2 superim pose cancel Z3 superimpose cancel

* Coordinatesystem

Argument
Xt, X2 is selected by the G711,
G712 commands. _
U1: Move to the tool eha nge
position.
U1: Move to the tool change
position.
W1: Move to a symmetric point
to turret No. 1. (alarm
Z3: Corresponds with the
machine zero point.
Wt: Move to the machine zero
point. I
S occurs if not commanded)
VI: Move to Y2 axis center.
Per rotation feed effective
spindle Spindle None Spindle

Constant surface speed Spindle Spindle

control effective spindle None

Index, after moving to the tool

change position. Cannot be commanded. Alarm <
I T T****X. Moves to X
indexing.
_ position after
Cannot be commanded. Alarm ;i
com¬
mand
_ _zJZ3
GOOXCZJ Moves to X _ position after Z,
T*>ftX A __ reaches A following the Cannot be commanded. Alarm
G01Z,| | FI 1 indexing
"I"** Compensation Cannot be commanded. Alarm
ir
Note 1) Superimpose is automatically canceled upon pattern switching.
2) No command can be given to $2.
3) The X argument and A argument (Z) value is commanded by the workpiece value.
4) The Z value of the A argument is a value between 2\ to Z2, which is effective when the F ;

command of Z2 in next process is 1000 mm/min or less.

5) Y2 axis and the argument V1 are for E32IV only, and they can be used only when G712 is

1 commanded.
6) The argument W1 for $2 must be always specified, otherwise an alarm will develop.

i: 9I
1 ii
1 5-55 II
;! ii

V'
 ]
l

5. PROGRAMMING

111
1
S-3-2-2 Two-saddle (G720)

Machining command
I
:
:

$1 $2 $3
Command format : G720 G720W1 G720W1

Commanding the above code to the execution Line calls the two-saddle machining pattern, to 1
automatically superimpose the Z2 axis on the Z j axis, and perform synchronous move.
:
; #1
1
This pattern is used for simultaneous machining of rough machining and finishing,
i:
l simultaneous thread cutting (different pitches also OK), outer diameter and boring
secondary machining.

I
1
<*-
212
(332) (Note 1)

XI40.0 Z0
m}wiY2© Turret No. 2

(X160.0ZO) A XI 40.0
(X160.0)
z©
Z2
-z©
YAQ.Z®
©
z©

;
I£ÿI
Ci®
2©
X0,Z0 mCl©
~c,
zo
4ÿ
Z©

O Q
CO

Xi©

fx,
X140.0Z0
(XI 60.0 ZO)
/ X,®
•Turret No. t Dimensions in parentheses
are for E25/32.
1
411
(561) Y2 axis is for E32IV only.

Note) The Z2 axis moves to the zero point (workpiece face) in the Z\ axis coordinate system,

:
t

.
::
m
5-56
i
 h
5. PROGRAMMING f
1
I#
::

i || Execution program j
§ $1 $2 $3
v* w ! i
B f t f 1
i
8
G720 G720 G720W1
G00X12.0Z-Q.5 !1L1
I L lG01X15.0Zt.0F dll GOOZ - 0.5
i
|
i

% !2L1 1X11.0 1
I Z10.0 G01X14.0Z1.0F HU j
i X21.0Z13.0 Z10.0 <l>
I Z13.5 :
X21.0Z13.5
5
8
f f t

;;
;
I
I 0.5
Turret No.2 1
.
7
1f
n (X11.0)

I?
s.
Q ss I =

i
W77/,
h
J
(G01 X15.GZ1.0F CZ3 )

Turret No.1
:

I
Explanation
1
Turret No. 1 performs rough turning Cl in the rough machining and finishing process first, and
turret No. 2 finishing starts at the same time after queuing at the positioning position.
;;

. \
5-57 :

i '.j
 j

\'

S. PROGRAMMING

Macro specifications

G720 s
Turret No. 2 performs turning
and secondary machiningby #ÿ»
point
.Turret No. 2
1
;
independent X2, Z2 control after v

—
A
superimpose to 1\. /

n
I !'
(Z1,C1,X1,X2,Z2,Z3axes
control)
(Z1.C1tXl.X2jZ2tZ3Y2axes
1
1

x4 Fixed t
point /

control)For E32IV only 71 —iMIplL /•I (Back \

--
< (Spindle) Spind,e}-J

ftlf-
Z2 /

d>-ÿ;
Turret No. 1 Z3

1
l
i
!

;
Line Line II Line 2 Line 3

Axis X„ Z„C, x2, z2, Y2 Z3

i;
Superimpose Superimposes Z2 on Z| Z3 superimpose cancel
Coordinate system Z2: Corresponds with the Z,
work coordinate zero
Z3: Corresponds with the
machine zero point.
point. (Workpiece face)

Argument Ut: Move to the tool change U1: Move to the tool change W1: Move to the machine zero
position. position. point.
W1: Move to the Z, work zero
point (workpiece face)
V1: Move to Y2 axis center
Per rotation feed effective
spindle Spindle Spindle Spindle

Constant surface speed

control effective spindle Spindle Spindle Spindle

y***# index, after moving to the tool Index, after moving to the tool
Alarm

T T**®*X_ Moves to X
indexing.
_
change position.
position after
change position.
Moves to X
indexing.
_ position after
Alarm
com¬
mand _
T****X A_ Alarm Alarm Alarm

Compensation Compensation Compensation

Note 1) Command argument G720W1 on Line No. 2 to move the Z2 axis to the workpiece face
position upon pattern switching.
2) Give this command after cancelling the ~L\ coordinate system shift.
v
3) When using G721 and G722, enter them to both $ 1 and $2 and place them on a queue.
;; 4) Y2 axis and argument V 1 are for E32IV only.
:

j;
5-58
 : B
5. PROGRAMMING
1

; 5-3-2-B Back/front simultaneous machining (G730)

i
[j Machining command
; i.
.ÿ
$1 $2 S3

Command format : G730 G730W1 G730W1

Commanding the above code to the execution Line calls the back/front face machining pattern, to
automatically perform the Xi, Z\, and Q axes machining on the front, and the X2, Z3 axes
I machining on the back. The pattern is actually used to machine the front and the back faces
I
independently.
Machining on E323V is done with X2, Z3, and Y2 axes, the Y2 axis being added for the back

--
machining.

Turret No. 2
X®
Y2 ©
% \ X 140.0 ZO
Y2© X© (160.0Z0)

m-—-
o o

c© XO ZO Q
:ÿ 2©. >CE>- & z© ze

C©
1 XO ZO
I
o

X 140.0 ZO
(160.0 ZO) X©
Note 1 C
<s> !

T
I
?
X©
Turret No. 1
j
360
(480)
Dimensions in parentheses
are for E25/32.

Y2axisisforE32IV only.

Note ) Set the value C (back chuck position) in the machining data considering a workpiece
back machining length.
See page 5-18.

5-59

1
 '1

5. PROGRAMMING

|| Execution program]]
i;'

$1 $2 $3

t
G730 G730W1 G730W1
IG00X20.0Z-im IGOOXIS.OZ-aSl
GG1Z15.0F LZ3 G01X20.0Z0.5F dD
I Z30.0
t i
!3L3 f

* S1L3
!
t

Fixed point Fixed point 0.5

(G0OX18.0Z-O.5)
0.5
Turret No. 2

© o
t
©
i
a
H
:!
I:

-
ZQ Z© © © 2 z© Z©
X x a

©
X

I
Turret No. 1
|
(G00X20.0Z-0.5;

Explanation

020 machining is performed on front side by the Zi and Xi axes, while another 020 machining is
performed on theback side by the X2 and Z3 axes, each by different programs.
The above figure shows a positioning status.
;

i
5-60
!J
 if
1
II 5. PROGRAMMING
m
II i
a
i-V: :!
|li
i
m> IMacro specifications! I
1 I
G730
is c§>
I Turning and secondary
— Turret
No. 2 \
ii machiningisdone |
\

mh
independently on the front and \

back spindles; Interpolation 1

I
1—- jplm
ss I 1
(Xt, Zi) is done with the spindle
m and turret No. 1on the front, -(Spindle) — 1
i
{Sack
spindle)
i
/
\
while interpolation {X2, Z3)is i f:

n
g
:
done on the back spindle and
turret No. 2 on the back side.
(Z1, Ci, Xt, Z2, X2, Z3 axes
2i mb \
\
X Z3 *
•"
/

control) Turret No. 1 1

1 (Zi,Ct,Xi, Z2, Xa, Z3 , Y2 axes
control)For E32IV only
I
I
"xn> I

I
|
§
Line Line t Line 2 Line3

Axis x,. z,.c, Z2 X2, Z3, Yj

If: i
Superimpose Z2 superimpose cancel Z3 superimpose cancel
::
Coordinate system Z2: Z2 moves to the machine Z3: The position where the
coordinate zero
system 2nd too! post back tooi- ft
point. b'rt meets the zero point
of the back side
workpiece.
i
I Argument U1: Move to the too! change U1: Move to the tool change W1: Move to the work zero I
f;i position. position. point.
§ W1: Move to the Z2 work zero VI: Move to Y2 axis center
-S' point (alarm occurs if not
commanded) I
|
:T"'h
W1ICZI
The shift amount isIi I
1 commanded by
from the Z2 axis zero point I:
Per rotation feed effective
5
spindle Spindle Sub spindle v

Constant surface speed

control effective spindie Spindle Sub spindle

Index, after moving to the tool Index, after moving to the tool
change position. change position.

T Moves to X
indexing.
_ position after Moves to X
indexing.
_ position after i
com¬ S
mand
T****x A. Alarm Alarm i
y** Compensation Compensation : 1

K:
;

Note 1) Y2 axis and the argument V1 are for E321V only. '
2) The argument W t for $2 must be always specified, otherwise an alarm will develop.
#
I :!
I 1
5-61
I!

I
1
 :

5. PROGRAMMING I
I
: 'ÿ

S-3-2-4 Three-Line simultaneous machining (G740)

|| Machining command
$1 $2 $3 1
Command format : G740 G740 G740

Commanding the above code to the executionLine calls the three-Line simultaneous machining
pattern, to superimpose the Zj axis on the Z-i axis, and the Z3 axis on the Z2 axis, while performing
the machiningby the Xi.Zj, and Cf axes.
This machiningpattern isused for three-process simultaneous machining of the outer diameter,
and front-back two face centers (drill), etc. (Double superimpose)
This command must be given at the X2 axis tool change position.

212 148 51
(332) (148) (81)

C5>.
C©
2®
fs?
(E>
1 E© W Z© Z© I
f c© ©
XOZO ©
2.
Z© ZQ 15i
<S>
Turret No. 1 Dimensions in ( ) are for E25/E32.

$1 $2 $3

Command format : G740 G740W1 G740W1

I

--
Entering argument W1 into the above standard status $2 causes the turret No. 2 center to
move to the front workpiece face, and entering argument W1 into $3 causes the back
S
workpiece face to move to the turret No. 2 center, to make a Z1/Z2/Z3 superimpose status.

148 c
:i;

f |
z© <£x
z© Z©
<s>
z© z© m
Note) The back face chuck position C is the value set in the machining data. See page 5-18.

5-62
1
i S. PROGRAMMING
.!

-I
I :ÿ

1 ii
Execution program || .

$1 $2 $3

G0OX1O.OZ- 0.5 I
G01Z15.0F CZU t |'l
X18.0
G740 G740W1 G740W1 j
Z30.0F cm GOOZ-O.5
III is
G00Z-0.5
—
iX 50-0 i
I

!2L1
1 f
!3L1
!s
1 y
1

t 1
I
:|ÿp| I

15
<s>
Z© Z©
[ ] 'i
r<s>
y
I
Z©
z©
3 €1—3
148 0.5
Z© Z©
|
t\
a Turret No. 1

: 7y i :;
Explanation j

The two back/front centers are positioned in a superimpose status with the X2 axis during 018 i
machining with the Zi axis and turret No. 1-Xj axis.

ii
5:
5-63 p
!I

it

'
 !

Macro specifications

G740

Turret No. 2 (Z2 axis) is

superimposed on the 2ÿ axis, and
A
t
d>'
__ do-
5. PROGRAMMING

--
T,
the back spindle (Z3 axis) is /TOCf \ E

superimposed on the Z2 axis to t *

1
perform 3-Line independent I
!
Vi
l
&
1;
machining.
/- ?

vulr' f—
(Zi,Ci,Xi,Z2, X2, Z3 axes control) 1 8a ck [
-{Spindle}
(Ziff Ci, X1rz2, X2, Z3, Y2 axes spindle
control) For E32JV only
h
Z?
\
lV-
1X /
xv4 Z3
;
!a
*
x,fEZT
$t

J.'l,
Line Une 1 Line 2 Line 3
1
Axis Xi. Zi,Ct x2, z2, Y2 Z3
I. Superimpose Superimposes Z2onZ, Superimposes Z3 on Z2
: Corresponds with the Zi Corresponds with the Z2
ii Coordinate system Z2 : z3:
work coordinate zero back face work
point. coordinate zero point.
Argument U1 : Move to the tool change U1 : Move to the tool change W1 :Move to Z2 back face
position. position. work coordinate zero
f W1 :Move to the Z, work
coordinate zero point
point.

I (workpiece face)
VI: Move to Y2 axis center
Per rotation feed effective
I spindle Spindle Spindle Sub spindle
Constant surface speed
I control effective spindle Spindle Spindle Sub spindle

“I"**** Index, after moving to the too! Index, after moving to the tool Alarm
change position. change position.

T Moves to X
indexing.
_ position after Moves to X
indexing.
_ position after Alarm
com¬
mand
T****X A Alarm Alarm Alarm

T** Compensation Compensation Compensation

f !
Note 1) Give this command after cancelling the Zj or Z2 coordinate system shift.
2) Y2 axis and the argument V1 are for E32IV only.

: :

y I

5-64

l !
 3

5. PROGRAMMING

1 ';} 1

5-3-2-S Pick off, center support machining (G750)

1 1k
r |Machining command ||
I $1 $2 $3
;i .]ÿ:
: Command format : G750 G750 G750W1
1 I
Commanding the above code to the execution Line calls the pick off machining pattern, to

*
I
superimpose the Z3 axis on the 2j axis.
This margining pattern is given after two-saddle, twin turret machining and the back/front i|
i
1

simultaneous machining commands, to knock out the workpiece, rechuck, or for center
1 support, etc. by the back spindle normally. i
£
I 360

8 (480) !

1 fr?-"===" I

2©)dD
MS3 M I :
$ 5

fc== = ~-=Wi O
I
Si 5
j!
X140.0 Z0
X0 Note 1
(X160.0ZO)\ c I

J X®
“]— Turret No. 1
Dimensions in ( ) are for E25/E32.
3

Note) Theback chuck position C is the value set in the machining data. See page 5-18.
m
£

1
f 5-65

I
€ÿ
£

£
!'

5. PROGRAMMING
!

|
Execution program

$1 $2 $3
:
G710 G710W1 G710W1
f t I
M3S1 = 1500G99
NIZZJ (G711.G712)
G00X21.0Z85.0T EZZJ
t t
G750 G750W1 G750
i
S2 = 1500M24
i G00Z-2.0
J
a G98G1Z50.0F EZZJ
G4U0.3
* M15

; !3L1 S1L1
G00X21.0
I G01X-4.0FEZZ3 !
t
G710 G710W1 G710W1
I
li I
;;i,y J »
t

85
II

<3
CD -«-
CD
1
z© z© z© z
% xozo.
0s
&////,
I
1i
I
S
I
s
X
1 Explanation
Turret No. 1
The Z3 axis is superimposed on the Z\ axis, and the back chuck closes to shift to the cut-off
process at Zj axis coordinate value, Z50.0.
1
«:
«
I 1
a:
I
I
'

i! 5-66
 i
1
1
5. PROGRAMMING

1
yl

1Macro specifications I
:
G750 I
I
1

----
)l
ffi;
• 'ir; Theback spindle canmove X2
independently while l
Fixed point
superimposing on the Zi axis. 1
The machiningpatterns of
I turrets No. 1and No. 2 are
&
maintained at the condition
before this command is given. Js:
E3 CS>ÿ
I

(Zi. C,,X,, I2, X2, Z3 axes

I control) Zt Z3. fi

I.

Line Linet Line 2 LineS

P
Axis Z3
I:: )|
1 Superimpose Superimposes Z3 on Zt
Coordinate system Z3: Corresponds with the Z,
!
work coordinate zero ,
point
W1:Move to the Z, work
Argument
coordinate zero point. 1;
Per rotation feed effective
§ spindle Sub spindle

! Constant surface speed

control effective spindle Sub spindle 5
SI
II Alarm 1
i T T****X_ Alarm
com¬
I mand T****x A Alarm I

I
:
T** Compensation

Mote t) Alarm occurs if the machining pattern before the G750 command is given is other than
I: 2)
G71Q, G720, or G730.
Give this command after cancelling the Zi coordinate system shift. 1
l 1
1
1 :
I
1
fI
tfip)
II
I

I 5-67
::

I
lii'
.p

I I:
$
 '

5. PROGRAMMING
?;

5-3-3 Machining Pattern Transfer

Pattern transfer
The patterns can he transferred by the G command, as follows.

Machining
pattern cancel
G700

Pick off Pick off

G750 G750

Two-saddle Twin turret

G720 G710

, ’F

Three-Line Back/front
simultaneous
:v
simultaneous
G740 G730
i,

Pick off
G750

\ Note) The pick off command(G750) cannot be given from commands other than the twin turret (G710),
$

two-saddle (G720), or back/front simultaneous (G730) commands. Direct command or command

1
f.
from other patterns will cause alarm. I-
t
$
;
;
!ÿ
1"
/I'
I
ii I
f
5
1
i »ÿ

1I
U £
1 I
5-68

it
 5. PROGRAMMING

,;v
H Patterns flow
The machining pattern command is given to all the three Lines. Queuing is also automatically
$ performed.

Program example

i, $3
$1 $2

« £

3
G710(U1)

G711
G710W1 (U1)
Machining program

Commanded on$1 alone

G710CW1)

G712

G740(U1) G740(W1,U1) G740CW1)

G720 (U1) G720 (W1» U1} G720(W1)

i
G722 G722 Commanded on $1, $2

!”'ÿ
G721 G721

G730 (U1) G730W1 (U1) G730(W1)

1 G750 G750 G750CW1)

iV Giving W1, U1 (argument) commands in the machining pattern command block enables axis move to a
fixedpoint along with the machiningpattern selection.
1
Note 1) The above argument commands in parentheses are optional, but G710W1, G730W t of $2 must
always be commanded. Alarm occurs if not.
2) Give this command after cancelling the coordinate system shift.

I
>

5-69

I
 :

rJ

§ÿ;. ri

f;: i

i
i

*
4
\
1

V
5» PROGRAMMING

!1

!
>

j
%
f
I;

!!;
5

i
!ÿ
$ I
m

i ;ÿ
a
i
|
je;
I'
;/ÿ

; 1
v 3
i,

|
i
(

I1
I

\
&

\
j
l \

Rt • i
}

I 1 I j

ii
| I4
i 1
:ÿ

:j

i
5-70
;
 5. PROGRAMMING
i

5-4 ACTUAL PROGRAMMING '?ÿ

i [TURNING] v

Basic programming using the commands in the previous chapter.

1
3
m
;

{;

1
%
K;.":

I i

1
$ (,•

J
5-71

1
f
 )

1
i

I
I

5. PROGRAMMING

:> 5-4-1 Overall Program Configuration

Command format : •Program No. ODD

® Line No. $1 $2 $3

•Sequence No. N N N

•Machining program FiTI (ran Em

I Count M56
®

•Last program command G999 G999 G999

•Last program only mo mo mo
sequence No. N999 N999 N999
•1 cycle stop M02 M02 M02
•Queuing at head of program M99 M99 M99
•Stop code % % %
)

..fe:
1
I
II

;
Si
1

5-72 ;
 I
r.

5. PROGRAMMING

Explanation :
O The program number is given at the head of the program to distinguish the program from other
programs.
4
The number is designated in 8 digits, and 000000001 to 099999999 canbe used.
I * In this machine, the mechanical software macro is includedinprogram numbers of the 9000s, so the
9000s must be excluded from the program numbers to be designated.

;
O The programs of the three Lines are entered in a single program, so the programs are entered for each
Line number ($1 to $3).
j
i O Attaching a sequence number at the head of each process will allow easy check of the program.
The sequence numbers (except for N999) are all mere reference numbers with no influence on the
machining, and can be omitted.
N00001 to N99999 (excluding N999) can be used as the sequence number (maximum 5 digits).
5

is O Enter the product count command M56 in continuous machining. (Can be commanded on $1 alone.)
O Always enter G999 as the last program command, queue for the Lines, and perform machining of the
last program machiningpattern. i.
* Always enter G999 in $ t to $3, to allow automatic queuing.
O Enter N999 after the last program ends.
O Always enter the 1 cycle end command (M02), program head queuing (M99), and stop code (%) at the
s end of each program.
O The program of this machine after the $1 to $3 (Line command) has no special format, and can be
decided as necessary according to the machiningpattern. I;

1 O Enter the last operation in any Line after G999 Oast program command). The machining ends by N999 ?
($1 to $3) after performing the work.
O Enter the fixed pattern after N999.

f.

1
I ;;
I :i:

%
- s
5-73

!
 5. PROGRAMMING

5-4-1-1 Process recognition

Processingrecognition can be done by using the sequence number, for mainly for time measurement

;;
M Sequence number

Command format : N Maximum 5 digits

n
I
I JL j II
I Tool number Si
Machining sequence

1
The sequence number is given to deside the machining sequence or to check the tools. For example,
enter N j 0 11 1 |} "l |f 3 j when using tool No. 13 in the 1st process. *
a
1
H Process recognition
,ÿ

Command format : WK [•#]

I [ ] 2 digits (0 to 99)
a
1
• Enter the process recognition WK [••] at the beginningof eachprocess. i
• WK [••] must always be enteredin eachprocess of the programif time measurement ®i
is to be done.
• There is no other use than for time measurement. i§
!; : •TheAs the sequence number, use this function as fit for each programmer.
• entry numbers cannot be duplicated.

II
I
5-4-1-2 Machining plan
4 Center hole drilling (center drilling, drilling, tapping, boring, etc.) is to be cut before the outer
I
diameter cutting.
4 The outer diameter cutting is generally to be done with a single infeed. If there are grooves in the

i
middle, cut the groove each time with the grooving cutter, andcontinue the outer diameter cutting.
II
4 Cutting required of high precision and cutting with large infeed amount are to be done by the front
I turning tool, wherever possible.
One cycle ends by cutting the workpiece with the cut-off tool. m
* The machining pattern and machining sequence will be different when the machining includes
back machining. The cut-off does not always mean end of the machining. II

1
I
f; 5-74
I*
 5,
h:
5. PROGRAMMING

:
1 i.

5-4-2 Preparatory and Cut-off Process

5-4-2-1 Preparatory Process
Conditions necessary for operation of the cycle are set in the preparatory process, before the operation is
put to a start. |

11 X©
I 1
1 Start position

VZZZÿZA S--
Guide bushing
fixture

% 1
!
z©
% 1
nr i VZZZZZA

Machininglength move
""V'x©
distance ?I
(part length + cut-off width)
i {
O The program starts, as shown above when the cut-off ends and the Z axis returns to the start
position. Note that the above figure is the machining when the cut-off tool is mounted on the turret
i :
No. 2.
I
O Give the program number at thehead of the program.
O Then, set eachLine command ($1 to $3).
O Next, set the conditions necessary for each Line.
1) Where to set the reference point of the longitudinal anddiameter directions :

• the reference point is X

The diameter direction is the direction of the turret where the cut-off tool is mounted, and
- 4.0. S
® The reference point of the longitudinal direction(Zt axis side) is normally Z0.
* The diameter direction and longitudinal direction reference points of other turrets change
according to the machining pattern, etc., and must be set each time. i

O Enter the machining pattern command. (Considering the contents of each Line.)
O Close the chuck.
O Select the next process tool.
O Effective turret selectioncommand.
n O Then, start the operation.
® —
Escape the Z\ axis side (longitudinal direction) material for 0.5 mm.
® Rotate the spindle. (If back face machining is also performed, given the command also on
v
the back side.) ;
r;
® Decide whether to command the feedrate in per minute feed (mm/min) (G98) or in per
J;
rotation feed (mm/rev) (G99). ;

I
i'
5-75

j
!
!
 j

5. PROGRAMMING

I
'.m

§8
I
&
1
Program example

Start I
I
O (D
$1 $2 $3 (2)
G50X
G7»®
Z •••• G50X-4.0ZO
•
G7® W1
G50Z0
G7®*W1
(3)
(4) I
M06 (5) i
S
T®*e®
G7»®
GOOX*®Z-0.5
(6)
(7)
(8)
I
II
;
1
••
M3S1 = e ®G99 (9)

l
|
( Machining process )
: Explanation

(1) Specify the program number.

(2) Specify eachLine command.
(3) Set the current position (start position) coordinate system in each Line.
(4) Specify the machiningpattern command.
(The following machiningprocess is performed by this machining pattern command.)
I (5) Close the chuck.
(6) Select the next process tool.
(7) Effective turret selection command.
(8) Escape the material from the tool side before starting the machining.

1 (Normally input about — 0.5.)

.j
! (9) Enter the Z\ axis side spindle speed and forward rotation command.
(The Z3 side back spindle command is M23S2 = ••••,)
1 if
I
1f
Specify per rotation feed (G99). (Or, specify G98 for per minute feed.)

:
n
I
If

'

1
:

5-76
jl
1 in
 5. PROGRAMMING

1
Ml

G50X-4.0Z0 G00Z-0.5

s
r't I;

I s|
Cut-off tool Cut-off tool
" t I
1/ 1 1

£ 2 ( %
%
ft
T $
E
E
X -4.0

Q.5 mm 1
Decide this point as Z = 0. rs

| i
O Prior to the program execution, implement O Escaping thematerial allows spindle
1
the start point positioningprocedure to rotation without damaging the tool. The cut¬
move the cut-off tool 2.0 mm downward off tool can also be moved to the diameter
.ÿÿÿ
from the center in diameter direction. That direction in rapid feed.
point is equivalent to X = —4.0 in
: diameter designation.
O Implement the same procedure to move the
cut-off tool to a positionin longitudinal
direction where necessary longitudinal
% j'
I
move distance can be secured for a parts
| I
machining.

* After the X, Z positioning, press the

material on the cut-off tool, and start the
program.

I
1

!
1
'ÿ'I
|
5-77 V

;
!
 . - - -
35
I:
5. PROGRAMMING

it
;

5-4-2-2 Cut-off and ending processes 1

i!
!ÿ
Program example
( Machining process )
;
NDDDD NDDDD <D I
G712 ©
T[ © I:'.

GOOXCUz CUT <D

G201X G01X- 4.0F I iM31A i iTI I ©
| M05
M07
©
<Z>
1
m»co i ©
-
GOOX 4.0Z TOO (D
.
M56 ©
G999 G999 G999 <B>
N999 N999 N999 ©
M02 M02 M02 ©
M99 M99 M99
% % % ©

57
( End )
1
m
II
Explanation
4
© Enter the sequence number.
\ ;
: © Give the turret No. 2 selectioncommand.
!
© Pre-selection (Specify the turret No. 1separator mount number).
.
Position at the length to be cut-off, and perform tool position compensation.
(Total part length + cut-off tool width)
© Command start to the sequential cut-off operation.
(Cut-off tool moves to the cut-off start position of the diameter direction, and performs the
cut-off. Simultaneously, separates the workpiece.)
! © Stop the spindle rotation.
© Open the chuck.
! © Command the start tool No. on the turret No. 1side.
© The Z\ axis returns to the start position in rapid feed. Compensation cancel
© Count the products.
a © Command the last program command. (Automatic queuing is performed at G999 of each
Line.)
© After giving the last program command, always enter the the N999 command.
$ © Enter the1cycle stop command. .

Enter the program head queuing command.

© Stop code (end of program). i
m
The figure is shown in the next page.
m

•i 5-78
1
 1
5. PROGRAMMING

;,V 1
.1 :
Machining

§! %
S Workpiece length »
©
a Tool width 1
i
©

1 ~n o !,
'

T X - 4.0 i.
% 1
X
-4 7/ |l

a f
2 1

¥
1

ji

I:
|
I

i
%
I
; «'• i
5-79

;
1
,

:i
i
I
3

1
I
 5. PROGRAMMING in

i
5-4-3 Machining Process

<Outer diameter cutting >

Outer diameter cutting includes the front turning process, back turning process, the grooving process, if
etc.

I
11
-0.5 a. 1
£
Program point

Program point

!'
L ( A
u.J I I
X
1
11
II
Explanation: O Position the front turning tool at the position shownabove.
Specify move for as long as the machining distance.
O The cutter width of the back turning tool must be considered, as in the cut-off tool.
The actual cutting point is at the left side of the program point, so the cutting will
*
If
become short if coordinate point of Z=i plus cutter width a is not given. ||
Thus, set Z= £+ a as the program point (Z=iis the machining point).
O Alsobe careful of the cutter width of the groove tool. si
3*
J
1

5
•
/
IP
Program point -Cutting point
P
Program point Cutting point Prograrnpoint Cutting point
'A
program point Cutting point
I
(*Cutting point) 'I'"
:

Front turning tool Cut-off tool Back turning tool Groove tool

Notel) When using the back turning tool and groove tool, plus the cutter width to the
coordinate value of the longitudinal direction. Describing the cutter width of the tool r-‘
on the tool layout will help the later process. II
2) Always escape the tool to the material outer diameter queuing position at the end of
the outer diameter cutting.
:
s

5-80
 B
S. PROGRAMMING

ij

<Front turning process>

Program

: unnnn
GOO X3.5 Z-0.5 ©
G01 X8.0 Z4.0 F [ ©
Z9.0 © V
1
X13.0 F f 1 ©
.
B
Explanation

© Command the sequence number.

* © Position the tool at the prescribed diameter in rapid feed.
j'

© Perform taper cutting from 8.0 mm diameter to 4.0 mm long.

.
J @ Cut to 9.0 mm long.
d) Escape to material outer diameter +1.0 mm diameter,in cutting feed. I
H

% Machining (© has no movement.)

£
I 5 4
1
0.5

m Z z TO
s
;

n n I r
o
P
O
t ix
o
ji
y

4i
i 1
r
iB i

..
3
;

5-81

jjj
1
I
 I

5. PROGRAMMING

III
< Back turning process > I
Program

) wanna
GOO X17.0 Z17.0
®
d>
1
G01 X11.0 F[ ] <D |
Z23.0 F [ j ©
X17.0 F [ ] <D

Explanation i/1 .

© Command the sequence number. a

(D Position the diameter direction at +1.0 mm the material diameter, and the 11
longitudinal direction at 17.0 (13 mm longitudinal dimension plus cutter width
%
4 mm), inrapid feed.
(D Infeed to 011in cutting feed.
4
© Cut to 23 mm the longitudinal direction.
© Escape to material outer diameter +1.0 mm diameter, in cutting feed. i
I®
Machining

t
st
6 13
I *
| vo
r
A 2 I 1

1i
t 4 M. . 13
/
c 1
I s
\ ©
©
©
17 23
©
X X
i 'I:
1:
i;:
- a
f
4
ci I
?!
v 5-82 8
.

1: 5. PROGRAMMING

I
-
I <Grooving process>
.

Program •i.i

!€]ÿÿÿ ©
GOO X17.0 Z15.0 ©
GOt X8.0 F [ ] ...... <D
' X17.0 F I 0-2 I ©
:
Explanation
© Command the sequence number
© Position the diameter direction at the +1.0 mm of the material diameter, and the
longitudinal direction at 15 mm. The positioning is done simultaneously in rapid feed.
© Infeed to 8 dia. in cutting feed.
© Escape to material outer diameter +1.0 mm diameter,in fast cutting feed.

if • The grooving toolis used for grooving. Groovingis normally done after the outer
diameter cutting.

Machining

l
14.8 15.0
-
Ii

A VO
<a B
A tN

1
[I
sFi*-3
%
B i X
I
X
;i

0.1~0,2 mm The hatched

(Reference)
part is cut.
® If grooving is to be performed after
front turning, cut to 0.1 to 0.2 mm
before the longitudinal dimension
in the front turning process, and i
( VO
Q
ISJ
T &
decide the longitudinal dimension
by the grooving tool and perform
finishing, to make the longitudinal
F ;
in
t: dimensioning easy. 3

I
B 5-83

I
 !

!
1

5. PROGRAMMING

5-4-4 Center Hole Machining

Spindle speed
The spindle speed N (r.p.m.) when using center drilland drill is calculated as follows.

V: Cutting speed (circumferential speed) £

N= - X-. X 1,000
jrxd
d: Drill diameter (mm) (maximum diameter of machined
taper for center drill) si
it: Circularconstant{=r3.14)

i
#
Program point and cutting point
The position of the program point of the center drill anddrill against the holder, is as shown below. II
For instance, when positioning the drill in rapid feed at the center of the material as shown below, set
I
the X coordinate at —50.0 (diameter designation).

This positioning program is ; II

X© Program point
6711 t
I
-
«
1
0.5 G00 X 50.0 Z- 0.5
T
25 mm
I t
ggasasMsasaKi

i m
Cutting point
Turret No. 1

I
£ ;;;;

ftt
1
i m
W
I til
1
?!
i
t
5-84
1
*.
II ?!:
 5. PROGRAMMING
>
j:;

5-4-4-1 Center Drilling

*:
I
V,
Machining
i

it 0.5 5

-1
5
c=:> 'i
1

__
£ :ii;

1
i Program
TX Explanation
I X

i G711 CD Select turret No. 1.

I
I
v;
M03S1 = t © Rotation command.
X - 50.0 Z - 0.5 <D I I
I GOO
] ©
Positioning at the rotary center.
I GOt Z5.0 FI Infeed to 5 mm.
i GOO Z-0.5 ... © Return to original position. !'

1
I
',P

-
I:
I

3.
: 5

i'j
-
Vv
I
K
5-85
i

;
;

j
\

I
 j
'V

I
J

V:;

5. PROGRAMMING

!:

II
;
5-4-4-2 Drill 1
[Count and amount of infeed]

infeed amount (mm)

Material Tool 1st After 2nd

Woodruff drill
Brass Flat drill Entire length

Aluminum i,=0dx3.O in -in-1 xO-6

i.
Drill
Free cutting steel toadx 1 (min)

Tool steel ii = ad x 2.5 in = in-1 x0.5

Carbonate steel Drill to ad x 0.9 (min)
Free cutting stainless

Stainless steel it = ad x 2.0 in = in-1 X0.4

Drill
Hard material tO0dxO.8 (min)
::

Note
• Always perform center hole drillingbefore drilling. When machining deep holes, the
coolant may not reach the deeper part, or the chips may not be extracted well, to cause
i
galling on the material anddrill and damage the drill.
Therefore, infeed is recommended to be divided into several steps. Thisis called
stepping. See the above table for details on the infeed count and infeed amount.

Reference: ® Decide the drill machining depth considering

the tool length and the effective length.

I
g Tool length t == 0.3 x ad
V: ,!ÿ

118®
1
«:
r i
I:
I
*i
..
t 1
i
1
'

II
iV,

II
1
it
5-86
.

1 111
 f
i
i? 5. PROGRAMMING

i; 1
1 f:
1 Deep hole drilling
y (Example of infeed amount calculation)

1st infeed =05x3= 15.0

f
•; Materia! : Free cutting steel

1“ 2nd infeed 62 - f2-i x 0.6=9.0 61 +82+63 = 30.0

3rd infeed 63 = jÿi x 0.6 = 5.4 # 6.0

.
I
i 0.5
1
in
r.
y
\\\\\\
\ÿ\\\\\\\\\x
i:

T
'
15 (1st infeed
24 (2nd infeed)
)ÿ

30 (3rd infeed)

R, Program Explanation

G712 (1) Select turret No. 2.

I
ii M03S1 = [ 1 (2) Command the speed.
i |>

-
GOO X 50.0 Z-0.5 (3) Position the drill at the rotary center.
; ;
1 G01 Z15.0
GOO Z-0.5
F0.1 T (4)
(5)
1st infeed. Compensation No. command
Return the drill to the original position.
G04 U0.5 (6) Dwell (0.5 seconds)
I
,1
Z14.5
G01 Z24.0 F0.1
(7)
(8)
Positioning for the 2nd infeed.
2nd infeed.
GOO Z-0.5 (9) Return the drill to the original position. '
G04 U0.5 (10) Dwell (0.5 seconds)
Z23.5 (ID Positioning for the 3rd infeed.
I G01 Z30.0 F0.1 (12) 3rd infeed.
;;
I

1 GOO Z-0.5 TOO (13) Return the drill to the original position.
(End of drilling). Compensation cancel

: i)
!
5-87

i.1'
) I;

|
:

! :
R
:
 :

5. PROGRAMMING

5-4-4-3 Thread cutting by tap and die

There are two kinds of thread cutting; thread cutting by the cutter, and thread cutting by the tap and
die. The explanation on thread cuttingusing the tap and die is given first.
The tap and die machining are basically programmed according to the same theories, only the shift
amount upon positioning differs a little.

2=0
a 2= 0
a'

f
tP=
m
\)L

-
P
--
W'ti
!
i

Tap
W\
P
1
— t

• The tap and die are positioned as shown above, before starting the machining.
Die

• The shift amount a when setting the tap on the holder is to be 3 to 5 mm, while the shift amount a'
of the dieis to be set about "2 + 1mm".
® The preparatory hole effective depth for tapping must be as deep as possible. Normally make it
three time the lead or the same length as the tap nominal diameter deeper against the length of the
thread.

< • The standard speed for the tap and die machiningis 200 to 1000 r.p.m.
• The dwell time till the tap is extractedis calculated as follows.
:
1 b: Return amount (mm)
0.2xJ + b L: Lead (mm)
; t=
LxN/60
N: Spindle speed (r.p.m.) 11
2: Effective length of thread (mm)

*
OStandard speed
1
i
Material Nominal diameter Speed (r.p.m.)
1
Non-ferrous Ml to M3 600 to 1,000
materials M4 to M6 400 to 800 #
M7 to MtO 200 to 600
Ferrous M1 to M3 400 to 800
materials M4 to M6 200 to 600
M7 to to 400

5-88 I
 vi:

t 5. PROGRAMMING

i •f
a
I S-4-4-4 Tapping process (Example of machining MS P = 1.25)
I
Program Machining Explanation
i
I (1) Select turret No. 2.
a

11 G712 (1)
(2)
(a)
5 (2) Command the spindle speed. S
. M03 S1 =300 (3) Dwell to make sure of the
v. spindle speed <2.0 seconds). ;.i
G04 U2.0 (3) :
v (4) Positioning at the center of
GOO X- 50.0 Z- 0.5 (4) the workpiece. ;

1 (5) Positionthe tap toimm ;

S GOO Z4.0 (5) the workpiece face In rapid

feed. Z * (a- 1.0)

I
§

I
m. G32 Z11.4 F1.0 (6)

m
1WA
*Hr (6) Move the tap 8 mm forward
in the pitch (P x 0.8}
feedrate {the feed amount
is thread length £ X 80 %)
Z = {f x0.8 + a)
F = (Px0.8)
'

:!
I
Z2.0 Ft.25 M04 (7) (b)
3
(7) Retrieve the tap to 3 mm
from the workpiece face (b)
by pitch feed reverse
I
m
command.
1
i'll
53
Z=*{a-3.0)

<8) Wait till the tap is

G04 U2.0 (8) extracted.
(a) (9) Retrieve to the start
(9) 5 position of the next process
GOO Z-0.5 in rapid feed.

tt
i
(10) Spindle rotation command I
M03 SI —[ 00} of the next process.
1

0.5

i
Note) The G32 tapping command disables the override switch function, to perform
machining in the programmed feedrate.

il
I
5-89
t'

I
 !
!

i
1

1
5. PROGRAMMING

5-4-5 Thread Cutting with Tool

i B
II
The thread cutting command is normally performed by the G92 canned cycle, but special thread cutting
can also be done using the G32 single block command. The following are explanation on the G92 alone.

Program point and cutting point

1®1
f
The thread cutting toolhas right-handed type and left-handed type, each with different shift amount. I
The holder itself may be shifted. In this case, the shift amount of a is the cutting point of the tool is the
holder shift amount plus the tool shift amount.
1 p
The right-handed is normally selected as the front turning tool, and the left-handed type as the IS
back turning tool.

--
20 (Left-handed).
- 1
I
w
• *”] (Right-handed)

*j|
5

Program point Cutting point

- (-V Cutting point
1
Holder shift amount — *• Tool shift amount
Shift amount
Shift amount of tool bit
i
II

—-
a

(Shift amount)
*ÿ of holder a

(Shift amount)
, ill

5-4-5-1 G92 thread cutting canned cycle I

Start (initial point) Ill
i I
4
—*-{T)J a: Shift amount (mm)
L: Lead (mm)
a S

I Za: Effective length of thread (mm)

3 2

<§> 20 o
20
•MjP a
Initial
I i cr point

{Return to
Z start position)
L Za L 2a 2L

(Return X alone to start position) (X infeed positioning)ÿ

20 rrn ® zo ©

||

L 2a
(2 feed
positioning) L Za 21
I
111
I
5-90
 ‘

5. PROGRAMMING
;£ ;

& Thread cutting by G92

I Example M1OP = 1.5 Machining nonferrous material (right screw)

1 Machining
G92XQZCM
s
1
20 a :

Start position/ C?
s
c 2
2
£ \
N. Z program point Thread lead : L (1.5mm)

*L Za 2L*
Z Effective length : Za(12mm)
Tool shift : a (15mm)
infeed : Xn
* Uneven thread part
.

Program Explanation

G712 © Select turret No. 2.

M 03 51 = 1500 © Spindle rotation command.
G04 U1.0 © 1.0-second dwell to confirm the rotation.
GOO X13.0 Z12.0 T © Positioning the tool to the initial point (Z = a- 2L)
G92 X9.3 Z28.5 F1.5 © 1st infeed (X, 0.35) (L) (Z = a + Za + 2L) (F = L)
X8.8 © 2nd infeed (X2 0.25)
X8.48 © 3rd infeed (X3 0.16)
X8.28 © 4th infeed (X4 0.1)
X8.16 © 5th infeed (X5 0.06)
, X8.06 © 6th infeed (X6 0.05)
X8.06 © 0 cut (same as last infeed) j
1'

GOO X[ ]Z L © To the initial point of the next process.

See the thread cutting count table for details on the infeed.

!
5-91

!
l
I
 I
<

5. PROGRAMMING

® The spindle speed is limited as follows.

8,000 (mm/min) N: Spindle speed

N (r.p.m.) S
I L(mm)
L Thread lead

®
8,000: Maximum feedrate
The standard speed for thread cuttingis 500 to 2,000 r.p.m.
I
® Uneven threads are cut at the beginning and end of the thread cutting because of the delay of
the servo system. The amount is about 2L at the entrance and L at the exit when the spindle
speed is 1,500 r.p.m. The uneven thread part canbe made shorter by decreasing the speed. Iill
• The right screw and left screw are selected by the Z axis start position change or by the 1
reversing the spindle with the reverse holder. I

fj

I
,

!ÿ:

ii

i
*

i
i
:
,

i.

I '

I'

5-92
 5. PROGRAMMING I

5-4-S-2 G92 taper thread cutting canned cycle

The following taper thread cutting can be performed.

Machining G92XnznR|T|Fi i
'

zo
a

t Start position/T
Thread lead : L

z f:
X3
\
T Effective length : Za
Tool shift
Taper
: a
: r
\ Z program point * Uneven thread part

L* Za 2L*

The taper thread cuttingis also performed in the cycle of(D to© but the :
coordinate reference points are all at (D.
Note) The sign of taper r is the direction of the start position viewed from the end position.

Program Explanation iS

G712 ... (D Select turret No. 2.

M!ZZ1SI = GZ3 ... © Spindle rotation command and forward/reverse command.
G04 U1.0 ... <D 1.0-second dwell to confirm the rotation.
GOO X fxol Zi I • © Positioning the tool to the initial point
-
x (thread diameter + 2L) Z(a 2L)
G92 x rial z| 1 R m Fl |
... © -
1st infeed x (thread diameter 2 x infeed 1)
Z (a + Za + L), R (taper), F(L)
X(X2) ... © -
2nd infeed x (Xi 2 x infeed 2)
X(X3) ... © -
3rd infeed x (Xa 2 x infeed 3)
X(X3) ... © Zero-cut at diameter X3.
GOO XI i ZI [ ... ® To the initial point of the next process. (Thread cutting
cycle OFF.)

Seethe thread cutting count table for details on the infeed.

5-93

j!

i'
 ;

S. PROGRAMMING

Si:'
S
5-4-6 Boring (Coordinate System Shift)
if
V:
The center line of the tool and the center line of the nominal cutting diameter corresponds in boring.
Therefore you must determine the actual cutting point, and then code it in a program, based on a
1
calculation which takes shift amount of the holder (25 mm) and tool radius into consideration.
I
H Program point and cutting point

r ---
! <~
—6
1
The figure to left shows the position determined with
G0X0Z0.
Where, (25.0 + 2.5) X 2 = 55.0
S
.

V
.
therefore, specify GOO X -55.0 to move the boring tool
i.
h <=>.
nose to that of the front turning tool which hasbeen
set in the standard procedure. Cuttingpoint of the
boring tool is now positioned at the workpiece center
i
tn
CM
just as tool-bit of the front turning tool. a
Note) 25.0 is the shift amount of the drilling holder. i
in
EE XT
IO

-I 4
CM -e-

II
Turret No.1 side
£
I
g

•!;,
5-4-6-1 Diameter direction coordinate system shift and coordinate system shift cancel
When machining by the boring tool, the coordinate system shift command can be entered to make the
I
calculation of the coordinate value easy. The program uses the G50 coordinate system setting
command, as shown below.

[Coordinate system shift] G50 U55.0 (when the tool diameter is a5)

The above 55.0 after address U is calculated from 30.0 (distance between boring tool center and program
a
point diameter designation) plus boring tool diameter (05).
Therefore, when using an 08 boring tool, the coordinate system shift program becomes "G50 U58.0”.
I
The coordinate system shift cancel command must always be entered when the boring tool escapes to
11:!
the workpiece face. The followingis the program.

[Coordinate system shift cancel] G50 U - 55.0 (When the tool diameter is 05)
V

;
t 1
1
5-94
i
ill
31

5. PROGRAMMING
1 I
'

\
The above - 55.0 is toreturn the shifted 55.0.
. The above is the diameter direction coordinate system shift and coordinate system shift cancel, used for
boring, etc. There are also longitudinal direction coordinate system shifts and coordinate system shift
I: cancels used for the back turning tool, cut-off tool, etc. |

The explanation of the next section will be given for theback turning.

II
5-4-6-2 Longitudinal direction coordinate system shift and coordinate system shift
cancel
The cutting point and program point are shifted in back turning, so a program that adds the tool width 1
to the longitudinal direction (Z value) must be set.
The following explanation is how to set a program where the dimensions in the drawing can be directly
entered in the machining program without adding the tool width.

Machining layout drawing

T20 ®
T11

Workpiece { Material: C3604(brass)

Diameter: 020
I

4
ID
s ES T12 1
r, \
i

--
l
5 L -J
1

40

i
£
g
T20
% I
I
u
<2)T 12
J ©111
3

Si !

[Coordinate system shift] G50 W - 5.0 (when the tool width is 5 mm)
1
1 [Coordinate system shift cancel] G50 W5.0 (when the tool width is 5 mm)

!' Theory : The minus sign is added according to whether the program point is at a plus or \
%
minus position against the cutting point.
Note) In a usual approach, a minus sign such as G50W - X X.X will be assigned
?ÿ a coordinate system shift in Z direction.

1 |

5-95

t
1
:!ÿ
i

H
i 5;
 1
I
V

S. PROGRAMMING

1
;
!
1
Program Explanation $
IG5Q W — 5.0 I ... <D
1
1
Back turning tool longitudinal coordinate system shift command.
I GOO X21.0 225.0 ... (D Perform rapid feed positioning.
(* The movement is shifted by the shift amount.)
II
;
G01 Xt6.0 F[ ] ... (D Perform diameter direction cutting.
r
-
Z40.5 Fi ... <D Cut to the longitudinal direction 40 mm + 0.5 mm position.
!
X21.0 F0.2 ... © Escape the tool from the material diameter. :
I<550 WS.O I ... © Coordinate system shift cancel command.
I
;>
(* There is no longitudinal direction movement. The longitudinal
direction move is done at the next Z command.) .'ÿ"V
i:

i
ii

Reference program for

Coordinate system shift and coordinate system shift cancel (diameter, longitudinal
directions)
1 iff:
Z0
-[

®T20
c (Pipe material)
Material diameter a18 X01O
%
T20
I
4 3
p
i,
[ ©121 I
m
in so
N T11
I

—
IS
I1;. ;• 1
12 " 10
4
i
50 S'
»

0'T1Q
f T21
©TU v.:,
(Productseparator) ;§

1i
I
I i
|
% m•:!

i :
5-96
1
 r
8
5. PROGRAMMING p

:
Program (E20 twin turret)

01810 I
$1 $2 $3
f G50X140.0Z0 G50X-4.0ZO G50ZO
G710 G710W1 G710W1
M06 G999 G999
Prepar¬
atory <
T1100 N999 N999
G712 M02 M02
I process
G00X140.0Z-0.5 M99 M99
j

I T2100 % %
1 M3S1 = SZZZHG99
IS
1 Boring .
f 1G50U56.0
N0121
i
G00X12.0Z-0.5TDn
Boring coordinate system shift
(diameter direction)
process G01Z10.0F I I \
X9.0F r~~~i
I;
-
G00Z 0.5 TOO
L iGSOU - 56.pl Boring coordinate system shift
cancel (diameter direction)
'
'I

f, " N0211G711
T2000X19.0
Back turning coordinate system
;;
Sack lGSOW -4.0 ! shift (longitudinal direction) ij '{

turning * G0OX19.0 Z38.0 TDD

process G01X15.0F f
w Z50.0F d i ::
m X19.0F0.2 Back turning coordinate system
L IG50W4.0 I- shift cancel (longitudinal direction)
4i{
m ;
" N320G712
T1000
1 Cut-off tool coordinate system shift
IG50W-3.0 1 cancel (longitudinal direction)
GOOX19.0Z50.0 TDD
G01X16.0F0.2
G201G01X8.0F I IM31A r~~~lT1400
G00X19.0W 0.5 - ,
I;
W1.5 Twice cut-off •li

Cut-off G01X8.0F r I
and X-4.0F0.2
ending
processes M05
M07
IG50W3.0 I Cut-off tool coordinate system shift ::
T1100 cancel (longitudinal direction)
G00X - 4.0Z0 TOO
ii

M56
G999
N999
?ÿ
M02 i'
M99 ii.
%

5-97 :i
/ii
i
:

j.

I;1:1
P

1:
 •V
;•

0
y-
;;
;•

£ÿ

5. PROGRAMMING

1
'i'll
•V :

:
I8
t i-

!i

I
1
I
5-98
11
 .1I
5. PROGRAMMING
i

:
1 5-5 ACTUAL PROGRAMMING 1
.
. [APPLICATION]
l i
;
i1

1
I
;
; s s if
l .

11
1I "I '•

]
5i ii
i
Si
5-99

i
 :

5. PROGRAMMING

5-5-1 Subprogram
I
If a program includes fixed sequences or repeated patterns, they can be registered in the memory as
U
subprograms, to make the program very simple. ft
Subprogram cal! from the main program f:
Main program Subprogram

00001 00002
I
$1 $2 $3 $1
£
t:
is
i
?
M98F0002
GOO X17.0 Z15.0 M99 I
t
§

t t
% 9
: The M99 command is always
M02 M02 M02 necessary
M99 M99 M99
1

% % % 1
s
Subprogram call pattern 1
l
The subprogram call has the following regulations.

M98 Pi ill I

Vi
i'
Repeats (1 to 9999)
*( ) : command range

Subprogram number (1 to 99999999)

*
a

V:f
Note 1) The callis one time if the repeat count is omitted.

]
v
2) Up to 9999 repeats are available by a single call.
3) Eight nesting is allowed for subprogram call from the main program.
4) The subprogram call command can be used in any of the $1, $2, and $3 Line in the main
I
program.
5) A sequence number N:X X X X can also be called by specifying P command (sub-program
1
.
number) as H X X X X X (See pages 5-166 and 5-167).
111
1

5-100
 1 1; ii

: 5. PROGRAMMING

5-5-1-1 Deciding the machining drawing and tool layout

ii 4
SK4F carbon tool steel {free cutting)
'

i:
| ©T20 ©T21
T10
P
J {15 times repeat)
’ÿ7
i
co.s
15
10
CO.S
T20
2 P :

S
a
.2£ - — S. T12
{>. 3
2 1.5KC0J
1 1 { 15 grooves of same pitch in this distance)
©T12 100
G)T11
T11
T21

1-5
@T10 (Product separator)

: :
(j!.

.f

I
i i

1
ii

5-101

:
 j;

:
I

l
'

1 ii
II
5. PROGRAMMING
ii

5-5-1-2 Programming (Main program and subprogram)

[Main program]
01810
$1 $2 $3
' G 50X140.020 G50X-4.0ZO G50Z0
G710 G710W1 G710W1
i
Prepa¬
ratory •<
M06
T1100
1
G999 G999
process
G712 N999 N999
GOOX15.0Z- 0.5 M02 M02
L M3S1 = 2000G99 M99 M99
r N110G711 % %
T2100X15.0
:
Front -
G00X5.0Z 0.5T01
tur- « G01X7.0Z0.5 F0.04
ning Z10.0
process
X13.0
X15.0Z11.0
I;
; " N221G712 [Subprogram]
T1200X15.0 |
Groov- 00002
i
ing
process
G00X15.0Z18.5T02
—
| M98P0002L15 j
!_/ $1 $2 $3
t ' G01X12.0F0.025
r- N312G711 •<- X15.0F0.2
T2000X15.0 W - 0.6
G50W-3.0 X13.8W0.6F0.025
1: Back
tur- <
G00X15.0Z84.0T03
G01X13.0Z85.0F0.025
X12.0
I

!
15 times J
repeat
X15.0F0.2
W0.6
-
X13.8W 0.6F0.025
i ning
process Z99.5F0.04 X15.0F0.2
X11.0Z100.0F0.025 G00W3.5
1 X15.0F0.2 ! M99
G50W3.0 k. %
N411G712 !
T1000
G50W-2.0 I Note 1) Giving the longitudinal command of the
G00X15.0Z100.0T04 subprogram in absolute command (Z)
G01X13.0F0.2 l
E
repeats the cycle at the same position.
G201G01X- 4.0F0.025M31A8.0T1500 | Always give the move distance in
f M05 incremental command (W).
Cut-ofi<
M07
G50W2.0
i
2) The subprogram is called from the main
m
II
process 111
T1100 program via the same Line in the E

1 -
G00X 4.0Z0 TOO
M56
J
series.
&
;! G999 8 (Main) (Sub)
N999
$1 -*ÿ $1
ill
M02
M99 $2 $2
i % $3 $3

1 1
il
ii

f I
1
I
s 5-102
il
II
1 1
:,V.

1 5. PROGRAMMING
i
f
X
5-5-2 Constant Surface Speed Control

I When infeeding to the diameter direction as in cut-off, the workpiece diameter changes as the infeed
proceeds, to change the surface speed (relative speed of the workpiece and tool). The tool positionis read

I
in the controlunit by giving this command and commanding the relative speed, to operate the spindle
speed, and change the speed.
)

G50 SI IQQ Maximum spindle speed clamp value I

- The speed is controlled so that the spindle speed does not exceed
this speed during constant surface speed control.

S: Maximum spindle speed to be clamped at r.p.m.

3
Q: Minimum spindle speed to be clamped at r.p.m.
I
r I
1
G96 S Constant surface speed control start

S: Surface speed (m/min)

i
a G97 End of constant surface speed control
.ÿv

;;
Notes)
• If no S command is given when switching G96, G97, the S command of the previously
commanded mode will be effective.
The spindle change detection cannot be turned on during constant surface speed
*
control.

H • G50 is effective only during G96 (constant surface speed control).

mfX • Set the Q so that operatingunder slower speed than this value can cause trouble.
® The constant surface speed control is available on both the spindle and back spindle
for the E series.

I
I

i j

\
1
5-103
.0
II
 ;

;
j

S. PROGRAMMING
i
¥
W
Program Example
I".
1 !.!

¥
o®»®®
2
$1 $2 $3 11
Preparatory process I
i
Front turning process 1
T 1
Thread cutting process

T C
Other processes
t
T2000 (t)
N511
(2)
3
GOOX17.OZ50.OTDn
<735055000 1 - (3)
3

K596SJ 00 | f®
-
G201G01X 4.0F0.02M31AD TD (4)
[G97(Sj_=5q0)_] - (5)
¥
M05 I
M07
TDDDD 1
GQ0X-4.0Z CDT00
M56
G999 G999 G999
N999 N999 N999
M02 M02 M02
M99 M99 M99
% % %
I }

1
I (1) Select the cut-off tool.
(2) Position at the cut-off in rapid feed.
(3) Turn on constant surface speed control (surface speed 100 m/min)
f§ Maximum spindle clamp value command (5000 r.p.m.)
X
;| (4) Cutting (cut-off) I
(5) Reset constant surface speed control (500 r.p.m. normal speed
command)

! I
2
¥
*
i
5-104
|
I I
I
I 5. PROGRAMMING i

*i 5-5-3 Spindle Speed Change Detecting Function j ::

The spindle speed change detection function is used to monitor the spindle speed, and if the speed
change exceeds a certain rate, to automatically stop the machine. This prevents the burning of the
5
guide bushing or overload operation.
I
it
f Spindle

Command format: Spindie speed change detection OFF

S M97
M96 Spindle speed change detection ON

f:
v| j
Back spindle

1 Command format : M95 Spindle speed change detection OFF

1:
1 M94 Spindle speed change detection ON

I The spindle speed change detection commandneed not be commanded in the program, as M96 and M94
are automatically enabled when the power is supplied.

I
’ÿ!
However, the M97 and M95 commands are required to turn off the function.

Note) The spindle change detection is disabled while reversing the program in program check. It is
i
automatically enabled as soon as the program moves forward.
:ÿ

I
I
I

i!

t
i

I:

I:

5-105
 :

;
i
I

5. PROGRAMMING

5
I
5-5-4 Cut-off tool breakage detection (M50) on back spindle operation
;ÿ 1
A software detection, the cutoff tool breakage detection (M50) on back spindle operation, is II
i
provided in the E series.

00007
$1 $2 $3
1
G50X160.0ZO G50X-4.0ZQ G50Z0 11
G710 G710W1 G710W1
I t ;
(ordinary machining process) (ordinary machining process) (ordinary machining process)

!
I I
G710 G710W1 G710W1
Cut-off G712 i
process G00X31.0Zx x xT05
G750 G750 G750
I
G99 ill
M24S2 = x x x 1
G0QZ-2.0 •:
G01Zx x x F3.0
G4U1.0 1
11
M15
!3L1 !1L1 I
G01X-4.0FX x x
I
T ~M05M25 ~
1 I
,ÿ
| M03S1 = 100 l
j G04U0.5 I
f.
ii
I
«. M50
G7?0
j . G710W1 G710W1
1
M05
M07 I

1
J

G00X-4.0Z0T00
M56

___
G999 G999 G999
N999
M02
M99
N999
M02
N999
M02 «
M99 M99
% % %

1 C explanation
J

Stop the spindle after cut-off and rotate the main spindle at about lOOr.p.m. If the back s
spindle is rotated at 4r.p.m. or more, M50 functions and stops the machine by alarm.
Notel) As M50 command is possible also at other positions, pay attention to the
position where M50 command is given.
V
1
2) Use this function surely after verification with the machine.

«
111

I
5-106
I
 5. PROGRAMMING r
'

5-6 ACTUAL PROGRAMMING :!

[Complex Machining]

Programmingis a little difficult, but the basic theory is the same as turning. I

ft
f" !
I

I
I
r-

;
I
];

5-107

f
 S. PROGRAMMING

5-6-1 Secondary Machining

i;
5-6-1-1 Difference between turning and secondary machining
Machining mentioned above, whether outer diameter cutting, or center hole drilling, or outer diameter
thread cutting, are all done by rotating the spindle. In other words, the workpiece is turned and the tool
stays still to perform cutting. This kind of cutting is generally called turning Qathing). In secondary
machining, therotation of the workpiece is stopped and the toolis turned to perform the machining.

-
- [Difference between turning and secondary machining]
;
Turning The workpiece is turned to perform cutting.
Secondary machining .. The workpiece stays still, and the tool is turned to perform machining.

5-6-1-2 Machining sequence

As in machining with turning alone, machining of workpieces including secondary machining is also
done in a single cycle. The machiningprocedure is basically decided according to the following rule.

-
[Basic rules forthe machining procedure]

• The
®
Machining proceeds from the end face of material.
center hole drilling and secondary machining on the face are done first.
a • If lathing and secondary machining are commanded on the same position, lathing is done
before secondary machining.
j§
The tooling layout is created according to the above theory.

j.
: For example, the machining sequence in the following machining example is as shown below. SI
I
| <Machining example >

i
Turning
Back turning
Secondary machining
: \Key groove/
Turning
Turning
Groove
Cut-off
Secondary machining IIi
Slitting

i a Secondary machining
Cross hole

Secondary machining
D cut
n
|

<Machining procedure >

4
Slitting -* D cut — Grooving -> Back turning -* Cross hole -* Key groove -* Cut-off
5-108 I
1I
 5. PROGRAMMING

3§
5-6-2 Secondary Machining Spindle
'I .i
5-6-2-1 Tool spindle speed
The tool spindle speed specification on both turret No. 1 and turret No. 2 is 300 to 5840 r.p.m. in
V:
E16/E2Q (225 to 4460 r.p.m. in E25/E32). The turret selection is freely done, but the speed command
differs.
'V:

Command format : S3 = No. 1)

S4 = (Turret No. 2)
IB

As in turning, the speed is also calculated from the following formula. The result is rounded.
M"

N: Speed (r.p.m.)
V V: Cutting feedrate (m/min)
N= ——x 1,000
nD D: Tool diameter (mm)
i
ar: Circular constant ( # 3.14)
i

5-S-2-2 Turret and mounting spindle

The spindle can bemounted on both turrets No.land No. 2.

-[Types of spindle]
I e Outer circle drilling spindle (JSC110, JSC910, JSC310)
® Outer circle tapping spindle (JST110) !,

® Face drilling spindle (JSH110, JSE310)

® Face tapping spindle (JST510)
® Milling spindle (JSM110, JSM406) [KSC216] i
® Slitting spindle (JSS260, JSS675) [KSS660, KSS760]

:# ® Side cutter spindle (JSF160)

*( JE16/E20 [ ]E32N

1 •V Note 1) The same type of spindles are supplied for E25/E32; only, K comes at the head of the model ;
name instead of J.
The spindles cannot be shared for E16/E20 and E25/E32.
2) Stroke of E32IV X2 axis is not the same with that of other models, so a different specification is
r- employed for its slitting and milling spindles.
3) End face grooving with the slitting spindle on the E32IV No.2 turret requires a move of
KSS260 or KSS675 to the workpiece center due to the X2 axis stroke unique to this model. In
that sense, the machining is done by moving Y2 axis and using the holder KSS760 capable of
5 performing a slittingin Y axis direction.
i 4) Y2 axis is also used for a D-cut or 2-face width machining with an end mill on the E323Y No.2
|
turret. KSC216 ER25 holder for No.2 turret is additionally provided.
5) E32IV No.2 turret allows use of KSH132 for hob and KSP380 for polygon machining.

| * Consider well the role of the spindle, to select the optimum spindle for each purpose.

5-109 I
:
! 1
1

1
'

I
 J
:

5. PROGRAMMING
1
5-6-3 Coordinates
1
I
1
I
5-6-3-1 Coordinate value and sign
The same theory as turning applies to the coordinate value in secondary machining. The X coordinate
is always designated by the diameter, and the sign is X © for the tool direction and Z © for the I
I

workpiece direction.
' Outer circle drilling spindle

S
1:

I
a X©
1
m
.4

I
in
XI 7.0 Z25.0
(Positioning) I
m

%£>
IO
CO

O
I
§1
z© *
s' Cl
2©
co If
®
t Program zero point III
T

5
(XO.ZO) 1
1!
-
X 18.0 Z25.0

I
(Through-hole position) 10 15
S.
X©
ifi

Note) The © © of the tool position X coordinate is automatically changedby giving commands in
1
h
G700s.
:
II

i-i
5-110
;
 r

5. PROGRAMMING

:
:ÿ!
I
5-6-S-2 Coordinate shift and tool position
All spindles used in secondary machining have unique shift amounts. The programmed zero point and
tool reference point do not match and have a small difference, even when the tool is set on the prescribed i
position.
i
The coordinate system shift program (G500s macro) can be used to match the reference points.
For example, the following figure shows the relation of the zero points, when positioning the drill at the i
programmed zero point by the outer circle drilling spindle JSC 110 (KSC110) and using program B. I !

Programmed zero 1
Programmed zero
point XO, Z0 Q±D point XO, Z0
;

mi !i,

\i
& Subprogram
(When using B0 11)
3
"

25 x7 25

G501O011
G00X0Z0 GOOXOZO
G500Q011
l
G500 Coordinate system shift OFF Ji1 1

G501 Coordinate system shift ON

1 Command format G501A ir

Forward (1), reverse (0) tool rotation
t Spindle No.
A : Turret No. 1,B : Turret No. 2
1 : Shift ON, 0: Shift OFF

I • Commanding G501 AdDD shifts the coordinate system to correspond to the

spindle No. of table 1.

!r

i ,v

r
5-m f

I :

i
 I
:{

:
!

S. PROGRAMMING

• Shift amounts of various secondary machining spindles

Programmed zero point XO, ZO

1
©
Z3

; ;
©w
(U : Diameter conversion)

Spindle Shift amount

Spindle name
No. U W
01 Outer circle drilling, tapping spindle J5C110, JSC310 -30.0 -25.0
JSC910, JST11Q
02 Face drilling, tapping spindle JSE110, JSE310 SO.O 0
JST510
03 Horizontal milling spindle JSM110 50.0 -25.0
04 1/3 deceleration slitting spindle (shift A) JSS260 (center), JSS263 40.0 0
05 1/3 deceleration slitting spindle (shift B) JSS260 (tool-bit) -20.0 -30.0
06 1/8 deceleration slitting spindle (shift A) JSS675 (center), JSS680 50.0 0
07 1/8 deceleration slitting spindle (shift B) JSS675 (tool-bit) -25.0 -37.5
08 Side cutter spindle JSF160 (center), JSF163 30.0 -21.0

3 09 Horizontal milling adjustment type spindle JSM406 40.0 -25.0

10 1/3 deceleration slitting spindle (shift B) JSS263 -23.0 -31.5
,s
11 1/8 deceleration slitting spindle (shift B) JSS680 -30.0 -40.0
12 1/8 deceleration slitting spindle (shift A) KSS660 (center) for No.1 44.0
KSS663 (center) for No.1
:ÿ
|
I 13 1/8 deceleration slitting spindle (shift B) KSS660 (tool-bit) for No.1 -16.0 -30.0

•if
14 1/3 deceleration slitting spindle KSS760 for No.2 10.0
v-
KSS763 for No.2

1 15 1/3 decelerated outer circle drilling spindle

(for Y axis milling)
KSC216 for No.2 -30.0 -25.0 St

16 Hob spindle KSH123 for No.2 8.0 -25.0

I
;:j 17 1/3 decelerated polygon spindle KSP38Q for No.2 -30.0
I 18 1/8 deceleration slitting spindle (shift B) KSS663 (tool-bit) for No.1 -19.0 -31.5

i Note 1) Spindles from No.12 to No.18 sure intended for E32IV.

1i 2) If No.4 spindle is used for machining on No.2 turret, it must be moved to the center. So it
I
; would be safer to think that the spindle is provided for No.1 turret.
3) Theinitial for E25/32 is K instead of J.
i
I
5-112
 5. PROGRAMMING

;;

i
5-6-3-3 Main shift programs and program points
[Outer circle drilling, tapping spindle (JSC110, JSC910, JSC310, JST110)] i
; lI
II trrel •// :
l
II !:ÿÿÿ
£ £ !
:ÿ
'Subprogram
;v
T ,/when using 0011) 1

qi3 25 .3 25
rt
X

'

[Horizontal milling spindle (JSM110, JSM406)] i

(Horizontal milling adjustment type spindle JSM406) I
'

\
3 X
sui. 25
in

d CTi

I1
'subprogram

l 3E .(when using D030)

Dimensions in parentheses
areforJSM406. ; i
I
X JSM406 (when using CD090)
i.
[Face drilling, tapping spindle (JSE110, JSE310, JST510)]

is 3
t
si
Z
(when using D021)
I MM d
fM

in
II
:
ov
3 o 1
X :
y////Aÿm ;
I
5
i:
5-113

i
!;•
 1

5. PROGRAMMING

[Slitting spindle 1/3 deceleration JSS260, JSS263]

30
(31.5) n
30
(31.5)
Subprogram
U5
A(When using C3041) O]
A B z
! z
.ÿ.1 •s
\
A
/ V.*
1
1 /
/ 'Subprogram
l_
i
i
lO
05
in
3
3 1
I
/ VN B{When using C3051) |

/ \ r
'I
V//,
Note) Values in parentheses are for JSS263.
[Slitting spindle 1/8 deceleration JSS675, JSS6S0]
r:
X N
/ \ X
/ \
I
\ o
: m
I 05
V
, \/
Subprogram
A(When using B06Q) «$
1
{ A
'
..
'r
v
B
/

z
in &
z —L
I
A SI®
/Subprogram
\
!
/
B(When using B070) |
i 1
--- — - - -•

i
N
3 37.5 3 37.5
A I
(40.0) N (40)
X
Note) Values in parentheses are for JSS680.
[Side cutter spindle JSF16Q, JSF163]
X
r -i
®
-- 3
i i
i i i
! 1
z Subprogram
(When using O081) i T- 2
'r
1 <-

3
:i

21
—
i
i
*5
X
i
i
§
T
in
O)

! _!
1 Iff
3 21 i
t

Turret Taft
v if®
5-114
m
:
 %

5. PROGRAMMING '

1
T;
:

[Slitting spindle 1/8 deceleration JSS660, KSS663]

30
I
(31.5) •V
30
(31.5)
Subprogram
A(When using A120)
co Sr?
A
__ B
N
\
Z
A
CM
CM
eP
z -r ’i.

t
V
/
/L---
Subprogram
I in
cr>
i
I
--- 3 co

-
3 l B{When using A130) |
/ N
/ \ I
X N
N X I
v/z/ÿy/A
Note) Values in parentheses are for KSS663. ;•
jr
[Slitting spindle 1/3 deceleration KSS760, KSS763]
!
V
\Z/A,Turret ///A

§
11
Subprogram
iilliliilllUMHililiim
B{When usingB141)
in

z z

3
3 4> 60
(a63)
Note) Values in parentheses are for KSS763.
[Milling spindle (KSC216)] :
||

Y///,ia?*.y//A
5
SI$ .8 O
V

* -z Subprogram |
(When using B150) Is Si li
i®:
3 25 3 25 1

I
:

5-115

I
j
|

\, f)

$
,v
:
 1

5. PROGRAMMING

i!
[Hob spindle (KSH123)]
If
I
i
UO
f-
£ >
<&
1
:
11
:
to

2
Subprogram
{When using B161) * 1

r
o
Z
I 'sri
II
fill
'

II 3 25 3 25
; ;
,'///,

__
[Polygon spindle 1/3 decelerated (KSS380)]

ii
:
o
h-
LO
OD o
/
o
! Subprogram
I 00
-e-
| (When using B170)

z z
zza ?
Polygon
cutter
it
3 3

[Slitting spindle 1/8 deceleration KSS663]

|

31.5

31.5
S'
Subprogram
A(When using At 20) “1
A B CT:

__ s
z Z — j-
JC
\ / CM
4
\ /
\
/
L
/ i m
x / Subprogram I
CD
3 CO
3 / B(When using A180) i r~>
v /
/ \ I
X \
/ ''i X
Y//' Turret

1
5-116
 5. PROGRAMMING

H 5-6-B-4 Howto use the coordinate system shift program

%
I Types of program ;

The coordinate system shift program can be turned on/off on each spindle. The following are the 5

i
I
program.

Shift program No. Function

i.:
Outer circle drilling, tapping spindle
G500D011 (JSC110, JSC310, JSC910, JST110) Shift OFF
Outer circle drilling, tapping spindle
G501D011 (JSC110, JSC310, JSC910, JST110) Shift ON
i G500DQ21
Face drilling,tapping spindfe
(JSE110, JSTS10) Shift OFF
Face drilling,tapping spindle
G5010021 (JSE110, JST510) Shift ON
Face drilling
G500D020 (JSE310) Shift OFF
Face drilling
G501D020 (JSE310) Shift ON
% Horizontal milling spindle
G 500D 030
(JSM110) Shift OFF
Horizontal milling spindie
G501D030 (JSM110) Shift ON
1/3 deceleration slitting spindie
G500D041 (JSS260, JSS263) Shift A OFF
1/3 deceleration slitting spindle
G501D041 (JSS260, JSS263) Shift A ON
1/3 deceleration slitting spindle
G500D051 (JSS260) Shift B OFF
1/3 deceleration slitting spindle
G501 051
(JSS260) Shift BON
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
G500B060 (JSS675, JSS680) for No. 2 Shift A OFF
1/8 deceleration slitting spindie
G501B060
(JSS675, J5S680) for No. 2 Shift A ON
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
G500B070 (JSS675) for No. 2 Shift B OFF
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
G501B070 (JSS675) for No. 2 ShiftB ON
Side cutter spindle
G500D081 (JSF160, JSF163) Shift OFF
Side cutter spindle
G501O081 (JSF160, JSF163) Shift ON
G500Q090 Horizontal milling adjustment type spindle 1

(JSM406) Shift OFF

Horizontal milling adjustment type spindle
G501D090 (JSM4Q6) Shift ON

5-117

j
 |

1
:

,1:
5. PROGRAMMING
II
1
Shift program No. Function
1/3 deceleration slitting spindle
GSOOO 101 (JSS263) Shift OFF 1
G501D101
1/3 deceleration slitting spindle !i
(JSS263) Shift ON i
G500D110

G5010110
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
(JSS680)
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
(JSS680)
Shift OFF

Shift ON
*!
Followings are for
E32IV
;
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
G500A120 (KSS660, KSS663) For No.1 Shift OFF
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
G501A120
(KSS660, KSS663) For No.1 Shift ON S !

1/8 deceleration slitting spindle

G500A130
(KSS660) For No.1 Shift OFF
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
G501A130
(KSS660) For No.1 Shift ON 111
1/3 deceleration slitting spindle
G500B141
(KSS760) For No.2 Shift OFF
1/3 deceleration slitting spindle
G501B141 (KSS760) For No.2 Shift ON
1/3 decelerated outer diameter drilling spindle
G500B150
(KSC216) For No.2 Shift OFF
.

1/3 decelerated outer diameter drilling spindle

G501B150 (KSC216) For No.2 Shift ON 111I.
Hob spindle
;; G500B161
(KSH123) For No.2 Shift OFF
G501B161
Hob spindle
(KSH123) For No.2 Shift ON
1
G500B170

G501B170
1/3 decelerated polygon spindle
(KSP380) For No.2
1/3 decelerated polygon spindle
(KSP380) For No.2
Shift OFF
if
Shift ON
G50QA180
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle |
(KSS663) For No.1 Shift OFF
'
f|§
j ! G501A180
1/8 deceleration slitting spindle
I (KSS663) For No.1 Shift ON I

* TurretNo. 1[A| or turret No. 2[~Bj are insertedin the after G500 or G501.
I
1 The 1/8 deceleration slitting spindle can be mounted on turret No. 2 alone.
The "shift ON/shift OFF" function is to specify the "shift ON" program No. to perform
:v —
coordinate system shift of the corresponding spindle before machining on the spindle to be
y —
exact, before positioning the spindle tool and to specify the "shift OFF" program No. to
cancel the coordinate system shift after the machining on the spindle is completed.
Note) Switching between the forward and reverse rotation can be done by coding1or 0 for the
last digit. Make sure the spindle rotates in the right directionby runningit dry with
tools being attached.
I The initial for E25/32 is K instead of J.
U

5-118
 1
K 5
ft: S. PROGRAMMING
&
£
i 5-6-4 Connection of Turning and Secondary Machining
m \

:r- 5-6-4-1 When transferring from turning to secondary machining

Command format : M05G98MD SD =

M74G28H1
M18G50C0 ;l!j

1
£
is
o . The functionsof the words are as follows.
& M05 : Spindle rotation stop
ft?
ft ft- G98 : Per minute feed designation (mm/min)
(As the spindle is stopping, the per rotation feed is meaningless, so the command is changed
to per minute feed.)
MD $ÿ=ÿÿÿÿ 300 to 5,840 r.p.m. (E16/E20)
225 to 4,460 r.p.m. (E25/E32)
t_ S3 = Turret No. 1 tool spindle
54 = Turret No. 2 tool spindle

Turret Turret No. 1 Turret No. 2

Rotation
Tool spindle forward rotation M80 M83
Tool spindle reverse rotation M81 M84
Tool spindle stop M82 M85

M For C axis control

M74 C axis zero point decelerationcommand
I' G28H1 C axis automatic zero point return command
ftft M18 C axis zero point gear ON
G50C0 : C axis coordinate system setting
When the secondary machining is sequential, the above commands need to be input a single time before
1
the first secondary machining. They need not be input in each secondary machining.

i Note) "Spindle indexing zero point return" is performed to keep the rotation direction position of
the workpiece in secondary machining constant.
"fr Entering thiscommand makes the workpiece stop always at the same position as shown
below, in each procedure of the turning -* secondary machining -* turning -* secondary
ft/
machiningprocesses. (Point A is the spindle indexing zero point return position.)

‘O-C-O-Q-O {Spindle rotation) {Spindle stop) (Spindle rotation) (Spindle stop)

See “5-6-5 Indexing" for details on the indexing function.

5-119

i
I :

...

I
S. PROGRAMMING
• :'l

5-6-4-2 When transferring from secondary machining to turning

The program requires a certain pattern also when transferring from secondary machining to turning.

Command format : M20 MOD

M03S1 =
1
II
I
The functions of each word are as follows.
M20 Spindle indexing reset and C axis gear OFF
I
G99 Per minute feed command (mm/rev)
31 = : Spindle speed
M03 : Spindle forward rotation !

MOD : Tool spindle stop command

I
I I

a1;
m
0,
4 o
I
I i
'll
fill
i
X
m
X
Si;

ill:
1
m
1
I
I
II
mi
X

1
ir:

5-120 1

'I ass
 I

5. PROGRAMMING
t:

B-6-4-3 Rough form of program including secondary machining

u As a summary of turning and secondary machining, the following is the rough form of a twin turret :|C;
type program of the followingmachiningprocedure.

I
__
Outer diameter cutting (turning) -router circle drilling (secondary machining) -*•slitting (secondary
S'
1 machining) -*•cut-off (turning).

I Check well the commands at the connection of turning and secondary machining, and the shift
program.
i
I Program | | Explanation
ill 01234
! !
!
i:;

1 $1
GSOXfZZIZO
!
! $2
• G50X-4.0Z0
? S3
•G50Z0
,
J
Coordinate
system setting
G710 i G710 W1 iG710Wl
M06 i G999 I
G999
Twin turret command i
T1100 •N999 ! N999 *-

!
G712 i M02 i M02
GOOXCZZlZ-0.5 !M99 ! M99 I
M3S1= CZZ3G99 ;% s% Spindle speed designation 1
1

G711 _ ;
TDDOOX I I Selection of turret No. 1
m i
G712
(Omitted)
_
Outer diameter cutting

TDDOOX I ~1 Selection of turret No. 2

\ M05G98M83S4= F I ! s-
:
! M74G28H1 LL Commands to transfer to secondary machining
* M18G50C0 S ;
G501B011 Outer circle drilling spindle shift ON command
: (Omitted) Outer circle drilling
G500B011 Outer circle drilling spindle shift OFF command

G711 _
M80S3 = D

TDDOOX CZZ3 Selection of turret No. 1

G501A041 Slitting spindle shift ON command
! (Omitted) Slitting j
G500A041 Slitting spindle shift OFF command

|M20M82M85
£ ..
[M03S1= nz ]G99
Y T' Commands to transfer to turning y
G712

TDDOO S;
: (Omitted)
M05 Cut-off :ÿ

M07 Spindle rotation stop

TDDOO ]'
:i
GOOX - 4.0Z0 TOO v
M56
G999
N999
M02
M99
% !
V:
I

5-121

I
t

!
! f
 :

1
i

5. PROGRAMMING

i
lit
5-6-5 indexing

!:
5-6-5-1 Spindle indexing angle and indexing command
0.001 to 99999.999° rotary angle control command can be freely programmed for indexing in this
«
I
H

machine. (This is called the C axis control.)

Spindle indexing command 3

The indexing is executed by programming the spindle indexing command.
1
The indexing is input to the program by direct angle command, according to the following two ways. I
Command format

.......
1. Abosolute command

COO Cj 1
G01 £1 i FI I
* Rotate the workpiece for f I degrees from the zero Co
1
I
:
2. Incremental command

GOO H| | I
i
G01 H| | F| |

* Rotate the workpiece for I I degrees from the current position

I
Note) Indexing can be done in GOO (rapid feed) or G01 (cutting feed) and machining (cutting) %
can also be done by G01

Indexing direction
.
i W
1

A certain direction can also be commanded upon indexing. As in turning, the spindle forward
rotation indexing is called the "forward rotation" with the + sign, and the reverse rotation
indexing is called the "reverse rotation" with a —
sign. The counterclockwise direction viewed
from the workpiece face is the forward direction, while the clockwise direction is the reverse
direction.
Guide bushing
?

M03 (forward rotation)

:

i/i
M04 (reverse rotation)
Workpiece

- Direction of rotation
* Viewed from the front of the guide bushing
+ : Forward rotation of spindle (counterclockwise)
— : Reverse rotation of spindle (ciockwise)

c ; 5-122
.
 5. PROGRAMMING

S-6-5-2 Secondary machining spindle position relation (Except E321V)

(Turret No. 1 side) (Turret No. 2 side)

'
Tool mounted on face drilling Tool mounted on slitting
(tapping) spindle JSE110 (JST510) spindle JSS260
(JSS675 is allowed on
turret No.2 alone.)

\\\\\\\\ iT
NWWWW
3 /
Tool mounted on outer circle //
I drilling spindle JSC110 Tool mounted on outer circle
tapping spindle JST110
k4 Tool mounted on side cutter i
spindle JSF160
Too! mounted on horizontal
;V milling spindle JSM110
I
.
:ÿ! Figure 1 Figure viewed from the workpiece face

The above Figure1shows the relation of the spindles.

The tool can be mounted on either turrets No. 1or No.2 in this machine, but the indexing position
may be needed notice according to the positions when the mounting changed. (The 180° machining
point changes if the mounting changes.)
v:'

.q
The following figure shows the relative turrets of the tools mounted in the above Figure 1.

(Turret No. 1 side) (Turret No. 2 side)

%/jSMno
A ;
i JST110
JSS260
/ /\\\\\\\\v
tvÿSS\\x\v
\JSC110 ?

ISF160
JSE110(JST510} J

,
Figure 2

As can be understood by comparing the above Figure 1 and Figure 2, the position becomes completely
l '
I opposite.
* Setting the wrong indexingposition can cause accidents. i 1
Indexing is an important point in the secondary machining.
1
st
5-123

::
 1

5. PROGRAMMING

I
IS
5-6-S-3 Rough form the indexing program Iff
II
j;
'!ÿ
Program | | Explanation j |1
00425 r# Coordinate
1
$1 $2 $3 system setting
GSOXi -IZO G50X-4.0Z0 G50Z0 .J m
G710 G710W1 G710W1 Twin turret ,ÿ

M06 G999 G999 command

T1100 N999 N999 I
G712 M02 M02
GOOXl -
l Z 0.5 M99 M99 1
11
M03S1 = dZI G99 % ;%
I I
G711
Tqnoox mzi
: (Omitted) 1
G712 I
innoox ETZ1 1
r
5-

« M05G98M84S4= 1 ii
I
I!
! M74G28H1 i Command to move start secondary machining :TI
! M18 G50 CO J
lÿ~G50T B030
GOO Xi i Zl I
la
G01 XI 1 F -
I- 1
End
milling GOO
* C180.0
G01 XI
or
1FI
(H180.0)
I
-f— 180° positioning from zero point CO
GOO C360.0 or (H180.0) -!— 360° positioning from zero point CO
i l G500 B030_
M80S3=dZ]
G711
TDDOOX I I
_

!
'
G501 A011
GOO XI IZ I I
Lead

_
< GOt Z CZZ1C600.0 or (H240.0) F100 -t (Lead grooving in 10Qdeg/min feedrate :
groov-
ing G01 xl~~ IF I 1 - from current position to 240 deg coordinate)
G500A011
i~M20~M82~M85~
! MQ3 S1 = I ! G99
"Ii_
J
j- — Command to start lathing
: "G712
i
I TDDOO
'ÿ
i
I (Omitted)
M05
M07 I
TGImoo
GOOX-4.0ZOTOO
M56

I
1
G999
N999
M02
- M99
% 1
I
l
I
1
i: 5-124 ill
1
 1
5. PROGRAMMING

IP
-li '

S-6-5-4 Back spindle indexing command

Command format M78S[

,

§ [Command pattern]

M25 - <D Back spindle stop

£ M78S0 -0 Zero point return 0°
m - <35 Machining program 1
yi M78SI I -@ Indexing I I°
1 m —© Machining program 2
M78SI I -© indexing I I°
cm — <D® Machining program 3
M79 — Back spindle indexing OFF

t
® Command Line : Can be commanded from any of the Lines $1, $2, $3.
• Enter a number between 0° to 360° that can be divided by 15 in theI
angle command, in absolute command. The angle is 5° interval in E25/E32.
I of the S I I

• The indexing must be done in counter clockwise direction facing the back spindle (the same
direction in which the back spindle forward rotation takes place). That direction is signed
;fe plus. (Indexing must not be done in minus direction. )
::
i S-6-5-5 Interference preventive restrictions for secondary machining spindles used in
back machining
1 Following describes basic restrictions set for secondary machining spindles used in a back machining.
They are basic restrictions and may require some modifications depending on a machine layout or tool
set being employed. Make sure that an interference is avoided by running the machine dry before a
i machining.

Process Restrictions

Outer diameter drilling An interference could occur if certain external workpiece length from
theback spindle (25 mm + machining length measured from the end
S face of workpiece on the back spindle) is not provided.

Horizontal milling An interference could occur if certain external workpiece length from
theback spindle (25 mm + machining length measured from the end
face of workpiece on the back spindle) is not provided.
5
& Slitting The external workpiece length from the back spindle must exceeds the
machining depth.
*
I End face drilling When the standard tool set is employed in which a longitudinal shift is

-
I
si
not conducted, the external workpiece length from the back spindle
must exceeds the machining depth.

I 5-125

f 1 fi

:
 I

1
<S
5. PROGRAMMING
s
5-6-6 How to Calculate the Command Speed

5-6-6-1 Howto calculate the spindle speed value

Calculate the spindle speed from the following formula (A). €
.i
[Spindle speed]
N: Speed (r.p.m)
N= —
rxO
x 1,000 (A) V: Cutting feedrate (m/min) «- From the cutting
conditions table given later

D: Tool diameter (mm)

it: Circular constant (4= 3.14)

The rotation command value N is the same on both turret No. 1 and turret No. 2, but the program
command value of the slitting spindle (1/3 deceleration, 1/8 deceleration) alone differs in each spindle. ::

__
Example of calculation (1) Example of calculation (2)
Outer circle drilling spindle Slitting spindle (1/8 deceleration)
•
Drilling on the workpiece with 04 end mill.
(Material : brass)
•cutter.
Slitting the workpiece with 075 slitting r

lil
Cutting feedrate ... 25 m/min Motel) (Material:free cutting steel)
(from cutting conditions
table given later)
Cutting feedrate ... 24 m/min Note 2)
(from cutting conditions
«
Tool diameter 04 mm. table given later) .it
Cutter diameter 075 mm
Therefore, whencalculated from formula (A),
Therefore, whencalculated from formula (A),
I
N=
3.14x4
x 1.000 = 1,989 = 2,000 (r.p.m.) 8
N= X 1,000 =101.8
3.14x75
* The result of the calculation is rounded to
make a round value.
'
However, the slitting spindle is decelerated to 1/8, so;
N' = Program command value
N'= 101.8x8 = 814.8 4= 800 (r.p.m.)
8
Note 1) If the result of calculation of the speed exceeds the maximum speed, the maximum speed
I
(5840 r.p.m. for E16/E20 (4460 r.p.m. for E25/E32)) is unconditionally applied.
2) The center value of the cutting conditions table (at the end of this book) range is set.

I
't

;
i!

I 5-126 r it
V
9
 5 I
Ml 5. PROGRAMMING |
1
:
S-6-6-2 How to calculate the tool feedrate
;
The feedrate of the tool (nun/min) is calculated from the following formula according to the result of
’ÿE calculation of formula (A) in the previous page. Note that the formula differs according to the used tool.
v
I

— [Too! feedrate]

is! End mill, slitting cutter

I F = NxfzxZ (B)

1 F: Feedrate (mm/min)

1 N: Spindle speed «- from result of (A)

fz: Feed amount per cutter (mm/cutter)
Z: Cutters (cutter/rev)
Drill
F = Nxfr (Q
F: Feedrate (mm/min)
: N: Spindle speed «- from result of (A)
fr: Feed amount per revolution (mm/rev)
\

Example of calculation (1) Example of calculation (2)

Mount 04 end mill on the outer circle drilling Mount 075 x 2.0 (cutter width) slitting cutter on
1
a spindle to machine a brass workpiece. the slitting spindle to machine a free cutting steel
• Speed 2000 (r.p.m.) workpiece. (1/8 deceleration)
® Feedrate per cutter ... 0.065 (mm/cutter)
• Speed 1QQ(r.p.m.)
• Cutters 2 (cutters) (101.8 is rounded)
® Feedrate per cutter ... 0.003 (mm/cutter)

Therefore, when calculated from formula (8);

F = 2000 x 0.065 x 2 = 260(mm/min)
• Cutters 90 (cutters)

Therefore, when calculated from formula (B);

F = 100 x 0.003 x 90 = 27(mm/min)

Note 1) The feedrate F (mm/min) shallbe within 50 to 100 % of the value given in the attached table
for takingin consideration the flexion andothers on machining according to the diameter of
material.
1
v;1

:>;ÿ

5-127

:.rv, .
v i-.-v .

|
 v I
I

5. PROGRAMMING

iB
5-6-7 Example of Secondary Machining
1
I I
M
5-6-7-1 Cross center, drill, tap (E16/E20) m
Tooling layout

s
s

M4 P = 0.5 6 mm deep _ ©T22

f (prepared hole depth a3.6 x 9.08)
T20 i
@T20 • 20
i.

3
11 V
s

I 03.6
11
If
60
©T11 1lu T22
; ©T10
II T10
(Product separator)

+
15
®T13 M4P = 0.5 '

Workpiece material SUM (Free cutting steel) T13

Note) The center depth is 5mm. 25
I if
Program
||
I 0 0429

$1 $2 $3
f G50X140.0 Z0 G50X-4.0Z0 G50 20

|
if G710 G710W1 G710W1
M06 G999 G999
%
T1100 N999 N999
Preparatory J G712 M02 M02
I process ) GOO X21.0Z-0.5
M99 M99
M05 G98M80 S3 = 2200 % %
M74G28H1.0
1 ii
f M18G50 CO ® How to calculate the cross center, drill speed

:
f T2200
N111G711 N= X1000 m
:ÿ
it D
I'M', G501 A011 25 II
x 1000
GOO X21.0 Z20.0 3.14x3.6 si
Il Cross center <
process
G01 X10.QF132T01
GOO X21.0 TOO = 2210 ;V".M

I G500AQ11
M83 54 = 2200 == 2200 r.p.m
1
S3 = 500

.. GOO H180.0 or C180.0

• Feedrate I;,

F = Nxfr
a.
I
= 2200 r.p.m. x 0.06 mm/rev = 132mm/min
1
I
8

1
5-128
I
m. 1
 5. PROGRAMMING il
B
I .

r!
$1
i
b N222
f T1300G712 Theory of cross tapping coordinate

G501 B011
: Cross drill GOOX21.0 220.0
process G01X1.84F132T02 Clearance
a
II GOO X21.0 TOO
~
'S:’:
m G500 B011
T t
II V GOO H180.0 or CO i fl
K Z © oD
N313G711
f T2000
G501 A011 I
GOO X22.0 Z20.0
1F Cross tap J G01X10.4 F200T03
I
s process | X26.0 F250 M81 TOO
G04 U2.0
G500A011
Clearance

Infeed t mm
; *
:

M20 SVS82 M85 ! ,

t i
V IVSQ3S1 =2400 G99
I
f N420G712 *
Return 3 mm
l %
|
a T1000
GOO X21.0 Z63.0T04
*
G201 G01 X-4.0 F0.05 M31 A5.0T1400 Infeed S
M05
i
Cut-off and M07 -
<
X= oD (€ x 0.8} x 2
ending T1100 Ii
process GOO X- 4.0 Z0 TOO = 20 - (6 x 0.8) x 2
M56 = 10.4
G999
N999 i
F = N x P x 0.8 I':ste
M02
i
= 500x0.5x0.8
V M99
%
1I
i
= 200

i
Return

X = e?D + 3x2
i
= 20 + 3x2 1
= 26
Fas NxP
1
= 500x0.5
= 250 ; ;
|

S 1 ,

ii
i
I
f
I 5-129 fl
i

1 1
« !
 i\

If
5. PROGRAMMING

i
3
S-6-7-2 Milling, slitting (E25/E32) (Except E32IV }
.!
§ Tooling layout

|iv

©T20
15 . 6 45 4
T20

2 2 2
©T22
j 5, 3

j s I
+
CO
o T12

It I
1 -
i

rC 0.5
s
L
I 30
::
i.
l!
! i
Ii
o C0.5
J

i
"ÿ
i
©114 ®T12
4 <z>&
©’T10
I; 70
122

1i SUS303 (Free cutting stainless steel)

25ÿ
.H#-P' TK
H i
IT Product separator110
I Program
3 s
1 0 6271

$1 $2 $3
G50X160.0Z0
f G710 G50X-4.0 Z0 G50 Z0
It G710W1 G710W1
G999
Preparatory M06 G999
process < T1200 N999 N999
if; G712 M02 MQ2
GOO X25.0 Z- 0.5 M99 M99
3"
V M03 SI = 1200 G99 % %
!
I
I 3
f N112G711
T2200

I
-
GOO X16.0 Z 0.5 T01
G01 X18.0 Z0.5 F0.08
Front Z4.0
turning X23.0
If; X25.0Z5.0
M05 G98M83 S4 = 225
s M74G28 H1.0
M18G50C0

5 li

®1

5-130
IS!
I
 f-s II
if
iff :
5. PROGRAMMSNG

1
M
U
3 I
1 }
ii $1
1 ?'
V/:
N222G712
f T1400 Slitting
V

G501 B041
-
m GOO X18.4 Z - 0.5 T02 M=
K
— x 1000
D
(r.p.m.)
Slitting <> G01 Z2.0F10

* :ÿ '

1 process X- 18.4 S
—12,5
3.14x60
- x 1000
#v: Z-0.5 F1000
G00X85.0C90.0M85
i
= 66.3 r.p.m.
SI
s;
Ef
G500B041
v M80 S3 = 800
I
-
m
IB N314G711 N'= Nx3/1 N‘ = Commanded value
f T2000 « 66.3 x 3/1 3/1 = Reduction ratio
G501 A030 1
GOO X25.0 Z52.0 T03 = 198.9
G01 X19.7 F1000
End 4= 225 (Rotary tool min command value)
milling
< X-19.7F48
GQQC270.0 /i

process G01 X19.7 F ss NxfzxZ (feedrate)

G00X25.0 M20 M82 I
G500A030 * 75x0.0015x90
V M03S1 = 1000G99 :
= 10.125
I
N420G712 4= 10mm/min I
i
m
T1000
G50W-3.0 r
;
GOO X25.0 Z70.0 T04

*
G201 G01 X-4.0 F0.015M31 A5.0T1500 End milling
M05
Cut-off M07 N= —D— x 1000 (r.p.m.)
II
< T1200 n
and
G50W3.0
;i
1 ending
process GOO X- 4.0 Z0 TOO 3.14x6
15 x 1000
M56
jk G999 = 796 S
mt
a
N999
4= 800 r.p.m.
M02
M99
V% F= NxfzxZ (feedrate)

= 800x0.015x4 II
I = 48mm/min
111 1

Ii : 1

1
5-131
k

k
1 :
1
IS &
I:
:i:
5
i
1
I :

4
 i
I
!

S. PROGRAMMING
I
IB

5-S-7-3 Example of continuous indexing iead grooving (G01 command)

End millingis performed while angle controlis performed on the spindle (lead grooving).
:ÿ

Machining of 4 (width) x 1 (depth) groove cam

S3 —
II TT i
*4

'/
s•e-
10 10 60 20
SUM
100 (Free cutting steel)

I Program Required feedrate F mm/min

F = N x fz x Z (D
M05 G98 M80 S3 = 2000
M74G28H1.0 Commanded feedrate f deg/min
M18G50C0
G501 A011
G00X2t.0Z19.5T07 f= 7f2 + h2XF ai)
G01X18.0F120 . © N/ÿ2 + (ÿDh/360)2
Z20.0
Z80.0 C540.0 F584
C600.0 F688 ....
©
©
©
Calculate the command value from the above
formulas (I) CO). See the next page for details on
I
s
X21.0 F1000 .... ©' formula (II).
G500A011 From the above expression;

I
M20 M82

,
— M03S1 = | |G99 F = 2000x0.03x2 ==120 ©
v/ 602 + 5402x120
Feed commands
) V 602 + (3.14 x 20 x 540/360)2
© ..
0 ..
X,Z axes feedrate
C, Z axes rotary axis
_ V 3600 + 291600x120
speed 7 3600 + 8882.6
:
0 .. C axis rotary axis speed
©' .. X axis return speed 543.32x120 ==584
| •
111.73
ii
Cutting conditions f= V 02 + 602x120 0
; i;
7 02 + (3.14x20x60/360)2 t
I Cutting feedrate V : 25 m/min
_ 7 3800 x 120
Feedrate fz : 0.03 mm/ B;
cutter 7 109.65
Cutters Z : 2 cutters
60x120
I Speed N : 2000 =f= 688 ;ÿ :
1 10.47
!l

5-132
 5. PROGRAMMING

[Reference : Linear interpolation of Z (X) axis and C axis]

a I
1
4> D

The feedrate when linear interpolation is done between the linear axis (X axis, Z axis) and the rotary
axis (C axis) is the tangential speed in the linear, rotary Cartesian coordinate system when the rotary
l
angle (h) (deg) is converted into mm unit, commanded by F (mm/min). The speed of the rotary axis is 1

the rotary angle divided by the required time (deg/min). !

Therefore, convert as follows, to obtain the requried feedrate. r
When;
Required feedrate F mm/min
Commanded feedrate f mm/min

I;
the actual cutting time T (min) is represented as;
T = L/F
%
Now, L = V*2 + (jrDh/360)2 I
Therefore, the actual cutting time T' (min) when the commanded value is f is;
L;
s/$2 + h2
T‘ = (h is converted into mm unit.)
f

T = r so, ."i

v/fZ-phÿxF
T=
s/i2 + (ÿDh/360)2

3:
1
l
.!

I i
I
, ;;

3 5-133
f:
i
:
1
fi i

1 .

I
i
m

It
 I
I
I
t

r £;
:

i
i

ij

5. PROGRAMMING
i

I 1:
;

ia
i
i

1
1

•••'
;;;

I
:

lit
>

I
ll I
III I

I:
I: ;;

I
i
I
1i s'

11
I
If I
If I
1
i 1 s
\
1 I1

ifi
I

i'

I £
II

1 III
!
I
'll
1 ! I:f:
it
II i
SI

1 |:
1
I 5-134
f
I
I :
 5. PROGRAMMING I

i
.

K:

5-7 MULTIPLE-LINE PROGRAM as

SI
i I
a
s
\ ll
f I

I
55
1m
i 45
iM
I
i
4$ V
I
I

ii
:
is

f
:
i
i
.
is
:l
I

: iI
!
f
1S1
i
t
!I
*
I
6

s'

i1
I
s
l1
li
i I

5-135
I
:

5
1

:
I

;
)

l
 ;

;
j

5. PROGRAMMING

5-7-1 Application of Multiple-Line Program

18
Simultaneous machining can be used to increase the machining efficiency. Various macro patterns can
be selected and combined for free simultaneous machining. The dual turret can be made full use in the
I
?ÿ
6 axes, for example, machining on the twin turret (G710), two saddle machining (G720), front/back
simultaneous machining (G730), 3 processes simultaneous (G740), center support, pick off (G750), etc.
E32IV utilizes 7 axes with ¥3 axis being added to the existing. :-v:

5-7-2 Transition between patterns

The G code macros move automatically between the three lines, to execute the machining while
queuing.

O
$1 $2 $3 .

G50X i Izl l GSOXl Izl I G50Z I i

G710 G710W1 G710W1
I

--
G712 -* — $1 alone

[aG711 $1 alone
If
a
nu I
G720
t
G72QW1
t
G720W1 I
G722 G722
nu
i
11
CZ3
G721 G721
Commanded on
$1 and $2 1
I
C=3
G730 G730W1 G730W1 I
II
G740
t
G740W1 G740W1 i
H
CZ3 j
G710 G710W1 G710W1
1
il
G712 :
HU t
G750 G7SQ G750 1

f
l
nu
G710
c=]
G710W1 G710W1
1
I
M56
t
G999
N999
G999
N999
G999
N999
fl
M02 M02 M02 m
M99 M99 M99
% % %

;
SI

i
5-136
I
 5. PROGRAMMING

5-7-3 Application of the Machining Patterns

The actual program is created according to a given procedure.
This section described details on the structure of the program, using the following workpiece as an
example.

Sample workpiece
1
@ ©

©
j£ -~—QL
Machining process

<DFront center
© Front turning
© Back turning
@ Cut-off
© © Back center :

Machining (from process configuration to programming)

E
1
About ten types of machining can be structured for simultaneous machining using the multiple Line
program. The following are the tool configuraiton -*•tooling -*•programming procedure of each Line, of
$
three typical samples.

8:
:

i;
I f
I

f*;

5-137 i
 ] ;

»11
5. PROGRAMMING

* Sample <S> Back/front pick-off (G730 + G750)

I
|||
(D Process configuration

G730 G750 G730

I
$1 ( Preparatory
process ) © Front center @ Front turning @ Cut-off ( Ending
process )
$2
i
I
Ill
$3 ( Back
preparation Knock out )( Chucking )( Back
retrieval )
$

I
<D Tooling
i ii
il
l!

w
© dD©|
. Turret Mo. 1
1

I'
> il
©•••. Turret No. 2
1X
©©-£3ÿ
@ & il:

n
X
|

© © <© © 1
1
|| © 1

;
:
;:1
I
If ;

11 I
Is

1
i|

fit:

1
5-138
 'i

:r.' 5. PROGRAMMING

(D Structure of the program

00001
$1 $2 $3

G50X-4.0 Zl -1 G50 X l jZ i i G50 Z i i

_
---
G730 G730W1 G730W1
f Preparatory process Back preparation

a
Front center - ® Back center
—<Tj) i
Front turning - — @ Back spindle front turning
—— i
t
Cut-off posrtionirtg ( Knock out )
S
G750 G750 G750

c Chucking
:

!3L1 !1LI I
Cut-off

G730 G73QW1 G730W1

( Ending process
c Back retrieval ) ;!

G999 G999 G999

N999 N999 N999 f
M02 M02 M02
; v

M99 M99 M99

% % %

i
$
m

m 1
)j,
i
I:
5-139 I
I
Ii
:
I
I

!|

l ;
 :

h
S. PROGRAMMING

;;
Sample <l> 3-Line simultaneous machining and twin turret pick off
(G740 + G710 + G750)
I
at
(D Process configuration ill
I
RiWsK

G710 G740 G710 G750 G710

$1 ( Preparatory
process ) <D Front turning @ Back turning @ Cut-off ( Ending
process )
||
$2 <D' Front center

$3 ( Back
preparation ) (BlÿBack center ( Knock out ) ( Chucking )( Back
retrieval )
<D Tooling
!

(JT)
<3>

II <E>®
!; <s> ®‘

fl
I
I
i
© ©

0T)
__ Turret No. 1
Turret No. 2
CfED©

<#D ©
SB

ift'-
I
| 11
11

1I III

f j

if
5-140

1
 1f
y fi 5. PROGRAMMING i
I
:
.
© Structure of the program l :
; ;•
$
0 0002
j
$1 $2 $3 S
1
-

G50X I Izr G50X-4.0Z dH G50Z L i

G710 G710W1 G710W1
j
G711 a

r Preparatory process

G740
Front turning ®
G740W1
|Tvwxenter positioning j®" (Bl)
G740W1 I

I S3L1 S2L1
|| i
Front center h— -®* Back center

G710 G710W1 G710W1

.:
G711 ( Knockout )
j Back turning

G712
Back chuck positioning ) I

§m
j Cut-off positioning l ©
G750 G750 G750

!1L3
w !3L3
i Cut-off ( Chucking )
1!
1 G710 G71QW1 G710W1
'
i.'i

G999
Ending process j
G999
c G999
Back retrieval )
ill

N999 N999 N999

M02 M02 M02 i

M99 M99 M99

1
% % %

;ÿ i

It I
I
ml

ft u
5-141

1
if

1
 :
i

mm
:

I:

1-
.

S. PROGRAMMING

Sample <S> Two-saddle and back/front pick off

(G720 + G730 + G750)

CP Process configuration

G720 G730 G750 G730

$1 ( Preparatory
process ) <D Front turning @ Back turning @ Cut-off ( Ending
process ) 'i

$2 ©* Front center

$3 £57) Back center f Knock out )( Chucking )( 8a ck

retrieval )
I
i |;

(D Tooling
;

SB
<S> © 11
i!
<m>
H ©'
a
4 4
0 1 I

© (D © 2 (#T>®
/

I1
s
s Turret No. 1
Turret No. 2

1
Si
i;

5-142
1
I:
 I 1
I

5. PROGRAMMING

(3) Structure of the program

0 0003 I
$1 $2 $3

G50X-4.0 Z [ G50 X I tzl i GSOZI _}

G720 G720 G720
P
Preparatory process

Front turning CD 1Positioning <D* 1

1 IFront center
G730 G730W1 G730W1 h
pack turning 0 I Back center 3 ®
Cut-off positioning ( Knock out )
G750 G750 G750
( Chucking

I list
I3L1
y
S1L1

i iCut-off
G710 G710W1 G710W1
V

G999
Ending process
J
G999
c
G999
Back retrieval )
M999 M999 N999
M02 M02 M02
m
si M99 M99 M99
:
ft
w
% % %

;:-:r

I
i

% ji
I'i

I
E
1
H,
U 1
1 5-143 M

i #ÿ

I
I
i
I
i
S
I
I
1
I :

i-

;;

I i : |j:
:
5. PROGRAMMING
l‘:
|i
i
I

’
-.••• ••

s :
IS
)y

:
:ÿ

;
;
:
i:

m
:ÿ

;ÿ i '

|
&
a
i
r :
:

f-
t
;

:: :
!

I;

;
;;

i;

;
I
||

I:

5-144
L I!
«
I I
8l 5. PROGRAMMING 8
1
I
Ij
1
ri,
5-8 PROGRAM EXAMPLES
s
1
Sample 1. Outer diameter turning (Basics) ;
Sample 2. Center hole drilling, boring, outer diameter turning, and thread cutting |
:: Sample 3. Secondary machining

:.S • D cut and 2-face width machining i.

•End face eccentric drilling and tapping
•Outer diameter drilling and key grooving ;:

I •Slitting :
Sample 4. Back machining I
• Back-front simultaneous machining G730 -» G750
1 Sequence calls using M98 (Back machining program and last
. program)

V;

if

li
i
8'

1 ;ÿ

5-145
I
:

;
5
1

J:
;

i
5. PROGRAMMING

Example 1 Creation of a program m

I; is

<Machiningdrawing> I
Workpiece material SUM24L (free cutting steel 20 dia.) 111
1
o <N
Q a
I
1
| 16 24
m
40

Cut-off too! ©
I
<Tool layout >
Turret No. 2
T20

©T2Q
3 1
Front turning too! CD

Turret No. t
T11

|
f
f
©T11
m7777777777\
Turret No. 1 ©'
T10

{Product separator) ;
1i
I I
©' T10
I
I

Relative position of tools on turrets No. 1and 2

M03
Turret No. 1 Turret No. 2 Note) • The figure of the tools on the
tool layout drawing is one-
|

/?///>>. direction drawing, on both

turret No.1and 2.
« All later program examples
| are mixture of E16/E20 and
Guide bushing front face E25/E32 programs.

fill
5-146
 S. PROGRAMMING

Program Twin turret command Explanation

00001 Program number

$1 $2 $3
S5
S G50X140.0 Z0(X 160.0)
f G710 G50X-4.0 20 G50ZO Set the coordinate system (Fugure 1)
2
n.
M06
t
The figure in ( }
G710W1 G710W1 Twin turret command
Close chuck.
3
2
< T1100
G712
is for E25/32 Select tool T11.
Turret No.2 side command It
Q.
v G00X21.0Z-0.5 Escape material from tool (Figure 2)
£ M3 SI = 2400 G99 Rotate the main spindle forward in
2400 r.pjn.,by per minute feed (mm/rev)

.£ N0111G711 ' Sequence number; turret No. 1side command Ji

£
§$
GOO X12.0 Z- 0.5 T01
G01 Z24.0 F0.1 '
—— Positioning at 012 in rapid feed (Figure 3); command offset No. 1.
Cut for 24 mm to the 012 longitudinal direction (Figure 4).
I l| X21.0 Oat fchft cuator diameter of wotfept&co for 0.5 mm (Figure 5)

,. Sequence number; turret No. 2 side command

( N0220 G712

--------
</s T1000 Pre-selection (product separator mount tool)
sO GOO X21.0 Z43.0T02 Sapid fend rat-off positioning; eotasnaad offset No. 2.

52.
05
G201 G01 X ~ 4.0 F0.02 M31 A10.0T1400(T1500)
M05
- Cut-offand collecting the product.
Stop main spindle.
!|l|
=5 M07 —
-
Open chuck.

I
Tt 100
f GOO X- 4.0 Z0T00
SelecttoolTIl.
"c M56 :
”” Esfcara to fcixo start position; cancal tits compcacatiocL

““ Count the number.

5fc G999 G993 G999 -- Last program execution command.
?
3
u M02
N999 N999
M02
N999
M02
—— Last program queuing
One-cycle stop
lM99
%
M99
%
M99
%
—— Return to the head of the program.
Stop code

Calculation of the spindle speed j and [feed j

i;

N= — x 1,000 = 150 x 1,000 = 2387 =2400 (r.p.m.)

3TX D 3.14x20

|
N : Speed (r.p.m.)
V : Cutting feedrate 150 m/min
D : Workpiece diameter 020 mm.
K: Circular constant (4= 3.14)
Fx 0.02 mm/rev
Fz 0.1 mm/rev
1
f From Table 1, page 5-214
------- From Table 1, page 5-214

J)
p

lUl
5-147
1
•i
i1

1;
.
l ;ÿ

1
I
I

is

! S. PROGRAMMING
»
Operation
I
g
% I
T20 g
g
& g 'si
Z Z
<3
’ J o

If

{Fig. 1)
X-4.0

(Fig. s)
W-
m 4rt

I
,

I
!
ph p
g
lii
m

ag
F
z — s. !!|l

0.5
3 40
I
(Fig. 2)

V
g
g
(Fig. 6)

,i.
a
z z
7ÿ.
r-

. ;(Fig. 3}
ri T11
43

P
(Fig. 7}

1 g
I z
"it-r-N z
;
\

l i l-
\

i—
(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 8)
!i
II
vi 5-148
I
M
 - S. PROGRAMMING

Example 2 Creation of a program (E25/E32)

--
<Machining drawing>

% 5
'

Workpiece material : C3604 (brass) c>

-\ÿn
0
I
I
S
(material diameter : 025.0- 0.015) trj
G
Sat - !.<>*--it-:: Is
M8XPOF 10 23 15
'
30

'

<Deciding the machining procedure and tool layout>

20

E
(2M)
Center drill <3 T11 <3)

Drill V T2T@
<S> T20 <S> T24 ©T23 \

a
Boring
"t j-f~ T12®
i 1 1 f7 ©T11
Tap T22®
E
I
ru @T21

©T12
5

T13 ©
© T22 Front turning too!
I
in 20
f; Grooving tool T23 ©
Thread cutting tool 2V\
1
I t 3 4
» ®'T10
t 10
©T13 T14 @
2 T24 ®
@T14
0
Back turning tool g
E 24.5
I. 5
:ÿ
|
Cut-off tool
T20 ©
g
: no <§>' M
4
II
3
a
1
f
(Product separator)
* ;

5-149

l)

1
I

5. PROGRAMMING

:
I!
f I
Example 2
This program includes many kinds of drilling and outer diameter cutting.
8
I Program (Twin turret command) Explanation

--------
——
:
00002 Program number 11
t/4 $1 $2 $3 Line commands
:|||

----
o ( G50X160.0Z0 G50X-4.0ZO G50 Z0 Coordinate system setting
Q- G710 G710W1 G710W1 Twin turret command

if
£•
S JA
M06
T1100
: —— . Close chuck.
Select next process tool Til.
2
SB
Turret No.2 side command

--------
-------- -
G712
g
“ÿ
-
GOO X26.0 Z 0.5 Eacafw tool &om tfca onto diamtar of U® ®rorknises. AkosKapstiateolfor-O.Smm&omtiiO'iroApiecafcso.
- - Rotate the spindle forward in 3400 r.p.m...by per minute feed (mm/rev)
M03 SI = 3400 G99

S N0111 G711 Sequence number; turret No. 1side command

1 eQ. T2100 121 pre-selection

c
—
GOO X 50.0 Z 0.5-
G01 Z6.2 F0.08T01
Positioning of center drill at the center of workpiece.
Infeed of the center drill; select offset No. 1.
ill
-
~ Escape center drill from the workpiece face; cancel offset.

--------
------------- ---- -
GOO Z- 0.5 TOO
u
0?
11
Sill
8
so N0221 G712 - Sequence number; turret No. 2 side command i

T1200 T12 pre-selection

|
Q.
o>
-
GOO X 50.0 Z- 0.5 Positioning of drill at the center of workpiece. :
G01 Z36.0 F0.15T02 Infeed of the drill; select offset No. 2.
= GOO Z- 0.5 TOO Escape drill from the workpiece face; cancel offset.
6

--------
----------- -
St =3200 Speed command for the next process.
'

f N0312G711 Sequence number; turret No. 1side command I

i|
T2200 T22 pre-selection.
i (rt
G50 U56.0
GOO X13.0 Z- 0.5 T03
—— Coordinate system shift
Boring;positioning, select offset No. 3.

-------
if G01 X10.0Z1.0 F0.025 -- Chamfering to inner diameter 010. (Cl)
if 2

--------
------- -
Z15.0 F0.04 Cut to 15 mm deep.
II
Ii
0! 1 X6.6Z16.7 F0.025
.£
GOO Z- 0.5
— —.—— Chamfering at the entrance of tap (C1.5).
Escape tool from the workpiece face.

-------
o
4 tn G50 U 56.0- - Cancel coordinate system shift.
S1 = 500 Speed command for the next process.
if V. G04U1.0 1.0-second dwell (Wait till the rotation becomes stable.)
:
ii ill
If ( N0422 G712 Sequence number; turret No. 2 side command
—-—

-------
f; T13 pre-selection; positioning at 025., and wait
s T1 300X25.0
II
4 so GOO X-50.0Z-0.5 Positioning of tap at the center of workpiece.
i!

-------
-----
Z19.0 Positioning of tap at the longitudinal direction.

------
3:
ii SK
.E
G32Z32.0F1.0T04
Z17.0 FI.25 M04 TOO
Infeed of the tap (80% feed); select offset No. 2.
Return tap (100% feed, main spindle reverse rotation); cancel offset ‘ iii
CL
4 CL G04 U2.0 “ Dwell
if GOO Z- 0.5 Escape tap from the workpiece face.
V M3 St =2400 Rotate the spindle forward in 2400 r.p.m.

s
I
iff;

I f

1
I 5-150
II
If
Iff
si
 1
5. PROGRAMMING
I
V

Program (Twin turret command) Explanation

$1
(A
tSb

8 N0513G711 " Sequence number; turret No. 1side command. I

H05
T2300 X26.0
GOO X21.0 Z- 0.5 T05
“
-
T23 pre-selection, positioning at 026, and wait.
Rapid feed positioning; select offset No. 5.
I
•§ - I
|<
G01 X24.0Z1.0 F0.08 Chamfering (Cl)
Z17.8 - Machining from longitudinal 18 mm collar to 0.2 ram to the front.
S X24.2 - Positioning to immediately before the chamferingposition.
C
O l X26.0Z18.7 - Chamfering(escape diameter direction from workpiece diameter)

------
u.

------
( N0623G712 Sequence number; turret No. 2 side command.

------
VI
T1400X27.0 T14 pre-selection, positioning at 027, and wait.
; GOO X26.0 Z18.0T06 Rapid feed positioning; select offset No. 6. :
o

------
CL
G01 X21.5 F0.05 Infeed to 21.5 dia. in cutting feedrate.

---
Escape diameter direction from front turning diameter

---
X25.0 F0.2
S<
s
W- 1.0 —
MoVe 1.0 to the longitudinal direction (incremental command)

------
o X23.0W1.0 F0.05 Chamfering to 023.0.
o X26.0 F0.2 ---
- Escape from workpiece diameter.
SI = 1200 - Speed command of next process. j
l G04U1.0 OweH
i

( N0714G711
T2400X26.0
— T24
Sequence number; turret No. 1side command.
pre-selection, positioning at 026, and wait.

---
— Command thread cuttingcycle; 1st infeed
VI
VI

8 GOO X27.0 Z21.5 T07 Positioning to the initial point; select offset No. 7.
O
Q.
Cl
G92 X23.3 Z41.0 F1.5
X22.8
— 2nd infeed.
_c X22.48 — 3rd infeed.
5 <
1 —

---
X22.28 4th infeed.
X22.16 — 5th infeed.
"g
£
-C
X22.06
X22.06
— 6feh infeed.
Zero-cut (Same dimension command as the 6th cut)
GOO X26.0 Cancel thread cuttingcycle (by GOO).
l S1 = 2400 — Speed command of next process.

v>
V.

o
CL
f N0824G712
T1000
G50W-5.0
GOO X26.0 Z19.3 T08
------
—
—
Sequence number; turret No. 2 side command.
T10 pre-selection.
Coordinate system shift.
Rapid feed positioning; select offset No. 8.
;

------
05
c G01 X24.6 Z20.0 F0.03 Chamfering (C0.2)
1 E < XI6.0 — Machining (longitudinal 29.0
Infeed to 016, in cutting feed.

---
3
ij-', Z29.0 F0.08 mm) to immediately before the chamfering position.
X13.6 Z30.2 F0.03 Chamfering
rtJ
m X26.0 F0.2 Escape tool from workpiece diameter.
G50W5.0 Cancel coordinate system shift.

1
1
1 !
:: ]:
5-151

1
••

:S
f i
:

I
?!ÿ
if
M
I

M
I
b

:
r
1 5. PROGRAMMING
I

Program (Twin turret command) Explanation

$1

( N092Q T2000 X26.0

G50W-4.0
GOO X26.0 Z30.0 T09
$2

-----
- - -----
-----———
$3

Sequence number; select the same tool side T20; Positioning at 026.
Coordinate system shift ON.
Rapid feed positioning; select offset No. 9.

-----
G01X17.0F0.2 “ Approach near back turningdiameter.
G201 G01 X6.0 F0.05 M31 A12.0T1500 Performcut-off and collect tbs product.

----
-
GOO X26.0 Z29.5 (or W 0.5) Escape the tool to the diameter and longitudinal directions.

-------
{Preparation for second cut-off.)

----
Z34.0 Positioning for second cut-off.
G50 S6000 Q2400 - Constant surface speed
Maximum, minimumrotation damp (6000 r.pum, 2400 r.p.m.)
sCL G96S180 control ON

- - - - ----- - - - -
(cutting feedrate 180 m/min).
o»
—

---------------
£ G01 X 4.0 F0.05 End of second cut-off.

1 G97S1 = 500 -- — Constant surface speed control OFF; spindle rotation 500 r.p.m,

Tj G50W4.0 Coordinate system shift OFF.

ro
H-
o
M05
M07
—— stop spindle.
Open chuck.
A
3 T1100 — Select tool Tit.

---
U
GOO X- 4.0 Z0 TOO Sotant to ti® start 5«ofioo;taiic®3tS»«>*ixaasatioB.
M56 :
: : Count the number.
G999 G999 G999 Last program execution command
N999 N999 N999 — Last program queuing
—
'

M02 M02 M02 ' One-cycle stop

M99 M99 M99 ’ Return to the head of the program.

V % % % '
— Stop code
ff

ff;
il

iff
::i
if
if
if |
if.
i'i
if
if
1if I

ft
;f

if
if
if
if
;i
5-152
H
 K
I'
i;
5. PROGRAMMING

Example 3 Creation a program |

;
<Machining drawing>
V:
Workpiece material : SUS303 (free cutting stainless)

o
Material diameter : ®18 (- 0.015} 20

Both-side chamfering Cl
M3 x P0.5 Depth 6.0 Cut-off T20 ©
I;
A-A’sectional view s3.5 through hole
C?’/ (Preparatory hole 02.55 x 11.77}
-5 3'
IS
v ~iA
T
co

Ef
i
I*.
idi
f

M?- 2 7 16 90 edges

-r 20
T11 <3> .
V

--
35
60
Slitting cutter :
(two cutters)

<Machiningprocedure and tool layout>

1M r2- T12® I
Center drill :
02ÿ5 Drill
T21 O
T20 T24 T23 T22
© © © © M3 Tap
st

U 1 TV T12
©
T21
<3>
T13 Groove
to T22 ©
;

V
III = **— 1

fÿl
1.5 M Center drill T14 ©
1 A
i
:
i
i
I
»
i:
II
® © <D
:'

ii
1 ! T14 T23
T14 Tit // ©
n
I t 03.5 Drill /
:
> i ;

©• ©
T10 T15 T24
e4,0 End mill

:b
i

T15 © ]:i
06.O End mill
Next comes programming of this part along
the drawing and layout. -0 :
Product separator 25
<a>*
no

5 5-153
1:

j»!

ii
I
I
is
]

R
ii
1
1
1

i
I r —~

: 5. PROGRAMMING

I
I

Program (Twin turret command) Explanation

00003
$1 $2 $3

f G50 X140.0 Z0 (X160.0) G50X-4.0 Z0 G50Z0

a
S
2
G710
MQ6 t
The figure in ( )
G710W1 G710W1

EL I1100 is for £25/32

G712
; (’ I -
GOO X25.0 Z 0.5
(M05) Per minute feed designation; tool #1
Q.
spindle 240 r.p.m. forward rotation
a.
G98 M80 S3 = 240
M74G28H1
M18G50C0
} Command to proceed to the
secondary machining
C axis zero point return
C axis; gear ON, coordinate system setting

-------
cu
f N0111 G711
45
6 T2100
§ G501 A041 Secondary machining spindle coordinate system shift ON
tl m GOO X9.25 Z - O.S T01 (Slitting spindle)
c-E

-----
G01Z3.0F11
p
II
*
9.
<0
E
X - 9.25
Z-0.5F200
S G50GA041 Secondary machining spindle coordinate system shift OFF
5
5
32
$
GOO X140.0 S3 = 1250 (X160.0)
L T1200
— Rapid feed to tool change position; tool #1spindle 1250 r.p.m.
t

------
<55 For £25/32
c
f N0212
G501 A021 Coordinate system shift ON (face drilling spindle)
~ os GOO X10.0
1 2-|ÿ G01 Z4.5 F48T02
|lc GOO Z- 0.5 TOO
gg G500A021 * Coordinate system shift OFF
5 V. M83 $4 = 1900 * Tool #2 spindle 1900 r.p.m., forward rotation
(Q O
u- JC

--------
>
9
( N0321 G712
IS = T1300
G501 B021 Coordinate system shift ON (face drilling spindle)
1 "S GOO X 10.0 H180.0 Rapid feed, positioning at 10 dia.; 180° indexing
o» G01 Z7.7 F114T03
1
2 1, GOO Z- 0.5
G04 U0.5
: |
8
c Z7.2
TO
£
E G01 Z11.77
] gif GOO Z- 0.5 TOO
ij G500 B021 •
Coordinate system shift OFF
V S3 = 500 H180.0 ' Tool #1 spindle 500 r.p.m., 180° indexing

If
I
1

4
5-154

1
 I

5. PROGRAMMING
1

%
g> N0413G711 fc
a T2200

~&
T3
Qj
G501 A021
GOO Z4.Q
Coordinate system shift ON (face tapping spindle) I
'
N X10.0

------
g / G01 29.8 F200 104 I
c Z2.0 F250 M81T00
8 G04U2.0
T3 G500A021 Coordinate system shift OFF 1;
<y
u
«o M20
u. M03 S1 = 1600 G99

f N0522G712
11400
G50W- 10.0 * Grooving longitudinal coordinate system shift ON
G00X19.0T05
Ol Z1.0
.E G01 X16.0 Z-0.5 F0.015
o G0OX19.0T06
o
03 Z8.0
03 G01X17.0Z9.0
-i J XI 6.0
\ X19.0F0.2 j!
E |
Z10.0
X17.0 Z9.0 F0.015
-a
£ X19.0F0.2
G50W10.0 • Grooving longitudinal coordinate system shift OFF
M05
%% M80 S3 =1400 G98 1
M74G28H1 Command to proceed to secondary machining
V M18G50C0

% CTl
.E
c
.c r N0614G711
?:: T2300
E

If —*
G501 A011
GOO X19.0 Z20.0
G01 X7.6F42T07
* Coordinate system shift ON (outer circle center drilling)

I'M
8.g '
u
GOO X19.0 TOO
H180.0
G01 X7.6T07
* 180° indexing
i y-S GOO X 19.0 TOO
y T G500A011 *
Coordinate system shift OFF
-c
IJ
OS
V S4= 1400 '*
Tool #2 spindle 1400 r.p.m. <

i:
,-.i

f:
is
1 5-155

1
i
,
g
I
I

:
:
;

5. PROGRAMMING
;
I

m
;

N0723 G712
§ G501 8011 * Coordinate system shift ON (outer circle drilling spindle)
G00X19.0Z20.0
G01X-1.0 F56T08
03 GOOX19.0 !' !§
t c
= G04 U0.5
“O X0
'f
G01X-15.7
i: if GOO X19.0
*u
H <5 G04 U0.5
p
3
o
-
X 14.7
G01 X-21.1
GOO XI 9.0 TOO
G500 B011 * Coordinate system shift OFF
S3 = 1200 H- 90.0 ' Tool #1 spindle 1200 r.p.m.; 90° indexing
|
03

= f N0814G711
T2400
£ G501 A011 * Coordinate system shift ON (outer circle drilling spindle)
I GOO XI 9.0 Z35.0
f!

-----
G01 X13.8F42T09
GOO X19.0 TOO
u G500A011 Coordinate system shift OFF
It!.f ® S4= 1100 H180.G Tool #2 spindle 1100 r.p.m.; 180° indexing
3
o
03
.£
f N0924G712
T1500
it %o G501 8011 * Coordinate system shift ON (outer circle drilling spindle)
it
1 03 GOO XI9.0 Z35.0 T10
IIf G01 X14.0 F48

------
is
if. Z45.0

-----
Si: U X19.0F200
:
O G500B011 Coordinate system shift OFF
Q> M85H- 135.0 Tool #2 spindle rotation stop; 135° indexing
if *3 Tool #1spindle 1000 r.p.m.
6 V S3 = 1000 II
i ;

------
||||
!: f N1015G711
Si T2000
II I
03 G501 A030 Coordinate system shift ON (horizontal milling spindle)
.£
:: £ G00X18.3Z38.0T11 :§|f
G01X-12.0 F60 I
It
3
Z42.0
X18.3
I? V G500A030 * Coordinate system shift OFF
f Q
M20M82 * Reset secondary machining (gear OFF); too! #1spindle rotation stop
t M03 S1 = 1600 G99 *
Spindle 1600 r.p.m., forward rotation; specify per rotation
feed

ft
Iff II
1
I 5-156
I
 Is-

1 5. PROGRAMMING

VI

I
f N1120G712
T1000
G00X19.0Z63.0T12
.2 G01 X16.0 F0.015
to X19.0FQ.2
m
GOO 262.0
£
t/i G96S90
a
i
i
o
G50 S5000 QI600
G01 X16.QZ63.Q F0.015
G201 G01 X-4.0 F0.015M31 A8.0T1400 * Product separation
1
CL.
5= G97S1 =500
? (M05)
,1 3
u M07
T1100 Return to the start position
GOO X-4.0 ZOTOO

</>
M56
s
o G999 G999 G999
CL N999 N999 N999
M02 M02 M02
xs M99 M99 M99
tS V % % %

$1 $2 $3

11

-
I
|

li

l
5-157

i :
;
 r-ti
I
t

t
a;

i|

I
...
.-;;i

5. PROGRAMMING

t '
n 1
i

t IS
:
i.
1
si I
I
:
i
a i
l I5
it I
l!

i1

it

f:

s
III I
IS
it I
t
ii
i !

t
II
it
iJ
:
II
il if.
t
I
if
IIit
II
t]
}
:
il
til I
It 1I
t
il II
it i
it :
st Is
t
i
t
;
tt
s
II
III
t
t Ii
illI: i: 5-158
It: I;
I!
lits Si
I
5. PROGRAMMING
I
ft
'ft
I Example 4 Creation of a program (E25/E32) (Back/front simultaneous machining)
I
II <Machiningdrawing>

:.S: Carbon tool steel

Workpiece material : SK4F
024

a
\ 2
&
1 R « --
-4 1

5 s

15 48 (7) 20
ft; :
1 90

1
|
G730 (Back/front simultaneous command)

& T20
us
ft
2b.
1
T22

© T14

a
T24
<3
V~ T14 ©
4s

i
I <D T10 ©T12 T12 ©
m
i Note) Back spindle chuck position 30 mm
T10®

5-159 ;ÿ
I
I
ir
f;|
if
it;
si
H
:

I
I
I
:

f
:
:

5. PROGRAMMING
Ilf
m •
•

si
Example 4 Program
1
Samplel : Back/front simultaneous machining 1/3

No. I
000041
$1 $2 $3 Line iiii

G50X-4.0 G50X160.0Z0 G50Z0 1

i G730 G730W1 G730W1 2
M06 3
|
M23 S2 = 1600 G99 4
:
GOO X25.0 Z-0.5 M88 5
M03 SI = 1600699 6 l!
T1400 7
8
GOO X25.0 Z-0.5 T2200 9
X-50.0 GOO X25.0Z-1.0 10
X-50.0 11
G01 Z5.0 F0.06T01 12
G01 Z5.0 F0.06T03 13
GOO Z-0.5T00 14 ill
T1200X25.0 GOO Z-1.0T00 15
: T2400X25.0 16
17
f GOO X25.0 Z-0.5T02 G00X16.0Z-1.0T04 18 II
X13.0 G01 X20.0 Z1.0 F0.08 19
G01 X16.0Z1.0 F0.08
1
: Z15.0 20
I
Z20.0 X22.0 21
X25.0 Z27.8 X25.0 Z16.5 22
T1000 T2200 23
GOO ZO 24
I M25 25
M32 26
M16 27
MIG 28
G04U1.0 29
I
I M11 30
I M33 31
32
I 111!
33
34 ill
35
I
II
I

5-160
|
1
5. PROGRAMMING
ii I
j;
'?ÿ
£ Example 4 Explanation of program
m Sampiel : Back/front simultaneous machining 1/3
000042”**Program No.
1
I $1 $2 S3 Line
Current position coordinate system Current position coordinate system Current position coordinate system
1
Wi
setting
Back/front simultaneous machining
setting
Back/front simultaneous machining
setting
Back/front simultaneous command; to
1
y.l; command command; to Z2 axis fixed point. Z3 axis work zero point. 2 ft
:
3
IS Forward rotation at 1600 r.p.m. 4

& Forward rotation of spindle at 1600

Interference check OFF 5 1
13 r.p.m. 6
Select T1400 at X160.0. 7
8
I Select T2200 at X160.0. 3
Front center positioning and
center machining to Z5.0 by
i 10
11
Front center positioning and
turret No. 1,T1400. center machining to Z5.0 by 12
turret No. 2,T22C0.
13
14
$ v 15
; Select T1200, and gotoX25.0. Select T2400, and go to X25.0. 16

h
w
Front turning a16. and 60“
1
o20. x 15 mm machining by
17
18
19
tapering by T1200. T2400. 20

I
Select T1000 at XI60.0.
v
Select T2000 at X160.0.
21
22
23
. 24
To Z3 axis Z0 (work zero point).
Stop back spindle. 25
Move workpiece separator forward. 26
Open chuck 27
Knock out ON. 28
1-second hold. 29
Knock out OFF. 30
Move workpiece separator backward. 31
32 1
33

v
34 1
35 t
:
\:
i
J':

5-161 :|

I ;

1
;

S'
i?

I
1
1
e

I
§
•
.

I
i
I
•M
f
II
1
I
f
I
.

S. PROGRAMMING

I 2/3

Jl 000041 Program hlo.1

$1 $2 $3 ft
: GOO X2S.0 Z94.0 105 36
G750 G750 G750 37
M24 52=1600 38
f GOO Z-2.0 39
G01 Z60.0 F3.0 40
M123 41
It M15 42
If
I
i
I3L1
G01 X-4.0 F0.03
!1LI 43
44
I G730 G730W1 G730W1 45
M124 46
f: M05 47
M07 48
49
I! GOO X-4.0 Z0T00 50
M56 51
G999 G999 (3999 52
53
54
55
56
•,

j:
G730 G730W1 G730W1 57
58
59
111 M23 S2 = 1600 G99 60
GOO X25.0 Z-t.O 61
X-50.0 62
i :
G01 Z5.0 F0.06T03 63
f GOO Z-1.OT0O 64
T2400 X25.0 65
|i
GOG X16.0 Z-1.0T04 66
'll G01 X20.0Z1.0 F0.08 67
Z15.0 68
69
I
70

i'l
5-162
31
 5. PROGRAMMING
;

2/3
1 000041*— Program No.
§1 $1 $2 $3 Line
!i;:
36
Pick off command (superimposed on
Pick off command Pick off command 37
Bade spindle 1600 r.p.m.reverse
rotation. 38
ToZ-, axis coordinate system Z-2.0. 39
Chuck positioning at Z60.Q- 40
I Sack spindle torque limitON 41
Close chuck. 42
Queuing with Line $3. Queuing with Line $1. 43
II
Cut-off 44
Back/front simultaneous machining Back-front simultaneous machining Sadc/front simultaneous command; to Z3 axis work
45 1
pattern command; to Z2 axis fixed point. zero point.
Back spindle torque limit OFF 46
V 47
Return to Z, axis coordinate 48
system setting value Z0. 49
1
1
I 50
*
I Counting
Last program execution command Last program execution command Last program execution command
51
52
1
I 53
54
55
li Back/front simultaneous machining Back/front simultaneous command; Back/front simultaneous command; to
56
pattern to Z2 axis fixed point. Z3 axis work zero point. 57
I 58
I 59
1
1 Back spindle 1600 r.p.m. forward
rotation. 60
{ 61
Back center positioning and 62
center machining to Z5.0 by
V turret No. 2,T2200. 63

1 I
Select T2400, and go to X25.0
64
65

1 Machining 20 dia.x15 mm by
66
67
S
T2400.
68 |
8 69 I>
I
s 70

3
:

5-163 I

i|

I
 i;

1 ;

y;
ij
j'

5. PROGRAMMING
::

s I
3/3
000041 — Program Mo.

$1 $2 S3 line II
X22.0 71
X25.0 216.5 72 S*
T2200 73 III
G00Z0 74
M25 75
1 111
M32 76 I:
M16 77
M10 78
G04U1.0 79
Mil 80
M33 81
82
83
84
85
86
87
N999 N999 N999 88
M89 89
M02 M02 M02 90
I
M99 M99 M99 91 1
% % % 92
ft 1

Ij
I

:'!ÿ
v.v
s;
li:

it
SI 111

if
S;t
I -
Sis
!
iss:
SI
SIS
I 5-164
s!
a
 I
5. PROGRAMMING

3/3
000041 —Program No.
$1 $2 $3 Line
'
71
72 1
Select T2200 at XI 60.0. 73
To Z3 axis Z0 {work zero point}. 74 1
Stop back the spindie. 75
Move workpiece separator forward. 76 ii
Open chuck. 77 J!

Knock out ON. 78 l]

1-second hold. 79
Knock out OFF.
Move workpiece separator
80 1

I
backward. 81
82
83
84
85
86
87
Last program ending command. Last program ending command. Last program ending command. 88 15
interference check ON 89
Execution of M02 to % ending Execution of M02 to % ending Execution of M02 to % ending
program program program 90

l
' 91
92

|
I:

I
v;

II
I

5-165

j
I
f
Ff.
I
>!

5. PROGRAMMING

Sample 2: Sequence calls using M98 1/2

000042— -Program No.

$1 $2 $3
G50X-4.0ZO G50X160.0Z0 G5OZ0
G730 G730W1 G730W1
M06 M88
GOO X25.0 Z-0.5
M03 51 = 1600 G99
i

11400

N01 M98 H1000(sequence call)

GOO X25.0 Z-0.5
X-50.0
G01 Z5.0 F0.06 T01
Gooz-asibo
T1200X25.0

N02
GOOX25.0Z-0.5T02
X13.0
GOl'xV6'.0Z1.'oFb:08
Z20.0
X25.0 Z27.8 |
TYOOO I

N03
GOO X25.0 Z94.0T05
G750 G750 G750
M24 52 = 1600
G00Z-2'.0
Goi zeo.o Fi!o Mi’23
G04uV;b" I
I M15
!3L1 !1L1
G01 X-4.0 F0.03
1 1
G730 G730W1 G730W1
M05 Ml 24
M07
GOO X-4.0 ZO TOO
M56

5-166
 m
1
5. PROGRAMMING

Sample 2: Sequence calls using M98 2/2

Sf
1
I®
000042 —
Program No.
$1 $2 $3
G999 G999 G999
G730 G730 Wt G730W1
M98 Hi 66o
-'i j
1 : i,
N999 N999 N999
M83
M02 M02 M02
ill M99 M99 M99
3 % %
N1000
Comments
M23S2 = 1600 G99
1 1. Arrange your back machining or product collection T2200
H program after the sequence number N1000 and end it with
1
I M99. GOOX25.0Z-1.0
& 2. A maximum of 5-digit command ”M98 HDD can
m
be used for calling the back machining program or product
X-50.6
G01Ho F0.06 foi
collection program. (Except for N999.)
k 3. The programprogresses numerically. When a continuous Gbbz-T.ofbo
m
cycle or last program is OFF, © to (D are skipped. T2400 X25.0
;il
i,
I F1QW ! $3 G00X16.0 Z 1.0104
G50 Z0 G6ix2b.6zi.6F6.08
© Zi'5.6
’r X22.0
M98 H1000-* X25.0Z16.5
T2266
V
<D
,,T G999
© G00Z0
© G730W1
I - M98 H1000 -«e — M25
N999 M32
I © M02 M16
;;
©
M99 M10
©
G04U1.0
5:NIOQO M11
© M33 I
f
®u M99 M99 9;
fj
% %
f
4. When the program is called by M98 HD ,it is returned
to its first ND .
1
I I
I
a 5-167

;
ii

!
w
4 :I
:
.
5

Ijf;
fi
I
I

I
f;R
!
1
I,:

yl
•; :

.
5. PROGRAMMING
III
'

I
:
i

:
:ÿ
I'

;i i,

®;:g
1
I

I
i I
I :'v.>

5
111
!; 18

I
i
|
I
t :
' :ÿ

. 1
|

I:
|

Iq '
:|
t

,, !
i
f:

l1 i
SI

:
! I

1
:V

t
i

; \ >
i
f-

5-168
;V
l J J
;| 1
5. PROGRAMMING

1
|

9
i:
!!
5-9 Optional Functions t

1. Automatic bar feed i:

2. Too! nose R offset

3. Complex thread cutting cycle

4. Long workpiece machining I
5
:'N
5. Milling interpolation I
6. Spindle synchronous controlI
7. Hob machining (for E321V only) 1
8. Y axis machining (for E32F only) |

1 I

if

:
5-169
 ;

S. PROGRAMMING

I
5-9-1 Automatic Bar Feed (Content without back machining standard :
operation)

When automatically feeding the material, the following automatic bar feeding process must be inserted
between the cut-off process and the ending process.

[Operating drawing]
f

GOO 20 TOO
I
-A
r 8

Limit switch
. (No-material signal ON)

\
a
•••

l - 50.0F0.2
GOt x 17.0W 01 X -4.0
t (End of cut-off)
M
M55«—M07«—M54

Push rod retrieval position

Extract material from finger chuck -=
Materia!
MSS
m :

:
Workpiece basket
Limit switch-
& /
insert material into finger chuck
-tS-
E M
M06—»(W50.0F0.2)
rf '

-U i3-
t

'!/
3-e &
G01 X -4.0F0.02

F-
:
Check the operation referring to the program of the next page.

5-170
 5. PROGRAMMING
1
|

I [Automatic bar feeding program] (standard)

S o«®®@

$1 $2 $3 IS
i
Preparatory process
,,y 4r 5

tI
£ M09
-
* 8 S

| Machining process \ j
3

1 ; s
1 i
Si J
/ j
]
1
T2000 Automatic bar feeding
,
( T[ ] i
i : program and explanation
N820G712 ! 8
GOO X17.0 Z50.0 !
G01 X-4.0 F0.02 : 8

M08 ?ÿ Turn off special block deletion.

M08
/( ) »
/( } I outer diameter deburring program
) \
i
'
/{
/G01X17.0 W - 50.0 F0.2
i
Extract material from the guide bushing, and escape the cut-off tool
i to + 1 mm the material outer diameter.
m /M53 Turn OFF Cooiant.
I
/M05 Stop spindle rotation.
'V-:
* /M54
I
Turn off supply device machining torque.
m /M07
/M55 i
Open spindle chuck.
Material change command (supplying device starts material change)
#
I /M06
/M52
i

s
Close spindle chuck.
Turn ON coolant.
i /G04 U2.0
i /MG3S1 = [Z Rotate spindle forward.
i
m AA/50.0 F0.2
i

i Insert material into guide bushing.

: /X-4.0 F0.02 8ÿ Cut the end of the material short.
1
mm
M09
B
l Turn on block deletion.

I
§
(Hereafter, blocks with /are ignored.)

M05
W.: M07
4 GQ0X-4.0Z i
M56
moo
E

I
I
; I
t
| G999 j G999 G999
I ! N999 5
N999 N999 I
I M02
M99
SVS02
M99
M02
M99
i % %
.i,
% 1
j

if
m 1
i
1 1
8
5-171

1
I
i
1
I
1

1
8
!
R;
!
I
i
if
;
:

t=

If
I .

il

5. PRGGRAMMiNG
'I

5-9-2 Tool Nose R Compensation < Option >

When the tool-bit is round, the round tool nose can cause error between the programmed form and the
cutting form during taper cutting or circular interpolation. I
The tool nose R compensation function is set to automatically calculate the error and perform :
compensation. The command code can fix the compensation direction.

Command format : ® Nose R compensation cancel ....... G40

•Nose R compensation left mode ON G41

® Nose R compensation right mode ON G42

Enter the tool nose data in advance, into the <R> l Tool nose R l and <P > l Virtual tool nose Nolof
the tool nose data screen.
Note) The < R> of the wear data screen and the <R> of the tool data screen are different. |i
f

[TOOL DATA] OFFSET2. 1/6

#1: INC #A : ABS l|!
<X> <Z> <R> <P>
\ #1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 11
h
'

2 0.000 0.000 1.500 0

3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 m
4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 . i
i;r
15 0.000 0.000 0.000 0

!*
#L M )Zf )Rf )P( )
TIPOFS T-DATA WORK START. P COUNTER MENU

(1) Virtual tool nose

• The virtual tool nose is a non-existing 0
point, the 0 point of the right figure.
R
• Set the tool on the holder as shown in the
right figure.

(2) Virtual tool nose number

• The direction of the virtual tool nose viewed from the tool nose R center is decided as the
virtual tool nose number.
Anumber <P>, being selected out of 0 to 9, is designated for each tool.
* 1

5-172

:'5
 M
'
5. PROGRAMMING

H
m
(3) Popular tools and virtual tool nose numbers

J Virtual tool nose No. 4 Tool data <P> Virtual too! nose No. 1
0
»*ÿ

Front turning tool Boring tool

Tool data <P>
m

Too! data <P>

Virtual tool nose No. 3 Tool data
<P> Virtual tool nose No. 8
:7

ID m
I R
Back turning tool R Diamond point tool
v,;j

>;l T T

Notes) » When performing rapid feed positioningor canceling the tool nose R compensation, be
4
careful of the tool. Keep the tool away from the workpiece basically for more than the
distance equivalent to the nose R.
® Alarm occurs if G commands not allowed while executing tool nose R compensation is
! commanded.
* Refer to the Operator's Manual of the NC for whichcommand causes alarm.
;;

O The theory of the tool nose R compensation is the same as in the CXNCOM F series.

5- 173

'.j
1
i!

<[\ •

I
8
*
i

:
I
I t

1
I
l
ti
1
|{r
1
£
| 5. PROGRAMMING
ill

I
(4) Basic G code patterns
123 T22 T21T20
<3> 0 © <P>
i
I' 4f 4 1
i
I
I
I i
4
s
T2Q
»
ji

i
i
i
i
!
i
i
i 3
k
!
t l a I
i ..
i
Boring tool

#• s <p>
1: i— J 4

Front turning tool

;[
Machining direction

G40 * T21
G41
G42 -- <P>
8

Diamond point tool

[EXAMPLES]

1.Boring process B.Diamond point process 122

_G42JGOOX18.OZ-0.6TOI • G50W-9.0

II G01 Z0 F0.1 :|G41 | G00 X 17.0 T03 <P>

: G01 X11.0 Z4.286 F0.2 3
U G01 X7.483 F0.02
If G02X0Z1.0 R7.5 jG03Xn.QZ10.714 R0.5 F0.03 Back turning tool
it G01 Z-0-6 jj |
<340 G00X17.0 it

if G40 GOO X18.0 i G50 W9.0

if
T23
2-Front turning process 4,Back turning process J
i;
ft |
G42 GOO X 17.0 Z-0.5T02 G50W-4.0
i't G41 | G00 X17.0 Z19.0 T04
X8.0
i j G41 G01 XI 0.0 Z-0.5 F0.03
I G01 X15.0 Z20.0 F0.03
Z15.0 F0.05 X10.0
it X15.0 F0.1 Z29.5 F0.05
X17.0 Z16.0 F0.04 X8.8Z30.1 F0.02 S
G40 G00 X17.0 X17.0F0.2
1 1
G40 G00X17.0
if
it

1
G50W4.0
1
I
it
;;t
t
ti;
it 5-174
a
m
1JS 5. PROGRAMMING

:S

«l 5-9-3 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle< Option >

5-9-3-1 Thread cutting command
Thread cutting is normally done little by little, in multiple infeeds, but the infeed points must be calculated
to keep the machining amount constant, and this takes considerable time for programming.
The thread cutting canned cycle can be used for automatic calculation of the infeed points within the

1 control unit.
I The commandis givenby G76 as follows.

£ G76 P fSTFTI QrSdiSI Rf-d~l

1
V G76 xi IZI iRmpmonaiPm
I
P m Final finishing repeat count 00 to 99
r Thread cutting chamfering amount 1 = Equivalent to 0.1pitches 00 to 99
a Tool nose angle On1degree increment through 0° to 99°) 00 to 99 l:
Admin Least infeed clamp value 0 to 99.999mm
d Finishing margin 0 to 99.999mm
X Diameter direction finalinfeed point (diameter value command)
Z Longitudinal direction thread cutting end point
k Thread height (radius designation without sign)
Ad Reference infeed (radius designation without sign)
I £
i
Thread lead (pitch)
Diameter direction distance from the thread cutting end point X to the thread
I cutting start point (diameter direction dimensional difference of the taper)
(Radius designation with sign)
•i .§ I
:ÿ* .E

* u z

*0
XJ
<3
<i S
xi
< TO
<3 I®
Jl
5
1 Initial point <J § *
JC

27
£
v v

l X
I!
•5 S
2

"O flj

Note 1) m,r, a are commanded at the same time by address P. (Surrounding 0s may not be omitted)
I
2) m, r, a can also be set by parameter. The parameter value is also overwritten by program
command.
Preparation parameters #11, #18, #19, #20, and #21.
3) Command shouldbe given to each of 3 Lines.

* Refer to the Operator's Manual of the NC for details.

;;
l
l
i 5-175
;
ft j

1
:
>

i
!
5. PROGRAMMING 1
V:

S-9-3-2 Program Sample

Program
S1 = 1500 M03 CD
G04U1.0 0 i'
I
T jl300 | ©
. i
GOO X|11.0|Z[6J1 . ©
G76 P1020360 I Qj i j .......
iR
G76 Xl 6.381 H
Z 5.25 K[810] ofizo]
1 Fll.251 ®
GOO X DD
‘

Explanation
| © Rotate the spindle.
® 1.0-second dwell to wait for a stable spindle rotation.
1: Select toolNo. 13.
@ Position the tool at the thread cutting cycle start point (initial point).
<§> Setting of the thread cutting cycle.
P020360
m twice
r 0.3 pitches ;
a 60®
® Perform thread cutting cycle B.
Thread height (K) 0.81
First infeed (Q) 0.32
Pitch (F) 1.25
• Cutting is done as "1st infeed 0.32, 2nd infeed s/sTx R ~ 0.453 When
the difference of the previous and current infeed becomes smaller than the
|
1
minimum infeed Q I I, the infeed starts increasing for the minimum
S infeed.
!
• The finishing margin Rl I is cut at the end, to infeed the thread height.
The finishing cutting is done by infeeding the commanded counts (twice in
the above example) of the thread height.
<2> Return to the cycle start point, or proceed to the next process.

x0 V2Ad Ad
u Initial point
a 1:
k
II
d V2Ad + Admin

5-176
 5. PROGRAMMING
vi

5-9-B-3 Line Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle I

:
;s3
(1) Command format

G76. 1 X/U Z/W RiPkQAd F l:

m2;
'S' (2) Detailed description
,s
- <D When G76.1 is to be given to both Lines 1and 2, the Line that received the command first waits
for another Line to be commanded. The thread cuttingcycle is initiated as the command is
specified for both Lines.

ED mi
J J
GOO X_Z ;
G76.1
*

— GOO X__Z
G76.1 —
5 S
<D G76.1 initiates the thread cutting cycle whichenables G76 to bothLines and allows queuing of
g the Lines at the start andend of the thread cutting.
I
!ÿ

: ~Wvwwvwvs
i wwvwws

pÿ-r-AAAAAAAAAA-l —
vwwww-J
I
f
—
I
1
£
(D Queuing at the start and end of the thread cuttingcycle.

1
•Queuing

I*

5-177

!•:
 5. PROGRAMMING

s ® Precautions for the thread cutting command (G33), thread cutting cycle (G78), and complex
thread cuttingcycle (G76) are applicable to this thread cutting cycle, too. ;

<D Since G76.1 is Intended for a thread catting at two locations, other associated commands can be I
I
coded independently for each Line, thatis they may not be the same.
1
S-9-3-4 Notes upon double thread screw start position
Multiple thread screw must be cut under the same conditions from the beginning to the end. When •3
it
cutting the first thread with the superimpose on, and the second thread with superimpose off, or in the
opposite case, it is still not sufficient to shift the cut of the secondthread for the lead/2.
I
<Program example> '
|
;
$1 $2
SI =800

:
I r* G720 Superimpose on G720W1
Super-
if im
oT |
G0X17.0Z25.0T7 GOX17.OZ-2.5T8
I2L99
1
y
L~ G76.1 X13.06 Z41.9 RO R970Q180 F3.6-
. threadScutt!ngne°US —
.......
*•* G76.1 X6.7 Z12.8 RO P600 Q150 F125 1
Super¬
G730 Cancel superimpose <5730 W1
fl" GO X17.0 Z25.3
impose
G76 X13.06Z41.9 RO P970 Q180 £30 Second thread cutting
GO X17.0 Z43.0
! ||
<Follow delay of thread cutting>
E = N x P x (Ts + Tp) / 60 / 1000
E : Follow delay (mm)
<Follow delay of the first thread> Superimpose ON
E1 =800 x 3 x (60 + 30)/ 60/ 1000 = 3.6mm I
I
N: Spindle speed (r.p.m.) <Follow delay of the second thread> Superimpose OFF
P : Threadlead (mm) E2 = 800 x 3 x (30 + 30)/ 60/ 1000 = 2.4mm
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration
ij? time constant (msec) The above calculationis required.
Tp: Position loop time constant (msec) Multiple thread cutting must be done according to the
following two ways.
1. Cut the second thread with the superimpose on.
:| 2. Command the start point of the second thread
cuttingconsidering the difference of the si
acceleration / deceleration time constant.
I (Shift amount of the second thread cutting
1 —
=Thread lead/2 Follow delay)
:
[Ex] 3/2 -(3.6 -2.4)= 0.3mm

I
5-178
I
4' 5. PROGRAMMING
£

1
II 5-9-4 Long Workpiece Machining (Option) U421B, U422B
Headstock movement
Workpiece movement
|!
ZO
Spindle advance
Spindle retract
@
IZ300.0 ZO
i
®
<2>
S' '
i
ZO Z300.0
®
© Z600-0 ZO
i Z300.0
© _;
1
I ©
Z600.0
®\
iZ70(k0
®\
XO
Z600.0 © - J;
Z700.0
© ®© ®© ®
© Q Cut-off )
Z600.0
©

Mote 1) © should be at the same location with@.

2) Code the headstock maximum move distance in the machining data “Machining length”. The
!
maximum move distance depends on models. In the above example, #(8X310.0) should be set
to allow for some margin.
I Move distance by model
Program
i'v E16 :165mm
onnnn
E20 : 205mm G50Z0 ... <3>®
E25 : 255mm
E32 : 325mm
GOO Z300.OT0O ®®

*
1
|
( Rechuck )
G5QZ300.0 © T 1st rechuck

GOO Z600.0 TOO ®® 5

f Rechuck) 2nd rechuck
G50Z600.0 ©

I
G00Z700.0TDO ... €>©
ih

:
( Cut-off 3
GOO Z600.0 TOO ... ©©
. ( End )
%
ms
At the end of the program, the spindle must be returned to the position where
the machine starts from (the position having the same machine coordinate).

5-179
1

:
|
 :

ij

;;
I

I
?!
5:
5. PROGRAMMING
I
1
5-9-4-1 Remaining Workpiece in A Long Workpiece Machining
Calculation of a remaining workpiece is important in a long workpiece machining to avoid an
unexpected trouble.
3
If workpiece goes short during the long workpiece machining, the spindle might jumps off the
workpiece resulting in a tool damage or interference. Calculate a remaining workpiece according to the

i following formula.

Formula: (Workpiece length - Remaining workpiece length) -*•(Product length + Cut-off tool width)
>*«« i

{Example 1]
Workpiece length 2.5m(2500mm)
Product length : 450mm
Cut-off tool width : 3.0mm
Remaining workpiece length : 200mm (Usually the shortest of remaining workpiece lenghthis
about 200 mm.)
:

(2500— 200) -5- (450+ 3) 5 (Number of complete products)

* 5.08
I 0.08 X (Product length + Cut-off tool width)
= 0.08X(450 +3) 4= 36mm (Remaining workpiece)
I
% Note) The remainingportion determined in the calculationis either cut off in an end short-cut
l
1 machining or disposed as a surplus. A bar feeder can have a trouble in the cuttingif the
I remaining workpiece is too long. (Cutting capability of a bar feeder varies according to the
I model).

I
1
{Example 2]
Workpiece length : 2.5m(250Omm)

; Product length : 500mm

Cut-off tool width : 3.0mm

$ Remaining workpiece length : In case of 200 mm (2500- 200) -*•(500 +3) 4.57
1
; 4 (Number of complete products) 288mm (Remainingworkpiece)
-
Remaining workpiece length : In case of 300 mm(2500 300) -5- (500 + 3) 4.37
1 4 (Number of complete products) 188mm (Remaining workpiece)
When the remaining workpiece is 300 mm
Cut off about 190 mm from the workpiece in a short-cut machining or use a workpiece 200 to
300 mm shorter than the current one.

5-180
 €
5. PROGRAMMING
%
1/ r
1
5-9-4-2 An Example of Long Workpiece Machining
<Machiningdrawing>
Material:Free cutting steel
Material diamete: 020
690
>5 —H 2-4> 3 .......

*il
I
Ttr
UL 11 0
in

f;

10 10
700

: <Machining drawing and tool layout>

1 Z0 1
1
1 Cut-off T10
3
Process
$1 $3
1. Front turning 1. Back spindle Front turning Til
1
2. Dcut front turning
&
1
3. Outer diameter
center drilling
2. Back spindle D
cut
010
End mill —e T13
$ 4. Outer diameter 3. Back spindle 2MX900
drilling center drilling
% Center T1 4

*£ 5. Rechuck (Twice)
6. Cut-off
4. Back spindle
outer diameter 03
:

1 drilling
Drilling T15 i

25

::r Front turning

s
T21
I

I
Note) Above is an example with reference
to E32, so modifications (and a
010
End mill e T23

reasonable care) are required to a 2MX900

;>ÿ Center T24
tool replacement position, Zi stroke,
% etc. when E16, E20, or E25 is used. 03
Drilling T25
l:
25

9
W
%
5-181
11
§
:y,:
#:
V

1
I
«
it
i!
-
W
&
m :
9
£
I
el
I
if
::
i!
i
II
If
%
I '

n
if""
"•V

5. PROGRAMMING
I?
|||
11
I

---
111
if A sample program for a long workpiece machining
i
I 00700 Program number
is i
il $1 $2 $3 i,I- i
f
G50 X-4.0 Z-0.1 G5QX16O.0 Z0 G50Z0
G730 G730W1 G730W1
M06 G99 M23 52 = 2400
GOO X21.0Z-0.6 T2100
I
G99 M03 S1 = 2400 MSS
11100
N3121(Back spindle front turning) l
N0111(Front turning) GOO X21.0Z0T31
GOO X21.0 Z0T01 G01X-1.0 F0.05
f! G01 X-1.0 F0.05 X13.6 F0.1
X13.6 F0.1 X14.0Z0.2 F0.03
f
X14.0Z0.2 F0.03 Z10.0 F0.08
Z10.0 FO.OS X19.6 F0.1
X19.6 F0.1 X21.0Z10.7 F0.03
X21.0Z10.7F0.03 M25G98M84 54=1300
M78 S180 pay attention to the lip
M05 G98 M81 S3 =1300
Si M74G28H1 T2300 indexing angle on the
I M18G50 CO back spindle
if N3223(Back spindle D cut)
T1300
'
G501 B030
N0213(D cut) G00X21.0Z5.0T32
G501 A030 G01 X-11.0 F120 11
I GOO X21.0 Z5.0 T02 X-21.0 F500 I
G01 X-11.0 F120 G00Z-0.5
X-21.0 F500 X30.0
G00Z-0.5 G500 8030
X30.0 M83 S4 = 2700
G500 A030 T2400
M80 S3 = 2700
T1400 N3324{Back spindle outer diameter center drilling)
§ G501B011
N0314(Outer diameter center drilling) M78S90 - Pay attention to
II G501 A011 G00X15.0 Z5.0T33 the indexing
f! angle on the back
GOO XI 5.0 Z5.0H90.0T03 G01X8.4F162 spindle
G01X8.4F162 GOO X15.0
1 GOO X15.0 M78S270 II
if: H180.0 G01X11.0 F500
ft G01 X11.0 F500 X4.4F162
If X4.4F162 GOO X15.0
f!
if! GOO X15.0 G500B011 II
: G500A011 T2500

I T1500

if 111
if

If
S
if;
If li
f'i at;j!|

;; 5-182
f! ill
 a
i 5. PROGRAMMING t
I
III : |
3
i
i
8
00700 Program number j|1

i- $i $2 $3
N0415(Outer diameter drilling drill) N3425(8ack spindle outer diameter drilling) i
G501 AO11 G501B011 1:
1 GOO XI 5.0 Z5.0 T04 G00Xt5.0Z5.0T34 1
$
i:
I
G01 X11.0F5Q0
X-8.0 Ft 62
G01 X11.0 F500
X-8.0F152 !
;H
G00X11.0 GOO Xt 1.0
I X-7.0
G01 X-17.0F162
X-7.0
G01 X-17.0 F162
1 GOO X15.0 GOO X15.0
; G500A011 G500 B01 t
GOO CO M78S0
1 M82 M85
I T1000 T2100
1
I;
GOO Z450.0
NOS
GOO Z300.0 TOO
I
I
m ! 3L1 I 1L1
m
i
M15
M07
G4 U0.5
— 1st rechuck i
G00Z-0.1 m
G50Z300.0
G04 U0.5 i
1
i M06
. M16
1
W' GOO Z600.0T00
§.; G04 U0.5 z%
ZL M15
1 M07 1
d G4 U0.5
I? “2nd rechuck
GOO Z300.0
G50Z600.0
I
I G04U0.5
R MQ6 ,ÿ

H M16
*'ÿ
!ÿ :

4
i
&
z
'1
z,
m
m
:
! :!

I
m 1
I;

US! 5-183
6 I

1
-
I'}ÿ
ii
i

I :
1
!: I
:l
 :

5. PROGRAMMING

S
;
00700 Program number
t-
$1 $2 $3
f
N0610(Cut-off)
M20M79
M03 S1 = 1900
G114.1 H1 D-2RDDD
.Spindle synchronous control ON I
1
Phase matching with the R shift being considered
M03 M24
G 00 X21.0 Z703.0 T06
G750 G750 G750 Z650.0
1
G98G01 2670.0 F3000 1
G04 U0.3
M77 «- Waiting for the spindle
M15 synchronous control to
!3L2 !1L2 complete
G99 G01 X-1.0 F0.03
I G730
X-4.0 F0.05
G730W1 G730W1 i.

G113
M05 M25
M07
1
GOO X-4.0 Z600.0 TOO
M56 M89 1
1
G999
N999
G999
N999
G999
N999
i
M02 M02 M02
M99 M99 M99
% % %

Note 1) There are two approaches for the spindle synchronous control. One approach is, as shown above, to
1
pick off after shiftingR and the other is to pick off by chuckingboth spindles after their indexingis V,
over.
2) If the workpiece empty is signaled during a rechuck, appropriate measures must be implemented
to stop a further machining.
[Example] GOOZ3O0.OTOO
!ÿÿÿÿ Queuing with all other Lines
M8
: I
M8
/ GDD(Mnn) An illegal code to introduce an alarm

3) Appropriate measures must be implemented in your program. That measure can be introducing
an intentional alarm as shown above to stop the machine and fix a trouble, or causing a material
replacement at the above point to end the program.
4) With E32IV ,a milling on No.2 turret is done with Y axis (KSC216).
./!

i
5-184 :!
a
i
 !«

! 5. PROGRAMMING

r!
5-9-5 Milling Interpolation <Option>
Milling interpolation is a function that allows to create a program by using linear axes (X and Z axes)
and spindle rotation axis (C axis) as the linear axes of X, Z, and Y axes.

5-9-5-1 Milling Coordinate

Milling interpolation is initiated at G12.1 (milling interpolation ON) and ends at G 13.1 (milling
interpolation OFF). X and Y axes coordinate are commanded in radius designation.This G code
command at a single block.
I Following figure shows how plus and minus signs are assigned to X and Y axes.
(g Y
X<+) X(-)
Y(-r) Y( + )
+
UO. 10) -10. 10*
V
I \
z X -e-
I
! l
.1-
X
/IQ. -10); -10. -10)

XC+) X(-)
Y(— )• Y(— )
;.
5-9-5-2 Milling Plane
When you plan an end face machining, first select X - Y plane by G17 command and then code the
coordinate values read from the workpiece end face.

For end Offset mode

face
machining (Operation)
r* — 4 -Tool centroid
Tool G40 Offset cancel
diameter r*G42 I !
G41 1 f |
G41 Right side offset y
<R>
offset Workpiece shape
;
1 G42 Left side offset

1 Circular G02 Counter clockwise

interpolation rotation t,
f
/Y
G03 Clockwise rotation
X
;;
Y 1
1

\G 0 3
n
t.*.
x ,*''G 0 2
G 4 1.
G4 2' :
1 1

.
5-185

:1

;•

’r
 :

5. PROGRAMMING

: i;

it 5-9-5-3 Program Format

| A sample for #1turret Figures in { ) apply when #2 turret is equipped with tools
I

' M05 G9& M80 S3 = Spindle stop, per minute feed, and tool spindle rotation
(M83 S4= )
Preceding M74G28H1 . C axis gear ON and zero point return
processes ..
(GOO HI 80) Note 3)
M18G50C0 ... C axis and coordinate setting

s':

N G7t1(G712) T Milling tool selection u

G50U |
W Coordinate shift to tool center. Note 1)
G00X Z T To milling start point (Pa). Note 4)
( G12.1 ... Milling ON
G17 End face machining selection
G41 GOOX Y Tool diameter offset ON and move to machining start
point (Pa) (this move can be initiated by G42, too)
Milling J GQ-J x Y F
process
Milling
i
j G40G00X Y Tool diameter offset OFF and move to milling end point (Pe)
$
G13.1 Milling interpolation cancel
G50U W Coordinate system shift cancel

: .
Note 1) Shift amount of milling spindle used for millinginterpolation.
1 Standard holder Side cutter spindle End face drilling spindle
;-r

A T*
B

E
C
s 5
%

Model Side cutter spindle End face drilling spindle A B C D

j
E16/20 JSF160 JSE110 95 80 70 0 60
E25/32 KSF160 KSE110 95 80 70 0 60

-
G50U 2(A B)Wf; for a side cutter spindle
G50U 2(A - C) Wi; for an end face drilling spindle 1
1
2) When a machining is done with tools on #2 turret, you must specify coordinate values and tool

1 3)
diameter offset in your program on the assumption that tool are also mounted to #1 turret.
Machining position of #1 turret is 180° shifted from that of #2 turret. Therefore, when a
machining is to be continued on #2 turret, a 180° rotation must be done before proceeding to a
milling. Coordinate values and tool diameter offset, however, are programmed on the
assumption that all machining is done on #1turret.
4) Xs value at the milling start position P$ is designated in radius, so it must be converted to a
diameter designation before the command is given.
Xa, Xd, and Xe values at other positions are radius designated and they can be commanded
without conversion.

I
5-186

1
 5. PROGRAMMING

'

S-9-5-4 Coordinate Calculation for Milling i

Determine appropriate milling operation points based on the following formula.

\
Machiningpoint X axis coordinate Y axis coordinate

Milling start point

Ps=(Xs, Ys) Xs>(d/2 +r+a)2/(w+r) Ys = 0

Machining start point

Pa=(Xa,Ya) Xa=w Ya>V(d/2+r+a)2— (w+r)2

Machining end point

Pd=(Xd, Yd) Xd=w Yd>V(d/2)2— w2 +b
Milling end point
Pe=(Xe, Ye) Xe>(w+r)+(Yd2/ (w+r)) Ye=0

d : Workpiece diameter (mm)

Tool r : Tool diameter (mm)
w: Machining width (mm)
Tool w ' a : Start point margin (mm) i:
;
b: End point margin (mm)
r
Pa
r
N Workpiece
Y plus
A
/
I
/
/
S d x -
i
Ps
Pe ~7 b
/
Pd Y minus

X plus X minus
1
1 Example) When d = 32mm, r = 30mm, w= 12mm, a = 2mm, b = 2mm
I Ps = (55, 0) Pa = (12, 23.3) m
Pd = (12, -12.6) Pe = (45.8,0)
ii 3

I
p Note 1) Since above calculations are done without regard to a plus or minus sign, an appropriate sign
must be assigned, based on a tool position, to the results when they are converted to
I coordinates.
I 2) Coordinate Xs at Ps must be designated in diameter because it is moved before a milling is
turned on.
Xa, Xd, and Xe at other points are radius designated and can be used without a conversion.
§

5-187

I
I

1
5. PROGRAMMING

5-9-5-S Precautions for Your Programming I

Pay attention to the followingpoints in creating a program for a milling operation. 1 V

(1) Clear X axis enough from a workpiece to a provide necessary approaching distance to it before starting
a milling operation. If an approaching distance of X axis is not enough as shown in the figure below, it
has to go near the workpiece once before moving to a commanded position, thus making an interference
between a tool and workpiece possible. IS
1
I
When a positioning is done from point A to point
B
8 as shown in the figure to the right, X axis
approaches a workpiece in its move from point A Tool movement
1
1
i K
to K and then it moves away from the workpiece
inits course from point K to B.
Thus, you must compute a milling start point \
(point A) that will not allow an interference with A \
the workpiece. Workpiece
Point A = Point P$
s
(2) Diameter of a rotary tool and diameter of a workpiece to be machined must be considered when a
m.
milling start point is determined. An inappropriate start point can cause an interference between a tool
lii
and workpiece.
I
s
Too!
If a machining start point is set at point K for a D 1
cut as shown in the figure to the right, an
interference could occur at the shaded portion I
during X axis approach.
A machining end point (point B) must be \ NB Workpiece
i
computed so that above interference can be
avoided. K
Point 8 = Point Pa
f

5-188
H:
Hi:
 S. PROGRAMMING

(3) For a two-way machining such as 2-face width machining, you must cancel the milling mode upon
1
completion of a machining on one side. Then rotate C axis 180 to continue the machining on the other
.
side. A continued machining without canceling the milling mode can cause ah interference between a
1; tool and workpiece.
e r

A
1

a
i!
D

i An example of 2-face Commands in ( ) are used when tool are mounted

width machining to #2 turret.

_......_
!
i
| M05 698 M80 S3 = Spindle stop, per minute feed, and tool spindle rotation
Preceding (M83 S4 = )
processes <
M74 G28H1 C axis gear ON and zero point return
.M18G50C0 C axis and coordinate setting

N G711(G712)
__
.....
Milling tool selection

......
650 U W .. Coordinate shift to tool center

.....
GOO X Z T ©(Point Ps)

......
C G12.1 . Milling ON
G17 Plane selection
G41 GOO X Y_ ...... ©(Point Pa) 'i
Milling
processes
G01 Y- _F . ©(Point Pd) f Milling
G40GQ0X Y ©(Point Pe) J
:

V. 613.1 .’... Milling OFF and interpolation cancel

G00X _Z ©(Point Ps)
1
C180.0 ...' Workpiece 180° rotation by C axis
( G12.1 Milling ON
G17
©(Point Pa)
Milling < G41 GOO X Y
processes G01 Y -_ ©(Point Pd) Milling
G40 G00X Y ©(Point Pe)
G13.1 Milling OFF
G00X Z
G50U- W Coordinate system shift cancel
:
Note) Machining from ® to © are carried out with the workpiece
being 180° rotated. So, your attention is required to X and Y
coordinates.
© = ©,© = © :V!
.5.
'ÿ
I
5-189
:

:•

1
!

•r*1"

S. PROGRAMMING

S-9-5-6 Milling Offset

I In a millingprogram creation, a rotary tool center is supposed to be the tool nose.
Since the milling operation utilizes the tool nose R offset (G40, <341, and G42), you should familiarize
yourself with it by reading the descriptions presented in the "Program Manual" prepared by Mitsubishi
Denki. Following describes the tool nose R offset settingprocedures.
(For how to bring up the screen, see 4-3. "ToolNose Data", 4. Operation, Operator's Manual.)

Example) When T05 is used

[TOOL DATA] OFFSET2. 1/6

#1: INC #A : ABS.
I
<X> <Z> <R> <P>
#1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
5 0.000 0.000 I J i I - 0 must be always set for the tool nose position :
I -Tool radius setting
Example) Side cutter: R30.00 when 060.0
i;
End mill: R1.5 when 03.0

An illegal coordinate system shift in a tool diameter direction will produce an unacceptable cutting
profile.
For example, an excessive coordinate shift for an end face linear interpolation (see figure below) will
result in rounding the outside, as shown by path B. Or,if the coordinate system shift is too small, inside
will be rounded as shown by path C. A rounding after linear interpolation tells that the coordinate
system shift is incorrect andneeds a modification.
Path B

4,
PathC

f
b.

c
/I
;

Programmed path
\
I
Offset of finishing dimensions are done by modifying <R> in the tool data.
If finishing dimensions are larger than the requirement, reduce the error amount in the tool data. 1
If finishing dimensions are larger than the requirement, reduce the error amount in the tool data. I
If finishing dimensions are smaller, increase the error amount in the tool data. I

5-190
 s:

& It '
5. PROGRAMMING
i!
) °l
II
,§ hi
I I
5-9-S-7 A Sample Program
w
s Example 1) Dcut JSF160
Side cutter 06O.O t4.0
VST
a 5
V;. M05 G98 M8Q S3 = 1050 4+h* SA
;::;j M74G28H1 $
o
M18G5QC0 ft
1*
J

M
N312G711
E= 3
Cx_

T1200
G50 U30.0 W-5.0
A fV
GOO X 100.0 Z3.0T03 Ps Milling start point
lO if;
G12.1 £ ik K
V
G17

.......
3
G41 G00X2.0Y24.0 . Pa Machining start point
G01 Y-9.8F80 Pd Machining end point i
1
G40 GOO X36.0 Y0 ... pe Milling end point
G13.1
G50 U-30.0W5.0
Ps : Xs > (16/2 + 30 + 2)2/ (30 + 2) = 50.0
s;
M20 M82 Since Xs is designated in diameter
M03S1 =3000 G99 50. x 2= 100.
1 Pa : Xa = 2 (From above figure) ||
Ya > V(16/2 + 30 + 2)2 -(2 + 30)2 =24
Pd : Xd = 2
Yd > V(16/2)2 -22 + 2 = 9.74 4= 9.8
Pe:Xe >(2 + 30) + {9.82/(2 + 30)} = 35.00
\
Note) A computed Xs at the milling start point li
Ps must be converted to a diameter
designation.

(TOOL DATA] OFFSET2. 1/6

f?:
#1: INC #A : ASS
.1; <X> <Z> <R> <P>
#1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 li

4 0.000 0.000 0.000 \ 0

5 0.000 0.000 0.000 \ 0
!

Tool diameter offset setting

1
f;
'

5-191
11
\
1
I
i
§"

1!

I
!:
1
 :

«
'

!
ijj

4.
1
;

f
4 5. PROGRAMMING

Example 2) JSF160 i.

Side cutter 06O.O t4.0

a
M05 G98 M80 S3 = 1050 3
<
M74G28H1
M18G50C0 11

N0312G711
T1200
s
EF •v

G50 U30.0 W-5.0

GOO X100.0 Z3.0T03 Ps Milling start point Y
G12.1 :: t:
Tool movement ' '
G17
G41 GOO X2.0 Y24.0 Pa Machining start point m
G01 X2.0 Y-4.9 F80 CD (See Example 1) R0.1
m
7
© V:
G02X1.9 Y-5.0 R0.1 F880 ©
G01X-1.9 F80
G02 X-2.0 Y-4.9 RO.1 F480 ©
®K A
m
i G01 Y4.9 F80 © ''
G02X-1.9 Y5.0 RO.1 F880 ©
G01 X1.9 F80 <Z>. x -*ÿ

G02 X2.0Y4.9R0.1 F480 ©

G42 G01 X2.0Y9.0 ••Pd Machining end point
G40 GOO X35.0 YO ..... Pe Milling end point
7 A®
•
G13.1
G50 U-30.0 W5.0 © ©ÿ
M20 M82 R0.1
M03 S1 = 3000 G99
t •**

[TOOL DATA] OFFSET2. 1/6

I #1: INC #A : ABS
<X> <Z> <R> <P>
#1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
Sgjft
r7:: 0.000 0 000 3C-OCO s 0
4 0.000 0.000 0.0001 0
5 0.000 0.000 0.000 \ 0
i

Tool diameter offset setting

Note) An excessive R in the tool nose R offset introduces wasteful actions and machining time
a in corner cutting. Provide a small rounding to corners to reduce machining time and
v;
obtain a better finish. (See following page).
it

5-192
 •i

5. PROGRAMMING

•When right angle is commanded !

I .

I
I
1
•i
1 ter

I
1
Ji:
%

Wasteful cutter actions are due to the cutter move, that is it has to move away
once from workpiece before making an approach for the machining.

•When R is provided to a corner

Cutter movement

I
co

8 Fa\
i Fb

6
:
30

To eliminate wasteful actions due to commanding the right angle, the cutter is moved in a circle at
corners as shown in above figure.
For a circular motion, a cutter move at its center is
coded feedrate in a a program. Thus commanded
feedrate can deviate from an actual rate at a di Cutter diameter ti Cutter radius
machining position. Recheck the feedrate commanded
3 in your program. d2 Material diameter r2 Material radius
S •
For a circle circumscribed to a cutter outer diameter d3 Machining diameter r 3 Machining radius
Programmed feedrates at Fa and Fb is computed with j j? Eccentricity
I the machining feedrate being set at F2 = 80 mm/min. : pi Programmed feedrate
(3+30)
Fa = 80 x
3
-=880 F2 Machining feedrate
(6 + 30) Determine a feedrate of a machining diameter as
Fb = 80 x -=480
6 follows
Note) A larger cutter tends to cut part of a subsequent! (dÿ + di) (rÿ + ri)
F, = F2 x = F2X
machining face during its circular move. Avoiding this d.3 ;t2
requires reduction of the above feedrate in accordance
with the machining allowance.

i
5-193

i I:
1
I
=:

;.i S. PROGRAMMING
I
ai

m
:0
I
Example 3) JSF160
Side cutter 06O.O t4.0
8

•>
M05G98 M80S3 = 1050
: k~Z_
M74 G28H1
L -
u +
m
M18G50 CO
s s
''
N0212G711
T1200 (t.O in front of material)
G50 U30.0 W-5.0 On contact with material)
GOOX80.1 23.0 T02 Ps Milling start point
G12.1

......
G17
G41 600X8.0Y8.8 Pa
; i,
G01 YO F300
1 G02 X8.0 YO 1-6.5 F450 Mote) x -*ÿ

G01 Y-2.0 F100Q

G40G00 X40.1 YO Pe
G13.1
G50 U-30.Q W5.0
M20 M82
MQ3S1 = 3000 G99
[TOOL DATA] OFFSET2. 1/6
#1: SMC #A : ABS
<X> <Z> <R> <P>
< #1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
1
1
3 0.000 0.000 0.000 \ 0
4 0.000 0.000 0.000 \ 0
5 0.000 0.000 0.000 \ 0
Tool diameter offset setting
Ps : Xs > (16/2 + 30.0 + 1)2/ (8 + 30.0} 4= 40.03
:)
Since Xs is designated in diameter
I
40.03 x2 #80.1
I
1 Pa : Xa = W = 8
Ya > V{16/2 + 30.0+ 1)2 -(8 + 30.0)2 = 8.77- = 8.8
rs
n Pe : Xe > (8 + 30.0) + 8.82/(8 + 30.0) = 40.037-
The machining feedrate being set at F2 = 80mm/min.
13 + 60
Fi = 80 x - = 450

Note) True circle command. You will have a true circle if you specify a center with I.J (in the G17 Iffi.
mode) in a circular interpolation where the start point is identical with the end point. (See the
’“Program Manual” by Mitsubishi for details).
1 1
i

5-194
 5. PROGRAMMING

Iy
I
i
Example 4) JSE110
End mil! 2 blades s3.0 *
II
i
:
: 31
i; M05 G98 M80 S3 = 2700 5 ,
M74G28H1
M18G50C0
6
N414G711T1400
G50 U50.0 W-5.0 - 4 16.0
GOOX21.OZ2.OT04 Ps Milling start point (
G12J R1.5
r* k
G17
—E r* ro (O 1
G42 GOO X10.5 Y-1.5 Pa Machining start point Vj. I!
G01 X3.0 F200 CD
L
- I
(D
J|
Y-3.0
X-3.0 © 1
Y3.0 2 !
6
X3.0 ©
i
I
Y1.5 © Tool nose R offset amount should be considered, rather than
X10.5F500 specifying Y0 I
£ G4OGOOX1O.5Y0 Y
Y0 is acceptable since the tool 1
•: G13.1 nose R offset has been canceled o
l
G50 U-50.0 W5.0 i
M20M82 ©\ V

MQ3S1 = 3000 G93 I

X I
I
l
©yK ©/ y

: Ps : Xs > (8 + 1.5 + 1)2 e- (9 + 1.5) = 10.5 f

Pa : Xa (See figure to the right)
Ya would be 0 if the figure to the right is referenced, but \
iII
Y-1.5 is specified here because the tool nose R offset is j 1
turned on.
Pa
1
4 i;
I
[TOOL DATA] OFFSET2. 1/6
#1: INC #A : ABS
<X> <Z> <R> <P>
9 W
1
I
ft
l
#1
2
3
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0
0
0
10.5 Xa
s
5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
1
Tool diameter offset setting

I
I
5-195
lif

§;

;
; 1
Si
I
I
I
i
ii
s
I
#
I
i
t
II
V: I

5. PROGRAMMING
;
f
1 i
if ;

Example 5) JSE110
End mill 2 blades 03.0

t
lit:
i

M05 G98 M80 S3 = 2700

4> 16.0 f I
f: M74G28H1 r•
it M18G50C0
! ?
a
i

?
Si N0214G711 i
m
T
T1400
G50 U50.0 W-5.0 2 5
GOO X20.0 2-1.0 T02 Ps Milling start point
G12.1
G17
it G42G00X2.5Y2.5 . ©
G01 Z2.0F125 1) 3
G02 Y-2.5 R2.5 FI 60 ©
G01 X-0.5
G02 Y2.5 R2.5
G01 X1.5 ©
2-1.0 F1000
G40
2) MS§
G13.1
G50 U-50.0 WS.O
if
M20 M82
M03S1=3000G99
:
s
End mill
s
i
i

i
•>
: ITOOL DATA] OFFSET2. 1/6 1) Infeed up to 22.0
#1: INC #A : ABS 2) Retum to 2-1.0 i
<X> <Z> <R> <P> Si
I
I! ;
#1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 A circle inscribed to the cutter inner diameter
d-i Cutter diameter rÿ Cutter radius

1
3
4
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000 \ 0
0 \ d3 Machining diameter r3 Machining radius
V

5 0.000
0.000 0.000 0 \Fi Programmed feedrate
Tool diameter offset setting } *2 Machining feedrate
til: Machining diameter feedrate (F2) is set
Determine a feedrate of a machining diameter as
follows
at 100 mm/min
f (d3 + d,) (r3 + n)
= F2X FI = F2 x .

m d3 r3 1
2.5+ 1.5
; t F1 = 100 x 2.5
= 160
I
lit
5-196
;
1
:
 i
5. PROGRAMMING

5-9-5_8 List of alarms |

:
(The characters in Gothic are displayed on the screen as the alarm message.) ;

1 Program error occurs if mistake is included in the machining program or when the program does not
match the NC specifications.

m The following are list of new errors. 1

! ;
I Description Action
Error No.

P480 No milling specification Check the specifications.

Milling command (G12.1, G13.1)
was given when there is no
specification for the milling
function.
P481 Illegal G code (milling) Delete the illegal G code.
G code that cannot be
commanded under the milling
mode was commanded.

P482 Illegal axis command (milling) Delete the command against the
Command was given to the rotary axis.

I rotary axis under the milling

i mode.

P484 Return not completed (milling)

Perform manual or automatic
M reference point return.
/
P485 Illegal modal (milling) ® Give the cancelcommand (G40,
£ « It was during cutter radius G97, G80) before commanding
S' offset, constant surface speed G12.1.
1 control, or in the drilling ® Give the T command before
cycle when entered in the commanding G12.1. :
milling mode.
® T command was given in the
v
milling mode.

s
1V 1
I I

I 5-197

1
 5. PROGRAMMING

f;
5-9-6 Spindle Synchronization < Option >
It synchronizes speeds of one spindle with that of another spindle to control speeds and phase of the
synchronized spindle.
This function is used when it is required to match speeds of both spindles. Such function would be
needed, for instance, when rechucking a workpiece by the back spindle replacing the spindle currently
chucking it, or when changing speeds of a spindle while the spindle and back spindle are chucking the I
same workpiece.
It alsomakes rechucking of a polygonal workpiece possible by matching a phase of the both spindles.

5-9-6-1 Command Format

v
(1) Spindle synchronization cancel G113;
:V|

(2) Spindle synchronization I ON __ 1

G114.1 H D R_A_j

Command range
Address Meaning of address
(Unit)
Remarks
7V

H Reference spindle selection 1. Spindle Normally 1. Spindle will be selected as

D Selection of the synchronized 1. Spindle
spindle
R Phase shift specification to
the synchronized spindle
A Spindle synchronous speed
constant setting
2. Back spindle the reference spindle.
Rotation directions of the synchronized
2. Back spindle spindle with regard to the reference
spindle is decided by signs. %;
0~359.999(deg) • Commanded shift amount is effective
to the spindle in clockwise rotation.
® Phase matchingis not operative I
when R command is not given.
0.001~9.999(sec)

!
f

Note 1) .Emergency stop cancels the spindle synchronous control mode.

2) A speed clamp during the spindle synchronization conforms to a lower clamp value of the £
spindle andback spindle.
3) A spindle andback spindle indexing is disabled in the spindle synchronous control mode. The
i
spindle synchronous mode must be canceled prior to an angleindexing.
4) A numeral outside the command range introduces a program error. (P35 command value
over).
5) A program error occurs if H and D is not commanded. (P33 format error).
6) Speeds and rotation direction of the spindle and back spindle during the spindle
synchronization conform to that specified to the reference spindle. Rotation direction of the
1
synchronized spindle, however, can be reversed from the reference spindle rotation by coding
such in your program.
7) The reference spindle's speeds and rotation direction can be changed during the spindle a
synchronization. And, a constant surface control on the reference spindle is also available. A
constant surface control on the synchronized spindle is not operative.

5-198
m
 '"
i !

5. PROGRAMMING

8) When a trouble such as workpiece flaws or phase shift is detected, give M75 or M123 command
-
along with M15. M124 is given at the end of a cut-off machining (such as 601X 4.0F0.03).
—
M75; Back spindle torque limit L enable (1/2 ofH). 25% of the rated torque.
M123; Back spindle torque limit H enable (Parameter setting). = 50% of the rated torque.
Ml 24; Back spindle torque limit cancel.
9) When a trouble such as flaws on a workpiece is caused by an insufficient spindle
acceleration/deceleration time, make it longer by coding A command in your program. 1:
1
I 5-9-S-2 Program Sample
"V

£ [Example 1] For chucking the same workpiece with both the spindle andback spindle while they are
rotatingin the spindle synchronous mode.
a A pick-off of a special shape workpiece becomes available by adjusting the Rxxx shift.

$1 $3
)

i i
M03S1 = 2000 : Spindle forward rotation M25 Back spindle stop
TxxOO • Cut-off tool selection
M03M24 : Speed command input Note!)

1Spindle synchronous control

G114.1HID-2Rxxxi
mode ON
1 : Rxxx shift input

G00X__Z__T : Cut-off positioning

G750 I Superimpose ON G750 Superimpose ON(Z3/Z-|)

G98G01Z _
F Move to chucking position
I G04U0.5 Dwell
M77 Waits for spindle
synchronization to complete Note2)

MIS Back spindle close

S' »3Lxx Queuing !1Lxx Queuing
ii; G01X-4.0F0.03 Cut-off
G710(G730) G710W1(G730W1) | Back spindle retract
G113 Spindle synchronous control
mode OFF
M05M25 Spindle and back spindle
I stop
£
1 Notel) Rotation will not be initiated before the spindle and back spindle speed command
input is finished.
Note2) M77 must be always entered 1block before the back spindle close. 1
K t

"i;
o ,;w

5-199 !
;
1
 5. PROGRAMMING 1
1
[Example 2] Entering the spindle synchronous control mode continued from the spindle and back .

: spindle indexing with theboth spindles chucking the same workpiece. '

'.l. A pick-off of a special shape workpiece is available by shifting C axis after its indexing.

$1 $3
:
i i
M05 Spindle stop M25 Back spindle stop
M74G28H1M18 C axis indexing M78S0 Back spindle indexing
GOOHxxx Angle shift command at

GOOX __
Z T
picR-off
Cut-off positioning I,
G750 Superimpose ON G750
_ Superimpose ON(Z3/Zt)
;

G98G01Z F Move to chucking position

G04U0.5 Dwell :

M15 Back spindle chuck dose

!3Lxx Queuing !1lxx Queuing
'V
M20M79 Spindle and back spindle
indexing reset i
Spindle synchronous control
G114.1H1D-2 mode ON 1
V
M03M24 Speed command for both
spindles ON
M03S1 =
M77
G01X-4.0F0.03 Cut-off n
II
Note) Enter speed commands (M03, M24) before the synchronous control.

5-200
 || '
5. PROGRAMMING
ij
$

S-9-6-3 Selective Use of Spindle Synchronous Control

£ C axis shift Rxxx shift Caxis or Rxxx shift

1 + spindle
synchronous
+ spindle
synchronous
+ spindle synchronous
control + index plate
I control control
mechanical phase matching

I Mere spindle Mere spindle

1 Pick-off of only round workpiece synchronous synchronous Not required
control can do control can do
Pick-offof only a specially shaped o
" workpiece
o Not required
1
Machining a round workpiece into
a special shape workpiece, andits o o Not required
pick-off
Phase matching for front andback
machining on a round workpiece
O O Not required

Phase matching for front and back I?

V
machining on a special shape X x O
workpiece K
Machining a round workpiece to a
special shape workpiece and
matches the phase for its front and
x X o
back machining

:
:

, S-9-6-4 How to Adjust R (Phase Shift) I

I
:ÿ
(1) Open front andback chuck to remove workpiece. :
(2) Run the followingprogram in the MDI continuous execution only.
G114.1H1D-2Rxxx
M03M24S1 = 1000 i
S1 = 0 (Stops while maintaining R shift)
I G113
(3) Enter a special shape workpiece, check the phase shift, and then remove the workpiece.
I
(4) Press the spindle stop and back spindle stop buttons.
(5) Input R (phase shift) and repeat (2) through (5).

Iv:
Note 1) Adjust R value so that the workpiecephase matches that of the chuck. If the adjustment is
neglected, the workpiece will not be able to enter into the chuck causing a trouble.
1 2) Re-adjust R value after you have done a belt replacement or adjustment.
3) Higher speed at chuckingproduces bigger variations in synchronization.
.
4) In the phase matching under the spindle synchronization, the phase control is accomplished
based on the motor zero point of both spindles. However, since the machine zero point are not
identicalbetween the front andback spindles, R value of the spindle synchronization
1 command used for the phase shift offset varies depending on the machines.
When R command for the phase matching is given in the absolute position spindle
£ synchronous control, program compatibility will be lost and thus you must set different R
1 value for each machine.
!

&

I 5-201

1*
*ÿ

I
I
a:•

s"I
7
 :V

5. PROGRAMMING

5-9-7 Hob Machining

This function offers spur and helical gears machining by synchronizing C axis speeds with a rotary tool
speeds andthus controlling C axis speeds.
If And,it is possible to move Z axis during the synchronous control, too.

5-9-7-1 Command Format if,

(1) Spindle synchronization cancel 6113;

(2) Spindle synchronization1(Hob machining mode) ON

For spur gear G114.3H DEL

For helical gear _ _ __

G114.3 H D E_L P Q_j l

Address Meaning of address Command range Remarks

(Unit)

H Hob axis selection 1—4

i
4 : No.2 turret tool as
spindle i
D Workpiece axis selection 1to 5 or -1 to -5 Signs on D specifies therotation I
5 : C axis direction of C axis with regard to a rotary I
tool.
I
E Hob axis speed ratio 1-10 Speed ratio of1is assumed whenit is not
1
specification
(Number of hob threads)
specified.
S
.i
L Gear helix angle 1-999 Speed ratio of1is assumed whenit is not
(Number of hob teeth) specified.
P Gear helix angle -89000- +89000 Spur gear is assumed when P command
(-89— + 89deg) is not given or P0 is commanded.
Minimum 1
command unit
O.OOldeg
Decimal point can M-',

be placed
I
Q Module command 100-25000 When machining a spur gear, Q
(0.1— 25mm) command will be neglected if P command is
Minimum is not given or P0 is specified. I
command unit
0.001mm

!'ÿ

5-202
 5. PROGRAMMING

S-9-7-2 Program Sample

\l
020
M05M85 Brass
S4=000 Module :m=1.0
M74G28H1 + 020.0
i;
M18G98
} C axis zero
No. of teeth
Spur gear
: 18 J/
T2xxx
point return
10.0
1

NxxxxG712
G501B161
G114.3H4D-5E1L18 Hob machining mode ON
M83S4= 1800 .... Hob cutter rotates, and C axis rotates at the same time
GOOX15.6Z-9.3Txx
G01Z11.0F60 !H!ob machining
X22.0F500
GQ0Z-9.3
X15.6
C(r.p.m.)
r
' -
No. of hob teeth
G01Z11.0F300 ... Zero cut :
X22.0F500 p_ Speed of rotary tool x Per rotation feed
No. of hobteeth (Refer to the table)
G113
G500B161 F=_I800 x 0.6 = 60
T2xxx 18
M20M85

Precautions for your programming

1) An axis address (X, Z, C, U, or W) command given in the same block as G114.3 is ignored.
Example) G114.3— —X ; _
ignored.
2) Modal update is done for a modalcommand given in the same block as G114.3.
Example) G114.3 G01 ;
of group 01is updated to G01.

.....
!

3) An auxiliary command (M, S, or T) given in the same block as Gl14.3 is executed upon
switching to the hob machining mode.
Example) G114.3-- —
M03 ;
is executed as G114.3 is executed.
4) A group 00 G code in the same block as G114.3 gives the precedence to other Geodes specified
later in the same block.
Example) G114.3 G4 •P30. -ÿ
;
G4 P30. is executed.
See the Programming Manual prepared by Mitsubishi for G code groups.
1

5-203

\
;

*
3
a
I
1

1
;;

m
If a
I 1

5. PROGRAMMING

'

5-9-7-B Gear Formula &

: 0D: Gear outer diameter(mm) 0D — (Z+2)m Iu

j Z :No. of teeth (No. of threads)
: m :Module
Z
m
-2 i
a
•h :Tooth height 0D
m “ (Z+2)
h = 2m+0.2

In an actual machining, an approaching distance must be considered, too. 1

0d :Hob cutter diameter 032
H 0d a : Safety distance 1.5mm
v —
€ = (d h)h= VHh
i'
L—t+a
h

a € a
1 L.

H Tables for Cutting Conditions (For reference) 1

)& |
Ranking Workpiece (Material) Feedrate Cutting speed
Module (mm/rev) (mm/min)
I 0.5 0.4 to 1.0 150 to 300
1
Non-ferrous metal
(Brass, aluminum) 1.0 0.5 to 1.0 150 to 300

Free cutting steel 0.5 0.5 to 0.75 80 to 150

2
(SUM) 1.0 0.5 to 1.25 60 to 120
i
i

I
3
Steel general
(SUS303)
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5 to 0.75
0.5 to 1.25
0.5 to 0.75
50 to 90
40 to 80
30 to 60
1
Hard cutting steel |
1 4
(SUS304)
1
1.0 0.5 to 1.25 25 to 50

I
1 :
5-204 s
 5. PROGRAMMING
I
S-9-7-4 Speeds, Rotation Direction, and Restrictions
(1) Speed of C axis is determined by the number of hob threads and gear teeth specified by G114.3

E Sw : Speed of C axis (rpm) :

Sw=Sh* L
z —— Sh :Speed of rotary tool |
I E : No. of hob threads j s

1 L : No. of gear teeth j :

(2) Signs on D determine the C axis rotation direction.

;
When D carries "+" sign, C axis rotates the same direction as a rotary tool. If the sign is it will
rotate in the reverse direction.
(3) A field hold or override is not applicable to the cutting feed block in the spindle synchronization HI
1
i (hob machining) mode. This measure is taken because a speed change in the cutting feed block
under that mode makes a gear cutting unpredictable.
(4) An automatic move can not be commanded to C axis in the spindle synchronization HI (hob
machining) mode.
(5) Since the C axis speed is determined by the speed of a rotary tool, the rotary tool speed must not be
set beyond the C axis cutting clamp value.
(6) C axis can be used for the spindle synchronization M (hob machining) even though its zero point
return is not completed.
(7) When C axis is used for the spindle synchronization II (hob machining), its coordinate after the
spindle synchronization cancel becomes unpredictable. Therefore, if C axis is to be continuously
used after the cancellation, the dog type zero point return and coordinate system setting must be
repeated.
I (8) The spindle synchronous control HI (hob machining) mode can not be specified when the spindle
I
synchronous control I (speed synchronization) mode or spindle synchronous controlI (polygon
Vv"1,':
machining) mode has already been set.
Only one of the three spindle synchronous control commands can be given at a time.
(9) Phase matching is not available in the spindle synchronization HI (hob machining).
(10) A speed change must not be done in the mid of the operation.
(11) Speeds of No.2 tool spindle must always be specified before entering the spindle synchronous
i
control HI (hob machining) mode.
(12) Speeds of No.2 tool spindle must always be specified before entering the spindle synchronous
control HI (hob machining) mode.
|Limit speed 2000 r.p.m maximum (except E32IV )
j 3700 r.p.m.maximum (E32IV ) V : Cutting speed(mm/min)
|| C axis 100 r.p.m..m maximum D : Cutter diameter (032mm)
Ni :Hob speed (r.p.m.)
1000V Z :No. of teeth (No. of thread)
Caxis 100 r.p.m Nj—

C axis speed N2 ---gr— < 100r.p.m.(Maximum rapid feedrate)

$ t

I
II
5-205

8
1

:!

I
 j

5. PROGRAMMING

5-9-8 Y Axis Machining

Y axis is the axis along which No.2 turret moves up and down (vertical move). A machining is done by

M; No.2 turret tools along the axes formed by Y2 in combination with X2, Zjs Z2, Z3, or C axis.

5-9-8-1 Machining Form and Spindle

End face slitting and 2-face width machining KSS760 (1/3 deceleration)
Dcut KSC216 (1/3 deceleration)
Outer diameter eccentric drilling KSS110

Dcut
/
Y I
End face slitting

W/ \

z- X
}

X
\
Outer diameter eccentric drilling
2-face width machining

S-9-8-2 Stroke
+Y I
Zero point
Y22.0

////
332
/ No.2 turret Fixed point
dD V//, +X -- U
No.2
V turret

in
CD Standard tool mounting length
"3- Y - 22.0
— — Return position -Y w.
: §

co
CM
— Stroke limit

I
!
i

: 5-206 m
;|
V
vi
5. PROGRAMMING

t:
f: S-9-8-3 Y Axis Machining Mode
Program flow
$
V

I T2xxxx
Nl i G712
G2t0 Y axis machining mode ON (Clutchoft)
4 GSOUl IWl i
G98G00X cziz CZ3 YCZD CZH
t GO!
y- (ÿY axis machinirjgÿ)
GOOX i i
Turret must be kept away from the workpiece outer diameter.
GSOUl IWl I
...
G211 Y axis machining mode OFF. (Turret moves to Y = 0 position, then
Tcm clutch turns on)
Motet) The Y axis machiningmode command must be given to a single Line only. The command
can not be given to two or more Lines at one time, and a commandedLine can not be ;
switched.
2) The Y axis machining mode ON command (G210) turns Y axis clutch off. If G2 11 is given,
the turret automatically moves to Y = 0 position and turns Y axis clutch on.
3) Per rotation feed command or per minute feed command are not affected by these G
commands andmaintain their Line by Line modal.
4) After the command is given, you can arrange the program same as the machining pattern
v: program andcode the Y axis command there.
5) This G is code effective until G211 is given.
6) If T I |is specified to No.2 turret in the Y axis machining mode, it moves to Y = 0 in the
tool replacement position and then turns the clutch off again.
;

Scope of Y axis machining mode

£
Line
y Machiningpattern Geode
$1 $2 $3
Machining pattern cancel G700 X o X

y Twin turret machining G710 x x x

G711 X X X |:
1n
G712 o X X

I Two saddle machining G720 X O X 1

| '

& Back-front simultaneous machining G730 X X O

2-Line simultaneous machining G74Q X O X !

fl
Pick-off machining G750 X X X !
O : Available. s
X :Not available. Causes an alarm. h
ii
l:
f;
- 1
-- 5-207
..

:
i :

;
y
 S. PROGRAMMING
i i
S-9-8-4 Process by Process Comparison of Secondary Machining Spindles

E32IV specialized holder and

Process E321V holder Restrictions for use on E32F
machining method
Center drilling CDF401 No.2 turret inside mounting
Double sleeve hole can not be used.
Milling KSM110 When attached to No.2 turret, KSC216(l/3 deceleration)
it can reach only up to Machining is done by moving
workpiece center. Y axis.
X-6.0 is stroke limit. For No.2 turret.
Milling KSM406 Stroke limit is X-16.0 on No.2
turret.
Slitting KSS260 X-16.G is stroke limit on No.2 KSS76G(l/3 deceleration)
(1/3 deceleration) turret. End face slittingis done by
Slitting KSS675
(1/8 deceleration)
moving Y axis.
When attached to No.2 turret, For No.2 turret.
it can reach only up to
1
workpiece center.
X-6.0 is stroke limit.
Slitting When attached to No.2 turret, KSS660(l/8 deceleration)
it can reach only up to For No.l turret.
workpiece center.
X-6.0 is stroke limit.
I End face
drilling
KSE110
KSE310
When attached to No.2 turret, Special holder is not provided.
it can reach only up to E32M holder is used.
KET510 workpiece center.
X-6.0 is stroke limit.

I Outer diameter KSC110 No restriction when the Special holder is not provided.
drilling KST110 standard settingis employed. E32IE holder is used.
KSC310
KSC910
Side cutter KSF160 No restriction when the Special holder is not provided.
standard settingis employed. E32M holder isused.
Hob Option KSH123
if Spindle synchronous control
IQ is used.
Polygon Option KSP380
Spindle synchronous control
31 is used.

Above specifications apply to the back machining, except that 5° division indexing device (an

i option) is used.
When you employ above specifications, however, pay attention to the external workpiece length. It
can be a cause of an interference between the back spindle and secondary machining spindle. 8

i:
it
5-208
I
 , :

I 5. PROGRAMMING
.:‘V

p
i
!:
-i; :
S-9-8-5 Program Creation [A sample]
& L
<Machining drawing>
'
Material : Free cutting steel
Material diameter : 020
1 10 6 2-02 2 mm wide, 1.5 mm deep

1 through hole
-HI ;

i
;;
feHSl 10
!

3
::
8 18
50 ;

l
j :

<Machining drawing and tool layout > p

20
: .
!•

Cut-off

hi
T10
a if
n
I ;
©T23
II 4- Front turning Tn

©T22 No. of teeth 90 H

H4-
!
Slitting T20 i)
i
4> 60

©T21
(DT20 i
Vr,
End mill X T21
010 XX / '

I
1
IX
/\
I Center
drill
1M
s T22 ;

I
;

Drill T23 !
: 02 -- I
(Du i 25
!©T10

5-209

i i !•

i
i

I
i
lt
 ;

;ÿ
!

5. PROGRAMMING

$1

G50X-4.0Z9.9
G710
G711
M06
---
Program for the Sample

O 0324 Program No.

$2

G50X160.0Z9.9
G710W1
G50Z0
G710W1
$3

G00X21.OZ-0.6 M98H1000
M03S1 = 2000G99
T1100

N0111(Front turning)
T2000
GOOX2O.0ZOT01 fi;

G01X1.0F0.05
W-'i
X15.8F0.1
X16.0Z0.1F0.03 *
i
Z8.0
X19.8F0.1
it
X21.0Z8.6F0.03 if
;i:
M05
G98M83S4 = 400
M74G28H1 Secondary machining mode ON
I M18G5QCQYQ Y axis coordinate system setting

| If
N0220G712(Slitting)
T1000
G210 Y axis machining mode ON
I G501B141
&
«
ff
§
G00X21.0Z-0.5T02
Y18.0
XO
} G00Z-0.5T02
X0Y18.0
>;i|i
Z1.5 if.
il: G01Y-9.0F36 I
8 Y-18.0F72
:ÿ»
I
L
G00Z-0.5
X21.0
1
i
G500B141
S4 = 1300
T2100 -Since Y axis machining modeis ON, clutch is turned off after tool replacement
1
,;;v
I
i
1 i

1 I
I
I
ill
I
I 1
8
5-210
m El®'
1 It
m
 5. PROGRAMMING

-----
'll
Program for the Sample

O 0324 Program No.

i;
$1 $2 $3 i)

N0321(2-face width machining at two locations)

1 G501B150
v: G00X21.0Z1.0T03
Y12.0 GOOXiO.OZ1.OY12.OT03
X10.0
i G01Y-12.0F156
G00C180.0
G01Y12.0
m
5 G00X21.0 :«
Z13.0
Y10.0
X18.0
G01Y-10.0.
} G00X18.0Z13.0Y 10.0

;
G00C0
: G01Y10.0
G00X21.O
| G500B150 If
•T;

54 = 4000
T2200

i
N0422(Outer diameter center drilling)
y G501B011
G00X21.OZ3.OT04
,,, X11.0
Y4.0
G01X6.5F2Q0
G00X11.0
Y-4.0
G01X6.5
m G00X17.0
C180.0
X11.0
w
I GO1X6.5
w G00X11.0
Y4.0
G01X6.5
G00X21.0
G500B01 1
T2300
I

m :

I®
r
\ i
:

f:
I 5-211

j I
1
I
St
Is ::

1 l
I
; I *;ii
!
;
if::
1
1
i
;

;
I !
i>

*
;

|
-flf
'i
i
t
;

1
ft |

1 m
5. PROGRAMMING

?r
1
ji

:i:
O 0324

G5Q1B011
-----
Program for the Sample

$i
Program No.

N0523(Outer diameter drilling)

GOOX21.QZ3.0TQ5
Xlt.O
$2 $3

I
I
si
'Ill

Y4.0
G01X-2.0F200 #
i
V
G00X11.0
I X-1.0 I II
«
-------
S'
ft
G01X-12.0
G00X11.0
G01X-12.0
G00X21.0
:
s
:
|
i':,
Y-4.0 G500B011 :
G01X-2.0 G211 Y axis machining mode OFF
G00X11.0 T2000 : j‘ <

---
X-1.0 M20M85 : j
M03S1 = 1600M24 I j ;
G04U0.5 : :
G114.1H1D-2 Spindle synchronization mode ON

N0610(Cut-off)
G00X21.0Z63.0T06
G750 -
-f G750-S- G7S0
: G00Z-1.0M72
I3L1 <ÿ
! G98G01Z29.0F2000
G01X19.8F0.02 • I G04U0.3
X21.0F0.2 j M77
W-0.6 j M15M73
11:
X19.8W0.6F0.02 j
X-1.0 -- j *-| I1L1
G113 Spindle synchronization mode OFF
f
% G710 - G710W1 G710W1
si G711
il G01X-4.0F0.05
?! M05
M07 j G999
: M98H1000
G00X-4.0Z9.9T00
: M999
1 M56
M02
G999 -* G999 -*ÿ M99
fj N999 j N999
Niooo
M02 M02
:: M99 M99 ! M32
% M16
%
?! M10M72
G04U1.0
M11
M33M73
;:|! M99
? %

5-212
I
** 5. PROGRAMMING
I
i
t
M
I

I
sI
V 5-10 CUTTING CONDITIONS
I
1
**
1
'

1
|
If
V I
ft:
1

a
t:

I
1
% I
i
t
I 5-213
1
l

I
8

r~
5. PROGRAMMING

. The cutting conditions given here are to be considered to be a guideline. It is necessary to find the
> optimum conditions for the workpiece material, tool shape, and toolmaterial.

1 5-10-1 Cutting speed and feedrate

The cutting feedrate is generally based on the outer diameter of the material, but when the finishing
diameter and material diameter differs largely (when there is large infeed amount), it is necessary to
set higher cutting feedrate at the outer diameter of the material.
I H Outer diameter cutting feedrate (speed hard tool)

CTable 1>

i Cutting Feedrate in diameter direction Feedrate in longitudinal

I
1 Material speed
(X) centripetal
(mm/rev)
direction (Z) anti-centripetal
(mm/rev)
(m/min)
A B c A B C
s
I Brass 130-250 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.03 0.08 0.2
jv

I Phosphor bronze 100-160 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.03 0.06 0.1

Aluminum 100-300 0.03 0.05 0.08 0.04 0.08 0.2
Free cutting steel 100-200 0.02 0.05 0.08 0.03 0.1 0.2
Carbon tool steel 80-140 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.02 0.06 0.1
v
Carbon stool steel £
(free cutting) 100-160 0.015 0.03 0.06 0.03 0.08 0.15

Carbon steel for 80-150 0.06

structure
0.01 0.02 0.04 0.02 0.1
i I".
Alloy tool steel 60-140 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.1
Stainless steel
! (free cutting) 60-120 0.01 0.015 0.03 0.02 0.08 0.2 -•

Stainless steel 40-80 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.02 0.06 0.1

The feedrate differs according to the setting of the workpiece material, as well as the infeed amount,
required surface roughness, precision, tool life.

A B C :f'i
Dimensional tolerance Within ±5M Within ±10/* ±10fx or more
Surface roughness Within 3S Within 6S 6S or more
K
Infeed (radius value) 5mm or more 2 to 5mm 2mm or less
[Note] Centripecy and eccentricity are described as follows. ;
I
/ \ r
Centripecy (Movement of the tool
facing the center.)
(Fx) \ 7 \\ T7 I

Eccentricity (Movement of the tool (Fz)

parting away from the center.) / V V N
\ / vo 1 y
:

5-214

IB
I i-'

1
H inner diameter cutting speed (super hard too?)
5. PROGRAMMING

Cutting conditions for boring depends on the rigidity of tool and tool holder. The feedrate shown below
]ÿ!

is that of 08 X 40 mm super hard tool. The diameter direction feed is recommended to be half of the
i;
longitudinal direction feed.
<Table2>

Feedrate in longitudinal 1
Cutting speed direction (Z) anti-centripetal
Materia! (m/min) (mm/rev)
A B C i
,,
Brass 80 to 120 0.025 0.04 0.07
Phosphor bronze 80 to 90 0.02 0.03 0.05
i
I

1 Aluminum 80 to 100 0.025 0.04 0.07

Free cutting steel 65 to 90 0.02 0.04 0.05
i Carbon tool steel 55 to 70 0.015 0.03 0.04
I
i
i M
Carbon stool steel {free cutting) 60 to 80 0.02 0.04 0.05
I
3;
%
Carbon steel for structure 60 to 80 0.015 0.03 0.04
I Alloy tool steel 55 to 70 0.015 0.025 0.035
i
Stainless steel
55 to 70 0.015 0.03 0.04
(free cutting)

Stainless steel 40 to 60 0.01 0.025 0.035

Infeed amount is 0.5 to 1mm.

: ;; i
1 Reaming
:ÿ
r' <Table3> h
;
mi Feedrate (mm/rev)
Cutting speed
:
Material (m/min) 01 to 02 02 to 05 ®5 to
ml I
/:
Brass 10 to 20 0.07 to 0.25 0.15 to 0.5 0.25 to 1.0 |
Phosphor bronze
Aluminum
5 to 15
10 to 25
0.03 to 0.15
0.08 to 0.25
0.1 to 0.3
0.15 to 0.5
0.3 to 0.5
0.25 to 1.0
I
Free cutting steel 7 to 15 0.06 to 0.25 0.15 to 0.5 0.25 to 1.0 V.
f
Carbon tool steel 4 to 8 0.05 to 0.15 0.1 to 0.3 0.1 to 0.5 i
Carbon steel for structure 5 to 10 0.03 to 0.15 0.05 to 0.3 0.1 to 0.5
Alloy tool steel 3 to 15 0.03 to 0.1 0.05 to 0.2 0.1 to 0.3
''/r:
Stainless steel (free cutting) 3 to 8 0.03 to 0.12 0.05 to 0.2 0.1 to 0.4 1
I
; 1
Stainless steel 3 to 5 0.02 to 0.1 0.05 to 0.2 0.1 to 0.3

1
5-215

1
II
1 ,,,
8
1
.
1
I»
1
.
I
I i
II: i
I 1.1
1
ii
I 5. PROGRAMMING

I
ii8 1
||
H Drilling speed (high-speed tool steel)

<Tabie4>
i Drilling speed (m/min) Drilling feedrate (mm/rev)
I Material
0i to 2mm 02 to 5mm 05 to 12mm 0l to 2mm 02 to 5mm 05 to 12mm
1 Brass 40 to 50 50 to 60 70 to 80 0.01 to 0.05 0.05 to 0.1 0.1 to 0.2
It
1
t
Aluminum
Free cutting steel
60 to 70 70 to 80 80 to 90 0.05 to 0.06 0.05 to 0.1 0.1 to 0.2 1
20 to 30 20 to 30 30 to 40 0.05 to 0.06 0.06 to 0.1 0.08 to 0.18
1
i Carbon tool steel 15 15 to 20 15 to 20 0.05 to 0.06 0.06 to 0.1 0.08 to 0.18 IS

1 Carbon steel for

structure
20 20 to 25 20 to 25 0.05 to 0.06 0.06 to 0.1 0.08 to 0.18 ":S
I
1 Alloy tool steel 10 to 15 10 to 15 12 to 18 0.03 to 0.05 0.04 to 0.06 0.08 to 0.12 I
1
I
$
Stainless steel
(free cutting) 10 to 20 10 to 20 15 to 20 0.03 to 0.06 0.05 to 0.08 0.1 to 0.15
IS

I Stainless steel to9 9 to 12 9 to 12 0.03 to 0.05 0.04 to 0.06 0.08 to 0.12 i

I is
: j Drilling depth and corresponding speed reduction
..
m
Sid Reduction ratio ii
IS 3 10%
Drilling depth
S :
4 20% d : Drilling diameter
1 5 30%
6to 8 35 to 40%

f
I
1

f
v
1
i
1
i
m
||
I

I
1
5-216 |l
m
 5. PROGRAMMING

:!r
5-10-2 Thread cutting count with tool
H Nonferrous materials count
< Table 5 >
ill •
mm
ii
1 F 0.5 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0
;I Thread height 0.32 0.45 0.52 0.65 0.81 0.97 1.13 1.3 1.62 1.95
11
I 1st
2nd
0.22
0.07
0.22
0.18
0.25
0.20
0.25
0.22
0.32
0.22
0.35
0.25
0.35
0.23
0.35
0.27
0.40
0.35
0.40
0.36
Thread 3rd 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.13 0.14 0.16 0.20 0.22 0.25 0.30
cutting 4th 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.25
count 5th 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.15 0.20
6th 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.12 0.15
7th 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.12
8th 0.05 0.05 0.07
9th 0.03 0.05
10th 0.03
11th 0.02 ;;

M Ferrous materials count

v
<TabIe6>
mm
P 0.5 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0
Thread height 0.32 0.45 0.52 0.65 0.81 0.97 1.13 1.3 1.62 1.95

1st 0.18 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.25 0.28 0.30 0.32 0.35
2nd 0.08 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.18 0.18 0.21 0.22 0.23
Thread 3rd 0.04 0.07 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.14 0.12 0.16 0.18 0.19
cutting 4th 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.09 0.08 0.09 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.16
count 5th 0.02 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.09 0.12 0.15
|i
6th 0.03 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.08 0.11 0.13
7th 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.11
'm: 8th 0.03 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.11
9th 0.03 0.06 0.05 0.08 0.09
SI
10th 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.07 0.08
11th 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07
1 12th 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.06
13th 0.02 0.04 0.06
14th 0.03 0.05
15th 0.02 0.05
16th 0.04
17th 0.02
i
1
5-217
11
4
i

a
I
1
m
§

m
 :

5. PROGRAMMING

j;

5-10-3 Secondary machining cutting condition tabie \

ill
H End mi!! (Super hard) 1
<Table7>

Materia! Diameter Cutting speed Infeed amount Feedrate

mm m/min mm mm/cutter
Nonferrous materials 02 20 to 30 1.0 0.02 to 0.04
Brass 03 20 to 30 3.0 0.04 to 0.06
Aluminum 04 20 to 30 3.0 0.06 to 0.07
etc. 05,06 20 to 30 4.0 0.07 to 0.08
Ferrous free cutting 02 15 to 30
materials 03 15 to 30 2.0 0.03
(free cutting steel, etc.) 04 15 to 30 2.5 0.03
05,06 20 to 40 3.0 0.03 to 0.04
Ferrous materials 02 10 to 20
Carbon tool steel
Carbon steel for 03 10 to 20 2.0 0.02
structure 04 10 to 20 2.5 0.02
etc. 05,06 15 to 30 3.0 0.02 to 0.03
A!Sony tool steel 02 5 to 15
Stainless steel 03 5 to 15 1.0 0.01
etc. 04 5 to 15 1.0 0.01
05,06 10 to 20 1.5 0.01 to 0.02

ffl Slitting cutter (90 cutters, high-speed tool steel)

i
<Table8> * indicates the mm/rev of 90 cutters.
a Thickness Cutting speed Infeed amount Feedrate
Material
mm m/min mm mm/cutter
Nonferrous materials (0.70) ||I
0.5 25 to 50 to 6.0 0.008*
Brass 1 25 to 50 to 6.0 0.006 (0.55)
Aluminum 2 25 to 50 to 6.0 0.005 (0.45)
etc. 3 25 to 50 to 6.0 0.004 (0.35)

Ferrous free cutting 0.5 18 to 30 to 4.0 0.0035 (0.32)

materials 1 18 to 30 to 4.0 0.003 (0.30)
| (free cutting steel, etc.) 2 18 to 30 to 4.0 0.003 (0.25) a
§' 3 18 to 30 to 4.0 0.002 (0.20)
Ferrous material 0.5 15 to 25 to 3.0 0.0025 (0.23)
Carbon tool steel
Carbon steel for 1 15 to 25 to 3.0 0.002 (0.18)
structure 2 15 to 25 to 3.0 0.002 (0.15)
etc. 3 15 to 25 to 3.0 0.0015 (0.13)
Allonytoot steel 0.5 10 to 15 to 2.5 0.002 (0.18)
% Stainless steel 1 10 to 15 to 2.5 0.002 (0,15)
etc. 2 10 to 15 to 2.5 0.0015 (0.13)
3 to 2.5 0.001 (0.10)

1
s
f§§
5-218
"I
I
 5. PROGRAMMING 7

'

i
5-10-4 Cutting feedrate reference table If
r
<Table9>
I Unit: r.p.m. §
9000 7000
/.! 10000 8000 6000 5000 4500 4000 3500 3000 2500
220
f 1 7 A 7 7
V\ I
210

200
f L A /
7
V
V
2000 r.p.m.
1

>
A v- /
s
n
190
/ /
/
180 7
t /
V /
170 7 7 l
Si
160
Y A ii$
150
A /
7
V 7
1500 r.pjm.
I
A /
v
140
V v\ M7 / z.7 1
I 7 c
"S 130
T1 / A A
/ .2
3 1
7
yi
120
I o>
.5
/ Z
/ O
5
ts oc
3
u
110
77 7 ;

1 100
nv
M 7 /
7
/
/
y
uZ
1000 r.p.m. |
|

1
f
90
A 7 / v.

tAV.u>1
/
80 7 fj,
/
/ z:
7
I
70
7~7 / i/ :
i 60
7 7 /7
f 50 7 /
V
/
A
500 r.p.m. I
;

%
40 %
!
/
V
7
/
1
/
300 r.p.m.
30
77
/ / /
i
20

10
z I
J
£ !
m/min .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 2425 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Materia! diameter = D (0) mm If

'f.
I

5-219

1
1
)!
ft;]
:

..
§

::
1
I
I
1
I
!

i;

Si

S
&
f

l\

'}

i,:- .
i

'

!: i i
Product code i2 i 1 :6i2 |0 iE i2 i2 -5 iB -2
E 6 14 ; 1
I
Document code TTFj— | 0 j 5 j 0 j 5 I
Product code
0i
Ei3i3 j 2 1 wi/j/l/l/l/i/i/ 17 j 4 j 0 :
is

Document code 1! E 0;5 j 0;0

g;
 !
i;

M1
i ||HK fiB -r--r
6. TOOLING

(E332 TYPE IV)

1

6-1 Code Serial M9001~ Issue 1993. 9

No. No. (W6001-) Date
 6. TOOUNG

Eÿ32 W
TOOLING SYSTEM
:
Name Specification I Mode! name
:
““““Tool holder
:
[ Turning 3
Filed type f 16Xl6X90mm] : CTF116 =TFUH6 +PBU201
Fixed type (reverse) [ 16X16X90mm) : CTF2I6 =TFU216 +PBU201
Fixed type (10 mm shift) [16X16X90mm] T CTF316 = TFUS18 +PBU202
Fixed type (25 mm shift) [ 16X 16 X90mm] ] CTF416 =TFU416 +PBU202

Fixed type [5/8X5/8X34/2*] : CTF116L =TFU116L + PBU201

Fixed type (reverse) [5/8x5/8X34/2*] : CTF216L =TFU216L + PBU2G1
Fixed type (3/8” shift) [6/8X5/8X34/2*] j CTF316L =TFU316L + PBU202
Fixed type (1" shift) [5/8X5/8X34/2*3 j CTF416L -TFU416L + PBU202
:

Fixed type [3/4X3/4X34/2*] | CTF119L =TFU119L + PBU202

Fixed type (reverse) [3/4X3/4X34/2*] CTF219L =TFU219L + PBU202
Fixed type (3/8** shift) [3/4x3/4x34/2*1 : CTF319L =TFU319L + PBU202
Fixed type (1** shift) [3/4x3/4X34/2*] \ CTF419L =TFU419L + PBU202 ft
:rn
[ Cut-off ] i I
!
Fixed type [13Xl9X90min] CTF113 =TFU113 + PBU201
Fixed type (for back machining) [13x19x90mm] CTF213 =TFU213 + PBU201
Fixed type (for back machining, 3/8" shift) [13Xl9X90mm] CTF1013 =TFU1013 + PBU202

Fixed type [1/2X3/4X34/2*1 j_ CTFT13L =TFU113L + PBU201

Fixed type (for back machining) [1/2X3/4X34/2*3 j CTF213L =TFU213L + PBU201
Fixed type (for back machining, 1/2” shift) [1/2X3/4X34/2*] : CTF1013L =TFU1013L + PBU202
i

:::Sieeve holder :

Fixed frype Sleeve 025.4 ]

.: CDF101 =DFU1G1 +PBU201
Fixed type (for two-way machining) 'Sleeve 025.4 ]
-: i
CDF201 =DFU2Q1 + PBU201 is
Fixed type (for back machining) Sleeve 025.4 1 : CDF301 =DFU301 +PBU201
Fixed type (doable sleeve) <For turret No. 1> ;[Sleeve 025.4 } i CDF401 =DFU401 +PBU201
:
1 <For turret No. 1> CDF401L =DFU401L +PBU201
Fixed type (double sleeve) * [Sleeve 025.4 3
I
$ si
Tool and sleeve holder fM mm v
: :

(for two-way machining) i

v» : ,
m
Fixed type (CTF116 -f CDF301 type) j I CPT316 =DTU31g :
Fiÿ<m«rrm3 + CDF30iim>
I I OT313 -DTU313 +ÿ PBU201
:
'.J;': "
:y '\ l
"
* . .s
I;I
" - -
.....
1
” . '

Fixed type (CTF116L+CDF301 type)

' :•
I €DT316L =DTU316L +PBU2Q1
'
S
"
SSpgMf
.:S» type) : GDT313L =DTU313L +PBU201
t ’ < Fixed WMWM
vY,-:
\ l
i:
i’ : S s
‘

i
*T7
Si/'
/ ! r
; :
~
M
':l
fm,
li illii V ;i'

:' ISllBlillsl a
i.i v'i : Sy !' il' if*
6-2
 6. TOOLING
;

8
1

Name Specification Model name

SB3ffiSEKS£“£ j\/ÿ 0|
'

Fixed type (ÿ 16 tool + right 10 tool) KTFZ216 =TFUZ216 +PBU201

Fixed type (two-way sleeve + right two-way sleeve) KPFZ201 =DFUZ201 +PBU201
Fixed type (double sleeve + right double sleeve)
<For turretNo.l > : KDFZ401 =DFUZ401 4-PBU201

1 Fixed type (ÿ 5/8" tool + right 1/2" too!) KTFZ216L =TFUZ216L +PBU201 1
Fixed type (ÿ 3/4“ tool + right 1/2" tool) KTFZ219L =TFUZ219L + PBU202 I
Fixed type (double sleeve + right single sleeve)
<For tarretNo.l > KDFZ401L =DFUZ401L +PBU201

:;:Sleeve;
[ Drill, boring tools]
Eego type chuck (010) [AR16I Q5R163 ADS11C
3 Rego type chuck (010 long) [AR16HER163 ADS21Q I
Rego type chuck (010 both-end) [AR16] [ER16] ADS310
Rego type chuck (010 short) IAR163 [ER16] ADS410

[Drill]
Drill chuck [MT1| ADS206
Morse taper [MT11 ADS112

I Morse taper [MT23 ADS212

[ Boring ]
Boring tool (04) ABS104
ABS108
5 Boring tool (08)
Boringbar (010) ABSUO
Hi;
[Tap]
Rego type chuck (M10) (ARI6][ER163 ATS112
[ Die]
Die diameter (020) M2 to M6 AUS106
Die diameter (025) M6 to M8 AUS110
Die diameter (038) M8 to M10 AUS112
'

Die diameter (03/4" ) 1/4" AUS106L

Die diameter (0l“ ) 5/16” AUSUOL
p
vv Die diameter (0l-l/2M) 25/64" AUS112L

\ [ Center ]
ft Male center (for turret No. 2) JCS101
it

1 Rotary tool 1
[ Drive unit]
ti- v".
SDU501
i SDU502
I SDU503 I
!
SDU504
SDU505
i; SDU506 i
SDU507 1
i
i 6-3 I

V.

I
i
*
1
¥
i
:V:
 <•
I!
||
i

I
1|

II
V

I 1

a I
6. TOOUMG
I]

: v
Name : Specification Model name
[ OD drilling spindle ]
Rego type chuck (short body) j [AR16] [ER16] KSC110
Rego type chuck (fang body) ;[AR16][ER16] KSC910
Rego type chuck (adjustable type) j [AR16] [ER16] KSC310 =SCU310 +SDU501
Rego type chuck Cl/3 deceleration) <For torret No.2 > •[AR25][ER25] KSC21S =SCU216 +SDU507
[ OD tapping spindle ] :
i
Reg® type chuck ;[AR11][ER11] KST110
IEnd face drilling spindle 1 i £
Rego type chuck Qosag body) j SAR16] [ER16j KSE110 =SEU11Q +SDU502 pgu
Rego type chuck (short bar) ; [AR16] [ER16] KSE310 =SEU310 +SDU504 :
[ End face tapping spindle] :
;

Rego type chuck i[ARll][ERll] KST510 =STU510 +SDU502

C Milling spindle] I
Rego type chuck :[AR16] [ER16] KSM110 =SMU110 +SDU503 i
Rego type chuck (adjustable type)
*
:[AR113[ER11J
I
KSM406 =SMU406 +SDU503
i
I
lSlitting spindle]
i/3 deceleration <For turret No.l> •[060X015.875 1 KSS260 - SSU260 +SDU503 f'1
1/3 deceleration <For turret No.1> :[063X016] KSS263 =SSU263 +SDU503
1/8 deceleration <For turret Na.l> ;[060 X015.875] KSS660 =SSU660 4-SDU503
f 1/8 deceleration <For turret No.l > [[063X016] KSS663 =SSU663 +SDU503
1/3 deceleration <For turret No.2> j [060X015.875] KSS760 =SSU760 +SDU507
1/3 deceleration <For turret No.2> •[063 X016] KSS763 =SSU763 +SDU507
:
[ Side cutter spindle ] :
j [060 X025.4] KSF160 =SFU160 +SDU503
•1063X022] KSF163 =SFU163 +SDU503
lHob Spindle]
j [032X010] KSH132 =SHU132 -5-SDU505
C Polygon Spindle]
1/3 deceleration = [080 X015.875] KSP380 =SPU380 +SDU506

i.
'Tool pres$etter~~::™::
rosrjinmm

Main body TP1000

Settingblock I CTP101
! Setting plate (for 16-dxvision tool) KTPZ101
Setting plate (for back machining tool setting) KTP102

1
1
I
I
: I:
;
 :

:
6. TOOLING

CTF116 FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER

imt

V
!
!

\ I :
m /
c
ffii
'

tv

m m
-+ n
m
l
W, I For back machining

¥f
O
r»
o
O'
-is 1
-EM-
O' I

mi A TX t;
II
1
i
3 148

I
;{

I
>:
$
This type of tool holder is provided for turning the outer diameter.
i
Tool holder name CTF116
m Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting
Used tool

Tool size 16x16x90 mm

6-5

•i

::
 i
:

%:
6. TOOLING

CTF216 FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (Reverse rotation)

i
V ;
!

I
\
o
tv
I!
:
ii

i
o -M- s to
h
t
T1
\ I!
I For back machining

O' O'
!

A si
in
i
“Ft
J
"i
3 148

This type of toolholder is provided to reverse the spindle for turning.

Tool holder name CTF216

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 16x 16x90 mm :\

m

6-6
 t
i 6. TOOLING

CTF316 FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (10 mm shift)

v: i

\
—
'
V X ;
E
"r f I

{
o
<\J

LO
O'
o
!

i
s'
/

W~l * ; ;

in
i ifi
CVJ
IJ

3 IP

1 This type of tool holder is provided for the outer diameter turning tool. The tool can be mounted with a 10
mm shift (right-handed tool) from the standard mounting position.

:ÿ
Tool holder name CTF316

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 16x16x90 mm

f
:ÿ!
5
:'i'- ;

6-7

!
;

I
 6. TOOLiNG

CTF416 FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (25 mm shift)

r1
Jh tef#
1

] I 1
|

s
y
o
CO \ i
i ! ||.

+
•

;
o
r» Mr •~K>> PHI

w
ir>
o

m i

m
C\J
i
u
!
i !!

£
-H
3. 25.

1
:
£
1
This type of tool holder is provided for the outer diameter turning tool. The tool can be mounted with a 25
mm shift (right-handed tool) from the standard mountingposition.
: c
Tool holder name CTF416

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

r:
Too! size 16x16x90 mm
i
!

6-8
i
Ills
Hi
;

6. TOOUNG
11
I
a

CTF116L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (Inch system) i

i

*
I
1
$
X
is
X
"r — i
Jr\ i
§

:
X I /
Hfp
1
: cM
v m
-H
a
V
th
cL
ki
A T1 i
For back machining'

i i
i ~rs
:
i

0.12" 5-53/64*

K
i

js

This type of tool holder is provided for turning the outer diameter.
S
Tool holder name CTF116L ;

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 5/8x5/8x3-172"

I
6-9 :

I
il

I
 ,

* !

>;
;
|<

6. TOOUNG I

CTF 216L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (Reverse rotation - inch system)

rs
V s

I j l I
\

n
CO
1 u V I

7 v
1
W7r.
C .w
?
tn
A ui
'
For back machining

11
I
J
1
0.12" 5-53/64'

i|

1
i|

This type of tool holder is provided to reverse the spindle for turning.

Tool holder name CTF216L

ii
Used too! Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 5/8 x 5/8x3 -1/2"

A!
si
At
T
I

tt 6-10
 6. TOOLING

5;
'

| CTF316L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (3/8" shift - inch system)

V
;i

::
I
T
cc

V
v
?> ?
A
x

CVJ
X

a
-Js
1
--
"T
l
i
i
T
/
/

cv
_T2AI

:P
1-4
-H
I

i
!:
•i

ii;i

i;

I
;i
ll ,
* !

I I
A

ITT
0.12”
4 3/8*
'/! i

>L:

This type of tool holder is provided for the outer diameter turning tool. The tool can be mounted with a
3/8" shift (right-handed tool) from the standard mounting position.

Tool holder name CTF316L

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 5/8 x 5/8 x 3 — 1/2"

6-11
..-ÿ1

. I
:
 6. TOOLING

CTF 416L FiXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (1" shift - inch system)
|ij'.

:
:l':V

r
V
T"1
!
vO X

fl-f
N
s
i I
l
V M
i
n T
3
•
I

§ I i
?
ro
CM
JO 1 i
I ?!ÿ

LJ 1
-j_
Ar
0.12*
1
r1 ,

This type of tool holder is provided for the outer diameter turning tool. The tool can be mounted with a 1*
shift (right-handed tool) from the standard mounting position.
1

Tool holder name CTF416L

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Too! size 5/8 x 5/8 x 3 - 1/2” T

jii

6- 12
-r:
‘t %
6. TOOLING
1
I !ÿ

i Ii
CTF119L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (Inch system)

K
I •'i.

1
£
I $

JJ
V
e ni I+*FP|
_
_jn L For back machining
v ro
W
A
d OJ

A
+ LET
i
/
/

c
t
3p
A
0.12*’ 5-53/6 4~

1|

i;
;

!|;

This type of tool holder is provided for turning the outer diameter.

Tool holder name CTF119L

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 3/4 x 3/4x3 -1/2"

ai
I
6-13
I
'i

6. TOOUNG

§i

CTF 219L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (Reverse rotation - inch system)

|
:

r
x i
i

Jpl
\

8 \
: :
!
X
/
/
I--1
FF
i
8
co
1ÿ3- v
—— i L+J J For back machining
I
CVI
::: S n
A
i

'M
?

\! /
I
I ! A
8
8
1
"Y
0.12' 5-53/ 6 4*
» 8
1
r:,

it
.3;
1
;! This type of tool holder is provided to reverse the spindle rotation for turning.
||
Tool holder name CTF219L g
Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 374x3/4x3-1/2"

Ia
I
1
1
S?

6- 14
 6. TOOLING

CTF319L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (3/8' shift- inch system)

s

i
S! \ /
vO
f- ~i
\
k T
I
I
CO

V 11
==! fii
V n tv.

1
?
ro
* -t 3-

in
I

K 1
:
m
I
4
m 0.12" 3/8’

%
k
'n

•1

r
s This type of tool holder is provided for the outer diameter turning tool. The tool can be mounted with a
j

3/8" shift (right-handed tool) from the standard mounting position.

;-i
Tool holder name CTF319L

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 3/4 x 3/4 x 3 - 1/2" I

5:'
,
I
1
6-15
I, !

r
 j

I
6. TOOLING

CTF 419L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (1" shift - inch system)

r *
is
H.
I
‘vO \

i.

ro
v
?5
<x
m-4i
CVJ

th
t
A
t
i
—
0.12" r

This type of tool holder is provided for the outer diameter turning tool. The tool can be mounted with a 1"
shift (right-handed tool) from the standard mountingposition.

j
Tool holder name CTF419L
A1
Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting

Tool size 3/4 x 3/4x3 - 1/2"

6-16 ei
1
 I 6. TOOLING

'

CTF 113 FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER j-;

II
t ri
If;

?!S \ /
$
n
i \
Is —T" •4._,

r i
i

N
A; o
/
ill C\J

p;
m Hi
;

'AT K
to
O
r* -fe- o
XT
l
T .

m m
O' O'
t;

to1 5

a-
J
.

>r
R 3
l

i.;

I
a,

This type of tool holder is provided for turning the outer diameter (grooving, cut-off).
I V
Tool holder name CTF 113

Used tool Grooving, cut-off

Tool size 13x19x90 mm

i

. 1
I
i;
6-17
%

:
i :
?!
-
:!i

I
;
I
:

6. TOOLING I

CTF 213 FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (for back machining)

'U

/ r
i
Si

V !

X—
I
8

t
I i
I
I
I
i
IT)
o
cvi V \ ib-4
I

• M M1
'
to 27
I -S3 -w

__
NO
I
to
O'

cv
-EM-
}
o
O'

r#
A

Za =538.0
s
j vQ 1
Right-handed tool
-©ÿ
I
11'
1
Left-handed tool 3
jo 61 11
13 (22)
When dimensions in ( ) are for E25
1

E'

This type of tool holder is provided as the cut-off tool holder for back machining the workpiece by the back
spindle.

Tool holder name CTF213

Used tool Cut-off

Tool size 13 x 19x90 mm V

\"r'
i
6-18
I
6. TOOLING
s
CTF1013 FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (for back machining 12 mm shift)
f
I

y r1 S ;

i Ur r i!
:
o
CNJ

o
Njl

wi*
1
*1 m
li 1
SI
K2S J j Zs =534.0
VO
«s i i
-1 !»

CO
:

Right-handed tool' l i
I
Left-handed tool- 3.
z. 6.
.25. 11(14)

When dimensions in ( )areforE25

This type of tool holder is provided as the cut-off tool holder for back machining the workpiece by the back
spindle.
The tool can be mounted with a 12 mm shift (right-handed tool) from the standard mountingposition.

Tool holder name CTF1013

Used tool Cut-off

Tool size 13x19x90 mm

'

f
6-19 ]

;
 i
'

S
:

6. TOOUNG

CTF113L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (Inch system)

r 1
x . s,
!
:
__ s m
1

.1 Jy
! I

X\ K
VO
j / i

!
CO
--C
MMU
B
1
R
V
cv -#
LU
! ill
A A
i

! C# m"
1
I

- 0.12"
4 ;

TT

This type of tool holder is provided for the outer diameter turning tool (grooving, cut-ofi).
I
Tool holder name CTF113L

Used tool Grooving, cut-off

Tool size -
1/2 x 3/4 x 3 1/2"
I if

4 £
!; 6-20
 6. TOOLING

CTF213L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER

(for back machining - inch system) .

1
:
i

- y
I
r1
.±
__
,
NO /•

I
CO
N
\
X'

. !/6C 111
I—
CM .-1/1 I
T
v
?5
A
CM
CM
x it
-44
i
rJJ i CM
V i Z3=21~3/16*
CO
l, -±- ,!

Right-handed tool
i.
*
Left-handed tool
0.12“ l_
3ZC 74*
i f
1/2’ y4* (7/8*)
l
When dimensions in ( ) are for E25

This type of tool holder is provided for the cut-off tool to pick off the workpiece by the back spindle.

Tool holder name CTF213L

Used tool Cut-off

Tool size 1/2 x 3/4 x 3 1/2“ —

I
;
i

6-21

::
;
\

I
!

>
1
! 1V
:
\
| i
1

/
S

6. TOOLING

;
CTF 1013L FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (for back machining 1/2" shift- inch system)

V i
J

1
lo I
I
\ X* I

;
co
\ I /

W 4i s
v & !# !! li! 1
V ?5 CM
*1 i
fO
x_
I
tn
A
K
!
CO
j j Z3=21"

Si
Right-handed tool
! *©ÿ
I
Left-handed tool ~T I !
0.12*
HJ 1
5/6 f

r
1/4*
7/16'(9/16*)
I
When dimensions in ( ) are for E25

it

I p:.
1
This type of tool holder is provided as the cut-off tool holder for picking off the workpiece by the back
1 spindle.
The tool can be mounted with a 1/2" shift (right-handed tool) from the standard mounting position.
if
Tool holder name ATF1013L :
Used tool Cut-off
1
Tool size 1/2 x 3/4 x 3 - 1/2*

: b
I
I
6-22
II i
 !$
I

6. TOOUNG

;
CDF 101 FIXED TYPE SLEEVE HOLDER -i

li
:
t s

r
:
l

V
i'i;
r-
o
\
J 7
!
I
!
|

a
-H fa_4
O
ip-i

r
ft
! !
i

ill w I I
r
a S I
/ rOJ
IS R
a o
Hi A R
WT»
1 / i R
sOE0f
<Tt

R
<T4 R
O ! R
3
>r 73 [2.37*] R ;
7? R
10.12'] 148[5.83'1 R
*~3*“ R 1
16016.30-1
J

-A
is i

1 73 [2.87'J

3 148 {5.83'S
[0.12'J
For back machining

This type of holder is used to mount optional sleeve, to perform machining.

Holder name CDF 101

Used sleeve ADS 110 ADS 210

ADS 112 ABS104
ABS108 ABS 110
1 ATS 112 AUS 106

I Sleeve mount hole diameter

AUS110

025.4 mm (01" )
etc.
I

l
1
;K
V-

6-23

I
I::
j

I
 6. TOOUNG

CDF 201 FIXED TYPE SLEEVE HOLDER (for Two-way machining)

.j._.

I f
§ \ A /
s w/
M
/
A
! I I I
E *4- 4-r— W
w £ II
II I
! !
lit
£
1
©

in
i i
!
m
cr> i
T-
J /i !
-}<====
~J i

3 40 43
lo.tr? [1.57'J [1.69"]
142 [S.83'3

160 [6.30*1

This type of holder is used to mount the following sleeve, to perform front machining and back machining
by a single holder.

Holder name CDF 201

Used sleeve ADS 310

Sleeve mount hole diameter 025.4 mm (01' )

6-24
 6. TOOLING

!!
1 :
CDF 301 FIXED TYPE SLEEVE HOLDER (for back machining)

&
3
r::
V

;; I
4;
r
i
\
I
I
i
:

T
i !
* i.

X
1
i
!
: o
<N
x
h
£
m d
£ i
S £
S: i

w fQig
A* 3:
V
73 12.87"]
h
i 14S [5.83*]
'S''
",
160 16.30”]
9
I
I
fe
I
&

1 This type of holder isused to mount optional sleeve, to perform back machining.
%
Holder name CDF 301
1 Used sleeve ADS 110 ADS 112 1
ATS 112 etc. !

IK
I Sleeve mount hole diameter 025.4 mm (01" )

ft
fr¬
it
I l

I 6-25
I

:
II

!:
 I

6. TOOLiNG

CDF 401 FIXED TYPE SLEEVE HOLDER (Double sleeve) <For turret No.1>

/
.j._

i r
I—&
i iO
ro
v>
i
M
HU
w I
j

K S3 o

Pi
#$1
! I 7v i :
vO

£
6m -4

NO i
LO
i I
co 3 73
1 48
l
160
li!
J p
For back machining

I:

i== IBN i

— 3=
4

73

2. 148

This type of holder is used to mount two optional sleeves on a single turret station, to perform machining.
Inside mounting hole can not be used for turret No. 2.
1
Holder name CDF 401

Used sleeve ADS 110 ADS 210

ADS 112 ABS 104
ABS 10B ABS 110 S-:
ATS 112 AUS 106
AUS110 etc.
1
Sleeve mount hole diameter 025.4 mm (two positions) I
i 9m
6-26
I
 6. TOOLING

1:

CDF 401L FiXED TYPE SLEEVE HOLDER (Double sleeve - inch system) <For turret No.1>

i
f

ri
: ! i

Jr
?

I
CVJ
n \ /
!
I
s
SO tiimiii /

co I
tffi I
W ft
-f s:
1
t o
A €EEr=
to I
l i l
§
-4-
*«-'ÿ to si
vO
o

i, 1/8* 2-7/8*
5-55/64*
:
;v.s.
6-19/64*
it j I
;
57 For back machining

"Y 2-7/8*
5-53/64*
1
This type of holder is used to mount two optional sleeves on a single turret station, to perform machining. I;
Inside mounting hole can not be used for turret No. 2.
1:
Holder name CDF 401L
..
Used sleeve ADS 110 ADS 210

I: ADS 112
ABS 108
ABS 104
ABS 110
ATS 112 AUS 106L
Si
AUS 110L etc.
S 1
Sleeve mount hole diameter 01" (two positions) .:l:

\ 1
I
6-27
1
7

])j

i
i;
a
 :

6. TOOLING

CDT 316 FIXED TYPE TOOL & SLEEVE HOLDER (for back machining)

,44,

I
;|r
|;
3

g
r —r •+— 1
%

cvj
\ /
4* I
I®
Bm :ÿ

o
to
-™h
o
tr
o O
TTI %
~4— 4
i
iO
CVJ
i

IJ
s
i H-EEÿ- I
£;
43 4

3 148
iv
160
: v

This fcype of holder is used to mount the outer diameter turning tool and the short sleeve on a single holder,
to increase the number of tools.
.

Tool holder name CDT 316

Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting 1

Tool size 16x16x90 mm
Used sleeve ADS 410

Sleeve mount hole diameter 025.4 mm 4 ;;

4;

6-28
 6. TOOLING
l:

i .
CDT 313 FIXED TYPE TOOL & SLEEVE HOLDER (for back machining)
m

.r:
'§ÿ 5
;

y
. +-•
i r
\\
__
*
.in /
o s
w

l 0SS-
o
r-
to o
o
BÿF
o
i n — f rn
— 1 E=E»-
5s
5:
m
(VI
L 5;
43

d 1 48

160

.r This type of holder is used to mount the grooving tool and the short sleeve on a single holder, to increase the 1
number of tools. I
;ÿ
i
Tool holder name CDT313
1
f Used tool Cut-off, grooving
v Tool size 13xt9x90 mm

% Used sleeve ADS 410

i
Sleeve mount hole diameter 025.4 mm

1
v: 6-29

[
j
:

I
i
;

|
:
;
I

6. TOOLING

4 CDT 316L FIXED TYPE TOOL & SLEEVE HOLDER (for back machining inch system) - J
1
i

r
:
v H I
4

\
/
A -
r
i

V
Qm- S:
V £
7 CO
M CVJ
I .y
A
B= ro
ft r
LJ iJ iiEirH £
%
£
t=im& £
s f
i/s; 5-53/64*
6-19/64*
4
1

|
1
£
1
a This type of holder is used to mount the outer diameter turning tool and the short sleeve on a single holder,
4
to increase the number of tools.
I
1
Tool holder name CDT316L
if Used tool Front turning, rear turning, thread cutting I:
1
I
Tool size 5/8 x 5/8x3 -1/2’

Used sleeve ADS 410

1
e
1
>
Sleeve mount hole diameter 01" I it

i
1
ft'.
6-30
1
 i

6. TOOLING

I
CDT313L FIXED TYPE TOOL & SLEEVE HOLDER (for back machining - inch system)

:ÿ

f;
1
r I:

!
i !
\
I: !

*
l \ /
i
co

: V BMr
ro
d. OJ

n ro
AM n -4 in
\
1 p k
k
k
k
1-11/ V6~ k
5-53/ 6 4*

6-19/64*

t
This type of holder is used to mount the grooving tool and the short sleeve on a single holder, to increase the
number of tools.

Tool holder name CDT313L

Used tool Cut-off, grooving

Tool size 1/2 x 3/4x3 -1/2*

Used sleeve

Sleeve mount hole diameter

ADS 410

01"
:
t:

1
6-31

I
i

:
}

6. TOOLING 1
1
ICTFZ216 \ COMBI/ FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER (ÿ 16 tool + right 10 tool)
1
1
i
i

i /
1
£

\ 8
m
VT 14
i
i: 2
//!
OJ

w 1
-•4 o
4-+ I
r-
LO
O' 1
#]
in
cu
It
2.
:

\
This tool holder is the outer diameter turning COMBI / tooling, provided to increase thenumber of
; tools by intermediate indexing of the turret.

Too! holder name KTFZ216

I
Used too! All types

Tool size <D 16x16x90mm I

® 10x10x60 mm
s
I 6-32 1!
 ::b
!;

II 6. TOOLING

I
i KDFZ 201 \ COMBI / FIXED
-
TYPE SLEEVE HOLDER
(Two-way sleeve + right two-way sleeve)
I
:
£
&
1
|
a / 1
v 18*{0.71'J

V §
•v N/fi1r~T~
/
i
in-— in
o

M ih_ /__
1
// £ i i v;
sI
/'
/
o
m
°v
1 s
ri
Ifi —*<= -Z3- ;

! l; E
i
i "Y I
rp
I

3 40 43
[0.12'] [1-57'J (1-69']
148 [5.83']

160 [6.30']

This holder is the sleeve mounting COMBI

intermediate indexing of the turret.
\ /
tooling, provided to increase the number of tools by

Used when mounting the following sleeve, to perform front and back machining on a single holder.

Tool holder name KDFZ 201

Used sleeve ADS 310

:

Sleeve mount hole diameter 025.4 mm (01" }

>
||

I
6-33 i,
!'

Yi
 !
i
:

:=

6. TOOLING I
::

KDFZ401 \ COMBI1/ FIXED TYPE SLEEVE HOLDER (Double sleeve + right single sleeve) m
- ' <For turret No.1>

11

r -
/T i —r y
,-L_.

to i
A
to
f";
M Tl %
o rS LU' ILU
I
O
r© ArEEE
S

!i!
4:"
-U EE-
!i!
£ 1
3. 73
I 48

160

1
\
This holder is the sleeve mounting COMBI
intermediate indexing of the turret.
/
tooling, provided to increase the number of tools by

Used when mounting 3 optional sleeves (2+1) on a single turret station, to perform machining. Inside
mounting hole can not be used for turret No. 2.
V
! . ©

Holder name KDFZ401

1 Used sleeve ADS 110 ADS 210 :ÿ

I
i ADS 112 ABS 104 i
ABS108 ABS 110
::
ATS 112 AUS 106
AUS110 etc. f;
1
1
Sleeve mount hole diameter 025.4 mm (3 positions) ;

"

||
6-34
H
 it
I 6. TOOLING

*-
I
§ KTFZ216L \v— FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER
COMBI/
'
——
(ÿ 5/8“ tool right 1/2" tool) (inch system)
+

I
a
1

I
I
1 -
/
I
\ /m'" I

X Is 4_ /
W f-4
,w
/
-4—
ii

4ÿ
v
?5
a
r)
!! r+-+
S;
T
"T
i/X

This tool holder is the outer diameter turning

tools by intermediate indexing of the turret.
\ COMBI / tooling, provided to increase the number of

Tool holder name KTFZ 216L

’ 1
Used too! All types

Tool size © 5/8 x 5/8x3 -1/2’

® 1/2x1/2x2-5/16'

I i
I

- 6-35

'

1
':
; •
:

6. TOOLING

KTFZ219L\ COMBI/ FIXED TYPE TOOL HOLDER v

(ÿ 3/4" tool + right 1/2“ tool) (inch system)
5.:

:
,
0! I

V / 1
\
lo
t
Q3

l IT =i4-4>
x7
1/4 ©
m
1
/
n :ÿ

ir
I*
T a
i/X r I

This tool holder is the outer diameter turning \ COMBI7 tooling, provided to increase the number of
tools by intermediate indexing of the turret.

Tool holder name KTFZ219L

Used tool All types

Tool size 0 -
3/4 x 3/4 x 3 1/2*
® 1/2 x 1/2x2-5/16"

6-36 i

I
I
6. TOOLING !

i
n COMBl/ (Double
KDFZ 401L\ FIXED TYPE SLEEVE HOLDER
- sleeve + right single sleeve)
1 <For turret No.1> (inch system)
;

£
as\ V

I !
i

/
A;
i
KJ S'
n i
1 A
icr
'
v
a \ It—I—T
*co d *
o T 5
% \

*ro © ' ,-G==

-4
£
In
'O
o is 1
£

1/X 2-7/8*

5-53/64*

f 6-19/64*

i
:k h
r

\
This holder is the sleeve mounting COMBI /tooling, provided to increase the number of tools by-
intermediate indexing of the turret.
Used when mounting 3 optional sleeves (2+1) ona single turret station, to perform machining. Inside
mounting hole can not be used for turret No. 2.

1
1 Holder name KDFZ 401L

1 Used sleeve ADS 110 ADS 210

ADS 112 ABS 104
ABS 108 ABS 110
1 ATS 112 AUS 106L
AUS 1101 etc.
S
Sieeve mount hole diameter 01" mm (3 positions)
I
!ÿ

I
- 6-37

!
|
f

\ i

r
 6. TOOUNG
I

ADS 110 BORING DRILL SLEEVE (Rego type chuck 010 [03/8w] )

li

•+--

s
r
l

£ 1
a
©
A X x,
£
i
*=EE IF
<Q °°
1 x;
f
A

af
3 t 17
10.12'] (MAX.24) I[0.67*J ’

[MAX.0.94*]
148(5.33*1

160 [6.30*]
1
p.
1

This sleeve chucks drills and gimlets with straight shank by the Rego type chuck.
The dimension of the above € is adjustable, by sliding the sleeve.
i
Sleeve name ADS 110
s 0lOmm(a3/8" ) 1
' Max. chucking dia. :
;;
Rego type chuck model AR1S, ER16
i
I
%
: i
Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm (a1” )
1:
I
X
I
I
6-38
'I
 1
I: 6. TOOLING
I
i

i £

ADS 210 BORING DRILL SLEEVE (Rego type chuck 010 [03/8"] long sleeve)
1,

1
s
8
i
11
5!r
} 1
r !s

I I

s \
a A x
o
„ A 5s
I
sl -cnj-i-U
7 :

£ 17.
to.lrj (MAX.28. (0.67-3 !
148 [5.83';]

160(6.30']
I
;;
:ÿ

t
1 This sleeve chucks drills and gimlets with straight shank by the Rego type chuck. i
The dimension of the aboveiis adjustable,by sliding the sleeve.

:
Sleeve name ADS 210

Max. chucking dia. a!0 mm (03/8" )

Rego type chuck model AR16, ER16

Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm {01" )

6-39

j;
I
I
I

I
I
1
1
i
I

6. TOOLING

y ;

|
ADS 310 BORING DRILL SLEEVE (Rego type chuck 010 [03/8"] both-end)
:
::
i
I
1
:

§ I
y
I ?:ÿ
.

!
1
d
© k
I
1
:
-I 1 -tf- EH S.

1
7 i
(MAX.20) (MAX.23)
£
I
;
3 [MAX. 0.79*1 148 {5.83*3 [MAX.0.91'1 .ÿ

{0.12*1
' 160 {630*1 |
l?
r
§
5,
?

This sleeve chucks drills and gimlets used for the front andback machiningby the Rego type chuck on both H
ends. v
The dimension of the above € is adjustable, by sliding the sleeve.
m.

Sleeve name ADS 310

Max. chucking dia. 010 mm (03/8” )

Rego type chuck model AR16, ER16

r!
Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm (01" )

6-40
:?!
 "I
||
kA 6. TOOLING

1
ADS 410 BORING DRILL SLEEVE (Rego type chuck 010 [03/8“] short sleeve)
V-
7*
I
1

1 l +-

c
f
1
I
d
o

n
m BE
r
dE
SK 17
{0.67-1 t

3
7 148 [5.83*1 .
t
(MAX.23)
(MAX. 0.91”’

(0.12-J
160 [6.30-1
i
|

This sleeve chucks drills and gimlets with straight shank by the Rego type chuck.
:i
The dimension of the above € is adjustable, by sliding the sleeve. 1
i;
Sleeve name ADS 410

Max. chucking dia. e10 mm (03/8" )

Rego type chuck model AR16, ER16

!:'ÿ Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm (01" )

;
}•
li
1

I
6-41

:
I
 :7

j
!
|
\
;

t
6. TOOUNG

; ADS 206 DRILL SLEEVE (Drill chuck)

5:

35

;L
H m
1
£
I \
d
o
X \
J, :

jrtteo Q-M —
s
1

7 5: Ip
:
;
3 t 44
>
[0.12*] (MAX.24) 11.73"]
IMAX.0.94*] 14815.83*] I
16016.30*3

This sleeve chucks drills and gimlets with straight shank by the drill chuck.
The dimension of the above € is adjustable, by sliding the sleeve. t'

ADS 206
I
Sleeve name
1
I
Max. chucking dia. 06 mm (0I/4" )
.
Sleeve taper MT-1
5 Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm (01' ) 1

7 |

6-42
 6. TOOUNG

ADS 112 DRILL SLEEVE (Morse taper)

i
:

*1 *
i

L -d
B k
q
W
!
!
i
i i
5

1 £
§
1"-f N k
k
k
md
'
k
i Jo k :h
k !
g
|l:>-
7 k
k
k
m 3 .

[o.Tri*
t
(MAX.6S) l
k
i (MAX. 2.68'] 148 [5.83"]
m 160 {6.30']
1

m
ml
- This sleeve is provided for the Morse taper (MT-1) shank drill.
The dimension of the above € is adjustable, by sliding the sleeve.

I
m
Sleeve name ADS 112

*1
'5
Max. drill dia. 0l2mm(0]/2' ) Is
Sleeve taper MT-1

1; Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm {01" )

S:

I
€
,1:
if-

6-43 I

j
 :

]
i

6. TOOLING

ADS 212 DRILL SLEEVE (Morse taper)

L
[
i

k
l

i
:
3
;
t
i
3

l
2
o
r>i

7 £
£
A r vv

77 I
is £
o)
77
si. O
I
7 T7 -
3 2
77 V
[0.12'] (MAX.68)
[MAX. 2.68"] 148 15.83"]

160[630“]

: 1
t:

This sleeve is provided for the Morse taper (MT-2) shank drill. i
The dimension of the above € is adjustable, by sliding the sleeve

r,
Sleeve name ADS 212 v.

Max. drill dia. 0l2mm(0l/2' )

It
Sleeve taper MT-2

Outer dla. of sleeve 025.4 mm (a1* )

;
A;

is 6-44
II
I 1

6. TOOLING
S
I ;

1 i:
ABS 104 BORING SLEEVE (Boring tool 04 [05/32"] )
1 i
I I

1
1 I
si./
1 :
l
i
7 j

$
i
i
i I i
! I 1 i

i _A
O
fN

£
A 1
IS \
o

» }QTo SHF*
S
uO

7 t=U 7:
3 £
10.12"] (MAX.IS)
[MAX.0.71*] 148 [5.63*]

16016.30"} 1

This sleeve is provided for boring. /

The dimension of the above t is adjustable, by sliding the sleeve.
k

& Sleeve name ABS 104

A:
i Tool No. IE 6140
IE 6240
i
/. Tool size (ad) s4 x L mm (05/32" x L) j

S' Outer dia. of sleeve B25.4 mm (aT )

i
%
i
% 6 - 45 )
%

!
; I •

/ÿ:

:
.

'

i
! 6. TOOLING

ABS 108 BORING SLEEVE (Boring tool 08 [05/16"] )

I!
i

:
5
i i

i
lltfl
1
I

! 1 i I
I I !
s
s.
o

1
04

£ \
o
A \

;|
55 ff
1
%
1;
Y 1
3 I
lo.tn {MAX.23)
1MAX. 0.91"] 14815.83"]

160 1630"]

if

This sleeve is provided for boring. |

: The dimension of the above € is adjustable,by sliding the sleeve.

i Sleeve name ABS 108

;f j
Tool No. IE 6180
Ij IE 6280
I
Tool size 08 xL mm (05/16" xL)

Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm (01" )

: 6-46
!

Ii
 I
I
6. TOOLING :
7 !.!;
7
-
;ÿ
%
: 1
ABS 110 BORING SLEEVE (Boring bar 010 [03/8w] )

1
; 1
1 ,

7
i
1
m
1

L.
;
i !
I
1
1
-i
V

7 I ! I

7?ÿ 1
o
rss
7 £
is
1_ N
9:
7
£ i 1
1
v

i
I
1
i?. 7 £
I
i
1

i
3
[0.12*1 {MAX .28)
(MAX. 1.10"]
. 50 [1.97*]
148 [5.83*1

16016.30*]
til:

.1

This sleeve is provided for boring using the boring bar, and is fit for larger diameter and deeper holes,
compared with other sleeves.
The dimension of the above € is adjustable,by sliding the sleeve.

Sleeve name ABS 110

Tool No. IE 634Q-BR-4G4

:# 6
I Tool size 04 xL mm (05/32" xL)

I
m
Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm (01” )

1
17 6-47
v
1
:

;
s

!
 :

6. TOOLING

ATS 112 TAPPING SLEEVE (M12)

i r 7
•4— I:
§ :«
:
o
i
' Z
:
s I
:

o
i v
N s
sz
g
EEE3
! o,
£
:
7 Sr H
:
3 e 17(0.67*]
lo.irj1 *wzmr ”1 t
9
(MAX. 2.13*]
148 [5.83*]

160(6.30*]
I
S
1IS
This sleeve is provided for tapping. This sleeve can be used for both right-handed and left-handed screws,
7
and is chucked by the Rego type chuck. £*ÿ!
The dimension of the above € is adjustable,by sliding the sleeve. IS
:
U
Sleeve name ATS 112 t:
i-
Max. tapping dia.

Rego type chuck model

M12

AR16, ER16
«f
Max. chucking dia. 0lOmm(03/8" )
i
::
Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm (01' ) I
I
it.
6-48
1
 T,
M.,
6. TOOLING
\
<
a3
AUS 106 DIE SLEEVE (Die diameter 020)

I
II
1
%
I
t
¥
I r
i
i

Jr r
o
(\J

o \
r-
A \

-a’ T
T
OJ
,ÿ
l
i
7 30

;
3 e
CMAXJ8)
148
:
160
j

:
:

This sleeve is provided for die machining, and is used for dies of M2 to M6.
The dimension of the above t is adjustable,by sliding the sleeve.

Sleeve name AUS 106

t
A Tapping range dia. M2 to M6 x 30

Size (fld x t) 020 x7 mm

;
.! 1

Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm

:.;A I
i
6-49
I
i

•i:'.

I
 :

;
6. TOOLING
Si
lip

AUS110 DIE SLEEVE (Die diameter 025)

I
I
:
1
II

r
i

I
I
i
m
o

;
i
o
r-
§

cu
TO
•©;. e r WF- iii

7
i
3 t
(MAX.18) II
1 48 1;

160
11

If
This sleeve is provided for die machining, andis used for dies of M6 to M8.
The dimension of the above t is adjustable,by sliding the sleeve.

Sleeve name AUS 110

Tapping range dia M6toM8x30

i Size (ad x t) a25x9 mm

.
Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm

\
i\
6-50
|
 S'
s:
!:S|,

I 6. TOOLING

AUS 112 DIE SLEEVE (Die diameter 038}

1
S

I
1
S
ri

I i +-
: !
I I
m o
1 C\J

I T
s o
r*
\
V I
S'
I
<r
LO
-O
•s- 3
I a
T — 1
f|

3 € 5!
(MAX.18)
: 148
S
160
I

This sleeve is provided for die machining, and is used for dies of M8 to M10.
The dimension of the above € is adjustable, by sliding the sleeve.
£
Sleeve name AUS 112

Tapping range dia. M8 to M10 x 35 1

Size (od x t) 038 x 13 mm

1 Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm

:: I
6r51 h

I
J
:

;
s

!
1!

i
:
H

6,
I
TOOUNG
.1
v

AUS 106L DIE SLEEVE (Die diameter 03/4 "} 1

|l

lo IF —r
I
CO

V 1
a
A A >N
N
c
—r~H3- fe¬ ll

: 1
:i
|
'
7 ?5

0.12" f
!:|
(MAX23/32")
5-53/64*
6-19/64*

:
.
;
f
This sleeveis provided for die machining, and is used for dies of M2 to M6.
The dimension of the above f is adjustable,by sliding the sleeve.

:
Sleeve name AUS106L

Tapping range dia. M2toM6x 1-3/16'

!ÿ

Size (ad x t) 03/4" x 1/4”

Outer dia. of sleeve 01"

6-52
 ?r
;(? 6. TOOLING

-
i

1 AUS110L DIESLEEVE (Die diameter aV ) /ÿ

i 1

+-•

1
\
ro
<x Air ss

1
T
*o
r
3
7 mu
:i

0.12' t
(MAX23/321
5-53/64*
6-19/64* j

| i
This sleeve is provided for die machining, andis used for dies of M6 to M8.
i:. The dimension of the above € is adjustable,by sliding the sleeve.

Sleeve name AUS110L

Tapping range dia. M6to M8x 1-3/16'

Size (0d x t) 01" x 11/32'

% Outer dia. of sleeve 01' .

:
h

A 6-53

! !
i :ÿ

:
;
<
,*

• 6. TOOLING

AUS112L DIE SLEEVE (Die diameter 01-1/2 ")

:<
.

1
if

I
i .

I i

I
—
lo I
I
i
l
3

!
CO
I

d N
T
-o
O 1 ;

I
r 1-3/8*.
I
0.12“ e
CMAX23/32*)
5-53/64*
m
6-19/64*

H
1
1
This sleeve is provided for die machining, andis used for dies of M8 to M10. I
The dimension of the above € is adjustable,by sliding the sleeve.
::

: Sleeve name AUS 112L

IS
Tapping range dia. M8toM10x 1-3/8"
1
I
Size (ad x t) 01-1/2" x 1/2"
I
:

Outer dia. of sleeve 01"

111
!i IS

I:
6-54
I ill
i
St:
 1:

6. TOOLING
f

JCS101 MALE CENTER (for Turret No. 2)

r :
i
ur" :
*
i

i
\
I
1
it sI
—
s
—? ZZ,
t™,
i
I
I; I
1 11 67
(2.64"]
1
Ms 3 20 53 72
10.12"]1 iO.79"] (2.09*1 (2.83"]

*
S
145(5.71"] i

f;
1
Vl;j
/!;
i
I r?
1
i 1
'

'
1 This male center is provided to be mounted on turret No. 2, to stop the swing of the workpiece when
3 machining is done with turret No. 1.
i
i Too! holder name JCS101
m Thrust 23 kgf
1 Outer dia. of sleeve 025.4 mm (a1" ) 1
.3 l

i -
1
;
1 i:
I
:3'V'
m 6-55 r
1

I
I\
t

ft
:
6. TOOLING
1
11
§
1
9
ill
KSC 110 OUTER DIAMETER DRILLING SPINDLE (Rego type chuck)
1

!
/
A \ \
i

I
1
'

T f if!
£ \ /
a
a
§
/
i-i—i

£
3
2

?s
ITT
+

__ A
,--u
! I
I 1
1
The dimension at * may-
become 0 to 5 mm[Q to 0.20”]
1
o
smaller, according to the
dimensional differenceof the
to.lrj !Q.98”J
Rego chuck diameter and the
tool shank diameter. 1
1

I p-
This spindle is used to perform drilling on the outer diameter of parts by the drill, or to perform key
groovingby the end mill, etc. after stopping the spindle.

Tool holder name KSC 110

Max. chucking dia. 0lOmm(03/8' )

Spindle speed 225 to 4460 r.p.m

n
Rego type chuck model AR16, ER16
I
Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command i

ill
6-56
I
1
W
2
I 6. TOOLING
'I
1
I
8 KSC910 OUTER DIAMETER DRILLING SPINDLE (Regotype chuck)

1
8
if
! /
!
\ \ i?3
a v i
V

A
z y
-4
2 VO
CO
o
\

I
/
H-
I 1

£
1 B
ffi A
f£ [jl 0
The dimension at * may
become 0 to 5 mm[0 to 0.20”] 3
"T o
25
smaller, according to the 10.12*] [0.98*]
dimensional difference of the
Rego chuck diameter and the
tool shank diameter.

;i

This spindle is used to perform drilling on the outer diameter of parts by the drill, or to perform key
groovingby the end mill, etc. after stopping the spindle. !
This spindle is especially advantageous for machining by the end mill, etc., because of its longlongbody.
I
Tool holder name KSC910

Max. chucking dia. 010 mm (03/3" )

Spindle speed 225 to 4460 r.p.m I

Rego type chuck model AR16, ER16

Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

!

6-57

I
|

{
i;
 :

I
I

6. TOOLING

KCS 310 ADJUSTABLE OUTER DIAMETER DRILLING SPINDLE (Regotype chuck)

l
\h=J
\
/ \

v ! i
'

xSs
£ \
1
§ 1

! S
s2 n? XI
i
Spindle damp screw

Spindle
HI damp screw A Adjustment knob
(1 mm/scale)
Adjustment knob
(1 mm [0.04-"] /scale)
The dimension at * may
..CD
become 0 to 5 mm[0 to 0.20”]
smaller, according to the
3 25
Us
f;
dimensional difference of the
to.12'3 [0.
5s',Mra
Rego chuck diameter and the
tool shank diameter.
The dimension at ** varies according to the turn, to adust the
spindle based on jA] .

This spindle is used for drilling on the outer diameter of parts, or for the end milling. The spindle
position can be adjusted, by loosening the spindle clamp screws and turning the spindle center based on
.
fAl This spindle is advantageous for machining requiringhighpositioningprecision against the
center line, or for machining out of the center.
1
Tool holder name KCS 310

Max. chucking dia. 0lQmm(03/8" )

i1.
Spindle speed 225 to 4460 r.p.m
| Rego type chuck model AR16.ER16
Spindle adjustment width ±5 mm (±5/16' )

Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

'

6-58

i
 6. TOOUNG

KSC216 OUTER DIAMETER DRILLING SPINDLE (1/3 deceleration) <For turret No.2>

l-
*
ir
i

i %
r i y
; ;

A— T J
I
c
L£}
CO J
ta
4'
6
1
o

I
s2
e
V
In c#

V,

I 1
"1 f.
3 25
The dimension at * may become 0 to 5 mm [o.l 2"] [0.98*]
CO to 0.20”] smaller, according to the
a dimensional difference of the Rego chuck
diameter and the tool shank diameter. :h

The spindle is used to perform drilling on the outer diameter of parts by the drill, or to perform key grooving
by the end mill, etc. after stopping the spindle by moving Y axis.

1 Tool holder name KSC216

i

Max. chucking dia. o16 mm (05/8" }

Spindle speed 75 to 1487 r.p.m

Rego type chuck model AR25, ER25

1
'

Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon reverse rotation command l

6-59
 j
;

iS
6. TOOLING

:1
KST110 OUTER DIAMETER TAPPING SPINDLE (Rego type chuck) '

v:,',

i
::
/ \ \
i
V

: I :
I:
£
\ £
1
/
4L_4L
s I i
: .

s'
s2 T T
i

i
o WF I

-- cb
1 >
i:

N
.
3 25
c
The dimension at * may become 0 to 5 mm [0.irf'M0~9
[0 to 0.20”] smaller, according to the
dimensional difference of the Rego chuck
diameter and the tool shank diameter.

This spindle is used for tapping after drilling on the outer diameter of parts.

1! Tool holder name KST110

Max. chucking dia. 07 mm (09/32" )

; Max. tapping dia. M6

,
Spindle speed 225 to 4460 r.p.m ;;
Rego type chuck mode! AR11.ER11
Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

ft
6-60
i
1
 a.
A.
;
a
;
6. TOOLING
i
,

1
KSE 110 END FACE DRILLING SPINDLE (Regotype chuck)
8
3
1

f\
:

T
/ \ \
i
:: YF
i
: ;
I
.
.
a r
t
-i
3 •
°
a
-8
x s'
k
a
S: 5
8 d
I
©
A
% w
c
2
MJ
£ A
I
,-v *26
3
(0.12-]. ten
.

I The dimension at * may become 0 to 5 mm

[0 to 0.20”] smaller, according to the
i dimensional difference of the Rego chuck
diameter and the tool shank diameter.
V
1

1
This spindle is used to perform eccentric hole drilling on the end face of parts by the drill, or to perform
millingby the end mill, etc., after stopping the spindle.
This spindle is especially advantageous for end mill, etc., because of the long body.

Tool holder name KSE 110

Max. chucking dia. 010 mm (03/8" )

Spindle speed 225 to 4460r.p.m

I Rego type chuck model AR16.ER16
i
Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command
V f

i.
6-61 i
I
;
1

.
.(!

|
.

6. TOOUNG

1
KSE 310 END FACE DRILLING SPINDLE (Rego type chuck)

/
I
\ IP
\ ;

r
s
o
A
£
d
o
A
%
SQ “2
1
*45
lo.irf U.77*]

The dimension at * may become 0 to 5 mm

[0 to 0.20”] smaller, according to the
dimensional difference of the Rego chuck
diameter and the tool shank diameter. it
I

This spindle is used to perform eccentric hole drilling on the end face of parts by the drill, or to perform
millingby the end mill, etc., after stopping the spindle. t§
I
Tool holder name KSE 310 I
?
I
Max. chucking dia.

Spindle speed
010 mm (o3/8a )

225 to 4460 r.p.m

I
§
! Rego type chuck model

Spindle rotation
AR16, ER16

Above arrow direction upon reverse rotation command

s
,
1
6-62 £
m
 6. TOOLING
j;

KST510 END FACE TAPPING SPINDLE (Rego type chuck)

T
/ \ \

;’!i

H
.
i

1 \ 4 ;
o
:.:y:
f;
£ \
a
o
I
A
:

®
i
<Q
U-
"Y
£0.98*1
3 *34
[0.12*] 11 H.34']

The dimension at is the maximum tapping

depth.
The dimension at * may become 0 to 3 mm
[0 to 0.12”] smaller, according to the dimensional
difference of the Rego chuck diameter and the tool
shank diameter.

This spindle is used to perform tapping after drilling on the end face of parts.

Too! holder name KST510

Max. chucking dia. 07 mm (09/32' )

Max. tapping dia. M6

Spindie speed 225 to 4460 r.p.m

Rego type chuck mode! AR11, ER11

Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

6-63

..I
I

! ;

6. TOOUNG

KSM 110 MILLING SPINDLE (Regotype chuck)

/
ri'
\ V
i =3 I
m
K. -i
i

\
\ /

i
5 V !
d 4-
o
2 1 i-viD ~\-&. /
l
1

£ &<#)41 5

i
JQ
-1
e
3
A 25
i
\
i
3° [0.1 2*f * fo.98"
SO.79'3

III
This spindle is used to perform milling on the outer diameter or end face of parts, after stopping the spindle. 1
The dimension of the above € is adjustable,by sliding the end mill.
I
Tool holder name KSM 110 ;:v
I-
Max. chucking dia. 010 mm (03/8" )

Spindle speed 225 to 4460 r.p.m

: Rego type chuck mode! AR16, ER16

Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon reverse rotation command

*
'
6-64 I
111
 : 6. TOOLING

KSM 406 ADJUSTABLE MILLING SPINDLE (Rego type chuck)

r!

I;
4
A
1 \

V
J
sir '

I
o
\ Ai'

£
H s
rC
Jbrn i 1#-1
4 c-em
m

I®
;

I e Spindle damp screw

Adjustment screw 3 23
*17 |0.12'1 fO.98']
[CLsF]
Adjustable width 2 mm
Adjustable width
2 mm[0.08*]

The dimension at * may become 0 to 5 mm

[0 to 0.20”] smaller, according to the
-.'I ,:ÿ!
dimensional difference of the Rego chuck
diameter and the tool shank diameter.
1
This spindle is used to perform milling on the outer diameter or end face of parts, after stopping the spindle.
j'.: The dimension of the above € is adjustable, by sliding the end mill. Fine adjustment is done by loosening
the spindle set screws, turning the adjustment screw, and sliding the spindle. The spindleposition canbe
adjusted in the range of 2 mm (2/32 "*).

Tool holder name KSM 406

Max. chucking dia. 07 mm (09/32* )

Spindle speed 225 to 4460 r.p.m

Rego type chuck model AR11.ER11

Spindle adjustment 2mm (2/32* )

Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon reverse rotation command 1

;>•'
6-65

'!
 a
;

i \

6. TOOLING

KSS 260 SLITTING SPINDLE (1/3 deceleration) <For turret No.1>

:ÿ

/
T
\ \
bd :

t.

\ r
:

c \ 1
o

O
\
A
1 A V
T
I

st

e T
f
$4
<r. ST.

|(MAX‘J2}|
£ [MAX. 1-26"J
3 30
2 34
[0.12*] ll |T.18-fi
[t.34*]
2

This spindle is used to perform 2-face slitting on the end face of parts, or to perform grooving on the outer
diameter, etc., after stopping the spindle.
The dimension of the above € is adjustable,by the collar. ijjj:
;
The cutter center, when attached to No.2 turret, can reach only up to workpiece center.

Tool holder name KSS 260

r
Max. metal sawdia. 06O mm (02 -3/8” )

Metal saw inner dia. 0l5.875H7(05/8" H7) f.

Max. metal saw thickness 4 mm (5/32” )

Spindle speed 75 to 1487 r.p.m ::

Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

6-66
i
 ;

6. TOOLING

KSS 263 SLITTING SPINDLE (1/3 deceleration) <For turret No.1 >

1 i
I \ l \

y
s

1
i
r
S
a
\
s
A -

I
O
04

s:
2
m A
e 2. n±r
r-i--
t "Y
m/ rsy
I?MAX32) i
2 £ {MAX.1.26'1

I 5
s 34
11-18*1
3 30
[0.12']*!* (1.18']

:
i
i This spindle is used to perform 2-face slitting on the end face of parts, or to perform grooving on the outer
diameter, etc., after stopping the spindle. The dimension of the above £ is adjustable, by the collar.
1 The cutter center, when attached to No.2 turret, can reach only up to workpiece center. I
I
'f Tool holder name KSS 263

Max. metai sawdia. 063 mm (02-1/2'’ ) 1

;
1 Metai saw inner dia. 016H7 (00.6299" H7)

Max. metal saw thickness 4 mm (5/32' ) 1

Spindle speed 75 to 1487 r.p.m
I
>l!
Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

ra
6-67
$

'

jj
i

i
;

__
6. TOOLSNG

__
I
KSS 660 SLITTING SPINDLE (1/8 deceleration) < For turret No.1>
3
I
I 'feJ » ri
1
n a
j
r 3
s
\ / V Aj L\fi
o
\
d ;

:
:: 8

e
m

8 2
yd
—K 9)3*
:
1
%
<o' Q. 3 30
s (MAX.32)
IMAX.1ÿ6*]
34
{0.12”] [1.18']
3';

[1-34-]

This spindle is used to perform outer diameter groving etc. after stopping the spindle.
Since the spindle is decelerated to 1/8,it will be best suited for a heavy duty cutting.

Too! holder name KSS 660

Max. meta! saw dia. -

06O mm (o2 3/8* )

Meta! saw inner dia. 0l5.875H7mm(05/8* H7)

Max. metal saw thickness 4 mm (5/32* )

!
I Spindle speed 28 to 558 r.p.m
' Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon reverse rotation command

1
3

6-68
I
%
I 6. TOOLING

I KSS 663 SLITTING SPINDLE {1/8 deceleration) <For turret No.1 >

'f
j|
P
:

n rF3
J
l j \ \

/
:

r J
\ / «/
2
o
Ai
i
__±i
\
04

\
00

•rat cr?: f
a
e
«

V =F : r-yAT-r J'I
m
,n i
z
:
oi t-.

a
Jj
[MAX.1.26'1 [0.1
3
2TTT
31.5
[1.24-1
‘
i
.
34
[1.18']

1.

This spindle is used to perform outer diameter groving etc. after stopping the spindle.
Since the spindle is decelerated to 1/8,it will be best suited for a heavy duty cutting.

Tool holder name KSS 663

Max. metal saw dia. 063 mm (02.4803" )

Metai saw inner dia. 0l6H7mm (00.6299" H7)

Max. metal saw thickness 4 mm (5/32" )

Spindle speed 28 to 558 r.p.m

Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon reverse rotation command

6-69
•:
 \
f

;
I
i

II

_
6. TOOLING
J.
;i
3;
KSS 760 SLITTING SPINDLE (1/3 deceleration) <for turret No. 2 > 1
It
ijr -rt ii
|:|1|
i r
I
r II

! Jr"!
i
; J 1 ;

r \
s i ;
iti1
o
\ i Led
in
*
11
;

S’
2
XW O
ii

060 3
[02.36'] [0.12’J
30
[1.13']
11

* Reference dimensions for a 2 mm [0.78”] wide cutter.

Dimensions depend ona cutter width.

This spindle is used to perform parts end face grooving etc. by moving Y axis after stopping spindle.

Tool holder name KSS 760

Max. metal sawdia. 06O mm (02-3/8" )

Metal saw inner dia. 0l5.875H7mm(05/8" H7)

Max. metal saw thickness 4 mm (5/32" )

;v
Spindle speed 75 to 1487r.p.m
i
Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

;
j
6-70
>4
:!
1 6. TOOLING

IS
1 KSS763 SLITTING SPINDLE (1/3 deceleration) < for turret No. 2 >
1
I i-
.j r::.D
in
ir i
1
!Jr‘{
5 &J

fl
!
|
p \ :
I
u
a S
im Rf
;ÿÿÿ
o

r
I
s iT
tn_
r*
§ ?:
a i
so m
I
in o
a o
063 {02.48”] 3 • 31.5
10.12”] [1.24”]

S * Reference dimensions for a 2 mm {0.78”] wide cutter.

Dimensions depend on a cutter width.

1; This spindle is used to perform parts end face grooving etc. by moving Y axis after stopping spindle..
£a
Tool holder name KSS763

1 Max. metal saw dia.

Metal saw inner dia.

063 mm (02.4803’ )

016H7 mm (00.6299’ H7)

1 Max. metal saw thickness 4 mm (5/32’ )

Spindle speed 75 to 1487 r.p.m

!"

* Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

1a
6-71

:
 3

6. TOOLING

'

‘ KSF 160 SIDE CUTTER SPINDLE (1/3 deceleration)

! in I
/
T
\ \ ix
i

; 1 I

X i:.
s X
;ÿ

: O
I
CM

E |
d
§
1
-- E
r
—X
i
s-ig»
CO
M A
X
L
i;ÿ

\ 1
3 21
5s
S
[0.12"]*" '[0.83"]

1
:,
i
i

This spindle is used to perform machining on the outer diameter by the side cutter, or to perform D-cut
machiningby the X axis - C axis simultaneous control (millinginterpolation control).
:.E Replace the spacer according to the thickness of the cutter.
"y
I.
Tool holder name KSF 160 r
Side cutter dia. 06O mm (02 -3/8" )
r
Side cutter inner dia. 025.4 mm (01" )

Side cutter thickness 7 to 14 mm (1/4 to 9/16" )

3
Spindle speed 75 to 1487 r.p.m 1
Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command 1
:f
I 6-72
:':V
 1 I
.
6. TOOLING

$ I
If
KSF 163 SIDE CUTTER SPINDLE (1/3 deceleration)
1
:
•[
1
& /
i
\ I
1 \
bd
1
is
V s
i
r
k \ /
U -H
\
2 4-
O
*

£
2
§
-A

£ W sV
&
//
HE -Y
:H :

5£ la

3 21ÿ
s
2
(0.12'] {0.83']

•i

1 This spindle is used to perform machining on the outer diameter by the side cutter, or to perform D-cut
machining by the X axis - C axis simultaneous control (millinginterpolation control).
'I; Replace the spacer according to the thickness of the cutter.
'
Tool holder name KSF 163 ;
Side cutter dia. o63 mm (02 -1/2" )

Side cutter inner dia. 022H7 (0O.866T H7)

Side cutter thickness 7 to 14mm (1/4 to 9/16" )

v Spindle speed 75 to 1487 r.p.m I

1
Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

6-73

I
i
I
N

\
j

I
i

:
\

6. TOOLING

KSH132 Hob Spindle

I
I
;

-Jr i \ ; r”~
/
Fr -H 9
I o
! rti rhrti I if
s
1
ii
sffe-
in

E F--
lls S & 1
.1 -•!
i
*y
*1
3 25
if 10.12'] EO.38’1
i;

The spindle and this tool spindle are synchronized and used for a gear machining done by a hob cutter.

Tool holder name KSH 132

Hob cutter dia. 032 mm (o1 - 1/4" )

1
Hob cutter inner dia.

Spindle speed
a10H7mm (00.3937" H7)

225 to 3703 r.p.m

-
;

1 1
Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon forward rotation command

i
L
I
&
!

6-74
§§
m
r'l
‘

3 6. TOOLING
1

KSP 380 Polygon Spindle (1/3 deceleration)

I- : i
I
I
i nI
;
i

JFF~-
r
O
a
!
/ r
o rh
,p
J —Hr=-
I
d
£
i

1 l

'm 1/
£
2
-- =,
? 'Z / ir
"1 $
3 25 :

'
2’f “{0.98-V
[0.1

f:

1 The spindle and this spindle are synchronized and used for a polygon machining (hexagon machining) done i
by a polygon cutter.

'ÿ
Tool holder name KSP 380
;
Polygon cutter dia. 08O mm (03 -5/32" ) ii

Polygon cutter inner dia. 0t6H7mm (00.6299" H7)

Spindle speed 75 to 3703 r.p.m :

ri Spindle rotation Above arrow direction upon reverse rotation command

1
I
I 6-75

'

i
if
!
 > ;

k
I

: i;
'i:

:
I

Si
,

Ii 1

!
v

. ;
'!
!

a’ i
Ii
;

s
V

;£ ::
•v

r !

i-

I\
l \

I:

' Si
T i ;
t Product code C i i I
E 3 } 3 2 IV xi I \ I
i
s
i
f
L
7 14;0 ;

\i
Document code 1:E o i6 i o i o

i
1
 «\.;v
1

U52R Coolant Flowrate Detector

!:

l\

:i

7. Attachment
(Option)

1. U52R Coolant Flowrate Detector 7-2

1.1 Names and Functions . 7-3

1.2 Adjusting method 7-4

i
1.3 Wiring diagram (E3 321V) 7-5

•i

1
:

*
:

1 Code Serial M9001— Issue 1994.11

No. IE-0700 No. (W6001-) Date

s
7-1
.,1
 J
U52R Coolant Flowrate Detector

I
.. :
1. U52R Coolant Flowrate Detector -
If the flowrate of coolant decreases for some reason, coolant may not expand over the cutting point,
£
resulting in fire or other accidents. This unit detects such decrease of flowrate to stop the machine
operation automatically.

Notes: 1. The flowrate of coolant depends on the change of a temperature. To discriminate the
flowrate in normal conditions from that in abnormal status, set the alarm setup flowrate
to at most 2/3 of the normal use flowrate.
;
2. This unit does not start if the temperature of the coolant is 15°C or less. Therefore, this 1
unit does not operate until the oil is heated (15°C). Thus, to operate the machine in a cold
room especially in winter, the operator must supervise the unit until the oil is heated. $
Once the oil temperature has reached 15°C, this unit executes the original detection
function continuously even if the oil temperature goes down.

I
£ S
€ !'
l Z
I

1
1

Thermistor

Flowrate sensor

Coolant pump-

7-2
i U52R Cooiant Flowrate Detector

4 1.1 Names and Functions

;
M Cooiant Flowrate Sensor LED for indicating the flowrate :
f © LEDs for indicating the flowrate Blinking LED for indicating the setup value ;
Indicates the current flowrate by ON and
OFF of 9 LEDs relatively. (While the
sensor is on, the left-most LED is always
on even if the flowrate is 0.)
<I) Blinking LED for indicating the setup .
•4121 13
value for flowrate alarm
Indicates the value that is set for a #
flowrate alarm. (The LED corresponding Set-point
1 to the setup value is always blinking.
Besides, one of the LEDs for indicating
flowrate is used for its purpose.)
& Flow
OK
0
I Potentiometer
/
d) LED for indicating alarm Potentiometer for
for adjusting the adjusting the
The LED is on while the flowrate is setup value flowrate range
normal. The LED goes off if the flowrate i
LED for indicating alarm
becomes lower than the setup value.
@ Potentiometer for adjusting the setup value
Sets up the flowrate alarm. Turning the potentiometer clockwise increases the flowrate. !;

§v © Potentiometer for adjusting the flowrate range

Adjusts the sensitivity of the sensor. Turning the potentiometer counterclockwise increases the
sensitivity.

Coolant Temperature Setter (Setter consists of indicator and thermistor)

© LED for indicating effective flowrate sensor
Indicates the flowrate sensor is effective. The alarm flowrate can be detected in the effective
area (standard setup in this unit: 15°C at minimum), but not in the ineffective area (LED off).

<D Indicator
Usually measures and indicates the coolant temperature using the thermistor.
d> Setter
Sets temperature of the effective area of the flowrate sensor. (Standard setup value in this unit:
15°C at minimum) :

0 ;
i

Setter box for coolant

Z
€
<Q
!
P
'2*- — Indicator
\
'VT-LED for indicating
0effective flowrate sensor

:•

7-3
i

U52R Coolant Flowrate Detector

s
: 1.2 Adjusting method
1. Confirm the dial gauge of the setter indicates 15°C.
(Loosen panel mounting screw of the setter box and remove the panel to confirm the dial gauge.)

2. Stop coolant supply, then turn on the power.

(When the power is turned on, all the LEDs for indicating the flowrate go on. After several
seconds, only the leftmost LED remains on and allthe others go off. Then, start adjustment.)

3. Set thenormal flowrate of coolant (normal flowrate: When fully opened)

4. Confirm the coolant temperature is 15°C or higher by using the indicator.

5. Slowly turn the potentiometer for adjusting the flowrate range until 8 or 9 LEDs (from the
leftmost) for indicating the flowrate go on.

6. Checking coolant flowing rate for the machining point, turn the valve and lower the flowrate of

:
coolant to a rate at which an alarmis issued. r
7. Turn fully the potentiometer for adjusting the setup value counterclockwise.

|
8. Slowly turn the potentiometer for adjusting the setup value clockwise until the LED for
indicating an alarm output goes off. !
9. Set the flowrate of coolant back to the normal rate. In this case, confirm that the LED for I
indicating an alarm goes on. (If the normal flowrate is close to the flowrate at which an alarm is
i:; issued, the LED does not go on when the flowrate is set back to the normal rate. The alarmis not
cleared in this state. Turn off the power supply and turn on it again (the alarm is cleared). Then,
lower the flowrate more than the previous time to a rate at which an alarm is issued, and repeat
procedure from step 7 to 9. *

10. Slowly decreases the flowrate of coolant again to confirm that an alarm is issued at the specified
flowrate.

I
I:
;ÿ

7-4
1
 i.£
i
;
U52R Coolant Flowrate Detector
ill
f
I
1.3 Wiring diagram (E3 32IV)
1
I:
i
Optional relay board (U80T) is

Flowrate sensor

_<£_BJU£
----
5 1 4121.13
ov o-
— RY1
o- CNCOF

X69
7
-o
RY1 |
—
J| 1
-o D1
-9-— o
2
8
yy

C
Black •o

-o
fi
I
i
c -»
— A ||

8 6
24N

Electronic thermostat I
E5L-AS1 §
4 (H) 9 CNTH J
X70 o — ""I c- «A
± Thermistor
l s
12 10 B
!
o
I ov (COM) B
,

I 13 5 THM+
o o
103
+
.
/ J Indicator
6 THM —
i
'
14
104 -0 o
t,

t
1
H
Y78 ;
:'i

LED for indi¬

(Resistor built-in type) cating effective
! flowrate sensor
1 24M i

7-5

§i

I
I
ii
1
k
i
i Ii
:} i

1
1
ii
 '

Ji-

\\ WxxifiiN 6f
"
%\4

?
:l
dwl( ...

$
f I
i

: :.ÿ

:
•'

&

f :

\
;V'-V

i;

Product code
B E ; 3 ; 3 ; 2 j iv ; 5 i — i
7 ;4 0
I
v* Document code 7j7|- j o ; 7 j oTo
I
%
\